Home

Lucent Technologies Release 8.2 Server User Manual

1. software defined connections Processor Interface Interface Processor channels channels channels channels 1 1 1 1 2 5000 5000 2 E 5001 5001 H Sig Sig a 2 Grp Index Extn Grp Index Extn 13 1 1 1701 1 1 2951p e s 6 a aa gt 1 2 1 2 2952 f bss i Ber Ue gateway 6002 X any 256 64500 64500 256 Link 1 Link 1 T I hardware connections Processor TN790B gt 3 T 1 i Processor Processor TN798B Bus bridge bridge Packet bus Packet bus Packet bus O Ext 1701 Ext 2951 node 1 node 3 Ext 1702 Ext 2952 Ext 5803 Ext 2801 loc 1a1024 loc 100924 loc 101115 loc 1a0906 192 168 10 101 192 168 10 103 cydfec4a EWS 052099 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 125 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the
2. L NetPkt si y eS gt i N Interface to Transmission Facilities Tie Trunk Tie Trunk Circuit Packs DS1 ISDN PRI Analog 10BaseT IP Interface me A MedPro menace mode MedPro or mode IP trunk or mode IP trunk mode What do the The function of each circuit pack shown in Figure is described below components do Processor The processor board is the main control element in handling the call This is the UN332B for the r model the TN 790B for the si model and the TN798B for the csi model PGATE r only On the r model the PGATE board TN577 connects the processor to the packet bus and terminates X 25 signaling NetPkt si only The Network control Packet Interface NetPkt board TN794 replaces the NETCON TN777B and the PACCON TN778 circuit packs in the R7si model It also replaces the LAPD portion of the PI TN765 circuit pack Administration for Network Connectivity 4 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview Pre R7 circuit packs C LAN The C LAN circuit pack TN799B enables signaling data to be transmitted via the TCP IP protocols across a LAN or WAN Signaling types include call setup and teardown registration of IP softphones TSCs QSIG and DCS signaling The C LAN circuit pack provides the data link interface between the switch processor and the transmission facilit
3. change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID dls n 0 2 n 0 3 n 0 4 n 0 31 y des E aL node 1lb eth 5003 31 13 ds 32 y dcs s 1 5003 node 2 0 32 23 20 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 31 ethernet connection to Switch 1 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 to server s Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen Interface A value of 0 allows any available interface channel to be used Chan for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O Destination Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name Node entered on the Node Names screen Destination This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned Port on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 200 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value bet
4. o Voice Hos TG 12 2 TAC 712 RNX 222 2 DS1 Node 1 Node 3 BX 25 Data R8r Gateway R8si Choss gt ce IO o RNX 223 Ext 2992 TAC 722 Ext 2111 DTE DS1 DS1 Voice lt ISDN Exts 2000 2999 REM AUDIX TAC 713 HG 99 7400D PGATE Ext 3111 Exts 3000 3999 Pl Node 4 xt 1994 R8csi DTE Voice q RNX224 L i ethernet1 intuity Ar TAC 714 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 70 Ds1 I DS1 arora PPP Data ler Ext 4111 C LAN TG 24 C LAN Ethernet E Al Ext 4991 TAC 724 a 4 194 Ext 4 191 LAN nononono D UL WW i ar ci Exts 4000 4999 98100114 Eas 10001999 1681 200 Ae ppp41 192 168 1 41 O cydfec9b KLC 101999 cms 192 168 2 90 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 207 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Switch Node 1 Administration This section displays the filled in screens for the administration of Switch Node 1 DS1 Circuit Packs Connection to Switch Node 2 add dsl 1c19 Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01c19 Name Switch 1 to Switch 2 Bit Rate 1 544 Line Coding b8zs Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode common chan Interface Companding mulaw Idle Code 11111111 DMI BOS n Slip Detection n Near end CSU Type other Connection to Switch Node 3 add dsl 1c18 Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01c18 Name Switch 1 to Switch 3 Bit
5. gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes e C LAN PPP port on Switch 3 e C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End 140 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 3 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 1 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 3 for the ppp connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da n add data module next Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 2801 Name _ppp on link 1 to node 1 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01a0906 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node 3 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection n DESTINATION Digits Node Name node 1 CHAP n This data module is assigned the extension 2801 you can assign any unused extension in the dial plan gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01a09 the ppp conne
6. 400 TTC OO931 a Protocols o 0 0000 ee e a Rs A eee A RA 401 setting Up TTE QIBA A ceca a a a add we 402 Appendix C Security Issues 403 Network Security Issues 2 1 0 2 000 cect ete 403 OVEIVIBW 6 20626 444246 Pee Reed bea wea Ee Ee A OS ES 403 Appendix D Capacities and Performance 407 Capacities and Resource Requirements o eee ee es 407 Performan e acre ar ae ee RG a ws GOR Gow A oe ee pe eae ey 409 Appendix E C LAN Installation 413 OVERVIEW dius dias a Bo ae es ae a A aa 413 Install the C LAN Circuit Pack e o 414 Other Hardware Upgrades a 416 Appendix F IP Trunk Installation and Administration 417 IP TUNK stallatiOn cura A Ak BR RRO Re eae oe a 417 IP Trunk Administration erratas araa A e Pe amp Bak RNG 418 PROOVIS e puras Bots pi oR de ae thea o eR oe Se et ge 418 Administration overview a a 418 Pancal GOWNS gt Hse nei Ree He Ge BE beady Ao Ao RA ARAL Ee Be A 419 DEFINITY administration procedures 2 a a es 421 Backing up configuration manager oa sas sao eas a e nae o 425 Restoring IF NUNK 2 42 beeen o E a a a a 425 Confirming the number of available ports 2 a a ee 426 NT administration procedures aooaa a 426 Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites 0 0000s 433 Non DCS Configuration o 433 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77
7. ISDN and TCP IP Switch 2 DEFINITY ECS R8csi Switch 1 DS1 DEFINIT ECS R8si node 1 DS Switch 3 C LAN DEFINITY ECS R8csi Task Summary The following tasks need to be completed for Switch 1 Switch 2 and Switch 3 1 Review checklist 2 Switch 1 administration a Assign node names b Assign signaling group and administered NCA TSC c Assign ISDN TSC Gateway Channel d Assign link via a data module to node 3 e Assign processor channels 3 Switch 2 administration a Assign signaling group and administered NCA TSC 4 Switch 3 administration a Enable bus bridge connectivity b Assign node names c Assign link via a data module to node 1 d Assign processor channels 5 Enable links and processor channels Administration for Network Connectivity 124 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Prerequisite Administration There are some system administration tasks that need to be completed before you can proceed with the connectivity administration described in this section Review the checklist of prerequisite administration tasks in Checklist for Prerequisite Administration page 54 before proceeding with the connectivity administration in this section Configuration 4 SWITCH 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 3 DEFINITY ECS R7csi DEFINITY ECS R7si DEFINITY ECS R7csi
8. in this case the IP address on the Node Names screen that is associated with the name entered in the Node Name field In general each octet value must be one of the following numbers 255 or 0 corresponding to the network and host portions of an IP address or 192 224 240 248 or 252 corresponding to using 2 3 4 5 or 6 bits from the host ID for the subnet ID A Screens Reference The subnet mask determines which part of an IP address is the network identifier and which part is the host identifier The subnet mask is associated with the IP address administered on the Node Names screen for the IP interface identified by the Node Names field on this screen See Chapter for more information on IP addresses and subnetting Usage This field can be used to subdivide a network into 2 or more subnetworks The subnet mask consist of a string of n contiguous 1 s followed by a string of 32 n contiguous 0 s When applied to a 32 bit IP address the subnet mask indicates that the first n bits of the address form the network ID and the next 32 n bits form the host ID portion of the address The following default values for the subnet mask are used for no subnetting Class A addresses 255 0 0 0 Class B addresses 255 255 0 0 Class C addresses 255 255 255 0 Valid Value An IP address of a bridge or router on the network that is directly connected to the IP interface Usage The gateway address mus
9. 1 Fill out the general information about your sites using Worksheet 1 The Field Codes on Worksheet consist of a number 1 or 2 that indicates the site and a letter A J that indicates a field on an administration screen For each code the Field Value column holds the specific value for that field for your switches The field codes are used on all the other worksheets to indicate the values to enter from Worksheet 1 For example field code 1A corresponds to the field International Access code for site 1 You would enter the value in the Field Value column for the International Access code for your site 1 switch Then when 1A appears on a subsequent worksheet you would enter the value corresponding to 1A from Worksheet 1 Use the second and subsequent worksheets to plan switch and IP Trunk administration On each worksheet in the Fill in with your actual values column replace the indicated field codes with the corresponding values you entered on Worksheet 1 For example on Worksheet 2 there is a field called Different Country for each site Its field code is 1A2B2D2E which means that you would enter the values from Worksheet 1 as follows lt Site 1 International Access Code gt lt Site 2 Country Code gt lt Site 2 Area Code gt lt Site 2 Exchange gt Once you ve done this the result is the exact phone number that you ll enter in the matching field in the administration software Note The IP Trunk application only
10. April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Data Module type analog dm This type of data module behaves identically to a 2500 set but it accepts rotary dial pulses Listl Data Extension Type Port ITE analog dm restricted ABBREVIATED DIALING Ext Name SPECIAL DIALING OPTION HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code From above list _ ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Name COS COR TN Common Fields Abbreviated Dialing List 1 Special Dialing Option Assigned Member Ext and Name See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Specifies the type of abbreviated dialing list Valid Value s system g group p personal e enhanced blank Usage Tf g or p is entered a group number or personal list number also is required Entry in this field supports Data Hot Line This field can be left blank Identifies the type of dialing when this data module originates calls Valid Value Usage hot line default or Leave blank for regular normal keyboard dialing blank Display only Extension and name of a previously administered user who has an associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504
11. Layer 3 Number Identification Services as defined in JT Q951 a Digital Interface between PBXs Supplementary Services Number Identification Services Differences from ITU T Q 931 include symmetrical operation as Peers similar to QSIG protocol i e No Network User definition different protocol discriminator Progress Indicator IE not supported in DISCONNECT messages Timers T310 and T313 are disabled Sending Complete IE not supported NOTIFY messages are not supported Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 401 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols B Private Networking Setting Up TTC Q931 a Complete the following steps to set up TTC connections Steps Begin N a a A 0 o Verify that you have the appropriate DEFINITY circuit pack for integration Enter change system parameters customer options on the command line of your system administration screen On page 1 verify that the G3 Version field is V8 or later On page 2 verify that ISDN PRI field is y Administer the TTC DS 1 circuit pack Check for the following field entries Connect field pbx Interface peer master or peer slave Peer Protocol TTC D channel This item must match between the local and receiving switches Channel Numbering sequential or timeslot This item must match between the local and receiving switches Administer or
12. QSIG Centralized Attendant Services QSIG Centralized Attendant Service QSIG CAS DEFINITY ECS supports two versions of CAS RLT CAS and QSIG CAS The CAS feature enables one or more Branch PBXs to concentrate their attendants on one Main PBX CAS provides transparency between PBXs of most features that are normally available to the basic attendant service RLT CAS uses an analog RLT network to optimized trunk utilization QSIG CAS does not use RLT By using QSIG Transfer and QSIG Path Replacement or QSIG Diversion with Rerouting the same optimization as using RLT can be accomplished with QSIG CAS Using QSIG CAS you eliminate the need to have a separate analog RLT network All current QSIG features and RLT CAS features are available with QSIG CAS Potential Drawbacks There are a few potential drawbacks when using QSIG CAS 1 Unlike RLT QSIG Path Replacement does not work immediately This means that resources are being utilized longer during QSIG CAS as opposed to RLFCAS 2 Unlike RLT QSIG Path Replacement is not guaranteed 3 Like RLT QSIG Path Replacement does not enable a branch PBX to act as a gateway PBX 4 No path replacement functionality takes place during or after a conference 366 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking QSIG CAS functions in RLT CAS The following QSIG CAS functions are currently in RLT CAS e Attenda
13. virtual channel identifier See VCI Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 virtual circuit virtual connection Glossary virtual circuit virtual connection The pre arranged route through the ATM network that all cells in an ATM transmission follow virtual circuit number The route identifier contained in an ATM cell header A VCI and a VPI together constitute the virtual circuit number virtual path identifier See VPI VPI The ATM virtual path identifier ATM is a connection oriented service that sets up a virtual circuit between the transmitter and the receiver The two endpoints negotiate an agreed route through the network before sending any data VCI and VPI together constitute the virtual circuit number that identifies this route The VPI is analogous in some ways to an ISDN trunk group W WAN See wide area network well known address The default network address for a given type of network component as specified by a communications protocol or standards body For example the ATM Forum defines well known addresses for LAN emulation servers and LAN emulation configuration servers well known port port numbers that are assigned to specific applications by IANA For example 21 for FTP 23 for Telnet 110 for pop3 wide area network A data network that connects local area networks LANs using common carrier telephone lines bridges and routers wideband
14. 1 128 csi model 1 256 si model 1 384 r model Usage Enter information about the processor channel in the row corresponding to the processor channel number you want to use Any Processor Channel number can be used in the range appropriate for the switch model For connections to adjuncts processor channel numbers 1 2 3 etc are typically used For connections between switches it may be convenient to use processor channel numbers that are indicative of the endpoints of the connection For example processor channel 13 for a connection between switch and switch 3 Enable Type y to enable a processor channel Type n default to disable a processor channel Valid entries Usage y n Enter y when assigning the processor channel This field must be set to n before you can change any of the processor channel parameters Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 273 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Appl Identifies the switch application used on this link Valid entries Usage audix des fp mwi gateway The gateway application is used for conversion gtwy tcp mis msaamwl between ISDN and either TCP IP or BX 25 msaclk msahlwc msallwc The gtwy tcp application is used for msamcs qsig mwi and blank conversion between BX 25 and TCP IP These application types are used on the gateway switch only Gtwy To Used for gtwy tcp applications only
15. Group 13 ISDN PRI to Switch Node 3 page 1 add trunk group 13 Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 13 Group Type isdn CDR Reports y Group Name ISDN TG 13 to Switch 3 COR 1 TN 1 TAC 713 Direction two way Outgoing Display n ATM _ Dial Access n Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Service Type tie Auth Code n TestCall ITC rest Far End Test Line No TestCall BCC 4 TRUNK PARAMETERS Codeset to Send Display Codeset to Send TCM Lookahead 6 Max Message Size to Send 260 Charge Advice none Supplementary Service Protocol a Digit Handling in out enbloc enbloc 6 2 Trunk Hunt cyclical Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss normal Calling Number Delete Insert Numbering Format Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Group 13 page 2 display trunk group 13 Page 2 of 10 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment n Measured Wideband Support Internal Alert Maintenance Tests Data Restriction NCA TSC Trunk Member Send Name Send Calling Number Used for DCS y PBX ID 3 Suppress Outpulsing n DCS Signaling d chan Outgoing Channel ID Encoding preferred UUI IE Treatment service provider Send Connected Number n Send UCID n Send Codeset 6 7 LAI IE y Group 13 member assignments add trunk group 13 Page 4 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 0 0 GROUP M
16. Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 287 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Far end Listen Port Valid entries Usage blank or Optional If entered the same number as entered in 0 65535 the Near end Listen Port field is recommended if not a left blank this number must match the number entered in the Near end Listen Port field on the signaling group form for the far end switch IRQ Required Valid entries Usage y Leave the default n if the far end switch is a DEFINITY ECS Set to y only if the far end switch is a non DEFINITY switch and requires a location request to obtain a signaling address in its signaling protocol n default Calls Share IP signaling connection Valid entries Usage y Enter y for inter DEFINITY connections Otherwise n default leave the default n Bypass if IP Threshold Exceeded Valid entries Usage y Set to y to automatically remove from service trunks assigned to this signaling group when IP transport performance falls below limits administered on the Maintenance Related System Parameters sys par maint screen n default Internetworking Message Specifies whether the system sends alerting or progress if an incoming trunk call is routed to a non ISDN trunk group for example CO or tie This field is administerable on a per port basis Valid entries Usage PROGress default ALERTing Administration for Network Connectivity 288
17. Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen A value of 0 allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 32 The Ethernet side of the gateway Enable Appl Gateway To Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Set to y Use gtwy tcp for conversion between X 25 and TCP IP Indicates a software connection between processor channels 32 and 23 Node 1 is the server for this session Set node 3 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the data module screen For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen 3 of 4 Administra
18. R8csi R8si R8r If an R8 switch is connected to two endpoints by different connection types it acts as Connection Type Ethernet Synchronous PPP ISDN PRI H 323 Trunk Ethernet Synchronous PPP ISDN PRI BX 25 H 323 Trunk Ethernet Synchronous PPP ISDN PRI BX 25 H 323 Trunk 1 Networking Overview Endpoint DCS CMS Intuity AUDIX DCS DCS DCS DCS CMS Intuity AUDIX DCS DCS DCS CMS Intuity AUDIX DEFINITY AUDIX DCS DCS CMS Intuity AUDIX DCS DCS DCS CMS Intuity AUDIX DEFINITY AUDIX DCS a gateway protocol converter between the endpoints Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 DEFINITY Capacities DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview The following table shows maximum allowable values and ranges for several connectivity parameters for DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Note that some or all maxima may not be achievable depending on specific switch traffic configurations Circuit Packs Audio Streams per IP Interface board H 323 IP Trunks IP Stations Processor Channels X 25 ethernet ppp Interface Channels listen ports X 25 ethernet ppp ISDN TSC Gateway Channels Links per System Links per Circuit Pack PI PGATE C LAN IP Routes Hop Channels X 25 only csi 2 C LAN X IP Interface medpro 31 for G711 codec 22 for compression codecs 300 na 1
19. Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0_ 0_ 0_ 0 node 1 192 168 10 1 node 3 192 168 10 3 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 117 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces 3 C LAN Administration The IP interface for each C LAN board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn y C LAN 01a10 TN799 B node 1 255 255 255 0 1 n a 255 255 255 0 rs y A 255 255 255 0 EEN IAS O E 255 255 255 0 ANS gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Inter region IP Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks t
20. a PC running the DEFINITY IP Softphone application with an IP connection to the DEFINITY server and a standard telephone with a separate PSTN connection to the DEFINITY server e CentreVu IP Agent same as the Dual Connection IP Softphone with the addition of call center agent features that enable agents to work at home The DEFINITY IP Softphone can also operate in a native H 323 mode which is a PC based single phone with limited features Documentation on how to set up and use the IP Softphones is included on the CD ROM containing the IP Softphone software The documentation includes a Getting Started quick reference an overview and troubleshooting document and context sensitive help integrated with the softphone software Procedures for administering the DEFINITY ECS server to support IP Softphones are given in DEFINITY ECS R8 2 Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 32 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks H 323 Trunk Administration This section describes the administration steps needed to setup H 323 trunks The first subsection covers the enabling administration that needs to be in place before the trunk administration can be done The second subsection gives a summary of the H 323 trunk administration and the last subsection gives the detailed steps The screens used for this administration are described in detail in Appe
21. eo Size seconds Maximum 3600 SUBSCRIBER CLASS OF SERVICE PARAMETERS Addressing Format extension Login Announcement Set System System Multilingual is ON Call Answer Primary Annc Set System Call Answer Language Choice n Call Answer Secondary Annc Set System PERMISSIONS Type call answer Announcement Control y Outcalling n Priority Messages n Broadcast none IMAPI Access y IMAPI Message Transfer n Fax Creation n Trusted Server Access y INCOMING MAILBOX Order fifo Category Order nuo Retention Times days New 10 Old 10 Unopened 10 OUTGOING MAILBOX Order fifo Category Order unfda Retention Times days File Cab 10 Delivered Nondeliverable 5 Voice Mail Message seconds Maximum Length 300 Minimum Needed 32 Call Answer Message seconds Maximum Length 120 Minimum Needed 8 End of Message Warning Time seconds Maximum Mailing Lists 25 Total Entries in all Lists 250 Minimum Guarantee 0 Page 2 of aN Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 95 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Worksheet A Names and IP Addresses for Lucent Intuity System Field Complete the information on this worksheet to collect information required to administer the Lucent INTUITY system for integration with the switch Recommended Your Entry Intuity System TCP IP Administration Screen TCP IP Administration Network Addres
22. ethernet gt R8si In this configuration a DEFINITY ECS R8r acts as a gateway between two other nodes one connected via ppp to an R8csi and the other via ethernet to another R8si This configuration is the same as configuration 5A except that Switch has two C LAN circuit packs instead of one One C LAN handles the ppp connection and the other handles the ethernet connection Switch 1 ppp BSI node la ppp C LAN a node la DEFINITY PPP ECS R8r node 1b C LAN b F ode 1b eth Task Summary The following tasks need to be completed for Switch 1 Switch 2 and Switch 3 1 Review checklist 2 Switch 1 administration Assign node names Assign processor channels SO 00 T 9 3 Switch 2 administration a Enable bus bridge connectivity b Assign node names Ethernet Assign IP Route C LAN a to node 3 Assign IP Route C LAN b to node 2 node 2 Assign link to via a data module to node 2 Assign link to via a data module to the LAN Assign link via a data module from C LAN a to C LAN b Assign link via a data module from C LAN b to C LAN a c Assign link via a data module to node 1la ppp d Assign processor channels e Assign IP Route to node 3 Switch 2 DEFINITY ECS R8csi DS1 C LAN Switch 3 C LAN DEFINITY ECS R8si Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 C
23. gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Field Conditions Comments Session Local The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Session Remote It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Mach ID Destination switch ID This is the Local Node Number on the dial plan of the destination switch 3 of 3 gt Submit the screen End Intuity System Administration Procedure Overview The following is a checklist of procedures that must be completed to administer a DEFINITY ECS with a TCP IP connection to a Lucent Intuity system The DEFINITY administration procedures are described in DEFINITY ECS Administrator s Guide 555 233 502 and in previous sections of this chapter The Intuity system administration procedures are describe following the checklist For a complete description of the administration procedures for connecting an Intuity system to a DEFINTIY ECS see Intuity Messaging Solutions Using a LAN to Integrate with DEFINTIY ECS 585 313 602 for Intuity R4 4 or 585 313 604 for Intuity R5 DEFINITY ECS administration The following p
24. For Processor Channel 21 ppp connection to Switch 1 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 2 is the client for this session Set node 1a to Server s Interface Link Must match the link number assigned on the node 2 data module screen Interface Chan A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 Destination Node Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen Destination Port This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 193 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Conditions Comments Session Local The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Session Remote It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and
25. Issue 1 April 2000 interserver routing table Glossary interserver routing table A database that keeps track of the interserver routing tables on a multiserver MMCX network When a server sets up a Point to Point Protocol connection with a remote server the local server looks up the dialed digit sequences in the interserver routing table Calls that involve only one MMCX server are routed using the dial plan table 1 O base address The place in memory where a given computer peripheral places and picks up messages that travel over a computer s system bus Internet Protocol IP Internet Protocol address A 32 bit number that uniquely identifies endpoints on the Internet commonly specified in the form n1 n2 n3 n4 where each Np is a decimal number between 0 and 255 Part of the IP address represents the address of a local network s gateway to the Internet and part represents the host machine address within that local network The available bits are apportioned to the network address or local address using a system of classes The Class A addresses used by the largest organizations on the Internet reserve the first 8 bits for the network portion of the address and remaining 24 for the host machine Class B addresses the most common class assign 16 bits to the network and 16 to the host machine The Class C addresses used by small networks reserve the first 24 bits for the network and the remaining 8 bits for the host IP u
26. enbloc enbloc DTT to DCO Loss Numbering Format Duplex normal normal full Page 2 of 10 Wideband Support n Maintenance Tests y NCA TSC Trunk Member 1 Send Calling Number n DCS Signaling d chan UUI IE Treatment service provider Send Connected Number n 230 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 3 Administration 4 Networking Example Group 13 member assignments display trunk group 13 Page 4 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 0 0 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 0 Port Code Sfx Name Night Sig Grp 01a1101 TN464 e 01a1102 TN464 e 01al103 TN464 e 01a1104 TN464 e Uniform Dialing Paln Page 1 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes ddxx dd Type 2x udpcode 222 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 AAR Digit Analysis display aar analysis 1 Page 1 of AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full Dialed Total Route Call String Min Max Pattern Type 221 7 7 101 aar 222 7 7 101 aar 224 7 7 101 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 231 Switch Node 3 Administration 4 Networking Example Routing Patterns add route pattern 101 Pattern Number 101 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 0 3 user user user user
27. ANSI American National Standards Institute A United States professional technical association supporting a variety of standards APLT Advanced Private Line Termination ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARS See Automatic Route Selection ARS ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange The standard code for representing characters in digital form Each character is represented by an 8 bit code including parity bit Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 465 asynchronous data transmission Glossary asynchronous data transmission A method of transmitting data in which each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data characters to be transmitted at irregular intervals This type transmission is advantageous when transmission is not regular characters typed at a keyboard Also called asynchronous transmission Asynchronous data unit ADU A device that allows direct connection between RS 232C equipment and a digital switch Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM A connection oriented digital service optimized for fiber optic lines at speeds up to 622 08 mbps ATM networks set up a virtual circuit virtual connection between the transmitter and the receiver before sending any data Data is then sent in a continuous stream of fixed length 58 byte cells each of which contains a 48 byte payload and a 5 byte heade
28. An extended network prefix is formed by using two or more bits of the Host ID as a subnet number and appending this subnet number to the network ID Administration for Network Connectivity 16 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing Subnet Masks 1 Networking Overview Two level classful hierarchy Network ID Host ID Three level subnet hierarchy Class Type lt q _HH Extended Network Prefix gt Network ID Subnet ID Host ID Subnet mask 1111111111111111111 1 00000 0 The extended network prefix is then treated as a normal network ID The remaining host ID bits define the host IDs within each subnet For example a block of IP addresses could be subdivided into four subnets by using 2 host bits to extend the network ID Now there are 4 times as many extended networks and 1 4 as many hosts per network Note In adding up the number of network and host IDs certain addresses cannot be counted In general addresses with all ones or all zeros in either the network portion or the host portion of the address are not usable These are reserved for special uses such as broadcasting or loopback Routing protocols use a subnet mask to determine the boundary between the extended network ID and the host ID in an IP address The subnet mask is a 32 bit binary number consisting of a string of contiguous 1 s followed by a string of contiguous 0 s The 1 s
29. C LAN circuit pack 413 Class of Restriction COR feature interactions Enhanced DCS EDCS 329 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 Class of Service COS feature interactions QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 CMS LAN Setup Summary 59 codecs specify 49 common control switching arrangements CCSA 349 communications interface processor channel screen 273 communiucations interface links screen 293 Configuration manager performing backups 425 Configuration Manager IP Trunk 426 configuring Microsoft NetMeeting 445 confirming the number of available ports on IP trunks 426 connecting switches 1 connection types 9 Index connection types 1 6 9 connectivity switch 4 country protocol options 320 coverage answer groups 326 Coverage Callback feature interactions DCS Call Coverage 326 DCS Call Forwarding 327 D channel 490 D channel backups DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS 328 Data Call Setup feature interactions Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 data module example 219 225 data module screen 256 analog dm 297 netcon 295 data module assign 42 Data Privacy feature interactions DCS Call Waiting 327 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 Data Restriction feature interactions DCS Call Waiting 327 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 DCS 2 IP Trunk 436 DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals feature 313 323 int
30. From Switch C 4 04 None From Switch A 5 05 None From Switch A 6 06 None From Switch A On Switch C Line Search Replace String String 1 01 None From Switch A 2 02 None From Switch A 3 03 None From Switch A 7 07 None From Switch B 8 08 None From Switch B 9 09 None From Switch B When a call terminates on a line we search for the unique string associated with that line but we do not replace it This reforms the digit string back to the way it left the originating DEFINITY and passes the appropriate digits to the DEFINITY at the terminating end Administration for Network Connectivity 438 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Rerouting calls when IP transmission quality is poor When transmission quality over the IP network is unacceptable use AAR or ARS with Configuration Manager to reroute calls over private and public telephone networks This is called PSTN Fallback Before you start Before you perform this procedure complete the following tasks Plan call routing page 419 Creating an IP trunk group page 422 Starting IP Trunk service page 432 Placing a test telephone call page 448 Placing a test telephone call page 448 Instructions As an example let s administer PSTN Fallback for trunk group 80 which is already set up To start PSTN Fallback begin at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the Configuratio
31. Interface field is network for the hub and user for the remote switch Note Mode Codes will not work with D4 or SuperFrame For each DEFINITY node enter change sign next on the command line Administer the signaling group see example in Chapter 4 of this document For each DEFINITY node enter change isdn private numbering and verify fields as follows Set Network Level field is 0 This setting overrides the signaling on the D channel allowing the Message Waiting lamp activation signal to be sent On the DEFINITY node enter change sys params mode code on the command line On the hub switch set the VMS Hunt Group Extension field to the voice mail hunt group extension On the remote switches repeat Step 15 Enter the voice mail hunt group extension in the Remote VMS Extension First field For each DEFINITY node enter change aar an on the command line Verify the following Call Type field is levO On the hub switch enter change station extension for each port extension in the voice mail hunt group On Page 1 verify the following Type field is vmi 398 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code B Private Networking 22 On Page 2 of the Station screen administer or verify the following LWC Reception field is msa spe Message Server Adjunct System Processing Element Leave Word Calling field i
32. Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 297 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Extended Trunk Access Call Screening This screen allows a set of digit strings to be identified that should not be routed via ETA This screen can also block the routing of certain FACs or TACs For example if the system administrator were to notice a digit string being mistakenly dialed repeatedly that ended up being routed via ETA to a remote PBX only to have the remote PBX return intercept treatment then that digit string would be a candidate for the entry into the ETA call screening table Entry into this table would have the effect of return intercept treatment to the caller without first attempting to route the digits to the remote PBX for interpretation via ETA Page 1 of 1 ETA CALL SCREENING TABLE Entry No 0 Q w H H n Q R o 0 fe H 3 Q ki 2 ct H lt woAIAUBWNHEe Call Screening Entry Assign those digit strings up to 10 that should be blocked for this RNX Each string can have up to 6 digits and or special or wildcard characters Valid entries Usage Digits 0 through 9 x X The character may only be used as the first character blank Administration for Network Connectivity 298 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens Extension Number Portability Numbering Plan A Screens Reference Page 1 of 1 EXTENSI
33. LAN emulation configuration server See LAN emulation LANE LES LAN emulation server See LAN emulation LANE line coding Line coding is the data format that lets either end of a communications channel correctly interpret messages from the other Line coding systems specify the voltage levels and patterns that represent binary digits 1s and Os based on the requirements of the transmission network The AT amp T network has two it demands that the net voltage on the line equal 0 volts DC and it demands a minimum Open System Interconnect OSI Model The T carrier system meets the first requirement by using a bipolar line coding scheme called Alternate Mark Inversion AMD It meets the second with one of several supplementary coding schemes including ZCS Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS and High Density Bipolar 3 Bit Substitution HDB3 line compensation link An allowance for pulse distortions in the cable that connects the MMCX server to the first channel service unit CSU on the PRI span It is proportional to the length of the cable T1 circuit packs adjust the outgoing signal so that it arrives at the far end without distortion A transmitter receiver channel that connects two systems 478 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 link access procedure on the D channel LAPD Glossary link access procedure on the D channel LAPD A link layer protocol
34. PtO carries PPP traffic and can have 1 9 timeslots Pt1 carries maintenance messages and can have 1 3 timeslots Pt2 carries broadcast messages and can have 1 3 timeslots gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 157 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 2 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0 _ 0_ 0 0 node 1 ppp 192 168 10 130 node 2 192 168 10 12 node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node n
35. SI99YS4A10M YUNAL dl tSv 0 422 qIO 0002 indy enss p0OG E2 9GS AVAHIOUUOD YIOMJON 104 UONEASIUILIPY Worksheet 5 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site same country any area code SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same a Different country A Different country analysis entry your actual area analysis entry your actual area Country different f Country different with values code with values code area code area code Dialed String 1A2B 1C 1C Dialed String 2A1B 2C 2C Total Mn 7 7 Total Mn il Total Mx i i Total Mx i i Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with Same Same Fill in with l Same Same Create Different country Create Different country k your actual area your actual E area entries Country different entries Country different values code values code area code area code Or
36. TTC specific protocol newly support in DEFINITY ECS R8 DEFINITY ECS supports Basic Call with Number Identification services TTC Basic Call Setup with Number Identification Supplementary Service DEFINITY ECS allows the display of the calling party number to the called party DEFINITY ECS also displays the connected number to the calling party after the call connects to the called number of another destination For many protocols Number Identification is considered to be part of Basic call however the TTC protocol defines Number Identification services to be part of their supplementary services offering No additional supplementary services are supported at this time 66 You can administer outgoing calls as yes no or restricted Restricted means that DEFINITY ECS sends the information but sends it presentation restricted which indicates to the receiving switch that the information should not be displayed A received restricted number is included on the Call Detail Record CDR Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols B Private Networking TTC Q931 a Protocols The TTC defined private networking ISDN protocol is largely based upon ITU T Q 931 protocol DEFINITY ECS supports the following TTC defined protocols Basic Call support as defined in JT Q931 a Digital Interface between PBXs Common Channel Signaling
37. Type ppp cos 1 Port 01c0709 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node la ppp Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 8993020 Node Name node 2 CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this link Port In this example the C LAN a circuit pack is in slot 01c07 the ppp connection is through port 09 Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 175 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for
38. amp DCS Type Signaling Signaling Voice Signaling ISDN T1 E1 facilities TSCs on the TSCs on the DCS usingISDN PRIor ISDN PRI ISDN PRI 8 QSIG psi B Channel D Channel D Channel T1 E1 facilities using ISDN PRI or X 25 DS1 B Channel Packet PVC OR Analog trunk T1 El facilities ing ISDN PRI or C LAN Sns PPP DS1 B Channel Packet PVC OR Analog trunk TI E1 facilities TCP ing ISDN PRI or Packet C LAN 2008 Ethernet DS1 B Channel DCS OR signaling Analog trunk only jiterface RIE Packet PVC Packet TCP palit ae 5 IP Interface Packet A in ip trunk C LAN IP Trunk mode mode montada Sl Packet TCP R8 en Ed IP Interface Packet nan in medpro C LAN MedPro mode mode For DCS X 25 and ppp connection types the signaling and voice data are sent together over tie trunk facilities as TDM multiplexed frames The DCS signaling data is sent as packets over a permanent virtual circuit PVC on tie trunk facilities For C LAN Ethernet connections the signaling and voice data are sent together over tie trunk facilities as TDM multiplexed frames The DCS signaling data is sent as TCP datagrams over an IP network through the C LAN CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview For IP Trunk connections the voice data is sent over IP facilities as RTP datagrams using the IP Interface assembly TN802 or TN802B each pack
39. csi si or r models Note The csi model does not support X 25 connections Administration for Network Connectivity 2 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview What is transmitted between connected switches How does the data move between switches TCP IP signaling connections were introduced with DEFINITY Release 7 Starting with R7 X 25 was no longer sold with new systems R7 and later new systems ship with only TCP IP connections or ISDN PRI for DCS signaling However existing systems with X 25 and or ISDN PRI DCS signaling can be upgraded to the latest version and keep those signaling links or a new system can be added to an existing DCS network Connections to the CMS Call Center and Intuity AUDIX adjuncts can use either X 25 or 10Base T DCS signaling When a DCS network uses a mixture of two or three of the different DCS signaling types one or more switches in the network must act as a gateway A gateway switch 1s connected between two switches using different signaling protocols and the gateway enables the two end switches to communicate by converting the signaling messages between the two protocols A gateway switch can provide conversion between two or all three of the signaling protocols but only one protocol can be used for DCS signaling between any two switches A telephone call consists of voice bearer data and call signaling data If the call is over
40. extension range 4300 4399 and 3400 3499 IP address 198 152 169 236 In the configuration above each DEFINITY switch has a separate trunk group that is dedicated to being linked to another site each of these trunk groups has a specified group of ports lines that is coordinated at the other end Extension calls to the other DEFINITY switches in the network are routed to unique trunk groups based on ARS AAR digit analysis within the DEFINITY the IP Trunk server s administration routes the calls to the appropriate IP address based on the port line that the call arrives on This configuration works whether DCS is administered between these locations or if users simply dial extension numbers to be routed to the appropriate switch and do not wish to receive DCS features To arrange a network in this configuration an administrator will need to know each IP Trunk server s IP address and the ports lines that are dedicated to that particular address 436 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration On Switch A Line Search Replace IP Address String String 1 None 01 198 152 169 236 Switch C 2 None 02 198 152 169 236 Switch C 3 None 03 198 152 169 236 Switch C 4 None 04 198 152 169 238 Switch B 5 None 05 198 152 169 238 Switch B 6 None 06 198 152 169 238 Switch B On Switch B Line Search Replace IP Address
41. gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments For Processor Channel 31 ethernet connection to Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Set to y Indicates that this connection will carry DCS data Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 to Server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 121 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Field Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The Destination Port number must match the Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes conveni
42. gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data next Data Extension Type Port Link Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y Page 1 of X DATA MODULE 3901 Name ethernet on link 1 BCC 2 ethernet 01a0517 1 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8si not previously assigned on this switch Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command Network uses 1 s Leave the default y if the private network contains only for broadcast DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the addresses network includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 199 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 3 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p
43. home voice mail message For calls made to a NetMeeting softphone if the call is not answered or if coverage is not administered after about 5 rings NetMeeting drops the call and the station stops ringing but the caller continues to hear ringback To avoid this situation make sure that coverage is administered for the NetMeeting softphone NetMeeting ignores any H 323 digits received out of band so it never hears DTMF from DEFINITY which always strips DTMF from the audio path and plays it out of band with H 323 For example if you are on a call on a NetMeeting softphone and the calling party presses a number or character on their keypad you will not hear the tone 52 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 3 C LAN Administration This chapter describes how to administer TCP IP data connections between DEFINITY ECS switches using the C LAN circuit pack This chapter does not cover the use of the IP Interface circuit pack for H 323 connectivity Overview This chapter provides an update of the R7 administration procedures which were described in Chapter 2 DCS Administration of issue 1 of this book The R8 changes described in this chapter are e R8 administration procedures using the changed ethernet Data Module screen and the new IP Interfaces screen e use of IP Routes which in some cases are not needed in R8 when they were needed in R7 e additional proce
44. if the caller wishes without redialing the number Branch Attendants e A branch can have an attendant Access to the branch attendant must be by way of an individual attendant extension Incoming trunk calls in a CAS network can bypass branch attendants but can be routed back to them by the centralized attendant e Branch calls terminate on the CAS main switch based on the incoming RLT trunk group day destination or night service destination An attendant console is not always answering or extending incoming CAS calls If someone other than an attendant answers a CAS call that person can extend the call back to the branch by pressing the FLASH button on a multiappearance voice terminal or flashing the switchhook on a single line voice terminal The branch reaction to Flash Signals and the branch application of tones is the same whether an attendant or someone other than an attendant answers or extends the call 340 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Interactions When an analog station call goes to coverage the station drops from the call This is the exception to the branch leaving the extended to party ringing If the main attendant extends a call to an analog station and that call goes to coverage and later returns to the main attendant the call is treated as an incoming LDN call and the attendant must re extend the c
45. interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 AUDIX forms Interface Links 293 interactions QSIG Message Waiting Indication 383 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 LAN Setup Summary 59 Authorization Codes feature interactions QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 Automatic Call Distribution ACD feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 Automatic Callback ACB feature interactions DCS Call Waiting 327 Automatic Callback feature interactions ISDN Feature Plus 358 Automatic Circuit Assurance feature interactions ISDN Feature Plus 357 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 491 Index B8ZS See Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution Backup buttons 339 backups configuration manager 425 Basic Call Management System BCMS feature interactions QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 380 basic encoding rules BER 369 binary decimal conversion 14 books how to order Xvi Bridged Call Appearance feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 bus bridge 414 example 233 Busy Indicator buttons 341 Busy name 361 Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks Verify feature Verify buttons 314 C cables C LAN 415 call associated temporary signaling connections CA TSC 321 369 Call Coverage feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 DC
46. module screen The interface channel number must be in the range 1 64 for an X 25 link Used for TCP IP connections only Used for TCP IP connections only 10f4 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 109 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 23 The X 25 side of the gateway Enable Appl Gateway To Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Processor Channel 31 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Set to y Use gtwy tcp for conversion between X 25 and TCP IP Indicates a software connection between processor channels 23 and 32 Used for TCP
47. n Node Name node 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection n DESTINATION Digits Node Name node 1la ppp CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01a04 the ppp connection is through port 13 Link The link number must be in the range 25 for R8csi not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 191 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this
48. network SDN the total NCA CA TSCs cannot exceed the number ordered The trunk group used by the NCA TSCs Leave blank this field is currently not used a indicates AT amp T protocol b indicates QSIG protocol Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi gt Press the Next Page key Service Feature ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT TSC Local Mach Index Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl ID abe 1701 y permanent 2951 dcs 1 2 1702 y permanent 2952 des Sa Page 2 of 5 As needed Inactivity Time out min 3 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments TSC Index 1 for DC S connection to Switch 1 Local Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl Mach ID Extension number of the ISDN interface for TSC 1 on the Switch 2 DS1 circuit pack y enables the administered NCA TSC Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA TSC permanent means that the administered NCA TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end as needed means the administered NCA TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed 1t can be set up either by the near end or far end switch Extension number of the ISDN interface for TSC 1 on the Switch 1 DS1 circuit pack TSC
49. screen is administered on Switch 2 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 of the screen change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0 0 O 0 node 1 192 168 10 31 node 2 192 168 10 32 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 67 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 1 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 2 for the ppp connection to Switch 1 The data
50. system 462 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CentreVu CMS G References The following documents provide information about administration and use of the CentreVu Call Management System CMS Lucent Call Center s Little Instruction Book for Basic Administration 585 210 935 Issue 1 Lucent Call Center s Little Instruction Book for Advanced Administration 585 210 936 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 8 Administration 585 210 910 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Database Items 585 210 939 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 8 External Call History Interface 585 210 912 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 8 Upgrades and Migrations 585 210 913 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 8 Software Installation and Setup 585 210 941 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Release 3 Version 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 585 210 919 Issue 1 CentreVu Advocate Release 8 User Guide 585 210 927 Issue 1 CentreVu Supervisor Version 8 Installation and Getting Started 585 210 928 Issue 1 CentreVu Supervisor Version 8 Reports 585 210 929 Issue 1 CentreVu Report Designer Version 8 User Guide 585 210 930 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Forecast 585 215 825 Issue 1 CentreVu Call Management System Custom
51. the 32 bit logical IP address which is configured in software with the 48 bit physical address of the C LAN circuit pack which is burned into the board at the factory The C LAN board has an ARP table that associates the IP addresses with the hardware addresses which are used to route messages across the network Each C LAN board has one physical address and up to 17 assigned IP addresses one for each port Logical Addressing An IP address is a software defined 32 bit binary number that identifies a network node The IP address has two main parts the first n bits specify a network ID and the remaining 32 n bits specify a host ID Format n al a a m Type Dotted Decimal The 32 bit binary IP address is what the computer understands For human use the notation address is typically expressed in dotted decimal notation the 32 bits are grouped into four 8 bit octets bytes and converted to decimal numbers separated by decimal points as in the example below Octet 1 Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4 11000010 00001101 11011011 00000111 a 194 13 219 7 The eight binary bits in each octet can be combined to represent decimal numbers ranging from 0 to 255 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 13 IP Addressing Conversion between binary and decimal IP Address Classes 1 Networking Overview Conversion from binary to decimal notation is accom
52. user user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 1 3 4 Request Format y as needed both ept none n rest none n rest none n rest none n rest none n rest none KKK KKK O Hunt Group page 1 add hunt group 99 Page 1 of 10 HUNT GROUP Group Number 99 ACD n Group Name Intuity 1 Queue n Group Extension 3111 Vector n Group Type ucd mia Coverage Path TN 1 Night Service Destination COR 1 MM Early Answer n Security Code ISDN Caller Display page 2 add hunt group 99 Page 2 of 10 HUNT GROUP Message Center rem audix AUDIX Extension 1111 Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX n LWC Reception none Administration for Network Connectivity 232 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Switch Node 4 Administration This section displays the filled in screens for the administration of Switch Node 4 Bus Bridge change system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 vcs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI Service SPID DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop Around Test Call Extension LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a C
53. 0 the switch will choose whichever it sees first not necessarily the most efficient one By entering 1 in the Metric field you are telling the switch this is a complex route if you know of a simpler route metric 0 to this destination use that instead In other words metric 1 diverts usage of the route to a metric 0 route if available The following diagram illustrates the use of the Metric field Switches A and C are connected via switch B over two LANs Switch B has two C LAN boards which are connected via a ppp link The network nodes are numbered 1 through 6 21 C LAN1 INE ethernet Ppp ethernet 4 1 C LAN2 5 6 C LANa Switch B C LANc Switch A Switch C The following IP routes are required for communications between switches A and C Administered Destination Gateway Route on Board Loc Node Node Metric 1 Switch A C LANa 6 2 0 2 Switch B C LAN1 6 4 1 3 Switch B C LAN2 1 3 1 4 Switch C C LANc 1 5 0 Implied Switch B C LAN2 6 5 0 The implied route from C LAN2 to node 6 via node 5 is not administered on the IP Routing screen but is a built in part of the C LAN firmware and the automatic subnet routing feature We are assuming that automatic subnet routing is enabled for node 5 on the Data Module screen Therefore on Switch B there are two routes to destination 6 route 2 and the implied route Administration for Network C
54. 00100000 32 192 168 50 33 to 192 168 50 62 01000000 64 192 168 50 65 to 192 168 50 94 01100000 96 192 168 50 97 to 192 168 50 126 10000000 128 192 168 50 129 to 192 168 50 158 10100000 160 192 168 50 161 to 192 168 50 190 11000000 192 192 168 50 193 to 192 168 50 222 11100000 224 not usable For example the IP addresses 192 168 50 75 and 192 168 50 91 are on the same subnet but 192 168 50 100 is on a different subnet This is illustrated in the following diagram where the subnet mask 255 255 255 244 is used to compare the first 27 binary digits or each address Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 19 IP Addressing Class A and Class B subnets 1 Networking Overview 192 168 50 75 11000000 10101000 00110010 01001011 192 168 50 91 11000000 10101000 00110010 01011011 192 168 50 100 11000000 10101000 00110010 01100100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 224 11111111 11111111 11111111 11100000 27 digits The other four possible subnetting schemes for Class C addresses using 2 4 5 and 6 subnet bits are formed in the same way Which of the 5 subnetting schemes to use depends on the requirements for the number of subnets and the number of hosts per subnet For Class A and Class B IP addresses subnets can be formed in the same way as for Class C addresses The only difference is that many more subnets per network can be formed Fo
55. 1 Steps Begin gt Open the Signaling Groups form enter ch sig n change signaling group next Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 1 Max number of NCA TSC 5 Max number of CA TSC 23 Trunk Group for NCA TSC 12 Associated Signaling y Primary D Channel 01a1024 Trunk Group for Channel Selection 21 Supplementary Service Protocol a gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Associated Specifies Facility Associated Signaling FAS the Signaling D channel carries signaling only for the B channels on Primary D Channel Max number of NCA TSC Max number of CA TSC Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection Supplementary Service Protocol the same DS1 interface Specifies D Channel signaling on port 24 of the DS1 circuit pack located at 1a10 Maximum number of simultaneous non call associated Temporary Signaling Connections that can exist in the signaling group This number includes all NCA TSCs that are administered on this screen and those that tandem through the switch in route to another switch in the network The TSCs carry signaling for features not associated with a specific call for example signals to turn on Leave Word Calling Maximum number of simultaneous call associated TSCs that can exist in the signaling group Typically this is the number of ISDN PRI trunk group members controlled by this signaling group If the connection is using the public
56. 1 audix 1 msa 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 De 8 Audix or MSA Name Identifies the name of the AUDIX or Message Server Adjunct MSA node Valid entries Usage 1 7 alphanumeric characters with no Used as a label for the associated IP embedded spaces address The node names must be unique Defaults on each switch audix msa csi si blank r Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 245 Networking Screens A Screens Reference IP Address The IP address associated with the node name Not needed for X 25 connections Pages 2 6 Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address 1 Default 0 _0 _0 _0 17 27 18 a 19 4 20 Do 21 6 22 Us 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 PAT 6 12 28 13 297 14 30 I5 31 16 32 Name The name of the adjunct or switch node Valid entries are alpha numeric and or special characters for identification Default is blank Valid entries Usage 1 15 alphanumeric characters Used as a label for the associated IP address The with no embedded spaces node names must be unique on each switch IP Address The IP address for the node named in the previous field Valid entries Usage 32 bit address expressed A unique IP address is assigned to each port on the in dotted decimal notation C L
57. 1 3 y at setup 3 3 3 y at setup Administration for switch 3 e Dial Plan form Start Dig Len Usage 4 4 ext 5 4 ext 6 4 ext Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 336 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking e Uniform Dial Plan form Ext Code Type Location Code Xxx UDPcode 221 SXXX UDPcode 222 e AAR Digit Conversion form Matching Min Max Del Replacement Net Conv Pattern String 223 7 7 3 ext n e AAR Analysis Table Dialed String Min Max Rte Call Type Node Num Pat 221 7 7 1 aar 1 222 7 7 2 aar 2 e Signaling Group form signaling group 4 TSC Local Enable Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext d Ext PBX ID 1 6905 y permanent 5905 2 des 2 6902 y permanent 4902 1 des 3 6903 y permanent 4903 audix e Trunk Group form Group Grp Type Used for DCS Sig Method PBX ID DCS 1 isdn pri y d chan e Routing Pattern form Routing Trunk FRL Del TSC CA TSC Pattern Group Request 1 1 0 3 y at setup Should be blank if SDN network routing requires 7 digits Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 337 Distributed Communications System Centralized Attendant Service How to administer CAS B Private Networking Centralized Attendant Service CAS allows attendants in a private network of switching systems to be concentrated at a central or main location Thus CAS reduces
58. 1 33 rmodel ppp Indicates the interface link number that 1 25 si model ethernet connects to another node in a DCS procr intf network a Message Server CMS SDN e 1 25 csi model x 25 Gateway or AUDIX Name Descriptive label for the data module Valid Entries DataModule Usage Types 0 27 ppp This field is not used by the system software alphanumeric ethernet Enter a descriptive name for ease in characters procr intf identifying the data module The contents of Default is x 25 this field are displayed when the list data blank pdm module command is used cos Class of service COS specifies a group of feature access permissions of a group of telephones Valid Data Module Usage Entries Types 0 15 ppp The value for this fields will be specified by the Default is 1 procr intf system administrator pdm Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 257 Networking Screens A Screens Reference COR Class of restriction COR identifies caller and called party privileges for telephones telephone groups data modules and trunk groups Valid Data Module Usage Entries Types 0 95 ppp The values for these fields will be specified by procr intf the system administrator Default is 1 22 Administer the COR so that account codes are pdm y E not required Forced entry of account codes is turned off for wideband endpoints TN Tenant partition number Enables a single DEFINITY ECS to appear
59. 1 carries DCS signaling between node 2 and node 1 Destination is node 1 TSC Index 2 for DCS connection to Switch 1 Local Ext Enabled Established Extension number of the ISDN interface for TSC 2 on the Switch 2 DS1 circuit pack y enables the administered NCA TSC Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA TSC permanent means that the administered NCA TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end as needed means the administered NCA TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed it can be set up either by the near end or far end switch 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 137 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Field Conditions Comments Dest Digits Extension number of the ISDN interface for TSC 2on the Switch 1 DS1 circuit pack Appl TSC 2 carries DCS signaling between Switch 2 and Switch 1 As specified on the Switch 1 NCA TSC Assignment screen TSC 2 is administered as a gateway on Switch 1 where the ISDN signals are converted to TCP IP Mach ID Destination is node 3 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 138 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp
60. 12 ports for a virtual connection to the IP Trunk circuit pack 1 Type add trunk group 5 and press ENTER The Trunk Group screen appears Administration for Network Connectivity 422 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration a TRUNK GROUP a Group Number 5__ Group Type tie CDR Reports y Group Name IP Trunk 01409 COR 85_ TN 1__ TAC 105_ Direction two way_ Outgoing Display y Trunk Signaling Type Dial Access n Busy Threshold 99_ Night Service Queue Length 0__ Incoming Destination Comm Type voice Auth Code n TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink___ Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5_ Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec 500_ Digit Treatment insertion Digits 9 Sig Bit Inversion none Connected to Toll n STT Loss low DTT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Receive Answer Supervision y y Note Depending on how the routing between sites is administered inserting digits may be required The example shows a 9 being inserted in front of any digits received from the IP Trunk In most DEFINITY ECS switches this is the access code for ARS and will allow the digits received on the trunk to be analyzed and rerouted based on ARS analysis table entries 2 Enter the field values as
61. 2 Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 Issue 1 A task based document that provides step by step procedures for administering the switch This book contains information previously found in DEFINITY ECS Administration and Feature Description 555 230 522 and DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Administrator s Guide 555 233 502 as well as new information for this release DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 Describes how to administer connections between DEFINITY ECS switches csi si and r models for DCS messaging The main focus is on TCP IP connectivity introduced with DEFINITY Releases 7 and 8 including voice over IP VOIP DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Change Description 555 233 411 Issue 1 Provides a high level overview of what is new in DEFINITY ECS R8 2 Describes the hardware and software enhancements and lists the problem corrections for this release It also includes any last minute changes that come in after the remaining books have gone to production DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 System Description 555 233 200 Issue 1 Provides hardware descriptions system parameters listing of hardware required to use features system configurations and environmental requirements Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 459 G References DEFINITY System s Little Instruction Book for basic administration 555 233 756 Issue
62. 2 048 Mbps 2 048 000 bits per second The European equivalent of the T 1 It can support 30 multiplexed 64 Kbps voice and data channels plus separate 64 Kbps channels for signalling and framing synchronization Also spelled E1 EIA See Electronics Industries Association EIA EIA 232 A physical interface specified by the EIA EIA 232 transmits and receives asynchronous data at speeds of up to 19 2 kbps over cable distances of up to 50 feet EIA 232 replaces RS 232 protocol in some DEFINITY applications electronic tandem network ETN A tandem tie trunk network that has automatic call routing capabilities based on the number dialed and the most preferred route available Each switch in the network is assigned a unique private network office code RNX and each voice terminal is assigned a unique extension Electronics Industries Association EIA A trade association of the electronics industry that establishes electrical and functional standards Ethernet A local area network LAN that works over short distances on twisted pairs or coaxial cables at speeds up to 10 mbps or 100 mbps One of the two LAN protocols MMCX supports See ATM LAN emulation LANE Ethernet Source Address A 48 bit physical address of the NIC also called the MAC address ETN Electronic tandem network 474 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 facility F Glossary facility A
63. 226 processor channels enable 72 per system 10 processor performance 412 proxy ARP 27 Q reference points 360 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR feature 367 interactions Basic Call Management System BCMS 380 Call Detail Recording CDR 380 Call Management System CMS 380 Call Vectoring 380 Data Call Setup 381 Data Privacy 381 Data Restriction 381 Malicious Call Trace MCT 381 QSIG Call Transfer 380 Recorded Announcement 381 trunk access codes TAC 381 Voice Terminal Display 381 QSIG Additional Network Feature Transit Counter ANF TC feature 361 381 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion feature interactions AAR and ARS 379 Alternate Facility Restriction Levels AFRL 379 Authorization Codes 379 Call Coverage 379 Call Detail Recording CDR 379 Call Forwarding 379 Distributed Communications System DCS 379 Facility Restriction Levels FRL and Traveling Class Marks TCM 379 QSIG Name and Number Identification 379 terminating call has coverage active 379 Transfer 379 498 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Call Transfer feature 362 interactions Call Forwarding 380 Distributed Communications System DCS 380 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 380 QSIG Name and Number Identification 380 QSIG Centralized AUDIX 364 what you get with QSIG Centralized AUDIX 365 QSIG feature call associated temporary signali
64. 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 131 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 1 Task Assign Signaling Group and administered NCA TSC This task assigns a signaling group and an administered NCA TSC for the ISDN connection to Switch 2 Steps gt Begin gt Open the Signaling Groups form enter ch sig n change signaling group next Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 1 Associated Signaling y Max number of NCA TSC 5_ Primary D Channel 01b0924 Max number of CA TSC 23 Trunk Group for NCA TSC 12 Trunk Group for Channel Selection 12 Supplementary Service Protocol a__ gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Associated Signaling Specifies Facility Associated Signaling FAS the D channel carries signaling only for the B channels on the same DS interface Primary D Channel Specifies D Channel signaling on port 24 of the DS1 circuit pack located at 01b09 Max number of NCA Maximum number of simultaneous non call associated TSC Temporary Signaling Connections The TSCs carry signaling for features not associated with a specific call for example signals to turn on Leave Word Calling Max number of CA Maximum number of simultaneous call associated TSC TSCs that can exist in the signaling group Typically this is the number of ISDN PRI trunk group members controlled by this signaling group Trunk Gr
65. 25 signaling For X 25 DCS signaling you administer the connection on the Data Module screen and the Processor Channel Assignment screen The type of data module is proc intf for an R7si or x 25 for an R7r Signaling via X 25 is not supported on the csi model Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 435 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration TCP IP signaling For TCP IP signaling you administer the connection on the Data Module screen and the Processor Channel Assignment screen The data module type is ppp for a point to point signaling connection or ethernet for signaling over an IP network In addition TCP IP signaling requires administration of the Node Names screen and in some cases the IP Routing screen Details of the administration procedures for signaling connections are given in Chapter 3 of this book DCS or Dedicated Trunks to Specific Locations Configurations IP Trunk Network Configuration DCS or dedicated DEFINITY Trunk Groups DEFINITY to specific locations Trk Grp 64 Switch B ports lines 4 5 6 extension range 4400 4499 and 4900 4999 a IP address 198 152 169 238 O anpr n Trk Grp 97 DEFINITY IP Cor ports lines 7 8 9 Trk Grp 31 pS Switch A ports lines 1 2 3 DEFINITY extension range 6500 6599 IP IP address 198 152 169 240 TRK Switch C
66. 64500 256 Link 1 Link 12 Link 21 Link 2 Link 1 hardware connections Processor Processor UN331B TN790B Network Processor bus 22L Processor DS1 Voice DSI TN767 control TN767 F 4357 TN767 TEE TN464 UN332B data 1464 TN794 i TDM bus 10BaseT 3 ethernet C LAN a Pktint C LAN b C LAN TN799 TN1655 TN799 e _ A TN799 Packet bus Packet bus Packet bus o o a z node 2 node 1a ppp node 1a node 1b node 1b eth node 3 D Ext 3020 Ext 2010 Ext 2013 Ext 2378 Ext 2377 Ext 3901 Z loc 1a0413 loc 1c0709 loc 1c0713 loc 1c0815 loc 1c0817 loc 1a0517 8 192 168 10 12 192 168 10 11 192 168 10 13 192 168 10 130 192 168 10 128 192 168 10 129 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 173 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch n
67. 7 7 3 ext n e AAR Analysis Table Dialed String Min Max Rte Pat Call Type Node Num 222 7 7 2 aar 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 330 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking e Signaling Group form signaling group 2 TSC Local Enabled Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext Ext PBX ID 1 4900 y permanent 5900 2 des 2 4901 y permanent 5901 gateway e Trunk Group form Group Grp Type Used for DCS Sig PBXID DCS Method 2 isdn pri y d chan 2 e Routing Pattern form Routing Trunk FRL Del TSC CA TSC Pattern Group Request 2 2 0 3 y at setup e Gateway Channel form Signaling Group TSC Processor Application Index Channel 2 2 57 audix e Processor Channel form Proc Application Inter Channel Remote PBX Channel Link Proc ID Channel 57 gateway 1 2 2 59 audix 1 1 1 1 Administration for switch 2 e Dial Plan form Start Dig Len Usage 4 4 ext 5 4 ext e Uniform Dial Plan form Ext Code Type Location Code 4Xxx UDPcode 221 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 331 Distributed Communications System 3 Node public private network with AUDIX B Private Networking e AAR Digit Conversion form Matching Min Max Del Replacemen Net Conv Pattern t String 222 7 7 3 ext n e AAR Analysis Table Dialed Min Max Rte Pat Call Type Node String Num 221 7 7 1 aar 1 e Signaling Group fo
68. 8122102 ITC Restricted TN 1 Establish Connection n Link 2_ DTE DCE dce Connected Data Module Enable Link n ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Physical Channel This must be the same as the link number ITC Enter restricted unrestricted is used only for wideband transmission Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8si not previously assigned on this switch Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command COS COR The values for these fields will be specified by the i system administrator TN DTE DCE The DTE DCE assignments must be opposites on the two ends of the connection Use dte for node 1 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 113 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Field Conditions Comments Enable Link Set to y after the processor channels have been assigned Maintenance Extension Specified on dial plan Destination Number TAC 812 extension 2102 of the data module on the far end that will establish the connection Establish Connection n means that the switch at the r
69. A circuit switched call at a data rate greater than 64 kbps A circuit switched call on a single T1 or El facility with a bandwidth between 128 and 1536 T1 or 1984 El kbps in multiples of 64 kbps HO H11 H12 and N x DSO calls are wideband Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 489 ZCS Glossary Z ZCS See Zero Code Suppression ZCS Zero Code Suppression ZCS ZCS line coding substitutes a 1 for the second least significant bit of every all zero byte in AMI encoded data see line coding ZCS encoding has no effect on voice communications but it corrupts digital data see restricted facilities In MMCX communications ZCS corrupts the ISDN D channel Administration for Network Connectivity 490 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 AAR and ARS features interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 Uniform Dial Plan UDP 354 AAR and ARS Partitioning feature interactions QSIG Message Waiting Indication 383 AAR digit analysis example 216 225 231 AAR ARS administration IP Trunk 424 Abbreviated Dialing AD feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 abstract syntax notation 1 ASN 1 369 additional network features ANF 369 administration centralized voice mail via mode code 397 H 323 Trunk task detail 38 QSIG 371 admi
70. BCC 2 Type ethernet Port 01c0817 Link 2 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command Network uses Leave the default y if the private network contains only 1 s for DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network broadcast includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of addresses forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 153 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on the Switch 1 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destinati
71. Bus Bridge 01a04 Inter Board Link Timeslots Pt0 6 Pt1 1 Pt2 1 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Packet Intf2 Enables the bus bridge Bus Bridge Location of the C LAN circuit pack If the system has two C LANs only one is administered for bus bridge Inter Board Specifies the bandwidth used on the 3 ports of the Inter Board Link Link The total number of timeslots assigned cannot exceed 11 Timeslots Pt0 carries PPP traffic and can have 1 9 timeslots Pt1 carries Pt0 Ptl Pt2 maintenance messages and can have 1 3 timeslots Pt2 carries broadcast messages and can have 1 3 timeslots gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 189 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 2 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX
72. CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 E C LAN Installation Install C LAN Cables Hub connection Install a cable from the backplane peripheral connector to a hub or wall field as required See the figure below 1 Connect the 259A connector to the backplane connector of the port slot containing the C LAN circuit pack 2 Connect the D8W cable between the 259A connector and a 10BaseT hub Figure 9 Cable Connection for C LAN 10BaseT Connectivity y cydflan2 EWS 101398 Figure Notes 1 259A Connector 2 D8W Cable max length 100m 3 10BaseT Hub or 110 purple wall field This connects port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack to the LAN Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 415 E C LAN Installation The following table shows the relationship between the backplane and the peripheral Amphenol pinouts and the RJ45 pinouts on the D8W cable for the C LAN circuit pack in any port slot Peripheral RJ45 Pin on Backplane Connector the 259A Pin 25 Pair Wire Color Lead Name Pin Connector 103 White Orange TD 27 1 003 Orange White TD 2 2 104 White Green RD 28 3 004 Green White RD 3 6 Wall field connection Instead of connecting a D8W cable to a hub you could connect a standard Amphenol cable between the peripheral connector and the wall field In this case you would need to reverse the transmit and receive pairs The transmit receive reversal is done
73. CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Type ATM The atm signaling group type is used for atm trunks Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 2 Group Type atm Max number of NCA TSC 0 Max number of CA TSC 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection Supplementary Service Protocol a CIRCUIT PARAMETERS Virtual Path Identifier 0 Virtual Channel Identifier Signaling Mode isdn pri Circuit Type T1 Idle Code 11111111 Connect network Interface Companding mulaw Country Protocol 1 Protocol Version a DCP Analog Bearer Capability 3 1kHz Internetworking Message PROGress Virtual Path Identifier This is a display only field Virtual Channel Identifier Valid entries Usage blank or 32 1023 Signaling Mode This is a display only field Idle Code Valid entries Usage An 8 digit binary number default is 11111111 Interface Companding Valid entries Usage mulaw or alaw Use mulaw in the U S Canada and Japan Use alaw elsewhere Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 289 Networking Screens Country Protocol Valid entries 1 25 or etsi A Screens Reference Usage Use 1 for the U S Protocol version Valid entries Usage a b orc Circuit Type Valid entries Usage T1 or El Use T1 for U S and Japan Use El elsewhere Connect Valid ent
74. Capacities and Resource Requirements The following table gives capacity limits for IP connections for DEFINITY ECS and the IP Interface circuit packs For DEFINITY Number of network regions Number of C LAN circuit packs Number of MedPro circuit packs Number of simultaneous TCP UDP connections per C LAN Number of audio streams per TN802B IA IA IA IA lA Capacity Limits 10 10 46 for the r 13 for the si and csi 508 22 using G 723 1 or G 729A codecs 31 using G 711 codec Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 407 D Capacities and Performance The following table gives the number of sockets connections needed for IP softphones and H 323 trunks For C LAN Number of Sockets Required Number of sockets per 3 1 DCP 2 H 323 road warrior application The H 323 sockets are held up 2 1 DCP 1 H 323 with tunneling while registered if the endpoint is administered as a Permanent user or while the call is active if administered as an As Needed user Number of sockets per 1 while registered telecommuter application Number of sockets per Native 1 per call with tunneling Mode station 2 per call without tunneling Number of sockets per H 323 Tie sharing amp tunneling 1 sig grp default trunk A E E sharing no tunneling 1 sig grp 1 call signaling groups are shared by trunks no sharing tunneling 1 call D no sh
75. Centre CMS Software Installation and Setup 585 215 866 58 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Overview 3 C LAN Administration Intuity AUDIX LAN Setup Summary The following list summarizes the steps for setting up an Intuity AUDIX on a LAN 1 2 Assign node name and IP address Assign UNIX machine name IP address configure LAN card Networking Administration TCP IP Administration Assign country and switch type Switch Interface Administration Switch Selection Assign extension length Host Switch Number switch node from dial plan Audix Number Switch Number IP address of the switch and TCP Port Switch Interface Administration Call Data Interface Administration Switch Link Administration Reboot the Intuity AUDIX Customer Services Administration System management System Control Shutdown System Set up the DCS Network Time Zones Audix Administration change switch time zone CMS LAN Setup Summary The following list summarizes the steps for setting up a CMS server ml Nn OO BB OO ND Edit the etc hosts file to add switch names and IP addresses Set up a second NIC Add a default router Set up the local remote port Choose between x 25 and TCP IP signaling For X 25 define which physical port is used on CMS For TCP IP assign the switch host name or IP address and TCP port number Administration for
76. CentreVu IP Agent is a variation of the telecommuter application Telecommuter The telecommuter application uses two connections to the DEFINITY system a application connection to the PC over the IP network and a connection to the telephone over the PSTN The user places and receives calls with the DEFINITY IP Softphone interface running on a PC and uses the telephone handset to speak and listen To administer a telecommuter application you must complete these steps 1 Verify that the DEFINITY system is enabled for IP Softphone use On the System Parameters Customer Options screen verify that Maximum H 323 Stations is gt 0 Maximum IP Softphones is gt 0 IP Stations is y 2 Add a DCP station or change an existing DCP station using the Station screen Type enter the phone model you wish to use such as 6408D Port X if virtual or the port number of an existing phone Security Code enter the user s password IP Softphone y Go to page 2 Service Link Mode as needed 3 Install the IP Softphone software on the user s PC Road warrior The road warrior application uses two separate software applications running on a PC application that is connected to a DEFINITY system over an IP network The single network connection carries two channels one for call control signaling and one for voice DEFINITY IP Softphone software handles the call signaling and an H 323 V2 compliant audio application such as Microsoft
77. Console Parameters Branch Tie trunk group Branch All Detailed description Inter PBX Attendant Service calls are incoming tie trunk calls from a branch location to the main location attendant group If no attendant in the group is immediately available the calls are queued When an attendant becomes available the call routes to that attendant Extended calls are treated as incoming calls to the main location DEFINITY ECS can be a branch or main location Users at each branch can access other branch locations through the main location A branch can have local attendants Users access these local attendants normally Interactions e Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access If a call at a branch attempts to access a controlled trunk group the call routes to a branch attendant if there is one If there is no branch attendant the call routes to the attendant group at the main location e Attendant Display and DCS Attendant Display In a DCS environment an incoming call from a branch displays at the attendant console at the main location as a local call In a non DCS environment an incoming call displays at the attendant console at the main location as an incoming tie trunk call e Attendant Recall If an attendant at the main location holds a call the calling parties at the branch cannot recall the attendant e Call Coverage A call redirected to a coverage path with the attendant group as a coverage point skips that coverag
78. Hundreds Select buttons are assigned for Loudspeaker Paging Access zones Trunk Group Busy Indicators provide a visual indication of the busy or idle status of the zones at the remote location as well as at the local node Example DCS configurations 2 Node private network with AUDIX The following two examples provide details for setting up two basic DCS networks The first is a two node network and the second is a three node network These examples use BX 25 and D Channel signaling connections For examples of TCP IP signaling for DCS see Chapters 2 and 3 in this book Figure 5 shows a 2 node DCS AUDIX D channel network In this configuration DCS feature transparency is achieved exclusively through the exchange of user to user information on the D channel using one of the three methods discussed earlier MA UUI CA TSCs or NCA TSCs Although NCA TSCs are nothing more than virtual connections on the D channel they are shown as independent entities in the diagram for the purposes of clarity Administered TSC 2 1 that is the first Administered NCA TSC of signaling group 2 of Switch A is connected to TSC 4 1 of Switch B This virtual connection is used in the exchange of user to user information for DCS features not associated with any current B channel connection Notice that for AUDIX a BX 25 data link is no longer required between the host switch and the remote switch es AUDIX messages between the AUDIX and the remote switch will use
79. IP connections only This must match the link number assigned on the x 25 data module screen The interface channel number must be in the range 1 64 for an X 25 link Used for TCP IP connections only Used for TCP IP connections only For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Leave blank for gtwy tcp ethernet connection to Switch 3 Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 1 is the server for this session Set node 3 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen 2of4 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Field Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique
80. Location Code Node Number Specify the type of treatment for the extension That is specify whether the extension should receive intercept treatment be converted to AAR or be converted via ENP The difference between AAR Location Codes and UDP Location Codes is that 7 digit AAR Numbers created from AAR Location Codes may be changed during AAR analysis by AAR digit conversion before being routed Seven digit AAR Numbers created from UDP Location Codes are not subject to digit conversion before being routed with AAR digit analysis When an extension code that is displayed on the UDP screen is not administrable because it conflicts with the translations in the first and or second digit tables then the type field for that extension code displays NotInDP Valid entries Usage AARCode ENPNode Local TempOOS The entry TempOOS indicates an extension is temporarily out of service Calls to these extensions receive reorder UDPCode blank A blank entry indicates this Ext code is not administered If no matching code can be found then the call receives intercept treatment Specify the 3 digit location code for Ext Codes administered with a type of AARCode or UDPCode This field displays if AARCode or UDPCode is entered as the type Specify the node number for Ext Codes administered with a type of ENPNode This field pops up if ENPNode is entered as the type Note Note This node number must not be the same as the local node number on
81. Mask Gateway Addr Rgn y C LAN 01A10 TN799 B clan al 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 1 y MEDPRO 01A13 TN802 B med al 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 1 y MEDPRO 01A16 TN802 B med a2 255 255 255 0 192 168 20 100 1 y C LAN 01A09 TN799 B clan a2 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 2 y MEDPRO 01B13 TN802 B med a3 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 2 y C LAN 01A09 TN799 B clan b2 255 255 255 0 192 168 20 100 2 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 Inter region IP Specifies whether or not IP endpoints registered in one region can use media connectivity allowed processing resources MedPro in another region Valid Values Usage y n Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use MedPro resources administered in regions that are different from the endpoints regions The MedPro and C LAN boards are assigned to the regions specified in the Net Rgn field Endpoints are assigned to the same region as the C LAN boards they use The DEFINITY system first allocates MedPro resources that are assigned to the same regions as the endpoints If demand for MedPro resources exceeds supply within the local region available MedPro resources from other regions are used if this field is set to y or call blockage occurs if this field is set to n Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 247 Networking Screens Enable Eth Pt A Screens Reference Used to enable or disable the C LAN or Med
82. Name Slip Type 01C17 D UDS1 BD 01C18 Y TBRI BD NOTE TN722B amp TN464B DS1 sources result in stratum 4 type II synchronization Stratum Enter the stratum level to be used for synchronization Valid entries Usage 3 4 Stratum 3 capability is only possible when using a TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack Port Network Only displays when the Stratum field is 3 Valid entries Usage Display only field Administration for Network Connectivity 304 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Primary Enter the 5 character circuit pack location number for the circuit pack that will function as the primary synchronization source The clock circuit pack s internal source is the implicit last choice Only one switch in the network can function as the primary synchronization source Only displays when the Stratum field is 4 The Primary and Secondary synchronization sources DS1 or BRI trunk facilities must be on the same Port Cabinet that is PPN EPN1 or EPN3 Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 G3r First and second characters are the cabinet number 01 through 03 G3si A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number blank A blank entry means no external source Secondary The system will select automatically the secondary circuit pack if
83. Node Name C LAN 01a05 TN799 B node 3 555K n Net Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 128 _1 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 gt Enter values Field Inter region IP connectivity allowed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node name Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use MedPro resources administered in regions that are different from the endpoints regions The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Enter c lan or medpro Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 165 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this exa
84. Node Names screen For ppp connections 1t must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen A value of 0 allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 14 Gateway between Switch 2 and Switch 3 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Set to y Set to gateway for conversion between ISDN and TCP IP Node 1 is the server for this session Set node 3 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three value
85. PBXs that support the D channel signaling feature and those that do not support this feature The switch providing this interface is known as the ISDN DCS Gateway node and provides backward compatibility to existing traditional DCS networks It maintains a mapping between processor channels and Administered NCA TSCs When a DCS D channel message arrives on an Administered NCA TSC acting as a gateway it is converted to a traditional DCS message and sent out through the processor channel that has been administered to map to this Administered NCA TSC Likewise when a traditional DCS message arrives at the gateway node on a processor channel acting as a gateway it is converted to a DCS D channel message and sent out through the Administered NCA TSC that has been associated with this processor channel on the ISDN Gateway Channel form In summary a gateway is required whenever a transition is being made from BX 25 signaling to D channel signaling When the transition takes place at a switch that sits between that part of the network that supports D channel DCS and that part that does not that switch is an ISDN DCS Gateway A DCS network consisting entirely of switches that support D channel DCS never requires an ISDN DCS Gateway because none of the switches require translation to from BX 25 DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel DCS enhances DCS by allowing access to the public network for DCS connectivity between DCS swi
86. Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 5803 Name _ppp on link 1 to node 3 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01b1115 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 792801 Node Name node 3 CHAP n This data module is assigned the extension 5803 you can assign any unused extension in the dial plan gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01b11 the ppp connection is through port 15 Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8si not previously assigned on this switch Enable If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway Link this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 127 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi Field BCC COS COR TN Node Name Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP End 3 C LAN Admi
87. QSIG SS CC has the following major options that are negotiated between the Originating and the Terminating PBX 1 Path reservation there are two methods of establishing the CC call a path reservation method b non reservation method 2 Retention of signaling connection there are two ways in which SS CC uses call independent signaling connections a connection retention method b connection release method 3 Service retention there are two possible behaviors when User B is found to be busy again after User A responds to SS CC Recall a service retention method b service cancellation method As an originating PBX for QSIG SS CC DEFINITY ECS will select the following major options e non reservation method for the Path Retention option e connection release method for the Retention of Signaling connection option e service cancellation method for the Service Retention option As a Terminating PBX for QSIG SS CC DEFINITY ECS will select the following major options e non reservation method for the Path Retention option e either the connection release method or the connection retention method for the Retention of Signaling connection option depending on which the originating PBX requests e service cancellation method for the Service Retention option QSIG allows users on a remote node to cover to an AUDIX on another node The original calling and called party information is provided to AUDIX so that each is identified properly dur
88. Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch For Processor Channel 23 connection to Switch 3 through Switch 1 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 2 is the client for this session Set node 3 to Server s Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 2 data module screen Interface Chan A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O Destination Node Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen Destination Port This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen Session Local For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the Session Remote remote switch and vice versa Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 194 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 T
89. Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch For Processor Channel 32 connection to Switch 2 through Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the server Set node 2 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen This must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channels screen Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen or TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen For each connection the Local Session number on this switch Session must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch Remote and vice versa Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen E
90. String String 4 None 04 198 152 169 240 Switch A 3 None 05 198 152 169 240 Switch A 6 None 06 198 152 169 240 Switch A 7 None 07 198 152 169 236 Switch C 8 None 08 198 152 169 236 Switch C 9 None 09 198 152 169 236 Switch C On Switch C Line Search Replace IP Address String String 1 None 01 198 152 169 240 Switch A 2 None 02 198 152 169 240 Switch A 3 None 03 198 152 169 240 Switch A 7 None 07 198 152 169 238 Switch B 8 None 08 198 152 169 238 Switch B 9 None 09 198 152 169 238 Switch B These entries allow a specific line port on the IP Trunk server to carry calls to a specific other location No digits are searched for as we already know that the DEFINITY has done the appropriate digit analysis A unique string is applied in front of each dialed string by adding a replace string each replace string is unique to that line port allowing for the terminating end to associate a call to the same line it left on at the originating end Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 437 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration On Switch A Line Search Replace String String 1 01 None From Switch C 2 02 None From Switch C 3 03 None From Switch C 4 04 None From Switch B 5 05 None From Switch B 6 06 None From Switch B On Switch B Line Search Replace String String 7 07 None From Switch C 8 08 None From Switch C 9 09 None
91. System B Private Networking Example of how UDP works UDP conversion is specified for individual extensions or groups of extensions sharing the same leading digits via the UDP form and extension codes An extension code is the desired leading digits of an extension followed by an x wildcard For example 123xx 12345 is the extension code for all 100 possible extensions beginning with 123 plus two wild cards 12345 is an extension code specifying one extension Each extension code can be assigned to 1 of 6 possible treatments e UDPCode Conversion to AAR with given location code further conversion suppressed e AARCode Conversion to AAR with given location code further conversion allowed e ENPCode Conversion to private network number via ENP form route to given node number routing e TempOOS Temporarily out of service give reorder e Local Local range of extensions e blank Similar to local however this extension is not chosen when the system is asked to add a station When a user at a switch that is included in a UDP dials an extension DEFINITY ECS first checks to see if the extension is assigned to a local station on that switch If so the call is routed to the station and UDP is not invoked If the extension is not found locally the system checks to see if the extension matches an assigned extension code If the extension matches an assigned extension code the sys
92. The only connection to this IP interface is node 3 on Switch 3 which is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 2 of 2 178 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module on Switch 1 for the ethernet connection The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 2377 Name ethernet on link 2 BCC 2 Type ethernet Port 01c0817 Link 2 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN b circuit pack Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Name Information only appears in lis
93. Type Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination Comm Type avd Auth Code n Trunk Flash n BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5 Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec 500 Digit Treatment Digits Sig Bit Inversion none Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Receive Answer Supervision y Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 223 Switch Node 2 Administration Group 12 Page 2 display trunk group 12 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Connected to CO Group 12 member assignments GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port 01a1001 01a1002 01a1003 TN767 E TN767 E TN767 E Uniform Dialing Paln Code Sfx Name 4 Networking Example Page 2 of 10 Measured none Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Glare Handling none y PBX ID 1 n When Maintenance Busy neither end Maintenance Tests y no Per Call CPN Blocking Code n Per Call CPN Unblocking Code TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 Total Administered Members 3 Night Mode Type Ans Delay Pa
94. a DCS network DCS signaling data is also required The DCS signaling data is sent over a separate path from the voice and call signaling data Call signaling data The call signaling data includes messages necessary to set up the call connection maintain the connection during the call and remove the connection when the call is finished DCS signaling data The DCS signaling data is separate from the call signaling data How it gets transmitted depends on the connection type which determines the type of signaling protocol used Figure 1 shows some of the major components of switch connections Before R7 a call from switch to switch 2 which consists of voice and signaling data is sent through a trunk circuit pack across a TDM transmission facility to a trunk circuit pack in switch 2 Releases 7 and later add alternate pathways for the call data In R8 and later releases Q 931 signaling is used which enables support for DCS and QSIG The C LAN circuit pack enables signaling data to be packetized and sent over a LAN WAN or the Internet The IP Interface TN802B circuit pack enables voice data and non DCS signaling data to be sent over IP facilities Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 3 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview Figure 1 Components of Switch Connectivity Processor DEFINITY DEFINITY Switch 1 Voice Data Switch 2 PGate r
95. administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0_ 0_ 0_ 0 o node 1 192 168 10 1 node 3 192 168 10 3 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 101 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign pdm Data Module This task administers a pdm data module for the connection between the PGATE board and the DS1 board for the connection to node 2 The data module associates a link number with a port address and extension number for the PGATE port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open the Data Module form enter a da n add data module next Data Extension Type Port ITC ABBREVIATED DIALING List1 SPECIAL DIALING OPTI ASSIGNED MEMBER Statio
96. al TN802 B medpro a2 TN799 B clan a2 TN802 B medpro a3 TN802 B medpro bl Page 1 of 2 n Net Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 20 100 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 20 100 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 100 2 255 255 255 0 gt Enter values Field Inter region IP connectivity allowed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node name Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use MedPro resources administered in regions that are different from the endpoints regions The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Enter c lan or medpro Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name entered here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 40 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Field Conditions Comments Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface Th
97. an interface to a communications device 2 A switch or adjunct in a Lucent DCS network Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS A method that allows multiple T1 and or El facilities to share a single D channel to form an ISDN PRLI If D channel backup is not used one facility is configured with a D channel and the other facilities that share the D channel are configured without D channels If D channel backup is used two facilities are configured to have D channels one D channel on each facility and the other facilities that share the D channels are configured without D channels NTSC See National Television Standards Committee NTSC standard Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 481 Open System Interconnect OSI Model Glossary O Open System Interconnect OSI Model An International Standards Organization ISO interoperability specification OSI defines standard services that compliant communications networks and equipment must provide rather than specific implementations It divides network operations into 7 steps called layers and arranges them hierarchically in a protocol stack The rules protocols in each layer of the stack specify a service that other parts of a communications system can always get as long as they make their requests in a standard way This approach leaves designers free to implement the internal details of the service in whatever way seem
98. and administer the trunk for Call Independent Signalling Connections Transfer into Voice Mail In addition to the Basic QSIG Supplementary Services administration described above complete the following administration e On the System Parameters Customer Options screen page 6 the Transfer Into Lucent QSIG Voice Mail field must be set to y e On the Feature Access Code FAC screen page 3 assign a Feature Access Code in the Transfer to Voice Mail Access Code field This field is called Transfer to AUDIX Access Code in pre R8 systems e A hunt group must be in the coverage path of the user s mailbox to be transferred into as administered on the Station and Coverage Path screens On the hunt group screen page 2 for this hunt group qsig mwi must be entered in the Message Center field and the number for the voice mail system must be entered in the Voice Mail Number field Steps Begin 1 Enable QSIG Supplementary Services with Rerouting on the System Parameters Customer Options screen page 6 as described above 2 On the System Parameters Customer Options screen page 6 enter y in the Centralized Attendant field 3 On the Console Parameters screen enter QSIG main or QSIG branch in the CAS field a If QSIG branch is entered in the CAS field then enter a number for QSIG CAS Number b If QSIG branch is entered in the CAS field then the field AAR ARS Access Code is optional 4 Administer the QSIG ISDN trunk gr
99. and turns on that subscriber s message waiting indicator Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 357 ISDN Feature Plus B Private Networking e Feature Plus Forwarding Diversion Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP If the public network supports CLIP and the forwarded to user has subscribed to the service then calling party information is available to the forwarded to user s display Connection Line Identification Presentation COLP If the public network supports COLP and the calling user has subscribed to the service then forwarded to party information is available to the calling user s display Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX relies upon Feature Plus Diversion Invoke Feature Plus Diversion first to enable the Centralized AUDIX feature Call Coverage e Terminating call has coverage active If a call is forwarded off switch and the terminating switch has call coverage activated and the criteria is met the call will not go to the forwarding coverage path It goes to the terminating coverage path e Forwarding and Coverage If the last coverage point in the coverage path is a number that routes over an ISDN SSF trunk no Feature Plus Diversion information passes to the coverage PBX Automatic Callback If automatic callback was activated before the called voice terminal user activated Call Forwarding over an I
100. are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 20f3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 81 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID gt Submit the screen End Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID This is the Local Node Number on the dial plan of t
101. automatically by a hub Other Hardware Upgrades Upgrades to DEFINITY ECS Release 7 require new processor circuit packs for the csi and si models TN798B and TN790B respectively and the NetPkt TN794 circuit pack for the si model For the si model upgrading to R7 the NETCON TN777 and the PACCON TN778 circuit packs must be removed and the NetPkt circuit pack assembly must be installed The NetPkt circuit pack is attached to a TN2400 circuit pack as a double circuit pack assembly that is inserted in the NetCon PacCon slots The connections built into this assembly provide the necessary jumpers between the NETCON and PACCON slots Refer to the appropriate upgrades document for the procedures to install these circuit packs and upgrade the software 416 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 F IP Trunk Installation and Administration This appendix describes the procedures for installing and administering IP Trunk connections using the TN802 IP Interface circuit pack or the TN802B IP Interface set for IP Trunk mode This appendix does not cover the TN802B IP Interface set for medpro mode for H 323 trunks this material is covered in Chapter 2 DEFINITY ECS with Internet Protocol IP Trunk allows you to route voice and fax calls over IP networks to other DEFINITY ECSs that also have this feature or to other PBXs Lucent or non Lucent equipped with the Internet Telephony S
102. be dialed again Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 353 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Interactions If AAR is active FRLs and Traveling Class Marks TCMs can be sent along with the private network number UDPCode and AARCode conversions use the FRL assigned to the caller ENPNode conversion always raises the FRL to the maximum 7 If an FRL is insufficient to access the facility access is denied There is no prompt for an authorization code even if authorization codes are enabled and administered If AAR is not active tandem tie trunks should not be used to transport UDP numbers The TCM is not recognized at the terminating switch Note Never use tandem tie trunks to transport UDP numbers the TCM and Hop count will not be recognized as such following the extension received at the receiving switch Automatic Alternate Routing AAR routes UDP calls Included with UDP is the required AAR subset If AAR is enabled in addition to UDP then the 7 digit AAR number provides the same routing as UDP Dial Plan All of the extension numbers on a switch are not necessarily part of UDP Any that do not belong to UDP are handled by a regular non UDP Dial Plan associated with the switch When administering the Dial Plan form and designating a group of extensions as UDP non local you can specify whether you want to search for local extensions fi
103. binary form of a broadcast address is most commonly formed by combining the sub network portion with all 1 s for the host portion of the address However some non DEFINITY older systems form broadcast addresses using 0 s instead of 1 s in the host portion These systems usually recognize a received broadcast message as such only if the message address is formed using the 0 s method For a broadcast message received the C LAN board recognizes either form as a broadcast address and therefore accepts looks at the message For a broadcast message sent the C LAN board uses the 1 s method if this field is set to y and uses the 0 s method if this field is set ton If one or more nodes in the network is a non DEFINITY switch that uses the 0 s method then every DEFINITY switch in the network that wishes to broadcast to these 0 s method switches must set this field to n Administration for Network Connectivity 262 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Data Module Type ppp Use the ppp data module for direct point to point TCP IP connections between DCS nodes This data module associates a link number and destination node with the port address and node name for the local node The fields on this form can be changed only when the corresponding port on the C LAN circuit pack has been busied out add data module next Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension
104. call The Attendant Alerting Timed Reminder starts when a call reaches the Attendant No Answer Timeout maximum value Transfer Out of AUDIX by Dialing 0 Attendant seeking calls that transfer out of AUDIX by dialing 0 whose host switch is a branch PBX are sent to the QSIG CAS attendant on the main PBX whenever the dial 0 out of AUDIX destination corresponds to the attendant group 394 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code B Private Networking Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code You can use a single voice mail system to support multiple DEFINITY and Merlin Legend Magix systems in a network via mode code This capability is available for DEFINITY ECS R8 Prologix R3 BCS Issue 6 Merlin Legend R6 1 Merlin Magix 1 0 Note DEFINITY One and Guestworks are not supported Voice mail systems that support these connections are Intuity AUDIX R4 4 or higher running on a MAPS with up to 18 ports Octel 100 with up to 16 ports Configuration requirements Centralized voice mail via mode code requires the following A DEFINITY ECS switch as the hub of the voice mail network with the voice mail system directly connected to it Direct ISDN PRI tandem trunk connections using DS1 service between the DEFINITY ECS hub and the switches the voice mail supports The system uses the D channel to transmit mode code signals to light message waiting
105. call covers from the branch to the main over a QSIG VALU trunk then QSIG VALU Call Coverage procedures apply Call forwarding Forwarding calls to the QSIG CAS number is allowed Call park If a call is parked and the Call Park Timeout Interval as set on the Feature Related System Parameters screen expires the call is sent to the attendant This works the same as for RLT CAS Call Detail Recording CDR CDR functions with QSIG CAS as for RLT CAS Call Record Handling Option Calls are sent to the attendant as non CDR calls if the following conditions all hold the call is subject to CDR and the CDR buffer is full and the attendant is administered as the Call Record Handling Option on the CDR system parameters form CDR Reports The format of the CDR data report is an administrable option on the CDR systems parameters form Customers can select from a list of pre defined formats or create their own The content of the CDR records is unchanged by QSIG CAS CDR records generated at the main are covered by existing procedures Calls incoming to the attendant look like incoming trunk calls Calls originated or extended by the attendant look like outgoing calls CAS Back Up Extension The CAS Back Up Extension is used in an RLT CAS environment but has no benefit in QSIG CAS 390 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking Conference I
106. capacities and how to estimate C LAN and voice processing resources Chapter 3 C LAN Administration Gives detailed procedures for six basic network configurations using C LAN IP connections NM Nel Appendix E C LAN Installation Installation procedures for the C LAN circuit pack Appendix F IP Trunk Installation amp Admin Installation and initial administration for IP Trunk Chapter 4 Network Example Shows administration screens for setting up a complex network Appendix G Document Reference The DEFINITY documentation library Appendix A Screens Reference Field descriptions for network related administration screens Glossary ppendix B Private Networking DCS features and QSIG Index xiv Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Terminology Terminology Preface The terms form screen and node are used in this book with somewhat different meanings than in previous documents The usage of the terms MedPro and IP Interface in this book deserve an explanation Screen Node IP Interface and MedPro The term screen is used in this book to mean what used to be called form the set of switch administration interface pictures that contain the fields that hold the switch translations values For example the Data Module screen Each screen c
107. channels channels Grp Index Extn Grp Index Extn N1 11 11 11 1 1 1901 1 3901 N3 N3 12 12 y N2 N3 1902 2 3902 N2 N4 13 13 1 N3 N4 1903 3 3903 N4 59 2 r 1904 4 3904 Int DEFINITY DEFINITY Processor I L L L I L i ECS R6si 1 channels ECS R 8si I i 11 N2 Node 4 a ny C LAN 13 laa eens interface 14 channels C LAN 15 5003 PH interface 16 6004 E channels 10BaseT 1 6005 Hu 5001 hub 5002 1 6021 6031 DEFINITY f Ethernet CMS ECS R8csi r os DEFINITY i y ISDN X 25 Gateway ECS R8r gateway Router ISDN IP Gateway X 25 IP Gateway cydfec8b KLC 101999 Administration for Network Connectivity 206 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Network Map Network Map 4 Networking Example The network map shows the RNX trunk group hunt group numbers data module type and extension for each Switch Node in the network For TCP IP connections the node name and IP address is shown for each node Node 2
108. cos 1 Remote Loop Around Test n Port COR 1 Secondary data module n ITC restricted __ TN 1 Connected to dte ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name 1 1002 27 character station name Common Fields See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Secondary data module Specifies whether this PDM is the primary or secondary data module Valid Value Usage y n Enter y if this PDM is the secondary data module used for Dual I channel AUDIX networking Enter n if this is the primary PDM or if this data module is not used for AUDIX networking The primary data module must be administered before the secondary data module may be added If Port is X this field must be set to n Administration for Network Connectivity 272 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Communication Interface Processor Channel PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 00000000000000o0o0Oo Proc Chan Displays the BX 25 virtual channel number or the TCP IP listen port channel to carry this processor virtual channel Valid entries
109. dd le o a 356 Differences in Inserted Digits field o o eee ee 356 NTSTTOJATION e os fk a a RR OE a ee A 357 Mer OS voice ui rie Mbs Gh Backes aca ele de dades ae HS eh ke a Da dio 357 vi Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Contents OSI rs end ta tad pana dda e and Ged death aa agai gol hadith oat 360 QSIG Basic Call Setup s e s so s auts iaa AA 361 QSIG Basic Supplementary Services o a oaa a a 361 QSIG Centralized Attendant Services aooaa a a 366 QSIG Supplementary Services with Rerouting a oa ao a 00200004 367 QSIG Transfer into Lucent QSIG Voice Mail oaoa a 368 QSIG Value Added Lucent VALO o a 368 QSIG Protocols ar ua ds SOAS OS SESE Se EOE HEHE ds ds 369 Temporary Signaling Connection TSCs a a aoa a a ee ee 369 Setting UP OQSIG sax oka a a aa a wave aa bas A a a A OB 371 OSIGiNteractOnss sonca sere e de hoe weds ake Ba eka a 379 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code 0 00 cece cette eee 395 Configuration requirements o 395 Peature SUPPO acti ost ee A A Peg oR ae e a iai a 396 Setting Up Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code 397 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols 000 ccc eee eee eee 400 OVENIEW ceo rara a as a a dee ae aa dee aOR A 400 TTC Basic Call Setup with Number Identification Supplementary Service
110. dedicated in a DEFINITY trunk group to a particular location Any digits received on these lines will always be routed to the same location The only requirement is to prepend digits in the replace digits field to ensure that a call placed on a line port at the originating end can be terminated on the same line at the destination end The digits prepended at the originating end and searched for at the terminating end must be the same Note Any digits searched for must also be replaced if they are used to complete 10 11 the routing of a call If digit substitution will be needed it may be necessary to put a digit string in the Search Digits field and substitute those with new digits in the Replace Digits field For Entry Type enter accept to allow incoming calls In the Search Digits field type the digits entered in the Originating Search string box for this site in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or follow the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites In the Replace Digits field type the digits entered in the Originating Replace string box for this site in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or follow the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites In the Destination Type field select the appropriate value for the remote switch Select ITS R1 2 if the other switch uses IP Trunk 428 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk
111. detailed field descriptions for a selection of DEFINITY administration screens forms The screen descriptions are divided into two groups a Networking Screens which are needed for network administration and are used in other chapters of this document and b Other Network related Screens which are related to network administration but not referred to elsewhere in this document Field descriptions for other DEFINITY screens can be found in the Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 Networking Screens Node Names page 245 IP Interfaces page 247 IP Routing page 251 IP Media Parameters page 255 Data Modules page 256 ethernet page 262 Ppp page 263 proc intf page 266 X 25 page 269 pdm page 272 Processor Channel Assignment page 273 Circuit Packs page 277 Signaling Group and Administered NCA TSC Assignment page 280 ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments page 291 Note All Trunk Group screens are described in DEFINITY ECS R8 Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 243 A Screens Reference Other Network Related DEFINITY Screens Communication Interface Links page 293 Data Modules netcon analog dm page 295 Extended Trunk Access ETA Call Screening page 298 Extension Number Portability Numbering Plan page 299 Hop Channel Assignments page 300 Node Number Routing page 302 Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefi
112. divert or forward calls unconditionally upon busy or no reply to another extension including forwarding voice mail e Calling Number ID You can display the calling party s number to the called party during alerting and after answer e Calling Name You can assign the Calling Name Feature Plus identifier with a maximum size of 15 bytes or the maximum network subaddress size whichever is lower e Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP You can assign display forwarded to party information to the calling user s display e Call Transfer Basic You can assign transfer calls between parties across the public network is supported Display updates at the time of transfer or upon completion of transfer however are not supported e Served User PBX for Centralized AUDIX Determines where to send messages destined for the AUDIX hunt group e Message Waiting Indication You can assign display a message waiting indication on a user s voice terminal Differences in Inserted Digits field There is a difference in how the Inserted Digits to form Complete Number field on the Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes form is used for QSIG and Feature Plus This difference is due to the difference in how the Feature Plus and QSIG TSC platforms operate For Feature Plus the Feature Plus extension must be included in the Inserted Digits to form Complete Number field while for QSIG only the higher or
113. do not need to power down the cabinet to install a C LAN circuit pack Administer the C LAN For the csi model only complete the following steps to administer the Bus Bridge for Bus Bridge for csi the new C LAN circuit pack models Note If there are 2 C LAN circuit packs installed in this csi switch administer the Bus Bridge for only one of them 1 Enter change system parameters maintenance 2 At the bottom of Page 2 enter y in the Packet Intf2 field 3 Enter the location of the C LAN circuit pack in the Bus Bridge field for example 01a08 for cabinet 1 carrier A and slot 8 4 Enter the port bandwidths or use the defaults in the Pt0 Pt1 and Pt2 Inter Board Link Timeslots fields 5 Submit the form 6 Verify that the bus bridge LED is lit on the C LAN circuit pack This indicates that the packet bus is enabled Test the Packet Bus To test the packet bus and the TN799 C LAN circuit pack the cabinet needs a oo Circuit TN771D Maintenance Test circuit pack 1 If there is no TN771D circuit pack in the cabinet place one in a port slot 2 Enter test pkt port network 1 long For more information about these tests refer to the test pkt command section in the maintenance book 3 If the TN771D circuit pack was already in the cabinet leave it there 4 If you added the TN771D circuit pack to the cabinet in order to test the TN799 circuit pack remove it from the cabinet Administration for Network Connectivity 414
114. entries Country different entries Country different values code values code area code area code Originating Originating Search string 1AX 1AX 1AX Search string 2AX 2AX 2AX Replace string 1AX 1AX 1AX Replace string 2AX 2AX 2AX IP Address 2G 2G 2G IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Terminating Search string 2AX 2AX 2AX Search string 1AX 1CX 1CX Replace string 1F1AX 1F1AX 1F1AX Replace string 2F2AX 2F2AX 2F2AX SI99YS4A10M YUNAL dl IP Trunk Worksheets Administration for Network Connectivity 458 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 G References This Appendix lists the complete set of current DEFINITY ECS user documentation and selected related documents This appendix contains a list of user documents for the DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server ECS Release 8 2 Most of these documents are backward compatible with DEFINITY ECS Release 7 systems To order these or other DEFINITY documents contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center at the address and phone number on the back of the title page of this document A complete catalog of Business Communications Systems BCS documents is available on the World Wide Web http www lucent com enterprise documentation Basic DEFINITY ECS documents Administration These documents are issued for all new and upgrade DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 systems The primary audience for these documents consists of customer administrators DEFINITY ECS Release 8
115. for the trunk groups Calls to an extension on one system are covered by extensions on remote systems that are administered as coverage points Figure 4 shows an example of DCS Call Coverage Figure 4 DCS Call Coverage oo PON oa Lr PEEL EEE rr o gt He DOTA TTT TT sys_a8 CJL 081596 Station A 7 PGATE or PI Board System A DEFINITY ECS 8 X 25 or ISDN PRI DCS Signaling DCS Tie Trunk Groups Link System B DEFINITY ECS 9 Hop or ISDN TSC Gateway Station C 10 Station D Station B 11 AUDIX Voice Lines 12 AUDIX x34000 In Figure 4 calls to Station A can be covered first by Station B then by Station C or D and finally by the AUDIX on system A Alternatively calls could be covered by Station C then Station B then Station D and so on If the called party answers after the call goes to coverage and the coverage point has answered then the called party calling party and coverage point are all conferenced together If the called party answers and the coverage point has not answered the call to the coverage point drops and the called party connects to the calling party Exceptions to DCS Call Coverage DCS Call Coverage is similar to Call Coverage with the following exceptions Coverage Answer Groups across nodes are not supported Under the following error conditions a call follows the coverage point s coverage path Administration for Network Con
116. from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names screen enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 of the screen change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default OR Ol OO node 1 192 168 10 31 node 2 192 168 10 32 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes e C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 e C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End 62 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 2 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 1 for the ppp connection to Switch 2 The data module defines a network interface it associates a link number with a port address and node name for the C LAN port on Switch 1 It also specifies the node name for the destination node which is a C LAN port on Switch 2 Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da n add data module next Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 2010 Name _ppp on
117. gt Submit the screen End Set to y after the link administration is complete Set to des for DCS signaling Node 2 is the client for this session Set node 3 to server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 2 data module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 162 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 Task Assign IP Route to node 3 This task specifies an initial route for messages handled by node 2 that are destined for node 3 An IP route is required for this route because there are intermediate nodes between node 2 and node 3 Steps Begin gt E
118. have defined 2 individual IP routes one each to node 1 and node 2 instead of this IP route However the network route is easier because we need only one The network route enables packets to get to any IP address on the 192 168 1 96 subnet that is addresses 192 168 1 97 through 192 168 1 126 so no other IP routes are needed No IP routes were needed on Switch 1 because a gateway address was assigned to the C LAN on the IP Interfaces screen IP routes are needed in only two cases when a gateway address is not assigned for an ethernet interface and when there are intermediate nodes between the endpoints of a ppp connection Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 89 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 2 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 y mis s 5 5001 node 2 0 1 1 2 n 0 Sig n 0 4 n 0 21 y dcs G S node 1 5003 21 12 ak 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 1 connection to CMS
119. lights on remote extensions A uniform dial plan for all switches in the network with a 4 digit plan if Merlin Legend Magix is part of the network One and only one mailbox for each extension in the network Note DCS software X 25 hardware and CLAN hardware software are not required for this type of network Additionally you cannot network switches simultaneously using both mode code and DCS Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 395 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code B Private Networking Configuration example Figure 8 shows what a configuration of centralized voice mail via mode might look like In this configuration DEFINITY system A is the hub Voice mail system X is the centralized voice mail system All other systems in the network are supported by voice mail system X except Legend system E and DEFINITY system D These switches do not have a direct ISDN PRI connection to the hub Figure 8 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code Example Configuration Legend Voice Mail DEFINITY E Y D Legend DEFINITY F C Legend DEFINITY DEFINITY G A B Voice Mail not supported by X voice mail X Feature Support Features that are supported are e Calling party name number sending retrieval e Message waiting light activation e Remote coverage to voice mail Fax a
120. lt ethernet gt R8si 171 Networking Example 203 OVGIVIOW pe ati EE Mee het bee a aa 203 NOWO Dilaga s a aia dah os RS OS kee A eed a a 204 Task SUMMAN ue 2408 4 doh ee et dd ah et Bee eH aL Gel DS 205 En Channel TSG Mapas sar a atta e ian what chee wean jee 206 NeWwOrk Map o0ceeery edad eed Chris eee needa A Rea oe eee 207 Switeh Node 1 AQMINISTAtION ssis cack ane iani x esha a Alan 208 DSi Circuit PACKS 20 2 doe eo Bae Sele PS ee OEE Oa ee eo es 208 Dial PIM ga Bet ak evt deve th idea e Bods Sides Hf Bee A SE A Be Re N N 209 Signaling GIoup oia SARS eee ee eandeedaa dead dbase 210 Synchronization Plan ew 624 2 00 04 eee bok ok de oe Se ee Be eS 210 TNR GOUS a 22 eek oa x ao ae db Oh ale dae ae ee we Bae A EO 211 Uniform Dialing Plame sis Bs dd Beh Se Bad he eR ee ee a A 216 AAR DIGIUANGIVSIS gt bie amp ee ee y aa ew Ete OER a Oe A amp 216 ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignment 2 0000002 eae 217 ROUTING Pates sms dase ea made dba Bad Be Be Eee bh Big A 217 Node Names 32 20 edad ere A A Re ee Se ee 218 Data MOUS es a dod a ee dd a no e Boe ae oe a 219 Processor Channel Assignments 00000 eee ee ee 221 Switch Node 2 Administration 0 00 cece ete 222 DSi Circuit Packs 2 2 46 dae A Shee Be ee ok Be Gg 222 DIARIA odia Bw eee he hk a we AA ee Ee ee le 222 Synchronization Planks 4 04 40 4 4 s G0 8 44 oe de ek om oe a OA ee ES 223 MONK GOUDES ta ds amp Bk ook he EE ok Ge So
121. of 10 TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 3 Port Code Sfx Name Night Sig Grp 1 TOO0004 H 323 Tr 1 3 2 T00005 H 323 Tr 2 3 3 T00006 H 323 Tr 3 3 4 5 End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 47 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Task 6 Modify signaling group This task modifies the signaling group form to add a trunk group number to the Trunk Group for Channel Selection field Task 6 Steps Begin gt Busy out the signaling group enter bu sig 3 gt Open the Signaling Group form enter ch sig 3 change signaling group 3 Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 3 Group Type h 323 Max number of NCA TSC 0 Max number of CA TSC 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection 3_ Supplementary Service Protocol a Near end Node Name clan al Far end Node Name clan bl Near end Listen Port 1720 Far end Listen Port 1720 LRQ Required n Calls Share IP Signaling Connection n Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded Is gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Trunk Group for Channel Enter the trunk group number If there is more than Selection one trunk group assigned to this signaling group the group entered in this field will be the one that can accept incoming calls gt Submit the screen gt Release the signaling group en
122. on both the originating and terminating switches but only one link between the two switches will have Est Conn set to y The originating switch is defined as having Est Conn set to y Valid entries Usage y The System is responsible for any part of the call setup required for the link between the System and the far end data module Should be y if the link is to be used for ISDN signaling n The System is not responsible for any part of the call setup The extension of the associated local data module for this link This field is similar to the pre R7 PI Ext field for the si model and the X 25 Extension field for the r model The type of connection x 25 ethernet or ppp This field replaces the pre R7 Protocol field The type of connection x 25 ethernet or ppp This field is similar to the pre R7 Destination Digits field for the si model and the Destination Number field for the r model Displays the destination of the link It does not apply to Ethernet links Applies to si models only It is administered on the Data Module screen type proc intf for the si model and type x 25 for the r mode If one endpoint of a link is DTE then the other must be DCE and vice versa The assignments must be coordinated on a network wide level Endpoint Switch Links are generally DTE and Tandem links are generally DCE If both endpoints are of the same type that is endpoints or tandem then the assignment of which is DTE and which is DC
123. on the IP Interfaces screen 2 Enter a node name for example subnet 1 and the IP address 192 168 1 64 on the Node Names screen 3 Set up an IP route with subnet 1 in the Destination Node field See the description of the subnet mask in Subnetting page 16 for more information on subnet addresses See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for a description of the Metric field 24 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing IP Route Examples 1 Networking Overview PPP Connections The diagram below shows three switches in a DCS network with PPP signaling connections between switches A amp B and between switches A amp C All nodes in this diagram are C LAN ports PPP data modules are administered between nodes amp 2 on switches A amp B and between nodes 3 amp 4 on switches A amp C With these connections switch A can communicate with switches B and C without using the IP Routing screen to administer explicit host IP routes However switches B and C need host IP routes to communicate with each other because they are not directly connected DCS Signaling over PPP The IP routes needed between nodes for this example are listed in the following table The Destination Node and Gateway Node columns in the table show the nodes that you would enter on the IP Routing screen to adm
124. one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask C LAN 01c08 TN799 B node 1 eth 255 255 255 0 3 o a 1 BEBK gt Enter values Field Inter region IP Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use connectivity MedPro resources administered in regions that are allowed different from the endpoints regions Enable Eth Pt The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Type Enter c lan or medpro Slot Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Code Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Node name Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 151 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Conditions Comments Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for
125. only receive busy warning indicators for trunks at the main PBX The attendant cannot receive information about branch PBX trunks Attendant Vectoring The attendant vectoring feature is available to QSIG CAS at the branch and the main An attendant seeking call terminating at the main PBX follows any vector steps that are defined at the main The QSIG CAS Number should not contain the number of a remote VDN Note that there is no admin check to block such administration but QSIG CAS may not function correctly Automatic Circuit Assurance As for RLT CAS the CAS attendant cannot receive ACA referral calls from a branch because any administered ACA referral extension must be on the local PBX Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 389 QSIG B Private Networking Call coverage The attendant group is allowed to be a coverage point If the call covers from the branch to the main over a non QSIG ISDN trunk then the call is treated as a forwarded call That is Call Coverage Off Net CCRON procedures do not apply and the call is not brought back to the branch PBX Note In order to obtain the full functionality of QSIG CAS it is recommended that routing patterns are set up so that a QSIG trunk 1s used when sending a call from the branch to the main If the call covers from the branch to the main over a QSIG trunk not QSIG VALU then QSIG Diversion procedures apply If the
126. page 1 change node names NODE NAMES Audix Names IP Address MSA Names IP Address intuity 192 168 200 10 msa a Z Administration for Network Connectivity 218 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address IP Address ppp14 192 168 200 12 ppp41 192 168 200 14 CMS 192 168 10 router 192 168 ethernet1 Data Modules x 25 data module add data module Page 1 of 2 DATA MODULE Data Extension Name x 25 on link 2 to node 2 Type x Remote Loop Around Test n Port Destination Number external Baud Rate TN Establish Connection n Endpoint Type j Connected Data Module 1900 Link DTE DCE Error Logging n Enable Link Permanent Virtual Circuit y Highest PVC Logical Channel 64 Switched Virtual Circuit n Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 219 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example pdm data module add data module 1900 Page 1 of DATA MODULE Data Extension 1900 Name BCC 2 Type pdm cos 1 Remote Loop Around Test n 01c2001 COR 1 Secondary data module n restricted TN 1 Connected To dte ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name ppp data module add data module 199
127. ppp Data Module to Switch 2 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 1 for the ppp connection to Switch 2 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 2376 add data module 2376 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 2376 Name _ppp on link 1 to node 2 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01c0815 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node 1 ppp Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 8993020 Node Name node 2 CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01c08 the Ppp connection is through port 15 Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 1 of 2 Administration for Networ
128. queued for an RLT The caller s terminal displays the trunk group identifier such as OPERATOR ISDN PRI If both DCS and ISDN PRI features are provided with a system the ISDN PRI display information displays in DCS format DCS Attendant Display When a user attempts to access a controlled trunk group and is routed to the local attendant the display shows the reason the call was redirected If the call is routed via CAS or the Inter PBX Attendant Calls feature the display does not show the reason the call was redirected UDP DCS tie trunks should not be attendant controlled This would result in all UDP calls on the controlled tie trunk being routed to the controlling attendant instead of to the desired destination Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 325 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Attendant Display Automatic Callback Busy Verification Call Coverage e When both ISDN and DCS display information or only DCS display information is received the switch displays the DCS display information in the DCS format If ISDN display information is received and no DCS display information is received then the ISDN display information displays in the ISDN formats e Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access and DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access Automatic Callback cannot be activated if the call uses a controlled trunk group e Ifthe
129. recognizes digits Don t use characters such as w p and so on in dialed digit formats that will be sent to IP trunks the application won t recognize these characters 3 Use these worksheets to administer all your sites using IP Trunk You can permit a different level of off premise dialing for each site For example Site 1 may allow limited off premise dialing but Site 2 may not and so on 420 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration DEFINITY administration procedures The following procedures must be performed on the DEFINITY ECS to administer IP Trunks A CAUTION The fields described in the following procedure must be completed as shown If they are not the IP Trunk service may not work properly Other fields may be completed as appropriate for your system DS1 Circuit Pack As an example administer the IP Trunk circuit pack at 01A09 to emulate T1 service for 24 channels See the table below for the settings to emulate El service for 30 channels Note that you are administering the IP Trunk circuit pack in this procedure not an actual DS1 circuit pack 1 Type add ds1 01A09 and press ENTER 01A09 is the address of the IP Trunk circuit pack The DS1 Circuit Pack screen appears ada dsl 1a09 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01409 Name T1 RB to ITS1 Bit Rate 1 544 Line Coding ami z
130. regions to allocate specific MedPro boards to H 323 trunks and others to stations or you could use regions to avoid traffic over low bandwidth or high latency network links 250 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference IP Routing add ip route 3 Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 3 Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric Route Type General Description IP routes are needed when switches are connected in an IP network and default gateways are not assigned and you want network nodes on different sub networks to communicate There are two type of IP routes host and network The following table summarizes when you would use each type Connection When to Define IP Routes Type Host IP Routes Define a host IP route when endpoints are on different subnets and no default gateway is defined for the local node Ethernet Network IP Routes Define network IP routes when you want hosts on the local subnet to communicate with hosts on some remote subnets but not others PPP Define a host IP route when there are one or more intermediate nodes between endpoints Network IP routes are not used with ppp connections In a LAN environment if network security is a concern not assigning default gateways limits internode access to paths that are explicitly administered Note 1 If you set up an IP route fro
131. screen is administered on Switch 3 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 90 0 0 0 node 1b eth 192 168 10 128 node 2 192 168 10 12 node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 3 nodes e C LAN b Ethernet port on Switch 1 C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 196 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN board on t
132. services such as DCS and QSIG Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 1 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview Networks When two or more switches are connected via tie trunks they form a private network There are two basic types of networks for Lucent switches e Main satellite tributary MS T A network of switches in which a main switch is fully functional and provides attendants and CO trunks for connected satellite switches Tributary switches are connected to the main and may have their own attendant and CO trunks The main switch may be connected to one or more Electronic tandem networks ETNs e Electronic tandem network ETN A wide area network of switches in which a call can tandem through one or more switches on its way from the originating switch to the destination switch ETNs have a uniform dial plan UDP automatic alternate routing AAR and automatic route selection ARS AT amp T provides a service called software defined network SDN that allows you to build a private network through the AT amp T public network facilities An ETN can be combined with an SDN to form a hybrid ETN SDN network The switches in MS T or ETN networks need to be provisioned with special DEFINITY networking software packages DCS Distributed Communications System DCS is a messaging overlay for ETN or MS T networks The overlay provides signaling connectio
133. shown in the screen diagram above Note All IP trunk groups are administered as DS1 tie trunks Group Type tie 3 Move to the Trunk Features page and type n in the Maintenance Tests field 4 In the Suppress Outpulsing field type y Note You may need to fill in other fields for your system 5 Move to the Group Member Assignments page and add the ports channels you ve purchased You re assigning virtual ports or channels to the IP Trunk circuit pack Each channel can carry one call at a time The number of ports you can use is limited to the maximum number specified in your license Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 423 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration E TRUNK GROUP gt Administered Members min max 1 12 Total Administered Members 12 Code Sfx Name Night Mode Type Ans Delay GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port 1 0140901 2 0140902 3 0140903 4 0140904 5 0140905 6 0140906 7 0140907 8 0140908 9 01A0909 10 01A0910 11 0140911 12 0140912 13 14 el Administer AAR ARS 6 Press ENTER to save your changes You can use Automatic Alternate Routing AAR and Automatic Route Selection ARS to route calls over an IP trunk group just like any other trunk group Unlike other trunk groups however you must administer both the DEFINI
134. single 1 544 Mbps United States or 2 048 Mbps outside the United States digital signal carried on a T1 transmission facility A DS1 converter complex consists of a pair one at each end of DS1 converter circuit packs and the associated T1 El facilities digital terminal data module DTDM An integrated or adjunct data module that shares with a digital telephone the same physical port for connection to a communications system The function of a DTDM is similar to that of a PDM and MPDM in that it converts RS 232C signals to DCP signals distributed application A computer application that runs on one or more clients and uses shared resources such as databases These resources reside on a common server Distributed design lets multiple users run programs using common centrally maintained files domain An addressable location on a network such as a group of computers single computer or subdirectory See Domain Name Server DNS Domain Name Server DNS An Internet computer that maintains a database of domain names Provides a mapping of alphanumeric names to IP addresses for example XXX XXX XXX XXX gt WWw lucent com DNS See Domain Name Server DNS Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 473 DSU Glossary DSU Data service unit DTDM Digital terminal data module DTE Data terminal equipment E 1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of
135. switches A amp C for the C LAN ethernet port interfaces to their LANs With these connections switch A can communicate with switch B and with the adjunct without using the IP Routing screen to administer explicit IP routes Normally node 5 would be defined as the default gateway for node 2 on the IP Interfaces screen which would enable switch A to communicate with switch C without an explicit IP route defined However if node 5 is not assigned as the default gateway for node 2 switch A needs an IP route to communicate with switch C because these switches are on different sub networks Similarly node 6 would normally be defined as the default gateway for node 7 if not switch C needs an IP route to communicate with switch A Also switch B needs an IP route to communicate with switch C because B is connected to A via ppp and there are intermediate nodes between B amp C DCS Signaling over PPP DCS Signaling over Ethernet Internet Network 1 Adjunct 26 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview The following table shows the IP routes needed if nodes 5 and 6 are not defined as default gateways for nodes 2 and 7 respectively Node IP Route IP Route Switch Destination Gateway Comments Connections Node Node IP route needed because nodes 2 amp 7 are on differe
136. system checks it for validity For Class C addresses there are 5 valid subnet masks For Class B addresses there are 13 valid masks and for Class A addresses there are 21 valid masks Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 263 Networking Screens Valid Value The default subnet mask is one of three values depending on the class of the IP address of the local C LAN port e Class A 255 0 0 0 e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 A Screens Reference Usage Enter a value for the subnet mask to specify the subnet group to which the IP address of this node belongs The valid subnets for each Class of address are Class A Class B Class C default 255 0 0 0 default 255 255 0 0 default 255 255 255 0 255 192 0 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 255 192 255 224 0 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 255 224 255 240 0 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 255 240 255 248 0 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 255 248 255 252 0 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 252 255 254 0 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 192 0 255 255 255 192 255 255 224 0 255 255 255 224 255 255 240 0 255 255 255 240 255 255 248 0 255 255 255 248 255 255 252 0 255 255 255 252 255 255 254 0 25929925970 299200 12008126 255 255 255 192 2592992959224 2992952939240 255 255 255 248 2559429925994292 Notice that all 5 valid Class C subnet masks can also be valid Class B o
137. that all three parties original calling party the attendant and the called party are never conferenced together That is if the attendant toggles between the other two parties for any number of times never conferencing all three together and then joins the two parties together with the attendant now out of the picture and ready to go on and handle other calls Path Replacement is attempted Remote Hold Remote Hold is used in an RLT CAS environment and has no benefit in QSIG CAS Controlled Restriction As for RLT CAS Controlled Restriction is not available in QSIG CAS for users on the branch Security Violation Notification As for RLT CAS the CAS attendant cannot receive SVN referral calls from a branch because any administered SVN referral extension must be on the local PBX Special Application 8140 Attendant Dial 0 Redirect Attendant Dial O Redirect allows calls to the attendant group to be routed to one of two attendant groups based on their call priority level and to alert with emergency ring The two groups are the default attendant group and the priority attendant group Administration of whether a priority level routes to the priority group is done on the console parameters screen Administration on the console parameters screen at the main determines which attendant group the priority level routes to and whether calls of that priority level alert with emergency tone Special Application 8141 LDN Attendant Que
138. that all users on a Served User PBX use the same Feature Plus Message Center Some of the served users can use a Feature Plus Message Center while others use a local message center and or a DCS Remote Message Center and or a QSIG Message Center However some served users on a PBX cannot use one Feature Plus Message Center while other served users on the same PBX use a different Feature Plus Message Center Off Premise Station Feature Plus MWI does not work with an off premise station implemented with a DS1 circuit pack e QSIG Feature Plus signaling links do not support QSIG Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 359 QSIG QSIG B Private Networking QSIG is the generic name for a family of signaling protocols The Q reference point or interface is the logical point where signaling is passed between two switches in a private network QSIG signaling allows certain features to work in a single vendor or multi vendor network QSIG complies with the International Organization for Standardization ISO Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN private networking specifications QSIG is defined by ISO as the worldwide standard for private networks QSIG uses ISO standard protocols as well as call independent signaling connections CISCs administered as non call associated temporary signal NCA TSCs DEFINITY ECS provides six levels of QSIG functionality each level is tur
139. the AUDIX Gateway functionality of the host switch and will be transported to the remote switch via an NCA TSC Specifically AUDIX messages destined for Switch B will arrive at Switch A on Link 1 Channel 2 processor channel 57 be converted to ISDN PRI Q 931 format and sent out via Administered NCA TSC 2 2 This is accomplished by administering processor channel 57 as a gateway and mapping it on the gateway form to Administered NCA TSC 2 of signaling group 2 that is also administered as a gateway Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 329 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Figure 5 2 Node private network G3i G3i PBX ID 1 PBX ID 2 RNX 221 RNX 222 AUDIX SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 Link 1 L BX25 1 Link 7 D CHANNEL ul PXI an tsc 2111 PES L2 ars 1 2 AUDIX2 is 2 2 AUDIX2 4 2 The following tables show you how you would complete each of the necessary forms AUDIX administration AUDIX Translations form Switch AUDIX Switch Logical Data Number Port Port Channel Link 1 1 59 1 1 2 2 57 2 1 Switch Port refers to the processor channel that is used for AUDIX in the PBX Administration for switch 1 Dial Plan form Start Dig Len Usage 4 4 ext 5 4 ext e Uniform Dial Plan form Ext Code Type Location Code 5XXX UDPcode 222 e AAR Digit Conversion form Matching Min Max Del Replacement Net Conv Pattern String 221
140. the dial plan screen Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 309 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Administration for Network Connectivity 310 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 B Private Networking This appendix contains five main sections 1 a description of Distributed Communications System DCS and the features that can be used transparently on a DCS network 2 a description of ISDN Plus networking capability 3 a description of QSIG and its features 4 a brief description of Centralized Voice Mail with Mode codes and 5 a brief description of Japan TTC private networking protocols Contents of this Appendix Distributed Communications System page 312 ISDN Feature Plus page 355 QSIG page 360 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code page 395 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols page 400 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 311 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Distributed Communications System Distributed Communications System DCS allows you to configure 2 or more switches as if they were a single large DEFINITY ECS DCS provides attendant and voice terminal features between these switch locations DCS simplifies dialing procedures and allows transparent use of some of the DEFINITY ECS features Feature transparenc
141. the number of attendants required at a branch For example a chain of department stores can have a centralized attendant location at the main store to handle calls for the branch stores Form Field Page System Parameters Customer Options Async Transfer Mode 5 289 ATM PNC Synchronization Plan Synchronization Source Synchronization Reference Stratum Duplication Related System Parameters Enable Operation of PNC 5 106 Duplication Fiber Link Administration ATM PNC All Circuit Packs Cabinet Form Field Page Attendant Console e Feature Button Assignments 5 38 cas backup trunk name Console Parameters e CAS 5 90 e RLT Trunk Group Number e CAS Back Up Ext e Timed Reminder on Hold e Return Call Timeout sec Station multi appearance e Feature Button Assignments 6 30 cas backup flash trunk name night serv Trunk Group RLT All 7 238 Feature Access Code FAC CAS Remote Hold Access Code 5 120 338 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Detailed description Each branch in a CAS has its own LDN or other type of access from the public network Incoming trunk calls to the branch as well as attendant seeking voice terminal calls route to the centralized attendants over release link trunks RLT The CAS attendants are at the main location The main location can be a DEFINITY ECS a DEFINITY Sys
142. the preference assigned to routes in the Route Pattern form Least cost Supplementary Service B SSB routes must be first followed by more expensive routes Note When routes to SSB trunks are included with routes to non SSB trunks SSB trunks must appear first on the Route Pattern form This is because as soon as ANF PR encounters a non SSB trunk in the route pattern it stops looking Class of Restriction COR and Facility Restriction Levels FRL are adhered to in routing calls ANF PR is not invoked on data calls because there is a period of time when information can be lost Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 367 QSIG B Private Networking QSIG Call Forwarding This feature allows a forwarded call can be rerouted in a private network to find a hecuing 7 more cost effective or resource efficient path QSIG Transfer into Lucent QSIG Voice Mail Transfer into QSIG This feature uses QSIG Call Transfer along with a manufacturer specific information Voice Mail MSI message to transfer a call directly into a subscriber s mailbox when the voice mail system is connected to the Message Center PBX via a QSIG link The voice mail system must be a Lucent system that supports the QSIG Transfer Into QSIG Voice Mail MSI operation Note This feature currently works only with the Serenade voice mail system This feature does not work with QSIG Centralized AUDIX The entire route f
143. to users as several small independent switches Valid Data Usage Entries Module Types 1 20 csi ppp Partitioning could be useful when 2 or more user Si procr intf groups tenants have different switch usage patterns 1 100 r an For R6 and later configurations all MASI trunks are Default is 1 associated with Tenant 1 BCC Bearer capability class This field is not administrable on the data module screens BCC is used with ISDN connections to identify the types of traffic that can be supported by a given trunk Valid Data Module Usage Values Types 0 4 ppp For non ISDN connections leave the default 2 pig For ISDN connections pdm 0 Voice only Use for H 323 trunks 1 Mode 1 data allows restricted circuit switched data on a B channel 56Kbps 2 Mode 2 data 64 Kbps data packaged in an inverted HDLC protocol and limited to user data rates between 300bps and 19 2Kbps 3 Mode 3 data when circuit switched 64Kbps digital data packaged in LAPD protocol 4 Mode 0 data a data bearer capability that allows full 64Kbps unrestricted circuit switched data on a B channel Also referred to as clear channel Administration for Network Connectivity 258 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Node Name The node name for the interface C LAN port defined by this data module Valid Entries Data Usage Module Types A name administered on the N
144. to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level connectivity can remain intact when higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 145 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Configuration 5A R csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si Task Summary In this configuration a DEFINITY ECS R8r acts as a gateway between two other nodes one connected via ppp to an R8csi and the other via ethernet to another R8si node 2 Switch 1 ppp DeFINITY S f ode 1 ppp ECS R8r CLAN node 1 eth Ethernet Switch 2 DEFINITY ECS R8csi DS1 C LAN Switch 3 C LAN DE
145. unexpectedly when using NetMeeting when the G 711 is set as the preferred codec on the switch NetMeeting may fail to use it Since there is no way to monitor which codec is being used the only way to determine that this is the problem is to disable all but the G 711 codecs Then if calls no longer work it can be concluded that NetMeeting is failing to use the G 711 The solution to this problem is to reinstall NetMeeting The telecommuter application of the IP Softphone requires the use of two phone lines one for the IP connection to DEFINITY which is used for softphone registration and call signaling and the other for a PSTN connection which DEFINITY uses as a callback number to establish the voice path How you allocate your phone lines to these two functions may make a difference For example assume that you have telephone services provided by the local phone company such as voice mail associated with one of your lines and not the other In this case you should use the line with the services to make the initial IP connection to register the softphone and use the line without the services as the POTS callback for the voice path Otherwise there could be undesirable interactions between the softphone and the local services For example if your telecommuter application is registered and you were using your POTS callback line for a personal call when a business associate dialed your work extension the business associate would hear your
146. while retaining the original extension number as long as the switches are part of the ENP subnetwork EPN is used in conjunction with Automatic Alternate Routing AAR and Uniform Dial Plan UDP How to administer ENP Form Field AAR and ARS Digit Conversion Table All Extension Number Portability Numbering All Plan Node Number Routing All Uniform Dialing Plan Ext Code e AAR Digit Conversion form Assign all 3 digit ENP codes as home and if using a 5 digit UDP associate the ENP codes with the leading or 10 thousands digit that is the fifth digit of the extension For example for extension number 73446 7 is the 10 thousands digit e ENP Numbering Plan form Associate the leading one or two digits of extensions in the ENP subnetwork with a 3 digit ENP code used to construct a 7 digit AAR like ENP number e Node Number Routing form Associate a route pattern with each node in the ENP subnetwork e Uniform Dialing Plan form Enter the number of digits in the plan 4 or 5 and the Extension Codes for non home extensions in the ENP subnetwork as ENPNode node number routed Detailed description The ENP Numbering Plan allows you to set 4 or 5 digit extensions in the ENP subnetwork to a 7 digit AAR like number that is sent to other nodes in the network Only the first 1 or 2 leading digits of the extension are significant ENP Codes are distinguished from AAR location codes because ENP Codes are hom
147. 0 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Field Conditions Comments COS COR The values for these fields will be specified by the system i administrator TN BCC This is a display only field Node Name The node name for the interface C LAN port defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen Subnet Mask Establish n means that the switch at the remote end of this connection Connection Switch 1 in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for Switch 1 Destination Not needed if the Establish Connection field is set to n Digits Destination Name of the node at the far end Switch 1 of this connection Node Name Must be a name entered on the Node Names screen CHAP This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 2of2 gt Press the ENTER SAVE key to save and exit End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 69 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 2 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assi
148. 1 Provides step by step procedures for performing basic switch administration tasks Includes managing phones managing features routing outgoing calls and enhancing system security DEFINITY System s Little Instruction Book for advanced administration 555 233 757 Issue 1 Provides step by step procedures for managing trunks managing hunt groups setting up night service writing vectors recording announcements using reports and understanding call centers DEFINITY System s Little Instruction Book for basic diagnostics 555 233 758 Issue 1 Provides step by step procedures for baselining your system solving common problems reading alarms and errors using features to troubleshoot your system and contacting Lucent DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Reports 555 233 505 Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the measurement status security and recent change history reports available in the system and is intended for administrators who validate traffic reports and evaluation system performance Includes corrective actions for potential problems Previously known as DEFINITY ECS System Monitoring and Reporting BCS Products Security Handbook 555 025 600 Issue 7 Provides information about the risks of telecommunications fraud and measures for addressing those risks and preventing unauthorized use of BCS products This document is intended for telecommunications managers console operators and security organizations within c
149. 1 Administration SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with f Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same A Different country E Different country analysis entry your actual A area analysis entry your actual area s Country different E Country different with values code with values code area code area code Dialed String 1AX 1AX 1AX Dialed String 2AX 2AX 2AX Total Mn 3 E S Total Mn ij i Total Mx gt z Total Mx A Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS fea ture access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each different country code X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each country X Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS fea ture access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each different country code X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each country X MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with Same Same Fill in with Same Same Create Different country Create Different country k your actual a area a your actual k area
150. 1 Task Assign ISDN TSC Gateway This task assigns the ISDN TSC gateway channels needed for ISDN signaling between node 1 and node2 Steps Begin gt Open the ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignment form enter ch isdn tsc change isdn tsc gateway Page 1 of 2 ISDN TSC GATEWAY CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Group TSC Index Channel cation Group TSC Index Channel cation L 20 14 des LI ome A DA am eat PO ea eee So Ooo S NA A _ sn 4 __ a eee 20 __ MEREN Be As 21 A 6 e 22 e ae gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments For Gateway Channel 1 ISDN connection to Switch 2 Sig Group Signaling group number assigned on the Signaling Group screen Adm d NCA TSC Index assigned on page 2 of the Signaling Group screen TSC Index Administered NCA TSC Assignment Processor This is the Processor Channel number specified as a gateway Channel application on the Processor Channel Assignment screen Application The application that this TSC is used for gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 135 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 2 Task Assign Signaling Group and administered NCA TSC This task assigns a signaling group and an administered NCA TSC for the ISDN connection to Switch
151. 1 e La CA gt PAPA Rens a ZII mee 8 _ E PANG Oe pas eee 25 TE LoT a PA PASS _ 1o ea 25 AVE 2 12 gt AA ZST sk Le a 29 ES 14 _ pee Seo SO pa 15 om Subs n En 16 _ a 32a ins Sig Group Used to indicate the Signaling Group to which the NCA TSC belongs Valid entries Usage 1 to 30 blank Adm d NCA TSC Index Used to indicate the administered NCA TSC that acts as one endpoint of the gateway Valid entries Usage 1 to 64 blank Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 291 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Processor Channel Used to indicate the processor channel to which the administered NCA TSC index will be mapped This processor channel is used as another endpoint of the connection in this gateway assignment Valid entries Usage 1to 64 blank Application Used to indicate the feature this gateway is used for Gateway channels can be used for DCS or ISDN PRI DCS AUDIX feature Valid entries Usage audix des blank Administration for Network Connectivity 292 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens Communication Interface Links This screen is display only starting with Release 7 The fields are now administered on the Data Module screens associated with
152. 128 na 5000 64 500 na 25 na na 1 ethernet 16 ppp 270 na Circuit pack abbreviations C LAN Control LAN TN799B NetPkt Network Control Packet Interface TN794 si 10 C LAN 1 NetPkt 2 PI 14 IP Interface medpro 31 for G711 codec 22 for compression codecs 300 1 64 5000 64 500 128 25 4 na 1 ethernet 16 ppp 400 128 r 10 C LAN 4 PGATE 46 IP Interface medpro 31 for G711 codec 22 for compression codecs 1000 1 128 1 384 1 64 5000 64 500 256 33 na 4 1 ethernet 16 ppp 650 256 PI Processor Interface TN765 used only for X 25 connections retained from pre R7 systems PGATE Packet Gateway TN577 IP Interface Used in the Medpro mode TN802B The number of audio streams per board is 22 if only one call uses a compression codec even if all other calls use the G711 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Softphones 1 Networking Overview IP Softphones This book focuses on administration for the trunk side of the DEFINITY IP Solutions offer The administration of the line side IP Softphones is covered in DEFINITY ECS R8 Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 For completeness a brief checklist of IP Softphone administration is presented here For R8 there are two main types of DEFINITY IP Softphone applications the telecommuter application and the road warrior application The
153. 15 Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 180 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen n means that the node at the remote end of this connection node 1b in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for node 1b Not needed if the Establish Connection field is set to n Name of the node at the far end of this connection Must be a name entered on the No
154. 2 Review prerequisite administration checklist Switch 1 administration a Assign node names b Assign IP Interfaces c Assign link via a data module to the LAN d Assign processor channels Switch 2 administration Enable bus bridge connectivity Assign node names Assign IP Interfaces Assign link via a data module to the LAN Assign IP routes Assign processor channels 0000U50 Intuity AUDIX administration a Administer the UNIX name and IP address b Administer the switch interface link c Administer extension numbers channels and services d Administer subscribers CMS administration See CentreVu CMS Software Installation and Setup 585 215 866 and Centre Vu CMS Switch Connections and Administration 585 215 876 for details of CMS setup and administration For Intuity AUDIX connections see Intuity Messaging Solutions LAN Integration with DEFINITY ECS 585 313 602 Enable links and processor channels 74 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi SWITCH 1 DEFINITY ECS R8r Configuration 2 3 C LAN Administration SWITCH 2 DEFINITY ECS R8csi Processor Interface software de
155. 2 Enables the bus bridge Bus Bridge Location of the C LAN circuit pack If the system has two C LANs only one is administered for bus bridge Inter Board Specifies the bandwidth used on the 3 ports of the Inter Board Link Link The total number of timeslots assigned cannot exceed 11 Timeslots Pt0 carries PPP traffic and can have 1 9 timeslots Pt1 carries Pt0 Pt1 Pt2 maintenance messages and can have 1 3 timeslots Pt2 carries broadcast messages and can have 1 3 timeslots gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 83 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network on the Node Names screen This screen is administered on Switch 2 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in a network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form ente
156. 2 dy anss poS esz sg g AUANIOUUOD YIOMION 104 UONENSIUILIPY O ZZZ dID 67 IP Trunk Worksheets Worksheet 1 Two Site Solution Both DEFINITY T1 SITE 1 SITE 2 See Field Name Field Value ons Field Name Field Value 1A International Access Code 2A International Access Code 1B Country Code 2B Country Code 1C Long Distance Access Code 2C Long Distance Access Code 1D Area Code 2D Area Code 1E Exchange 2E Exchange 1F ARS Feature Access Code 2F ARS Feature Access Code 1G IP Address 2G IP Address 1H PBX to IP trunk Route Pattern 2H PBX to IP trunk Route Pattern Number Number 11 PBX to IP Trunk Group Num 2l PBX to IP Trunk Group Num ber ber 1J PSTN Trunk Group Number 2J PSTN Trunk Group Number for PSTN fallback for PSTN fallback SI99YS4A10M YUNAL dl ost 0 422 qIO 0002 iudy enss pOS E Z S9GG AYUAIGUUOD AJOMIAN 10 UONENSIUIWPY Worksheet 2 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration No Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site Only SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same i Different country A Different country analysis entry your actual area analysis entry your actual area f Country different f Country different with values code with values code ar
157. 3 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 xi Issue Status Preface New Fields In addition to the R8 screen changes described above the following screens have new fields that specify IP trunk or IP Softphone parameters e Optional Parameter System Parameters Customer Options e Trunk Groups e Signaling Group e Station e Several Status and Measurement screens New Screens In Release 8 the following IP related screens are new IP Interfaces screen The IP Interfaces screen is new for Release 8 change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn n 255 255 255 0 o o n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 n 255 255 255 0 The fields for this screen are described in Appendix A Screens Reference IP Media Parameters The IP Media Parameters screen specifies the type of codecs available for voice processing The order in which you list the codecs is the order in which the system will use them This screen also specifies the range of audio port numbers available change ip parameters Page 1 of 1 IP Media Parameters Audio Codec Preferences 1 G 711MU 2 G 723 6 3K 3 G 729A 4 UDP Port Range Min 2048 Max 65535 Administration for Network Connectivity xii CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Issue Status Preface Reorganization The following chapter r
158. 33 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 107 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module for ethernet connections The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data module next DATA MODULE Data Extension 3391 Type ethernet Port 0160117 Link 3 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y Page 1 of x Name ethernet on link 3 BCC 2 gt Enter values Field Type Port Link Name Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses Conditions Comments This indicates the data module type for this connection In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01b01 the ethernet connection is through port 17 The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command Leave the default y if the private network contains only DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the
159. 4 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 307 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Ext Code Type and Displays what rules apply if the entries on the screen are not administered For associated data example shows a screen for Ext Codes starting with 512 If these entries are not administered the entry for Ext Code 51xxx applies to these entries and if Ext Code 51xxx is not administered the entry for Ext Code 5xxxx applies to these entries In a 5 digit UDP these read only fields display only if at least 3 digits are specified in the command line key although one set the set on the left of these fields would still display if 2 digits are specified in the command line key If only 1 digit is specified or if x or X is specified in the command line key then neither of these sets of fields display since there is no Ext Code more general than those listed on the screen Valid entries Usage AARCode ENPNode Local TempOOS UDPCode blank dd Displays the two digits or x s representing the extension or group of extensions to be administered For this field xx is repeated on both pages since it is the default for all other entries on both pages Changing the type associated with this field on one page changes it on both pages Administration for Network Connectivity 308 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Type
160. 4 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 1994 Name _ppp on link 4 to node 4 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 0O1c1502 COR 1 Link 4_ TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name pppl14 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 7241991 Node Name ppp41 CHAP n Administration for Network Connectivity 220 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example ethernet data module add data 1191 Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 91 Name ethernet on link 1 BCC 2 thernet 1 Type e Port 01c1517 Link 1_ Network uses 1 s for Broadcast Addresses y IP Interface change ip interfaces IP Interfaces Network regions are interconnected n En abled Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr y C LAN 01c15 IN799 B ethernetl 192 168 200 1 oO ooo0oo0oo0oo0o0 Processor Channel Assignments change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode i Node Port Local Remote ID audix s intuity _ 0 1 1 gtwy tcp 4 59 gateway intuity 0 3 gtwy tcp 2_ intuity 0 2 mis dcs gateway gtwy tcp 15 dcs gtwy tcp gateway lu la v ln Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 221 Switch Node 2 A
161. 5 0 255 255 255 253 255 2295 200 255 e200 2295 205 1230 295 239 259 2192 224 240 248 LIZ Notice that all 5 valid Class C subnet masks can also be valid Class B or Class A subnet masks and all 13 valid Class B subnet masks can also be valid Class A subnet masks For example 255 255 255 224 is a valid subnet mask for all three address classes It allows 6 23 2 subnetworks for Class C addresses 2046 aio subnetworks for Class B addresses and 524 286 2 9 2 subnetworks for Class A addresses Each of these subnetworks can have 30 25 2 hosts Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 21 IP Addressing Default Gateway 1 Networking Overview On LANs that connect to other networks or subnetworks it is convenient to define a default gateway node The default gateway node is usually a router that is connected to 2 or more different sub networks It could also be a C LAN ethernet port that is connected to other C LANs on the same switch Any packets addressed to a different sub network and for which no explicit IP route is defined are sent to the default gateway node The default gateway node is either directly connected to the addressed node or knows of another router that knows how to get to the packet address A default gateway can be assigned to a node C LAN port or IP Interface port on the IP Interfaces screen If you do not assign a d
162. 5 255 255 192 3 6 30 180 11100000 224 255 255 255 224 4 14 14 196 11110000 240 225 225 225 240 5 30 6 180 11111000 248 255 255 255 248 6 62 2 124 11111100 252 255 255 255 252 7 126 0 0 11111110 254 255 255 255 254 3 bit subnets As an example the third row of the table shows the results of using 3 bits for the subnet ID Three bits are borrowed from the host ID leaving 5 bits for the host IDs The number of subnets that can be defined with three bits is 2 8 088 001 010 011 100 101 110 44 Of these only 6 are usable all ones and all zeros are not usable The remaining 5 bits are used for the host IDs Of these 2 2 30 are usable As shown in columns 2 4 row 3 by using 3 bits for subnetting a Class C network can be divided into 6 subnets with 30 host IDs in each subnet for a total of 6 X 30 180 usable IP addresses Subnet mask The subnet mask is defined as follows The subnet bits borrowed from the host ID are the highest order bits in the octet of the host ID The 5th and 6th columns of the table show the binary and decimal subnet IDs formed by using the subnet bits as the highest order bits in an octet For example in the third row of the table the binary bit pattern is 11100000 which is decimal 224 This is the highest number that can be formed with the 3 high order bits in the octet The subnet mask is formed by putting this number in the 4th octet of the default subnet mask shown in the last column
163. 65 QSIG Path Retention B Private Networking Path Retention is a generic mechanism for retaining a network connection that can be used by supplementary services during call establishment The Originating PBX invokes path retention for one supplementary service or for several simultaneous supplementary services Invoking a particular supplementary service means retaining the network connection if the Terminating PBX encounters the appropriate conditions The Originating PBX is informed of the reason for retaining the connection It then decides for example by consulting the calling user whether to invoke the supplementary service Under some circumstances in which the network connection is retained more than one of the supplementary services for which path retention has been invoked may be applicable Successive retentions of the network connection by the Terminating PBX following a single path retention invocation by the Originating PBX are possible This is a result of different conditions being encountered at the Terminating PBX When an attempt is made to invoke a supplementary service for which the network connection has been retained a further condition can be encountered that can cause the network connection to be retained again for the same or a different supplementary service Path retention is specified in terms of a Path Retention entity existing within the Coordination Function at the Originating PBX and at the Terminating PBX
164. 730 vii Contents DCS over IP MMs accesos ebria ea 435 DCS or Dedicated Trunks to Specific Locations Configurations 436 Rerouting calls when IP transmission quality is poor 2 04 439 Placing a test telephone Calls vane ae eae ee es aa Aa Pace 440 Setting up alerts on IP trunks 0 0000 aa a d iai a ee 440 AIGMIVPCS en a4 2 36 2 aa bye a ba a BOK Sh a 5 ES 442 Viewing error Messages ee 442 Troubleshooting IF WURK e sa ta rama mnes Pa ea e ante ad 443 Maintaining the performance of the IP trunk server 444 Configuring Microsoft NetMeeting onaPC 0 o 445 IP Trunk WOnkKShGGIS 4 sta a ia 449 Appendix G References 459 Basic DEFINITY ECS documents o e 459 Callicenter documents lt lt end a a Be ra 462 Application specific documents o eu o eos 463 Glossary 465 Index 491 Administration for Network Connectivity viii CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Preface This book describes how to administer connections between DEFINITY ECS switches csi si and r models The main focus is on TCP IP for DCS signaling introduced with DEFINITY Release 7 and H 323 trunks introduced with DEFINITY Releases 8 Purpose This document provides the information needed to understand and administer the connections between DEFINITY ECS systems in a network using IP connections It do
165. 79 Hold feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 495 Index hop channel assignment screen 300 hop channels per system 10 host IP route 23 251 Hotline Service feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 hunt group example 227 232 240 Hunt Groups feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 installation C LAN 414 integration process configuring DEFINITY ECS 421 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS feature 347 interactions Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 347 Attendant Display 347 Attendant Recall 347 Call Coverage 347 Centralized Attendant Service CAS 348 DCS Attendant Display 347 Dial Access to Attendant 348 Night Service 348 interface channels per system 10 Internal Automatic Answer IAA feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 International Organization for Standardization ISO QSIG signaling protocols 369 Intuity AUDIX LAN Setup Summary 59 Intuity translations for DCS AUDIX example 241 IP address classes 14 private ranges 15 IP addressing 13 IP Interfaces screen 247 IP Interfaces define 40 IP Meadia Parameters screen 255 IP route host 23 251 network 23 28 251 per system 10 when to use 23 IP routing example 229 239 gateway 252 metric 253 screen 251 IP Softphone 11 32 IP Solutions 31 IP Sol
166. 84 101 117 126 140 148 158 164 174 190 196 assign pdm data module 102 assign processor channels 65 70 80 90 109 115 121 129 143 154 161 168 184 193 200 assign signaling group and administer NCA TSCs 132 136 enable bus bridge connectivity 139 157 189 Technical Support xviii telephone calls placing test telephone calls 448 temporary signaling connections TSC 291 320 Termination Extension Group TEG feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 terminology used in this book xv TN799B 7 31 TN802B 7 31 tones call identification 340 Transfer feature interactions QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 troubleshooting IP trunks 443 troubleshooting IP Solutions 50 500 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 trunk access codes TAC QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 QSIG Additional Network Feature Transit Counter ANF TC 381 trunk group example 211 223 230 235 for IP Trunk 422 Trunk Group Select buttons 313 trunk group create 45 Trunk Identification by Attendant feature interactions DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks 326 Trunk ID buttons 326 trunks 1 TTC Telecommunications Technology Committee 400 unicasting 480 uniform call distribution UCD QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 Uniform Dial Plan UDP feature 350 354 c
167. 8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level connectivity can remain intact when higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 123 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi In this configuration a DEFINITY ECS R8r provides gateway conversion between
168. A area E Country different f Country different with values code with values code area code area code Dialed String 1A 1A 1A Dialed String 2A 2A 2A Total Mn ij i Total Mn id is Total Mx gt dl 3 Total Mx j Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with Same Same Fill in with same Same Create Different country Create Different country E your actual i area E your actual area entries Country different entries Country different values code values code area code area code Originating Originating Search string 1A 1A 1A Search string 2A 2A 2A Replace string 1A 1A 1A Replace string 2A 2A 2A IP Address 2G 2G 2G IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Terminating Search string 2A 2A 2A Search string 1A 1A 1A Replace string 1F1A 1F1A 1F1A Replace string 2F2A 2F2A 2F2A SI99YS410M YUNAL dl 0002 dy anss poS esz sg g AUANIOUUOD YIOMION 104 UONENSIUILIPY O ZZZ dlD SY Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site only different country code X Worksheet 8 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T
169. AMI encoded data see line coding with either of two sequences If there has been an even number of 1s since the last substitution it substitutes the pattern 1 0 0 BipolarViolation where BipolarViolation is a 3 volt pulse a 1 of the same polarity as the preceding 3 volt pulse If there has been an odd number of 1s since the last substitution HDB3 coding substitutes the pattern 0 0 0 BipolarViolation for the 4 zero string This system does not corrupt binary data and is commonly used with E 1 lines host A server host name See server name IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority INADS Initialization and Administration System Information element IE The data fields in ISDN messages in service state The condition or state of an MMCX server that is ready to handle calls International Standards Organization ISO A body that defines and or adopts protocols widely used in the computer and telecommunications industries International Telecommunications Union ITU Formerly known as International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CCITT ITU is an international organization that sets universal standards for data communications including ISDN ITU members are from telecommunications companies and organizations around the world Internet The decentralized network of networks that grew from ARPAnet and supported by TCP IP Administration for Network Connectivity 476 CID 77730 555 233 504
170. AN circuit pack that is used for a connection four decimal b f our cecima numbers Each node name is associated with a unique IP each in the range 1 255 gt address except in the following circumstance If the separated by a decimal i E oint network includes a gateway switch that connects to pomi non IP nodes via X 25 or ISDN then switches on the IP side of the gateway would list all nodes on the non IP side of the gateway with the same IP address of the gateway that is several nodes could be listed on the Node Names screen with the same IP address See Chapter 1 for more information about IP addresses Administration for Network Connectivity 246 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference IP Interfaces Use the IP Interfaces screen to define an interface to the LAN from either the C LAN or MedPro circuit packs The physical interface is port 17 on the C LAN board and is a network interface card on the MedPro This screen specifies the IP address via the Node Names screen subnet mask default gateway address and the network region for each IP interface on the local DEFINITY ECS Note The C LAN and MedPro circuit packs must be administered on the Circuit Packs screen before they can be administered on this screen change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet
171. Assign node names b Assign IP Interfaces c Assign link via an ethernet data module to the LAN d Assign processor channels Enable links and processor channels Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 99 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Prerequisite Administration There are some system administration tasks that need to be completed before you can proceed with the connectivity administration described in this section Review the checklist of prerequisite administration tasks in Checklist for Prerequisite Administration page 54 before proceeding with the connectivity administration in this section Configuration 3 SWITCH 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 3 DEFINITY ECS R7si DEFINITY ECS R7r DEFINITY ECS R7si software defined connections Processor Interface Interface Processor Interface Interface Processor channels channels channels channels channels channels channels 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5000 500 o a eee el A se 22 5003 x any Esas 23 l 77 234 6002 x any z aie 2 IN ac 64 af 64500 Link 5 gt 32 Link 3 384 hardware connections Processor TN790B Processor UN331B T gt Processor T
172. C LAN boards See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for more information on the use of the Metric field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 188 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 Task Enable Bus Bridge Connectivity This task enables the bus bridge functionality on the C LAN circuit pack to provide a path between the packet bus and the processor Note Bus Bridge Connectivity is used on the csi model only This task may have been complete when the C LAN circuit pack was installed Steps Begin gt Open the Maintenance Related System Parameters form enter ch sys ma gt Go to page 2 and skip to the Packet Intf2 field near the bottom of the screen change system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 vcs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI Service SPID DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop Around Test Call Extension LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Packet Intf1 y Packet Intf2 y
173. DE NAMES Name IP Address IP Address ppp41 _ 192 168 200 14_ ppp14 192 168 12 CMS 192 168 10 router A pal ethernet1l a A Ll Data Modules ppp data module add data module 4991 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 4991 Name _ppp on link 1 to switch 1 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01a0515 COR 1 Link TN 1 Enable Link Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection n DESTINATION Digits 7241994 Node Name ppp14 CHAP n Administration for Network Connectivity 238 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Processor Channel Assignments change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote T n audix s 1 5041 intuity 0 1 10 mis 1 5001 cms 0 14 dcs 0 ppp14 5003__ 15 des 0 ppp14 5004 15 5 16 des 0 ppp14 _ 16 16 IP Routing add ip route next Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 1 Destination Node audix Gateway ppp14 _ C LAN Board 1a05 Metric Route Type y Jo IP Routing add ip route next IP ROUTING Route Number Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric Route Type Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 239 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Ne
174. DMI BOS n mulaw Slip Detection n Dial Plan change dialplan Uniform Dialing Plan UDP Extension Search Order FIRST DIGIT TABLE First Digit 1 I 2 yA 4 5 6 US 8 9 0 X Page DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Name Switch 3 to Switch 1 Line Coding b8zs Framing Mode esf 11111111 Near end CSU Type other DIAL PLAN RECORD Local Node Number 3 ETA Node Number 4 digit ETA Routing Pattern local extensions first Length 4 extension extension extension extension 228 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 3 Administration 4 Networking Example Synchronization Plan change synch Page 1 of X SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum Port Network Primary Secondary Location Name Slip Type Location Name Slip Type Olall DCS SW1 y UDS1 BD NOTE TN722B amp TN464B DS1 sources result in stratum 4 type II synchronization Signaling Group Page 1 add signaling group next Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 1 Associated Signaling y Max number of NCA TSC Primary D Channel 01a1124 Max number of CA TSC Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection ___ Supplementary Service Protocol a__ Page 2 Administered NCA TSC Assignment Page 2 of 5 ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service Feature As needed Inactiv
175. DS1 emulation connections It will typically be used in the MedPro mode The IP Trunk mode is provided for compatibility with existing R7 IP Trunk connections The TN802 IP Interface introduced in Release 7 which operates only in the IP Trunk mode can be upgraded via firmware download to the TN802B The following table lists the IP Solutions configurations and the circuit packs and software used with each Circuit Pack Requirements Software IP Solutions Requirements R7 R8 TN802B in medpro mode ia T with TN799B Trunks TN802B in ip trunk mode IP Trunk TN802 with TN799B Road warrior B TN802B in medpro mode DEFINITY IP Softphone application with TN799B Microsoft NetMeeting IP A ceo TN799B DEFINITY IP Softphone application Centre Vu IP Agent TN799B DEFINITY IP Softphone The IP Softphones should work with other audio applications that are fully H 323 v2 compliant DEFINITY IP Solutions was developed and tested with Microsoft NetMeeting Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 31 Overview 2 H 323 Trunks IP Connected Trunks H 323 Trunk IP Trunk IP Softphones IP connected trunks allow trunk groups to be defined as ISDN PRI equivalent tie lines between switches over an IP network Trunks using IP connectivity provide cost reduction and simplified management Benefits include a reduction in long distance voice and fax expenses facilitation of glo
176. Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections 1t must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen A value of 0 allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch in the Local Node Number field 2of2 66 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This
177. Dialing Between Sites F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites These procedures outline two different extension dialing configurations that may be used from a particular site to other IP Trunk sites The first configuration is non DCS where one trunk group exists in DEFINITY and is routed through the IP Trunk server to many different IP Trunk locations The second configuration is DCS where the trunks are dedicated to specific locations users are routed to a different trunk group that is different trunk ports within the DEFINITY based on the digits dialed The IP Trunk server routes calls based on the ports or lines the call was placed on Each of these configurations is outlined below and examples are provided Non DCS Configuration IP Trunk Network Configuration One DEFINITY Trunk Group to many locations DEFINITY All ports in Trunk Group 50 Switch B extension range 4400 4499 DEFINITY All ports in and 4900 4999 Trunk Group 50 Eo es AN IP address 198 152 169 238 IP TRK All ports in Trunk Group 50 DEFINITY Switch A extension range 6500 6599 IP address 198 152 169 240 IP Switch C extension range 4300 4399 and 3400 3499 IP address 198 152 169 236 In the configuration above each DEFINITY switch has all of the IP Trunk ports in one trunk group trunk group 50 Extension calls to the other DEFINI
178. Digits to be collected field entry will be determined by the type of dialing or types of dialing that will be performed using IP Trunking Refer to the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or if extension dialing is used this field would be the extension length in the DEFINITY private network A CAUTION Set this field no higher than the maximum length of the digit string the switch sends Otherwise the IP Trunk application waits several seconds for additional digits and users experience delays 4 Click the Dial Routing Plan tab 426 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration The Dial Routing Plan window appears IP Trunk Configuration Manager Local Machine 5 In the Machine Name list select the machine name of the local IP Trunk server 6 Select Originating and click Add under Routing Info The Add Originating Entry dialog box appears NODE2OIP Add Originating Entry Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 427 IP Trunk Administration 7 F IP Trunk Installation and Administration In the Add Originating Entry dialog box you enter information that routes the call data between originating and terminating locations You need to enter information that allows the IP Trunk to route calls based on dialed digits or on the line
179. E is arbitrary Typically when using a DS1 interface the originating switch should be administered as DTE and the terminating switch as DCE This field is similar to the pre R7 Connected Data Module field It is administered on the Data Module screen type proc intf for the si model and type x 25 for the r model Used for identification purposes only It is administered on the Data Module screen This field is similar to the pre R7 Identification field 294 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Data Module type netcon Data Extension Type netcon Physical Channel __ Name Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Name BCC _ COS _ Maintenance Extension COR _ TN Maximum Bit Rate ITC restricted ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code From above list _ ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name 1 Common Fields Physical Channel Maintenance Extension Maximum Bit Rate See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Identifies the number of the Network Control Packet Interface data channel identified as a netcon data channel This field appears only the si models Valid Value Usage 1to8 The
180. EDPRO changes the board s mode to MEDPRO e Sfx blank Name Reserved IP displays automatically Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 33 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Maintenance Related System Parameters IP Parameters Four parameters on the Maintenance Related System Parameters screen set threshold values for network performance page 4 e Roundtrip Propagation Delay sec High 800 Low 400 e Packet Loss High 40 Low 15 e Ping Test Interval sec 20 e Pings per Measurement Interval 10_ These parameters have no effect unless the bypass function is activated on the Signaling Group screen If the bypass function is activated for a signaling group ongoing measurements of network activity collected by the system are compared with these values If the values of these parameters are exceeded by the current measurements the bypass function terminates further use of the network path associated with the signaling group The following actions are taken when thresholds are exceeded e existing calls are maintained e incoming calls are allowed e outgoing calls are blocked on this signaling group if so administered blocked calls are diverted to alternate routes either IP or circuits as determined by the administered routing patterns You can use the default values set for these parameters or you can change them to fit the needs of your network
181. EMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 0 Port Code Sfx Name Night Sig Grp 1 O1c1801 TN464 E 1 2 O1c1802 TN464 E 1 3 O1c1803 TN464 E 1 4 O1c1804 TN464 E 1 5 6 7 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 213 Switch Node 1 Administration Group 14 tie to Switch Node 4 page 1 add trunk group 14 Group Number 14 Group Name Switch 1 to Switch 4 tgl4 Direction two way Dial Access y Queue Length 0 Comm Type voice BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out Outgoing Dial Type Wink Timer msec Digit Treatment Connected to Toll n Incoming Dial Tone y 1200 Bit Rate Disconnect Supervision Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Group 14 Page 2 add trunk group 14 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Connected to CO Group 14 member assignments GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port 01c1701 TN767 F 01c1702 TN767 F 01c1703 TN767 F wink wink tone 300 Code Sfx Name 4 Networking Example Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Type tie COR 1 Outgoing Display n Busy Threshold 99 CDR Reports TN 1 TAC Trunk Signaling Type Night Service Incoming Destination Auth Code n Trunk Flash n Incoming Rotary Timeout sec Incoming Dial Type Disconnect Timing msec Digits Sig Bit Inversion STT Loss normal DTT t
182. Enable Set to y Appl Enter mis for the CMS connection on Processor Channel 1 Mode Set the Mode to s server on both switches for connections to CMS Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 5 data module screen on this switch Interface Chan For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway 1 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 90 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi Field Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be
183. Extensions is 8 Extension 5200 60XXX and 61XXX RNX 222 3 Switch C Dial Plan for extensions is 51XXX and 52XXX RNX 223 Administration for Network Connectivity 352 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Considerations If a user at extension 41000 wants to call extension 61234 there are two choices Dial 61234 e Dial the AAR access code followed by 222 1234 If 61234 is dialed the system recognizes 61 as a remote UDP determines the associated RNX 222 and uses AAR to route the call to 222 1234 If the AAR access code and 222 1234 are dialed the system finds the route pattern for RNX 222 and routes the call to the switch associated with that RNX Whenever UDP is used to route a call to another switch the correct digit deletion and insertion must be specified within the route pattern so that the receiving switch gets digits in the format it expects DEFINITY ECS can be configured in several different ways e If AAR is available on the receiving switch Subnet Trunking can be used to insert the AAR feature access code on the originating switch or digit insertion may be used to insert it on the receiving switch The receiving switch then uses AAR digit conversion to convert 222 with 7 digits to an extension by deleting 3 digits and inserting a 6 e If AAR is not available on the receiving switch Subnet Trunking must be used on the originating switch to del
184. FINITY ECS R8si The following tasks need to be completed for Switch 1 Switch 2 and Switch 3 1 2 Review checklist Switch administration a Assign node names b Assign link via a data module to Switch 2 c Assign link via a data module to the LAN d Assign processor channels Switch 2 administration a Enable bus bridge connectivity b Assign node names c Assign link via a data module to Switch 1 d Assign processor channels e Assign IP Route Switch 3 administration a Assign node names b Assign link via a data module to Switch 1 c Assign processor channels Enable links and processor channels 146 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Prerequisite Administration There are some system administration tasks that need to be completed before you can proceed with the connectivity administration described in this section Review the checklist of prerequisite administration tasks in the Checklist for Prerequisite Administration page 54 before proceeding with the connectivity administration in this section Configuration 5A SWITCH 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 3 DEFINITY ECS
185. FINITY ECS network is not connected to any other network that is the DEFINITY ECS network is private This topology clearly solves all three access security concerns mentioned above However a private network is not an option for all customers Private segment Another topology is to put the DEFINITY ECS network on a private segment behind a router or a firewall This approach can also solve all three concerns above by implementing packet filtering in the router firewall such that only legitimate traffic can pass through Open network One other topology that may be chosen is a completely open network where DEFINITY ECS nodes are placed on the customer network just like any other piece of data networking equipment An open network topology addresses none of the three security concerns above and other methods of access control must be used for these installations Network administration refers to how a DEFINITY ECS specifically the C LAN circuit pack is administered in terms of dial up PPP ports and routing information A carefully administered system has only dialup ports in service for DCS and adjunct sessions that will be established at boot time This means that normally there will not be any ports available for a hacker to dial into Additionally the C LAN circuit pack should be administered only with routes specific to the DCS and adjunct nodes This ensures that anyone getting into a DEFINITY ECS can only get to other DCS or adjun
186. ID 77730 171 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si 4 Switch 3 administration a Assign node names b Assign link via a data module to the LAN c Assign processor channels 5 Enable links and processor channels Prerequisite Administration There are some system administration tasks that need to be completed before you can proceed with the connectivity administration described in this section Review the checklist of prerequisite administration tasks in the Checklist for Prerequisite Administration page 54 before proceeding with the connectivity administration in this section 172 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Configuration 5B 3 C LAN Administration SWITCH 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 3 DEFINITY ECS R7csi DEFINITY ECS R7r DEFINITY ECS R7si software defined connections Processor Interface Interface Processor nterface Interface Processor channels channels channels channels channels channels channels 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5000 5000 E 5000 500 2 E 5003 Bo pos 5003 x any F777 31 7 6004 32 64500 384 64500
187. INITY switch Enter values in these fields Node Name IP Address IP Interfaces Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces screen One line on this screen must be administered for each C LAN and each IP Interface board Enter values in these fields Network regions are interconnected Enable Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address Region Ethernet Data Module A data module screen type ethernet must be administered for each C LAN board on the switch Enter values in these fields Type Port Link Name Network uses 1 s for broadcast address Administration for Network Connectivity 36 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Signaling Group Each H 323 trunk must be assigned to a signaling group Enter values in these fields page 1 Group Type Trunk Group for Channel Selection Near end Node Name Near end Listen Port Far end Node Name Optional Far end Listen Port Optional LRQ Required Calls Share IP Signaling Connection Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded Page 2 Administered NCA TSC Assignment NCA TSCs need to be administered only if this signaling group is to be used for DCS AUDIX MASI or as Gateway Administration of TSCs is the same as in previous releases Trunk Group Each H 323 trunk must be assigned to a trunk group which is assi
188. IP Do the following procedures to administer the Intuity system Network Addressing If not already done you must set up the basic networking addressing for the Intuity system Do the following 1 Beginning at the Lucent INTUITY Main menu select gt TCP IP Administration gt Network Addressing The system responds with the Network Addressing window ee SN Network Addressing TCP IP Interface eeE 0 Host Name denaudix IP Address 192 168 1 125 Subnet Mask 192 168 1 224 Default Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 97 2 Use Worksheet A to enter the correct values in this window 3 Press F3 Save 4 Continue with the next procedure Administer Switch Interface Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 93 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Administer the Switch You must now administer the switch interface Do the following Interface 1 Starting at the Lucent INTUITY Main menu select gt Switch Interface Administration gt Call Data Interface Administration gt Switch Link Administration The system responds with the Switch Interface Administration window Switch Interface Administration O Switch Link Type LAN Country UNITED STATES Extension Length 4 Switch DEFINITY OVERLAN Host Switch Number 1 AUDIX Number 1 Switch IP Address TCP Switch IP Addre
189. IP interfaces are on the same network 192 168 1 they must be assigned the same subnet mask In this example the subnet mask 255 255 255 224 divides the network 192 168 10 into 6 usable subnets This C LAN IP Interface node 5 is on the first subnet See Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces page 77 for an explanation of this subnet See Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 for a detailed description of subnetting Leaving this field blank adds a level of network security for this IP interface but requires that IP routes be administered to enable communication with nodes on different sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 2 of 2 86 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module on Switch 2 for the ethernet connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da n add data next Data Extension Type Port Link 3201 ethernet 01a0517 5 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Name ethernet on link 5 This data module is assigned the next av
190. ITY messages or a combination of both on ISDN D channels There is no B channel related to the connection no data or voice transmissions take place There are two types of temporary signaling connections e Call Associated CA TSC e Non Call Associated NCA TSC A CA TSC refers to a service for exchanging USER INFORMATION messages associated with an ISDN B channel connection by the call reference value of the call control data packets On DEFINITY ECS this type of TSC is used only for DCS features on ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol a Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 369 QSIG NCA TSC B Private Networking An NCA TSC is a connection not related with any ISDN B channel connections DECINITY ECS supports two types of NCA TSC that conform to two different protocol standards The non QSIG AT amp T type of NCA TSC is used for the DCS over ISDN PRI D channel and DCS AUDIX applications Only ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol a support AT amp T NCA TSCs For further information see page 322 The QSIG type of NCA TSC is used for certain QSIG features such as Call Completion Automatic Call Back This type of NCA TSC is referred to in the QSIG protocol standards as a Call Independent Signaling Connection CISC Only ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol b supp
191. Identifies the processor channel that this processor channel is serving as a gateway to Valid entries Usage 1 128 csi model Two processor channels on the gateway switch are needed 1 256 si model to set up a gtwy tcp gateway which converts between 1 384 r model X 25 and TCP IP protocols For each of the two gtwy tcp processor channels the Gtwy To field points to the other gtwy tcp processor channel For example if processor channels 5 and 17 are used for a gtwy tcp gateway Gtwy To for processor channel 5 would be set to 17 and Gtwy To for processor channel 17 would be set to 5 Mode Identifies whether the IP session is passive client or active server Valid Usage entries c client This field must be blank if the type of interface link is x 25 r model s server or procr intf si model This field cannot be blank if the type of blank interface link is ethernet or ppp Set the Mode to s for ppp or ethernet connections to CMS Set opposite values c lt gt s on the endpoints for ppp or ethernet connections between switches or between a switch and Intuity AUDIX 274 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Interface Link Identifies the physical link carrying this processor virtual channel Valid entries Usage 1 25 csi si For the csi model all links up to 25 must be used for tcp ip 1 33 1
192. Installation and Administration 12 In the Destination Address IP field type the Internet Protocol IP address of the destination IP Trunk on the remote switch 13 In the Port field type the port number to be used for this connection The port number used in all IP Trunk servers is 5000 14 Click OK The Add Originating Entry dialog box closes and the Dial Routing Plan dialog box appears showing the information you entered Repeat the above steps for each originating entry line or dialed string specified in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets and or the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites Incoming calls To administer routing for incoming terminating calls start at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the Configuration Manager icon The Configuration Manager appears IP Trunk Configuration Manager Local Machine 2 Click the Dial Routing Plan tab The Dial Routing Plan dialog box appears Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 429 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration 3 In the Machine Name box select the local machine name for the local IP Trunk server 4 Select Terminating 5 Click Add under Routing Info The Add Terminating Entry dialog box appears NODE20IP Add Terminating Entry EJ Entry Type Accept v Search Digits 77 O Cancel Replace Digits None Line Number J 6 In the Add Termina
193. LING OPTION hot line HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code From above list ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name de This form applies when the Destination Number field is set to eia and Link 1 add data module next Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Data Extension 3456 Name Type procr intf COS 1 Maintenance Extension Physical Channel __ COR 1 Destination Number eia ITC TN 1 Establish Connection n Link 1_ DTE DCE DTE Connected To Enable Link n Clocking ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION HOT LINE DESTINATION Abbreviated Dialing Dial Code From above list ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name Administration for Network Connectivity 266 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Common Fields See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Physical Channel A number used by the switch software to identify the physical channel Valid Value Usage A 2 digit A multi carrier cabinet system supports the use of two number equal to Processor Interface circuit packs the first circuit pack the link number mounted in Control Carrier A supports physical channels or entered on this links 01 through 04 the second mounted in Control Carrier screen A supports physical
194. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Release 8 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Comcode 108678749 Issue 1 April 2000 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Your Responsibility for Your System s Security Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your com pany s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associ ated with your telecommunications system and if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunica tions services You and your system manager are responsible for the security of your system such as programming and configuring your equipment to pre vent unauthorized use The system manager is also responsible for reading all installation instruction and system administration docu ments provided with this product in order to fully understand the fea tures that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unaut
195. MENT Link Channel A Link Channel B Link Channel A Le 0 Ei E nly A 22 PAB ee E _s en MOE 32 _ Lee TES 4 __ ae 20 rin ew 5 ae lt 5 213 gt CES 68 as a S 22 TEN 2S Ue a 23 a Je 24 _ 9 ee S as ws 25 aoe alg _ ea 26 i zz LN EL a es 28 n EEs 135 DNI 14 _ ae re o 30 eas tas See ES Si e 16 32 Page 1 of 4 Link Channel B Observe the following when assigning hop channels e The Link Chan pair must not be assigned to a local processor channel on the Processor Channel Assignments screen e The four associated hop channel fields must be either filled in or left blank Pages 1 through X of the Screen HOP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Link Chan Link Chan Priority Link Chan Link Chan Priority Page 1 of 2 This is a two page screen for G3si and a four page screen for G3r 300 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Link Chan nel Priority Enter an interface link number in each field Valid entries Usage 1to 8 blank Enter a channel number in each field This field is labeled Channel for G3r and Chan for G3si Valid entries Usage 1 to 64 blank Indicates whether the hop c
196. MS depending on the physical connectivity Endpoint Type Must be assigned as adjunct An endpoint type is a type of packet switched data endpoint that uses X 25 call control procedures The X 25 Endpoint connects to external ports on the PGATE board and to the TDM bus via a DS1 trunk Ports connected to the adjunct endpoint can be either DTEs or DCEs Valid entries Usage adjunct Set to adjunct for DCS CMS or Intuity AUDIX Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 269 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Error Logging Used to record X 25 protocol errors in the hardware error log Valid Value Usage y n Set to n for normal operations Set to y for testing Permanent Virtual Indicates that the logical channels for PVC are allowed for this port default is y Circuit cannot be changed Valid Value Usage y n Default is y Switched Virtual Indicates that the Switched Virtual Circuit is not allowed for this port default is n Circuit cannot be changed Valid Value Usage y n Default is n Highest PVC Logical Indicates that 1 to 64 Logical Channels are allowed on this port Channel Valid Value Usage 1 64 Leave at 64 for normal operations default is 64 Data Module type x 25 Page 2 Page 2 of 2 DATA MODULE LAYER 2 PARAMETERS Number of Outstanding Frames w 4 Retry Attempt Counter N2 2 Frame Size N1 135 Retransmissio
197. N etMeeting handles the voice communications To administer a road warrior application you must complete these steps 1 Verify that the DEFINITY system is enabled for IP Softphone use On the System Parameters Customer Options screen verify that Maximum H 323 Stations is gt 0 Maximum IP Softphones is gt 0 IP Stations is y 2 On the DEFINITY system add an H 323 station using the Station screen Type H 322 Port X Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 11 IP Softphones 1 Networking Overview 3 Add a DCP station or change an existing DCP station using the Station screen Type enter the phone model you wish to use such as 6408D Port X if virtual or the port number of an existing phone Security Code enter the user s password Media Complex Ext enter the extension of the H 323 station from the previous step IP Softphone y Go to page 2 Service Link Mode as needed 4 Install the IP Softphone software on the user s PC 5 Install an H 323 V2 compliant audio application such as Microsoft NetMeeting on the user s PC Administration for Network Connectivity 12 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview IP Addressing This section describes IP addressing subnetting and routing Physical Addressing The Address Resolution Protocol ARP software on the C LAN circuit pack relates
198. N790B Processor bus pd le data TDM bus TDM bus TDM bus Pktint Digital hs TN1655 10BaseT ethernet Y S b PGATE Packet bus Packet bus O Ext 4121 Ext 2102 node 1 node 3 loc 1c0102 Ext 3391 Ext 4351 loc 1b0117 loc 1a1017 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 3 oydfec3a EWS 052099 Administration for Network Connectivity 100 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network A node is defined as any of the following a C LAN port a bridge or router a CMS ethernet port or an Intuity AUDIX or other MSA network interface card The Audix and MSA node name and IP address must be entered on page 1 of the screen The data for all other node types must be entered on pages 2 6 The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system
199. Name BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port COR 1 Link TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection _ DESTINATION Digits Node Name CHAP y Chap Secret Common Fields See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used to specify the network and host portions of the IP address for the C LAN port that is identified in the Port field The IP address is administered on the Node Names screen and is associated with the port location via the node name which is a common field on the Node Names and ppp Data Module screens When a new ppp Data Module is created the system populates the Subnet Mask field with one of three default subnet masks depending on the node name you enter in the Node Names field If the node name is associated with a Class C address on the Node Names screen the Subnet Mask field is populated with the default Class C subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Similarly if the node name is associated with a Class A or Class B address on the Node Names screen Class A 255 0 0 0 or Class B 255 255 0 0 default subnet masks automatically populate the Subnet Mask field The default subnet masks correspond to no subnetting If you want to create subnetworks you have the option to override the default subnet mask by entering a different subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field If you enter a subnet mask the
200. Name IP Address clan al 192 168 10 31 clan a2 192 168 20 31 default 00 30 50 medpro al 192 168 10 81 medpro a2 192 168 20 81 medpro a3 192 168 10 82 medpro bl 192 168 10 83 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for e Each C LAN ethernet port on the network Each IP Interface Medpro board on the local switch The default node name and IP address is used to set up a default gateway if desired This entry is automatically present on the Node Names screen and cannot be removed When the Node Names screen is saved the system automatically alphabetizes the entries by node name IP Address Enter a unique IP addresses for each node named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 39 H 323 Trunk Administration Task 2 Define IP Interfaces 2 H 323 Trunks The IP interface for each C LAN and MedPro board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Task 2 Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i Enable Eth Pt Type Slot C LAN 01A10 MEDPRO 01A13 MEDPRO 01A16 C LAN 01A09 MEDPRO 01B13 MEDPRO 01B09 SKKKKKK change ip interfaces IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed Code Sfx Node Name TN799 B clan al TN802 B medpro
201. Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 13 ethernet connection to Switch 3 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 1 eth is the server for this session Set node 3 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 1b data module screen For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The value 5003 is recommended for the DCS connec
202. Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 59 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Configuration 1 Rer lt ppp gt R8si Configuration is a ppp connection between a DEFINITY ECS R8r and a DEFINITY ECS R8si switch in a DCS network Switch 1 Switch 2 DEFINITY DEFINITY ECS ECS R8r R8si node 1 node 2 DS1 Ms DSi ppp C LAN C LAN Task Summary Complete the following tasks for Switch 1 and Switch 2 1 Review prerequisite administration checklist 2 NODE 1 administration a Assign node names b Assign link via a data module to node 2 c Assign processor channels 3 NODE 2 administration a Assign node names b Assign link to via a data module node 1 c Assign processor channels 4 Enable links and processor channels Administration for Network Connectivity 60 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Prerequisite Administration There are some system administration tasks that need to be completed before you can proceed with the connectivity administration described in this section Review the checklist of prerequisite administration tasks in Checklist for Prerequisite Administration page 54 before proceeding with the connectivity administration in this section Configuration 1 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 DEFINITY ECS R7r DEFINITY ECS R7
203. ON NUMBER PORTABILITY NUMBERING PLAN ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP ENP Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Ox 1x 2 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 9x 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 01 IL 21 glg 41 51 61 71 81 91 02 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 03 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 05 T5 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 06 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 96 07 T7 27 Sie 47 57 67 77 87 97 08 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 98 09 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 99 EPN Code Assign a 3 digit code to translate each 4 or 5 digit UDP extension that is node number routed to a 7 digit AAR like number used for outpulsing a call within an ENP sub network This field maps each leading digit of a UDP extension to an ENP Code or blank Valid entries 000 to 999 blank Usage Enter 3 digit ENP code Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 299 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens Hop Channel Assignments Screen A Screens Reference This screen assigns Hop Channels The maximum number of connections that may be established between channels on the system s interface links varies depending on System configuration HOP CHANNEL ASSIGN
204. Pro IP Ethernet port Valid Values Usage y n The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen If an enabled Ethernet port is changed to disabled all signaling and or media connections will be removed and the associated calls will be torn down The busy out command applied to the circuit pack for the interface overrules the Enable Eth Pt field Type Specifies the type of circuit pack for the IP network interface C LAN or MedPro Slot Specifies the location of the circuit pack for the IP network interface in the standard CCcss format CC cabinet number c carrier letter ss slot number Code Display only Specifies the board code of the circuit pack for the IP interface This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only Specifies board code suffix This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and the TN799 Node Name The unique node name for the IP interface The node name must be on the Node Names screen pages 2 6 only node names on page of the Node Names screen cannot be used in this field Administration for Network Connectivity 248 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens Subnet Mask Gateway Address Valid Values The valid values of the subnet mask depend on the IP address that the subnet mask is applied to
205. R7csi DEFINITY ECS R7r DEFINITY ECS R7si software defined connections Processor Interface Interface Processor nterface Interface Processor channels channels channels channels channels channels channels 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5000 5000 5000 500 2 A 12 gt 5003 13 f 5003 x any 7 77 gt 31 y 6004 32 64500 384 64500 64500 256 Link 1 Link 2 Link 1 I hardware connections Processor Processor UN331B TN790B Processor bus i ss Voice Ala 7 DS1 Network r DS1 Ea data m767 control TN767 Wie J TN767 Thee weer TN464 J PPP UN332B TN464 TN464 data T T A SCAT SETE TDM bus ida 10BaseT ethernet C LAN bee TN799 A Packet bus Packet bus Packet bus cydfec5a KLC 081999 node 2 node 1 ppp node 1 eth node 3 Ext 3020 Ext 2376 Ext 2377 Ext 3901 loc 1a0413 loc 1c0815 loc 1c0817 loc 1a0517 192 168 10 12 192 168 10 130 192 168 10 128 192 168 10 129 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 147 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Swit
206. RI trunk groups When the calling party is on a System 85 or Generic 2 When the DCS name message is not received by the remote coverage point s system Go to Cover Go to Cover is not supported over DCS and therefore is not supported with DCS Call Coverage 326 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Call Forwarding Call Waiting DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel Leave Word Calling Back to Principal With DCS Call Coverage a covering user on a different node cannot press their LWC button to leave a message for the principal to call the covering user Queuing DCS Call Coverage interacts with queuing in the following way If a call is queued to a coverage point such as a queue to a hunt group or an ACD split and the queue is not full the call remains in the queue without subsequent redirection until answered or until the caller hangs up If the forwarding extension and the designated extension are at different nodes and the designated extension s coverage criteria are met on a forwarded call the call is redirected to a point in the designated extension s coverage path If the forwarding extension and the designated extension are at different nodes LWC and Coverage Callback cannot be activated at the designated extension for a forwarded call There is a 30 second interval during which calls forwarded f
207. Rate 1 544 Line Coding b8zs Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode isdn pri Connect pbx Interface network Country Protocol Protocol Version Interface Companding mulaw CRC Idle Code 11111111 DCP Analog Bearer Capability 3 1kHz IB pa Slip Detection n Near end CSU Type other Administration for Network Connectivity 208 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration Connection to Switch Node 4 4 Networking Example add dsl 1c17 Page 1 of 2 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01C17 Name Switch 1 to Switch 4_ Bit Rate 1 544 Line Coding b8zs Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode robbed bit Interface Companding mulaw Idle Code 11111111 DMI BOS n Slip Detection n Near end CSU Type other Dial Plan display dialplan Uniform Dialing Plan UDP Extension Search Order FIRST DIGIT TABLE First Digit 1 ake 2 Se 4 5 6 Ue 8 9 0 238 DIAL PLAN RECORD Local Node Number ETA Node Number 4 digit ETA Routing Pattern local extensions first Length 4 extension extension extension extension Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 209 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Signaling Group Page 1 change signaling group next Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 1 Group Type Associated Signaling y Max number
208. Reports 585 215 822 Issue 2 Application specific documents ACD These documents support specific DEFINITY applications DEFINITY Communications Systems G3 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Agent Instructions 555 230 722 Issue 5 Provides information for use by agents after they have completed ACD training Includes descriptions of ACD features and the procedures for using them DEFINITY Communications Systems G3 Automatic Call Distribution ACD Supervisor Instructions 555 230 724 Issue 4 Provides information for use by supervisors after they have completed ACD training Includes descriptions of ACD features and the procedures for using them Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 463 Console operations Hospitality Non U S audiences G References The primary audience for these documents consists of attendant console users DEFINITY ECS Release 7 Console Operations 555 230 700 Issue 4 Provides operating instructions for the attendant console Included are descriptions of the console control keys and functions call handling procedures basic system troubleshooting information and routine maintenance procedures DEFINITY ECS Release 7 Console Operations Quick Reference 555 230 890 Issue 3 Provides operating instructions for the attendant console Included are descriptions of the console control keys and functions call handling procedures ba
209. S Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 DCS Call Coverage 326 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 ISDN Feature Plus 358 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 Call Detail Recording CDR feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS 327 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 380 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 Call Forwarding feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 QSIG Additional Network Feature Transit Counter ANF TC 381 Call Forwarding feature interactions continued QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Call Transfer 380 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 call identification tones 340 Call Management System CMS feature interactions QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 380 Call Park feature interactions DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 ISDN Feature Plus 358 Call Pickup feature interactions DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 Call Vectoring feature interactions QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 380 Call Waiting Termination feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 381 Called name 361 CallVisor ASAI feature interactions DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channe
210. SC CA TSC Pattern Group Request 2 2 0 3 y at setup 3 3 0 3 y at setup e Gateway Channel form Signaling Group TSC Index Processor Application Channel 2 2 60 audix 2 4 61 audix e Processor Channel form Proc Application Inter Channel Remote PBX ID Channel Link Proc Channel 59 audix 1 1 1 1 57 gateway 1 2 2 58 gateway 1 3 3 Administration for switch 2 e Dial Plan form Start Dig Len Usage 4 4 ext 5 4 ext 6 4 ext e Uniform Dial Plan form Ext Code Type Location Code 4Xxx UDPcode 221 6XXX UDPcode 223 e AAR Digit Conversion form Matching Min Max Del Replacement Net Conv Pattern String 222 7 7 3 ext n Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 335 Distributed Communications System e AAR Analysis Table B Private Networking Dialed String Min Max RtePat Call Type Node Num 221 7 7 aar 1 223 7 7 aar 3 e Signaling Group form Signaling group 4 TSC Local Enabled Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext Ext PBX ID 1 5900 y permanent 4900 1 des 2 5901 y permanent 4901 audix Signaling group 5 TSC Local Enabled Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext Ext PBX ID 1 5905 y permanent 6905 3 des e Trunk Group form Group Grp Type Used DCS PBXID NCA TSC for Sig Sig Group DCS Method 1 isdn pri y d chan 1 3 isdn pri y d chan 5 This field is only used for tandeming e Routing Pattern form Routing Trunk FRL Del TSC CA TSC Pattern Group Request 1
211. SDN SSF trunk the callback call attempt is redirected to the forwarded to party over the SSF trunk Call Park If a forwarded to diverted to extension user parks a call that has been forwarded from an ISDN SSF trunk the call normally is parked on the forwarded to extension not on the forwarded from called user of the ISDN SSF trunk Administration for Network Connectivity 358 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 ISDN Feature Plus B Private Networking e Feature Plus Message Waiting Indication Audio Information Exchange AUDIX Feature Plus MWI depends on the presence of a Message Center Whenever DEFINITY ECS acts as a Message Center switch there is an interaction between DEFINITY ECS and AUDIX DEFINITY ECS must be able to receive messages from AUDIX then if applicable send the appropriate Feature Plus MWI message to the network Similarly if DEFINITY ECS receives a Feature Plus MWI message DEFINITY ECS translates the Feature Plus message into the appropriate AUDIX message and passes it to AUDIX The only messages that DEFINITY ECS handles are AUDIX messages along the BX 25 link Feature Plus MWI can interwork with Basic AUDIX including INTUITY AUDIX and with DEFINITY AUDIX with the DCIU control link Feature Plus MWI does not work with the DEFINITY AUDIX that emulates a DCP voice terminal or with versions of AUDIX that communicate to DEFINITY ECS mode codes DEFINITY ECS implementation requires
212. TY ECS switch software and Configuration Manager to route calls over IP trunks DEFINITY ECS uses the dialed digit string to select a route pattern and thus a trunk group for each call The IP Trunk software matches each trunk line or each dialed string to a specific IP address The following administration needs to be performed on both the origin and destination switches if you can t administer the remote switch coordinate this work with the administrator at the other site The following general instructions assume that you know how to use Automatic Alternate Routing AAR and Automatic Route Selection ARS to route conventional calls To administer IP call routing on DEFINITY ECS 1 Administer the AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table on DEFINITY ECS with the information you entered in the Switch Admin tables on the worksheet 2 After you ve assigned a route pattern in the AAR or ARS Digit Analysis Table add the IP trunk group to that route pattern if you haven t already done so 3 Make the IP trunk group the first preference in the route pattern and perform any other administration required on the Route Pattern screen Note If you want to route calls over the normal telephone network when transmission quality over the IP network is unacceptable assign one or more conventional trunk groups to the route pattern as backups DEFINITY ECS will route appropriate calls to the IP trunk group Now you need to administer Configura
213. TY switches in the network are routed to this trunk group and the IP Trunk server s administration evaluates the dialed strings it receives and routes the calls to the appropriate IP address based on that dialed string To arrange a network in this configuration an administrator will need to know each IP Trunk server s IP address and the range of extensions in the DEFINITY at that location Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 433 Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites F IP Trunk Installation and Administration In Switch A above the IP Trunk server s originating entries will be as follows in order for calls through that IP Trunk server to be routed to Switch B and Switch C appropriately Line Search Replace IP Address String String Any 44 44 198 152 169 238 Switch B Any 49 49 198 152 169 238 Switch B Any 43 43 198 152 169 236 Switch C Any 34 34 198 152 169 236 Switch C These entries allow any line port on the IP Trunk server to carry calls to the other two locations It also allows each unique string extension range destined for one of the other two locations to be evaluated and routed to the appropriate location There would need to be terminating entries in Switches B and C that correspond to the entries above allowing the appropriate dialed strings to be terminated at those locations For example in order for calls to be received at Switch A from Swit
214. The Maintenance Related System Parameters screen can be administered by the init inads or craft logins Open the screen with the change command ch sys ma The IP Media Parameters screen allows you to specify the type of codec used for voice encoding and companding compression decompression The main difference between codecs is in the compression algorithm used some codecs compress the voice data more than others A greater degree of compression results in lower bandwidth requirements on the network but may also introduce transmission delays and lower voice quality The default codec is set for G711 The G711 provides the highest voice quality because it does the least amount of compression but it uses the most bandwidth The G711 default setting can be changed to one of four other codecs if the G711 does not meet your desired voice quality bandwidth tradeoff specification Also if the far end switch is a not a DEFINTTY ECS you may need to change the codec to match one that is supported by that switch The order in which the codecs are listed on this screen is the order of preference of usage A trunk call between two DEFINITY switches will be set up to use the first common codec listed on the two IP Parameters screens NOTE The codec ordering must be the same on DEFINITY switches at both ends of an H 323 trunk connection The set of codecs listed need not be the same but the order of the listed codecs must be the same 34 Adm
215. The NTSC is a division of the Electronic Industries Association EIA MMCX video transmissions conform with NTSC requirements national number The full dialed number minus the country code The national number is composed of office code plus subscriber code In North America this means area code plus seven digits For example 303 538 1234 is a national number NCA TSC Noncall associated temporary signaling connection NCOSS Network Control Operations Support Center NCSO National Customer Support Organization NEC National Engineering Center 480 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 NEMA Glossary NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association NETCON Network control circuit pack Network A collection of computer like devices nodes that are connected by and can communicate across a common transmission medium Network Adapter The interface between a node and the network has a unique physical address Network Interface Card NIC A circuit board that can be fitted to a personal computer PC to allow the PC to communicate with other machines on a network MMCX works with Ethernet cards and with asynchronous transfer mode ATM cards running Ethernet emulation Also called a network adapter NFAS See Nonfacility associated signaling NFAS NIC See Network Interface Card NIC Node 1 A point on a network that provides
216. Trunk Identification by Attendant feature is used during busy verification of a trunk Trunk ID button is pressed the trunk access code and trunk group member number of the DCS tie trunk being used is displayed e DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks transparency is lost if the routing pattern is administered to not delete the RNX and the AAR prefix is inserted on the terminating switch trunk group The voice terminal display at the terminating switch displays only a station name Extension is left blank DCS Call Coverage has the same interactions as Call Coverage plus the following additional interactions e Call Coverage Off Premises If the coverage point is a non UDP number in the remote call coverage table Call Coverage Off Premises is applied to the call rather than DCS Call Coverage even if a DCS link exists to the remote system e Coverage Answer Groups DCS Call Coverage to Coverage Answer Groups on remote systems are not supported by DCS Call Coverage Coverage answer groups cannot be administered on a system other than the principal s system e Coverage Call Back DCS Call Coverage does not support Coverage Call Back from a remote node e Displays The displays on the DCS Call Coverage point s terminal may be different than those associated with the Call Coverage feature in the following situations When the call from the calling party to the principal or the redirected call to the coverage point travel over ISDN P
217. Types dte dce procr intf The DTE DCE assignments must be x 25 opposites on the two ends of the connection Remote Loop Around Activates deactivates remote loop around testing Test Valid Entries DataModule Usage Types y n procr intf Set to n unless testing pdm Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 261 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Data Module Type ethernet Use the ethernet data module type to define an interface between port 17 on the C LAN board and the LAN This data module associates a link number and extension number with the C LAN port address add data module next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 2377 Name ethernet on link 2 Type ethernet Port 01c0817 Link 2 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y Common Fields See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Network uses 1 s for This field allows you to specify whether the DEFINITY system is to use all 1 s or all broadcast addresses 5 in the host ID to form broadcast addresses sent on the network by this C LAN board Valid Usage Entries y n Leave the default y 1f the private network contains only DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network default is y includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of forming broadcast addresses as described below The
218. Values that may display are five carrier and single carrier stack This field shows the type of carrier Note Note For G3r if the Carrier Type as administered through the Cabinet Administration screen does not match the physical hardware the Code fields may display question marks Valid entries Usage Display only field Values that may display are dup switch node expansion control not used port processor and switch node The slot equates to the physical slot of the given carrier the number of slots displayed depends on the system being configured For G3r the number of slots represent all administrable slots available for the given carrier type e For G3si all slots that could possibly be administered are displayed even if they do not apply to the current configuration of the system This is to accommodate the situation when a system is being reconfigured Valid entries Usage Display only field 278 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Code Enter the circuit pack code If there is a physical circuit pack installed in the slot the entry must match that of the circuit pack If there is equipment administered on a slot the equipment must be removed from the circuit pack before the circuit pack can be changed or removed Valid entries Usage TN followed by a 3 or 4 digit number of a valid DEFINIT
219. X 2C1DX X Total Mn is j h Total Mn bl Total Mx 4 dl Total Mx Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each exchange X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each exchange X MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with l Same Same Create Different country z your actual a area entries Country different values code area code Originating Search string 1A2B2DX 1C2DX Xx Replace string 1A2B2DX 1C2DX Xx IP Address 2G 2G 2G Terminating Search string 2A1B1DX 2C1DX Xx Replace string 1FX 1FX 1FX Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each exchange X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each exchange X MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in o Same Create Sian Different country Same your actual area entries Country different values code area code Originating Search string 2A1B1DX 2C1DX X Replace string 2A1B1DX 2C1DX X IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Search string 1A2B2DX 1C2DX X Replace string 2FX 2FX 2FX
220. Y circuit pack a valid ADXxxx number a valid ASAIxx number a valid DIGx number LGATE TN802 For the IP Interface assembly TN802B MAPD There must be at least two empty slots preceding the slot administered as code TN802 The Code field for these empty slots will automatically be populated with DSMAPD which must be changed to MEDPRO for the MedPro mode of the IP Interface TN802B Sfx Enter the circuit pack suffix if applicable Valid entries Usage Bto 2 blank Mode This is a display only field that shows the circuit pack mode if applicable Note Valid entries Usage Display only field Name This is a display only field showing the alphanumeric name of the circuit pack such as Digital Line Note Note When the circuit pack physically inserted in the slot differs from what has been administered on this screen a displays between the Sfx and Name fields Valid entries Usage Display only field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 279 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Signaling Group The Signaling Group screen defines the signaling parameters for ISDN PRI H 323 and ATM signaling groups Type ISDN PRI The ISDN PRI Signaling Group screen identifies groups of DS1 interface B channels for which a given D channel or D channel pair carries associated signaling information The Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS feature allow
221. You cannot activate QSIG SS CC if the call uses a controlled trunk group AUDIX You cannot activate QSIG SS CC towards AUDIX SS CC to any transferred to station is not allowed Automatic Call Distribution ACD You cannot activate QSIG SS CC towards a voice terminal after dialing the ACD group extension It is possible to invoke SS CC towards a station when dialing the individual s extension number You can activate SS CC from any ACD agent Bridged Call Appearance You cannot activate QSIG SS CC from a bridged call appearance When a call originates from a primary extension number the return call notification rings at all bridged call appearances Busy Verification After the called party in a QSIG SS CC call hags up neither extension number can be busy verified until both the calling and called parties are connected or the callback attempt is canceled by the activating party or by time out of the callback interval Call Coverage QSIG SS CC requests are always activated at the principal user and not coverage points Similar to ACB QSIG SS CC Call Completion calls to the called user can redirect to coverage Call Forwarding You cannot activate SS CCBS or SS CCNR towards a called station that has Call Forwarding enabled Call Pickup On recall at the originating side a group member cannot answer a QSIG SS CC call for another group member Call Waiting Call Waiting is denied when QSIG SS CC is activated to the single line voice terminal Conf
222. a for the G723 1 codec is 22 The endpoint carried load is 10 000 calls x 1 CCS holding time per call 36 CCS per Erlang 277 8 Erlangs From the MedPro table 15 MedPro boards are required rounding up Since there are 2 sockets per call for H 323 endpoints the socket carried load is 2x277 8 555 6 Erlangs Using the C LAN formula 555 6 448 2 C LAN boards are required rounding up 412 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 E C LAN Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing and making the physical connections to the circuit packs that are new for R7 the C LAN TN799 and the NetPkt TN794 circuit packs The C LAN circuit pack is optional for R7 but required for TCP IP connectivity in all switch models The NetPkt circuit pack is required for R7 in the si model only These instructions are also included in the upgrades and installation documents for each switch model They are duplicated here for convenience and completeness Overview Systems in a DCS network are interconnected by both tie trunks for voice communications and data links for control and transparent feature information Various DS1 interface circuit packs including TN464C TN767C TN722 and TN760 provide the voice communications interface For TCP IP connectivity the data link interface is provided by a TN799 C LAN circuit pack The C LAN handles the data link sig
223. ached for this route The location of the C LAN circuit pack that provides the interface for this route Enter 1 which indicates a complex route involving two C LAN boards See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for more information on the use of the Metric field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 187 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Route C LAN b to node 2 This task specifies a route for packets handled by C LAN b destined for node 2 This route is needed because node 1b and node 2 are connected via ppp and there are intermediate nodes between them Steps Begin gt Enable the ppp link on the node 1b data module screen ch da 2378 set Enable Link to y gt Open the IP Routing form enter a ip n add ip route next Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 3 Destination Node node 2 Gateway node la C LAN Board 1c08 Metric 1 The system assigns the route number 3 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Destination Node The name of the node at the destination of this route Gateway Node name of the gateway by which the destination node is reached for this route C LAN Board The location of the C LAN circuit pack that provides the interface for this route Metric Enter 1 which indicates a complex route involving two
224. administered for presentation unrestricted However non restricted data is sent restricted if the trunk group administration is set for presentation restricted ISDN numbering formats Numbering is specified on the ISDN Public Unknown Numbering and or ISDN Private Numbering forms The numbering form you use depends on how you administer the ISDN trunk group Numbering Format field However if you format the Called Party Number with public numbering the Calling Connected Party Number is created in the public format even if you specify private on the ISDN trunk group form This provides the caller or called party a number that can be used to reach the other party Since the call routes through the public network the public Calling Connected Party Number is a more accurate address Call Forwarding works over a QSIG network When a call has already been forwarded 3 times over a QSIG trunk it is not forwarded again but instead terminates at the final forwarded to terminal Remote activation and deactivation of this feature are not supported QSIG Call Transfer is based on the current DEFINITY ECS Transfer and Trunk to Trunk Transfer features QSIG Transfer signaling occurs as long as one of the calls involves a QSIG trunk between the two switches Once a call is transferred the transferring switch is unnecessary Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR is invoked automatically to connect the transferred call more eff
225. ailable extension 3020 gt Enter values Field Type Port Link Name Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses gt Submit the screen End Conditions Comments This indicates the data module type for this link Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 1a05 The link number must be in the range 1 25 R8csi not previously assigned on this switch Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command Leave the default y if the private network contains only DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 87 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign IP Route to Switch 1 This task specifies a route for packets sent by the node 5 IP interface the ethernet port on the switch 2 C LAN board to the nodes 1 and 2 An IP route is required because node 5 is on a different subnetwork from nodes 1 amp 2 as defined in the Subnet Mask field on the IP Interfaces screen and the Gateway Address field for node 5 on the IP Interfaces screen was left blan
226. ailed description 363 interactions Adjunct Switch Applications Interface ASAT 381 Attendant Call Waiting 381 Attendant Console Group 38 1 Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 382 AUDIX 382 Automatic Call Distribution ACD 382 Bridged Call Appearance 382 Call Coverage 382 Call Forwarding 382 Call Pickup 382 Call Waiting 382 Call Waiting Termination 381 Direct Department Calling 383 Hold 382 Hotline Service 382 Internal Automatic Answer IAA 383 Manual Originating Line Service 383 Multimedia Endpoints 383 Outgoing Trunk Queueing 383 Termination Extension Group TEG 383 Transfer 382 Uniform Call Distribution 383 Vector Directory Numbers 383 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Offer feature 363 invoking 363 queues Centralized Attendant Service CAS 339 DCS Call Coverage 327 Recorded Announcement feature interactions QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 release link trunks RLT 339 Remote Access feature interactions Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 remote hold 339 remote operation service element ROSE services protocols 369 rerouting calls when IP transmission quality is poor 439 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 499 Index restoring IP trunk 425 routing pattern example 225 232 routing patterns example 217 satellite switches 344 Screen XV screen IP routing 251 screens analog dm data module 297 circuit packs 277 commun
227. al extension so that it is possible to dial that attendant directly rather than dialing the attendant group ISDN non QSIG On an incoming attendant seeking call calling party information may be received at the branch for a call coming in over an ISDN trunk Leave word calling LWC Message Retrieval is not available for the branch PBX Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 391 QSIG B Private Networking Malicious Call Trace MCT MCT is a feature that is performed on existing calls MCT does not generate new attendant seeking calls MCT will work in QSIG CAS provided the attendants performing MCT Activate MCT Control and MCT Deactivate are all on the same PBX That is an attendant on the main cannot work with an attendant on the branch to perform MCT Multifrequency Signaling Calls coming into a branch over Multifrequency trunks are subject to intercept and may be sent to the attendant at the main Multifrequency signaling can indicate that an incoming call on an MF trunk terminate at the attendant regardless of the dialed extension Night Service Night Service is available to QSIG CAS If a branch PBX is in night service then all attendant seeking calls for that branch are routed to the night service destination not the CAS attendant If the main PBX is in night service then all attendant seeking calls at the main either incoming from the main or branch are ro
228. all if requested by the user On an incoming CAS call to the main attendant the Name field from the trunk group form for that RLT displays to the attendant Therefore you should administer the field to provide meaningful branch identification information Music on Hold feature at branch applies to two stages of LDN calls during call extension and Remote Hold Abbreviated Dialing The main attendant can use an Abbreviated Dialing button to extend CAS calls after obtaining branch dial tone Attendant Auto Manual Splitting The SPLIT lamp and button do not function on CAS main calls extended via the RLT trunk Attendant conference does not function on CAS calls Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access If a branch attendant has control of an outgoing RLT trunk group new attendant seeking calls route to the branch attendant Attendant Override of Diversion Use Attendant Override of Diversion with CAS Attendant Serial Calling Attendant Serial Calling does not work for CAS calls Automatic Alternate Routing and Automatic Route Selection CAS calls can be routed using AAR and ARS Busy Indicator Buttons Busy indicators can identify incoming calls over an RLT You can also use Busy indicators to dial after the attendant starts to extend a call Call Coverage Redirect calls to a centralized attendant by Call Coverage Do not redirect calls to a CAS backup extension for backup service via Send All Calls to the backup extension s c
229. all administered NCA TSCs assigned in this Signaling Group Valid entries Usage accunet i800 inwats lds mega800 megacom multiquest operator sdn sub operator wats max bnd Facility Type 0 and 1 user defined services blank Administration for Network Connectivity 284 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference As needed Inactivity Time out min The inactivity time out for as needed NCA TSCs assigned in the Signaling Group An as needed administered NCA TSC staying inactive in this time period will be removed from service Valid entries Usage 10 to 90 blank TSC Index Specifies the administered NCA TSCs assigned Valid entries Usage Display only field The administered NCA TSC index represents one DCS or DCS AUDIX logical channel connecting any two switches The Index number ranges from 1 64 Local Ext Used to assign an extension on the switch to the administered NCA TSC The extension cannot be previously assigned to another administered NCA TSC station or data module and so on Valid entries Usage An unassigned extension number blank Enabled Enables or disables the administered NCA TSC Valid entries Usage y Enter y to enable the administered NCA TSC a Establish Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA TSC Valid entries Usage permanent An entry of permanent means that the administere
230. alling Party Restriction Feature Access Code ARS Access Codel ARS Access Code2 Route Pattern e All Trunk Group CAMA All None Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 343 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Extended Trunk Access How to administer ETA Detailed description Examples of ETA administration Use Extended Trunk Access ETA in conjunction with Uniform Dial Plan UDP to allow DEFINITY ECS to send any unrecognized number such as an extension not administered locally to another switch for analysis and routing Such unrecognized numbers can be Facility Access Codes Trunk Access Codes or extensions that are not in the UDP table Non UDP numbers are administered on either the First Digit Table on the Dial Plan Record form or the Second Digit Table They also are not administered on the ETA Call Screening Table ETA helps you make full use of automatic routing and UDP Form Field Dial Plan Record e ETA Routing Pattern First Digit and Second Digit Tables ETA Node Number ETA Call Screening Table e Call Screening Entry A CAUTION Switches can be chained together using ETA However you must ensure that switches do not route in a circular ETA call setup Switch A can route to switch B and switch B can route to switch C But if switch A routes to switch B and switch B routes to switch A you create a circular ETA call setup Historic
231. ally ETA has been used by satellite switches to access stations trunks and features at the main switch ETA frees you from having to enumerate the entire dial plan for the main or satellite complex Calls that would get intercept treatment without ETA are routed to a remote switch to be reprocessed The following processing takes place when ETA is administered e ETA call is identified because it fails all other routing possibilities e The dialed string is not in the ETA Call Screening Table e An available route pattern is selected based on the Dial Plan form ETA Routing Pattern or ETA Node Number entries e The dialed string is sent to the remote switch CASE 1 e ETA Route Pattern Not administered e ETA Node Number Not administered In this case ETA is not active It is not used to route undefined dialed strings CASE 2 e ETA Route Pattern Administered e ETA Node Number Not administered 344 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Interactions In this case the ETA Route Pattern routes undefined dialed strings However since an ETA Node Number is not specified non call related DCS messages are not routed CASE 3 ETA Route Pattern Not administered ETA Node Number Administered In this case the ETA Node Number provides the route pattern Non call related DCS messages also can rout
232. ames for the following 3 nodes C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 1 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 2 for the ppp connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enterad da 3020 add data module 3020 Data Extension Type Port Link Enable Link Node Name Subnet Mask DATA MODULE 3020 PPp_ 01a0413 1 a node 2 255 255 255 Establish Connection n Page 1 of x Name _ppp on link 1 to node 1 ppp BCC 2 cos 1 COR 1 TN 1 DESTINATION Digits Node Name node 1 ppp CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01204 the ppp connection is through port 13 Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8csi not previously
233. an have one or more pages In some parts of this book he terms screen and form are used interchangeably The term node has two meanings for DEFINITY ECS switches connected in a network In a DCS network node means a switch or adjunct This is how the term is used on the Dial Plan screen for the field name Local Node Number With TCP IP connectivity node has a different meaning it refers to an interface to a network For example each of the 17 ports on the C LAN board is a node in this sense This is how the term is used on the Node Names Data Module Processor Channel and IP Routing screens This is also the common usage in a data networking environment With these definitions a DCS node a switch can have many IP nodes network interfaces In this book node is used in the second sense as a network interface A DCS node is referred to as a switch or in Chapter 4 as a switch node The official name for the TN802B circuit pack is ZP Interface assembly It is a media processing circuit pack in a 3 slot wide assembly It can be administered to operate in one of two modes JP Trunk mode or MedPro mode MedPro is a contraction of the words media processor Since the TN802B IP Interface assembly does media processing it is also referred to as the MedPro board The TN802B IP Interface assembly is an IP interface for DEFINITY ECS it connects directly to a 10 100BaseT LAN or WAN whi
234. an administered 12 Trunk groups assigned 13 Dial plan administered 14 Uniform dial plan administered 15 AAR analysis administered 16 Route pattern administered 17 Hunt groups assigned 3 of 3 Configurations The task descriptions are presented in six relatively simple configurations Each configuration describes how to administer either a 2 switch connection or a 3 switch gateway connection The procedures for administering these configurations can be used either individually or in groups as building blocks for constructing most networks involving DEFINITY ECS R8 and pre R7 switches The following table lists the configurations described in this chapter Config Switch Connection Switch Connection Switch Page uration 2 1 1 R7si ppp R7r page 60 2 R7csi ethernet R7r page 73 CMS 3 Si bx 25 R7r ethernet R7si page 99 4 csi isdn R7si ppp R7csi page 124 SA R7csi ppp R7r ethernet R7si page 146 5B R7csi ppp R7r ethernet R7si page 171 2 C LAN boards The first 2 configurations are simple 2 switch networks The next two are 3 switch networks with Switch 1 serving as a gateway between different signaling types for connection 1 and connection 2 The last two configurations are ppp ethernet networks 5B is the same as 5A except the Switch 1 has two C LAN boards instead of one Administration for Network Connectivity 56 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Overview 3 C LAN Administration TCP IP connections ppp or ethern
235. an transmit in a given period of time measured in bits per second not bytes per second on digital networks or in Hertz cycles per second on analog networks For analog transmission the band width can be measured as the difference expressed in hertz between the highest and lowest frequencies transmitted baud A unit of transmission rate equal to the number of signal events per second See also bit rate See bearer capability class BCC bearer capability class BCC Code that identifies the type of a call for example voice and different types of data Determination of BCC is based on the caller s characteristics for non ISDN endpoints and on the Bearer Capability and Low Layer Compatibility Information Elements of an ISDN endpoint Current BCCs are 0 voice grade data and voice 1 DMI mode 1 56 kbps data transmission 2 DMI mode 2 synchronous asynchronous data transmission up to 19 2 kbps 3 DMI mode 3 64 kbps circuit packet data transmission 4 DMI mode 0 64 kbps synchronous data 5 temporary signaling connection and 6 wideband call 128 1984 kbps synchronous data Bit error rate Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS B8ZS line coding substitutes a mix of 1s and Os for every group of eight consecutive Os in a stream of AMI encoded data see line coding The encoded string contains consecutive ones with the same polarity These intentional bipolar violations of the AMI coding scheme let the receiving end ident
236. and Intuity AUDIX the Machine ID is the Local Node Number on the dial plan For the qsig mwi and p mwi applications the Machine ID is the index used on the Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes screen Machine ID is not used for the CMS adjunct Administration for Network Connectivity 276 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens Circuit Packs A Screens Reference This screen administers circuit packs to carrier slots before the circuit packs are actually installed in the carrier or cabinet This allows the system to be configured administered when the circuit packs have not yet been physically inserted in their appropriate slots Before any voice terminals attendant consoles or trunks can be administered in the system the correct type of circuit pack must be installed in the appropriate slot or using the Circuit Pack screen a circuit pack must be assigned to the slot The Circuit Pack Administration screens do not have to be completed if the system cabinet is equipped with the circuit packs at the time of administration However for switch node carriers these screens must be administered Note For initial installation procedures circuit packs should only be assigned slots per the hardware Configuration Layout record obtained from the factory or Customer Services Support Organization Arbitrarily assigning circuit packs to slots should not be attempted because t
237. and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0 _ 0_ 0_ 0 node 1a ppp 192 168 10 11 node 2 192 168 10 12 node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 3 nodes e C LAN a PPP port on Switch 1 for the connection to Switch 2 C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 190 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 1 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 2 for the ppp connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 3020 add data module 3020 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 3020 Name _ppp on link 1 to node la ppp BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01a0413 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link
238. and Peripherals 555 233 116 Issue 1 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of ECS adjunct and peripheral systems and equipment DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Installation and Test for Compact Modular Cabinets 555 233 118 Issue 1 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of compact modular cabinets DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 ATM Installation Upgrades and Administration 555 233 124 Issue 1 Provides step by step instructions for how to install upgrade and administer ATM switches DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Installation and Maintenance for Survivable Remote EPN 555 233 121 Issue 1 Describes how to install cable test and perform maintenance on a Survivable Remote Expansion Port Network SREPN Provides power ground and fiber connections DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8 2r 555 233 115 Issue 1 Provides procedures for an installation technician to upgrade an existing DEFINITY Communications System or DEFINITY ECS to DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Includes upgrade considerations lists of required hardware and step by step upgrade procedures Also includes procedures to add control carriers switch node carriers port carriers circuit packs auxiliary cabinets and other equipment DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Upgrades and Additions for R8 2si 555 233 122 Issue 1 Provides procedures for an installation technic
239. and data Also 1 A circuit switched call 2 In wideband all of the time slots contiguous or noncontiguous necessary to support a call Example an HO channel uses six 64 kbps time slots 3 ADSO on a Tl or El facility not specifically associated with a logical circuit switched call analogous to a single trunk circuit 1 An arrangement of electrical elements through which electric current flows 2 A channel or transmission path between two or more points circuit pack A card on which electrical circuits are printed and IC chips and electrical components are installed A circuit pack is installed in a switch carrier Class of Restriction COR A feature that allows up to 64 classes of call origination and call termination restrictions for voice terminals voice terminal groups data modules and trunk groups Class of Service COS A feature that uses a number to specify if voice terminal users can activate the Automatic Callback Call Forwarding All Calls Data Privacy or Priority Calling features circuit switched network A network that sets up and maintains a connection for the exclusive use of two or more communicating parties for the duration of their call The familiar voice telephone network is circuit switched See packet switching clear channel facility A digital circuit that requires no in channel framing or control bits The whole bandwidth is thus available for data transmission client An application
240. and reconstructs the original sequence of samples Time division multiplexing is typically used on circuit switched networks Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 487 time slot Glossary time slot 64 kbps of digital information structured as eight bits every 125 microseconds In the switch a time slot refers to either a DSO on a Tl or El facility or a 64 kbps unit on the TDM bus or fiber connection between port networks trunk A communication line linking two switches public network PBX or MMCxX server trunk group A collection of trunks that all terminate at the same public switch PBX or MMCX server UDP 1 User Datagram Protocol Transport layer Connectionless unreliable fast 2 Uniform Dial Plan UNP Uniform numbering plan unrestricted data Data that has to travel over an unrestricted facilities because it can be corrupted by Zero Code Suppression ZCS line coding Digital data is unrestricted data unrestricted facilities PRI spans that use non ZCS line coding such as B8ZS or HDB3 end to end See Zero Code Suppression ZCS VCI The ATM virtual channel identifier ATM is a connection oriented service that sets up a virtual circuit between the transmitter and the receiver The two endpoints negotiate an agreed route through the network before sending any data VCI and VPI together constitute the virtual circuit number that identifies this route
241. ansmissions can use all of the bandwidth available to them see clear channel facility Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 485 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Glossary Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP An International Standards Organization ISO protocol that sets standards for communications between network components and network management stations SNMP handles network resources using the information contained in a management information base MIB a virtual database resident on the various parts of the network SNMP supports security configuration performance fault management and accounting management SNMP is part of the ISO Open System Interconnect OSI Model specification SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Same as call detail recording CDR SNMP SPE See Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Switch Processing Element subnet A network within a larger network Subdividing a network into subnets improves the efficiency of routing and makes the best use of the limited number of addresses available with any given addressing scheme Subnetworks are defined by using part of the host machine portion of the IP Internet Protocol address as an additional layer of network information Routers can then distinguish between a networking part that is significant for internet intranet routing and a host machine part which is significan
242. any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 71 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level connectivity can remain intact when
243. are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies SESSTM 4ESS AUDIX Callvisor Callmaster e CentreVu CONVERSANT DEFINITY DIMENSION e INTUITY MERLINO VOICE POWER The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of AT amp T ACCUNET DATAPHONE lt MEGACOM MULTIQUEST TELESEER The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated MS DOS registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation MULTIQUEST registered trademark of Telecommunications Service ProShare registered trademark of Intel Corporation UNIX trademark of the Novell Corporation Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 xix Trademarks Preface Administration for Network Connectivity XX CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 1 Networking Overview This chapter provides background information that will help you understand and use the information in the remainder of the book There are two major sections in this chapter The first section describes how DEFINITY ECS switches can be connected with a focus on IP connectivity The second section describes IP addressing and subnetting DEFINITY Switch Connectivity This section describes the basic components of a network of DEFINITY switches and how voi
244. aring no tunneling 2 call Number of sockets per H 323 2 while on call DID trunk As a worst case example of these limits assume 1000 active H 323 endpoints each requiring 3 C LAN connections and G 723 codec processing This configuration would require 3x1000 508 6 C LANS and 1000 22 46 MedPros Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Performance Overview Definitions D Capacities and Performance This section presents methods for estimating e the impact on the processor e the impact on the TDM bus e the number of C LAN boards e the number of MedPro boards Given assumptions about e the number of H 323 endpoints of road warrior applications of telecommuter applications of native H 323 phones of H 323 Tie trunks of H 323 DID trunks e average number of C LAN connections per H 323 endpoint e number of audio streams per DSP e grade of service GOS e average call holding times Offered Load The telephone traffic arriving at a system for processing The offered load is equal to or greater than the carried load Carried Load The telephone traffic actually processed by a system The carried load is equal to or less than the offered load Endpoint Carried Load The average number of IP Softphones H 323 trunks on active calls to the DEFINITY system Socket Carried Load The average number of active C LAN connections be
245. arrier Medium IP Night Service TestCall ITC rest QSIG Value Added Lucent n Digital Loss Group 13 Numbering Format async Duplex full gt Enter values Field Group Type Carrier Medium Service Type TestCall ITC TestCall BCC Codeset to Send Display Note Outgoing Display Conditions Comments Enter isdn Enter ip Enter tie Enter unre unrestricted Enter 0 Enter 0 This field may need to be changed if the far end is anon DEFINITY switch Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 45 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks gt If using DCS go to screen page 2 add trunk group n Page 2 of 10 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment n Measured none Wideband Support n Internal Alert n Maintenance Tests y Data Restriction n NCA TSC Trunk Member Send Name n Send Calling Number n Used for DCS y PBX ID 4 Suppress Outpulsing n DCS Signaling d chan Outgoing Channel ID Encoding exclusive UUI IE Treatment service provider Replace Restricted Numbers n Replace Unavailable Numbers n Send Connected Number n Send UCID n Send Codeset 6 7 LAI IE y gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Used for DCS Enter y PBX ID Enter the switch ID This is the value in the Destination Node Number field on the Dial Plan Record screen of the remote switch DCS Signaling Enter d chan Note These fields may need to b
246. ary Services field is y If the system is using QSIG Supplementary Services with Rerouting Supplementary Services with Rerouting field is y If the system is using QSIG VALU Value Added Lucent VALU field is y 8 For ISDN PRI only Administer or check the QSIG DS 1 circuit pack see Appendix A Check for the following field entries Connect field pbx Interface peer master or peer slave Peer protocol q sig Signaling mode isdn pri or isdn ext Channel Numbering sequential or timeslot This item must match between the local switch and receiving switch 9 For ISDN BRI only Administer or check the QSIG ISDN BRI circuit pack see Appendix A 372 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking 10 Administer or check the QSIG ISDN trunk group s PRI or BRI connected to the DS 1 or BRI circuit pack see Appendix A Check for the following field entries on Page 1 Group type isdn Supplementary service protocol b or d where ISO QSIG standards including the ETSI Version 2 and b European Computer Manufacturer s Association ECMA standards aligned with the ISO standards ETSI Version 1 and ECMA standards issued prior to the ISO standards for QSIG private network supports only Name Identification and Additional Network Feature Transit Counter ANF TC For Supplementary Services with or without Rerouting End
247. as follows Send Name field is y Send Calling Number field is y Numbering Format field is Private Send Connected Number field is y On each remote switch repeat steps 3 5 On each DEFINITY switch in the network enter change dialplan on the command line of your system administration screen Administer the dial plan for each node in the network see Chapter 4 in this document for examples Usually the hub is considered Node 1 If the network contains Merlin Legend Magix systems Uniform Dialing Plan field is 4 for each node If the network contains only DEFINITY systems Uniform Dialing Plan field is 4 or 5 For each DEFINITY node enter change feature access codes on the command line Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 397 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code B Private Networking 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 On page 2 verify fields as follows Leave Word Calling Send a Message field is 90 Leave Word Calling Cancel a Message field is 91 Note All nodes in the system and the Voice Mail system must match this setting For each DEFINITY node enter add ds1UUCSS on the command line where UUCSS is the address of the DS1 circuit pack On page 1 verify fields as follows Line Code field is B8ZS Framing field is extended superframe Signaling Mode field is ISDN PRI Connect field is PBX
248. ask Assign IP Route to node 3 This task specifies a route for packets handled by node 2 that are destined for node 3 An IP route is required for this route because there are intermediate nodes between node 2 and node 3 Steps Begin gt Enable the ppp link on the node 2 data module screen ch da 3020 set Enable Link to y gt Open the IP Routing form enter a ip n add ip route next Route Number Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING 4 node 3 node 1la ppp 1a04 0 The system assigns the route number 4 gt Enter values Field Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric gt Submit the screen End Conditions Comments The name of the node at the destination of this route Node name of the gateway by which the destination node is reached for this route The location of the C LAN circuit pack that provides the interface for this route For simple routes the gateway node is on this circuit pack Enter 0 See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for more information on the use of the Metric field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 195 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This
249. assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 159 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name n means that the switch at the remote end of this connection Switch 1 in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for Switch 1 Not needed if the Establish Connection field is set to n Name of the node at the far end of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Prot
250. atures such as Call Completion Automatic Call Back This type of NCA TSC is referred to in the QSIG protocol standards as a Call Independent Signaling Connection CISC Only ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol b support QSIG NCA TSCs For further information see NCA TSC page 370 The AT amp T type of NCA TSC is used for the DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel and DCS AUDIX applications Only ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol a support AT amp T NCA TSCs An AT amp T NCA TSC is an administered virtual connection established for exchanging USER INFORMATION messages on the ISDN D channel Once an AT amp T NCA TSC has been administered and enabled it is active for an extended period of time There are two types of administered NCA TSCs depending on their setup mechanism Permanent can be established by Near end or Far end As needed Once enabled a permanent NCA TSC remains established while the system is running If the permanent NCA TSC drops for any reason the system attempts to reestablish the connection An as needed administered NCA TSC is established based on user request and the availability of TSC facilities The connection drops after an administered period of inactivity The system can transport DCS or DCS AUDIX messages over an ISDN PRI D channel and over BX 25 data links when functioning as a gateway between a switch equipped with DCS Over ISDN PRI D c
251. ause they have all 0 s or all 1 s for host IDs For example in the third subnet the fourth octet of the first IP address is 96 01100000 and the fourth octet of the last IP address is 127 01111111 The network address of a subnet is the first IP address the all 0 s host ID of that subnet In this example the subnet addresses of the six subnets are 1st 192 168 1 32 2nd 192 168 1 64 3rd 192 168 1 96 4th 192 168 1 128 5th 192 168 1 160 6th 192 168 1 192 See Chapter 1 for more information on IP addresses and subnetting Enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway for the IP interface Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 78 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module for the ethernet connection to the CMS adjunct and to Switch 2 The data module defines a network interface it associates a link number with a port address and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data module next Data Extension Type Port Link 2377 ethernet 01c0817 2 Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Name ethernet on link 2 Network uses 1
252. bal communications full function networks with data and voice convergence and network optimization by using the existing network resources The TN802B IP Interface in Medpro mode enables H 323 trunk service using IP connectivity between two DEFINITY ECS systems H 323 trunk groups can be configured as DEFINITY specific tie trunks supporting ISDN trunk features such as DCS and QSIG or as generic tie trunks permitting interconnection with other vendors H 323 v2 compliant switches or as direct inward dial DID type of public trunk providing access to the switch for unregistered users A variety of signaling options can be chosen by the system administrator The IP Trunk mode of the TN802B IP Interface will typically be chosen for interoperability with existing TN802 as opposed to the TN802B IP Interface circuit packs IP Trunk mode can be used only between two DEFINITY switches Each IP Interface circuit pack in IP Trunk mode provides a basic twelve port package that can be expanded up to a total of 30 ports DEFINITY IP Softphones operate on a PC equipped with Microsoft Windows 95 98 NT and with TCP IP connectivity to DEFINITY ECS DEFINITY IP Solutions supports three IP Softphone configurations e Road warrior application of IP Softphone a PC running the DEFINITY IP Softphone application and an H 323v2 compliant audio application with a single IP connection to a DEFINITY server e Telecommuter application of IP Softphone
253. ce 5 Click Start Started appears in the Status column 6 Click Close 7 Release the IP trunk group on DEFINITY ECS Change companding to For systems that use A Law instead of Mu Law companding you need to change two A Law settings on the System Parameters Country Options screen and edit a ini file in the Windows NT C directory on the TN802 On the SAT 1 On the System Parameters Country Options screen change the Companding Mode field to A Law and change the Base Tone Generator Set field to 2 2 Busyout the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing busyout board UUCSS and pressing Enter In the Windows interface to TN802B 3 Click on Control Panel gt Services 4 Highlight IP Trunk Service then click on Stop 5 In the lower left hand corner right click Start gt Explore 6 Go to the c drive and click on its then bin 7 Double click on the its ini file to open it in Notepad 8 Under the MediaLib section go to COMPANDING MLAW Change MLAW to ALAW 9 Click on File gt Save to save the file 10 Click on File gt Exit to exit Notepad 11 Click on Control Panel gt Services 12 Highlight IP Trunk Service then click on Start Note Do not select Startup After service has started go to the SAT 13 Release the trunk group associated with the IP trunk by typing release board UUCSS and pressing Enter Administration for Network Connectivity 432 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Procedures for Extension
254. ce Administration Screen on the AUDIX platform Valid entries Usage 1 99 blank Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 303 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Synchronization Plan This screen assigns primary and secondary external synchronization sources This provides synchronization between the switch and digital facilities that the switch is connected to When the switch is connected to digital facilities the switch both Processor Cabinets and Expansion Cabinets must be synchronized to the incoming data rate of 8 000 frames per second This timing information reference may be derived from DS1 facilities or from a Stratum 3 external clock Loss of the reference signal excessive phase changes and variation in timing frequency can cause loss of data or dropped data connections When no external digital facilities including Stratum 3 external clocks are present or when a switch is the master node of a network providing timing to the rest of the network the timing can come from an oscillator on the switch s tone clock circuit pack The Synchronization Plan may not be required for some digital connections The switch s internal clock may suffice Page 1 of the screen Page 1 of X SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum _ Port Network _ Primary __ Secondary Location Name Slip Type Location
255. ce and signaling data are transmitted between switches for the different types of switch connections It also provides a summary of the administration procedures for connecting switches via an IP network using the C LAN and TN802B MedPro circuit packs Connectivity Overview Why connect switches DEFINITY switches can be connected in various ways for various reasons The main motivation for connecting switches is to enable people within an enterprise to easily communicate with one another regardless of their physical location or the particular communications server they are assigned to Inter switch connections also enable the sharing of communications resources such as messaging and Call Center services What kinds of Trunks connections are y possible Switches communicate with each other over trunk connections There are several kinds of trunks each kind provides a different set of services for the connection Commonly used trunk types are Central Office CO trunks which provide connections to the public telephone network through a central office and tie trunks which provide connections between switches in a private network These and other common trunk types are described in DEFINITY ECS Administrator s Guide 555 233 506 DEFINITY ECS Release 8 introduces the H 323 trunk which allows voice and fax data to be transmitted over the Internet to another DEFINITY system with H 323 Trunk capability The H 323 trunk supports Q 931
256. ce feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 MedPro mode 31 message associated user to user information MA UUI 320 Message Waiting Indication how to start administration 355 Messaging Server MS Interface feature forms 293 metric IP routing 253 Microsoft NetMeeting changing audio settings 446 configuring 445 making calls to the IP trunk application 447 Modem Pooling feature interactions Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 multimedia endpoints 383 MWI Subscriber Number Prefixes screen 303 n307 netcon data module screen 295 network diagram example 204 network IP route 28 network map example 207 network security 403 Networks DEFINITY 2 Night Service features interactions Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 348 night console service Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 trunk answer from any station TAAS Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 Node xv node 203 default 22 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 497 Index node names example 218 238 node names screen 245 node names assign 38 node number routing screen 302 nonattendant consoles 342 noncall associated temporary signaling connections NCA TSC 321 369 NT administration IP Trunk 426 Off Premises Station feature interactions QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 ones density 478 outgoing trunk queueing 383 PBX 488 configuring DEFINITY ECS 421 performance pro
257. cent Technologies BCS Publications Center 2855 N Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 Order Document No 555 233 504 Comcode 108678749 Issue 1 April 2000 For additional documents refer to the appedix References You can be placed on a standing order list for this and other docu ments you may need Standing order will enable you to automatically receive updated versions of individual documents or document sets billed to account information that you provide For more information on standing orders or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this document contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center European Union Declaration of Conformity The CE mark affixed to the DEFINITY equipment described in this book indicates that the equipment conforms to the following European Union EU Directives e Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC e Low Voltage 73 23 EEC Telecommunications Terminal Equipment TTE i CTR3 BRI and i CTR4 PRI For more information on standards compliance contact your local dis tributor Comments To comment on this document return the comment card at the front of the document Acknowledgment This document was prepared by Product Documentation Develop ment Lucent Technologies Denver CO Contents Preface Ix AES nadie oia id ix AUCIGNCE cu dada e a ix SUS oss et NY aa ue act ice es EE ia aos dado dear aan Bala ix OrganizatO gia iria asis dais xiv TSHMINOIOGY cli
258. cessor 412 ping see utility programs ping pinouts C LAN 416 placing IP trunk test calls 440 prerequisite administration checklist 54 Private Network Access feature 348 349 forms 348 interactions Attendant Call Waiting 349 Attendant Intrusion Call Offer 349 Private Networking features Centralized Attendant Service CAS 338 DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 313 DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 313 DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection 313 DCS Attendant Display 313 DCS Automatic Callback ACB 314 DCS Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA 314 DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks 314 DCS Call Coverage 315 DCS Call Forwarding 317 DCS Call Waiting 317 DCS Distinctive Ringing 317 DCS Leave Word Calling LWC 317 DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer 318 DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS 320 DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication 318 Distributed Communications System DCS 312 Enhanced DCS EDCS 319 Extended Trunk Access ETA 344 Private Networking features continued Extension Number Portability ENP 346 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 Italian DCS Protocol DCS 319 Private Network Access 348 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 367 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 362 368 QSIG Call Transfer 362 QSIG Name and Number Identification 361 See also QSIG features Uniform Dial Plan UDP 350 processor channel Assignment example 239 processor channel assignment example 221
259. ch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 90 O 0 0 node 1 ppp 192 168 10 130 node 1 eth 192 168 10 128 node 2 192 168 10_ 12_ node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 4 nodes C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End 148 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via
260. ch B and C the terminating entry in the IP Trunk would be as follows Line Search String Replace Siring Any 6 6 From any switch to Switch A Only one digit is required to uniquely identify calls to this location no other location has extensions that begin with 6 and since this encompasses the entire range of extension numbers only this entry is required Administration for Network Connectivity 434 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration DCS over IP Trunk IP Trunk supports most of the DCS features DCS signaling with IP Trunk can be either X 25 or TCP IP For X 25 DCS signaling the signaling data path is over a tie trunk connection between the switches For TCP IP DCS signaling the signaling data is handled by the C LAN circuit pack and can be either point to point ppp across a tie trunk facility or over the IP network Figure 10 shows the voice and signaling data path options for IP Trunk with DCS Figure 10 IP Trunk with DCS DEFINITY DEFINITY Switch 1 Switch 2 Processor Tie Trunk Tie Trunk Circuit Packs Ethernet WAN Intranet or Internet IP IP Interface Interface __ or ITS E or ITS E DCS Administration The administration of DCS with IP Trunk is the same as for DCS without IP Trunk You can set up IP Trunk connections for DCS using either X 25 or TCP IP protocols for DCS signaling X
261. ch uses the TCP IP protocols The C LAN TN799B circuit pack is also an IP interface for DEFINITY ECS In this book the terms TN802B circuit pack TNS02B IP Interface IP Interface assembly and MedPro board are used interchangeably Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 XV How to access this book from the web Preface How to access this book from the web If you have internet access you can view and download the latest version of DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Administration for Network Connectivity To view the book you must have a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader www adobe com To access the latest version 1 Access the Customer Self Service Center web site at http www lucent com enterprise selfservice Click Information Resources Click ELMO Enter your IL to access the library a A OO N Enter 555 233 504 the document number to view the latest version of the book To access this book from within the Lucent intranet go to www prodpubs lucent com How to order more copies Call Lucent Technologies Publications Center Voice 1 800 457 1235 Fax 1 800 457 1764 International Voice 317 322 6416 International Fax 317 322 6699 Write Lucent Technologies Publications Center 2855 N Franklin Road Indianapolis IN 46219 Order Document No 555 233 504 Comcode 108678749 Issue 1 April 2000 We can place you on a standing order list so that you will automatically rece
262. channels or links 05 through 08 A single carrier cabinet system supports one Processor Interface circuit pack and physical channels or links 01 through 04 only Maintenance Extension The extension used to perform maintenance functions on the standby physical channel in a duplicated system This is the extension specified on the dial plan The standby remote loop around tests fail if this field is not administered Abbreviated Dialing Specifies the type of abbreviated dialing list List 1 Valid Value Usage s system If g or p is entered a group number or personal list number g group also is required Entry in this field supports Data Hot Line p personal This field can be left blank e enhanced blank Note See Administrator s Guide 555 233 502 for detailed information on abbreviated dialing Special Dialing Option Identifies the type of dialing when this data module originates calls Valid Value Usage hot line default or Leave blank for regular normal keyboard dialing blank Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 267 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Assigned Member Ext Display only Extension and name of a previously administered user who has an and Name associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module Clocking Displays only when the Destination Number field is set to eia and Link 1 This field sets the cl
263. check the TTC ISDN trunk group s associated with the DS1 circuit pack Check for the following field entries on page 1 of the Trunk Group screen Group type isdn Supplementary Service protocol a Outgoing Display y Check for the following field entries On page 2 Disconnect Supervision y Numbering format public private unknown unk pvt Send Called Busy Connected Number y Sending Calling Number y Send Name n End 402 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 C Security Issues This Appendix briefly discusses issues related to system security for DEFINITY ECS in a TCP IP network environment Network Security Issues This section describes a strategy to ensure the security of an intranet that is connected to DEFINITY ECS R7 or later systems Overview The TCP IP connectivity available with Release 7 and later of DEFINITY ECS makes it possible to connect one or more DEFINITY ECS systems in a network that includes connections to a company s existing data network LAN or intranet This integration of networks introduces the possibility of unauthorized access to the DEFINITY network through the LAN intranet and to the LAN intranet through the DEFINITY network Security concerns Security can mean many different things The strategy described here focuses on three key concerns from a customer perspective 1 How can a c
264. chitecture craft commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes Call center documents DEFINITY These documents are issued for DEFINITY ECS Call Center applications The intended audience is DEFINITY ECS administrators DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Guide to ACD Call Centers 555 233 503 Issue 2 This module contains information about the call center specific features of the DEFINITY ECS DEFINITY ECS Release 8 Call Vectoring EAS Guide 555 230 521 Issue 4 Provides information on how to write use and troubleshoot vectors which are command sequences that process telephone calls in an Automatic Call Distribution ACD environment It is provided in two parts tutorial and reference The tutorial provides step by step procedures for writing and implementing basic vectors The reference includes detailed descriptions of the call vectoring features vector management vector administration adjunct routing troubleshooting and interactions with management information systems including the Call Management System DEFINITY ECS Release 7 Basic Call Management System BCMS Operations 555 230 706 Issue 2 Provides detailed instructions on how to generate reports and manage the system It is intended for telecommunications managers who wish to use Basic Call Management System BCMS reports and for system managers responsible for maintaining the
265. connections For the si model links numbered 1 through 4 times the number of PI circuit packs can be either x 25 or tcp ip The rest of the links up to 25 must be tcp ip For the r model links numbered through 4 times the number of PGATE circuit packs can be either x 25 or tcp ip The rest of the links up to 33 must be tcp ip Interface Chan Identifies the BX 25 virtual channel number or the TCP IP listen port channel to carry this processor virtual channel Valid entries Usage 1 64 x 25 The channel number 0 means any available port can be used 0 5000 64500 which will be automatically selected by the system ethernet or ppp For TCP IP connections the following values are recommended 5001 CMS Appl mis 5002 Intuity AUDIX Appl audix 5003 DCS Appl des not a gateway These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique 6000 Appl gtwy tcp The Interface Channel number must be unique for the gtwy tcp and gateway application types Destination Node Identifies the switch or adjunct at the far end of this link Valid entries A node name previously entered on the Node Names screen or blank Usage This must be a name entered on the Node Names scree
266. cs Line Compensation 3 Framing Mode d4 Signaling Mode robbed bit Interface Companding mulaw Idle Code 11111111 MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS 0 Slip Detection n y 2 Enter the field values as shown in the screen diagram above 3 Press ENTER to save your changes Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 421 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration More information The table below summarizes field settings on the DS1 screen for the T1 and El service emulated for IP Trunk service Field Setting for T1 Setting for El Bit Rate 1 544 2 048 Line Coding ami zcS ami basic or hdb3 Line Compensation 3 3 Framing Mode d4 Signaling Mode robbed bit cas Interface Companding mulaw mulaw Idle Code 11111111 11111111 Slip Detection n n Near End CSU type other Interconnect pbx Country Protocol 1 Creating an IP trunk Use this procedure to add a trunk group for IP trunks You can administer multiple group trunk groups on one IP Trunk circuit pack Each trunk group is assigned to virtual ports or channels on the IP Trunk circuit pack and your routing plan directs calls to certain trunks A CAUTION The fields described in the following procedure must be completed as shown If they are not the IP Trunk service may not work properly Other fields may be completed as appropriate for your system As an example add trunk group 5 and assign
267. ct nodes not anywhere else on the customer network Careful administration will address concerns 1 and 2 above Note that no new access to the system access terminal SAT such as network based SAT is introduced in Release 7 As in earlier releases of DEFINITY ECS all port and route administration can be done only via the SAT and all changes are logged Authentication also plays a role in providing access control to dial up PPP ports All of these ports can be protected by Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP This provides an extra level of assurance that no unauthorized user will be able to connect to a PPP port on C LAN 404 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Network Security Issues C Security Issues Damage control application restrictions In Summary Release 7 provides damage control by what can be termed application restrictions This simply means that DEFINITY ECS R7 has been designed to support only specific applications that is DCS and adjuncts Other applications that could present security risks have been deliberately disabled Specifically there is no support for telnet or rlogin into or out of a DEFINITY ECS making it difficult for anyone to maneuver between the DEFINITY ECS network and the customer network Additionally because of the application restrictions little damage can be done by someone attempting to hack into a DEFINITY ECS fr
268. ction Call Forwarding with Reroute uses AAR and ARS to reroute the original call Call Detail Recording Call Forwarding with Reroute is denied to calls that require Forced Entry of Account Codes Call Transfer When a forwarded call transfers the forwarding indication displays to the caller until the call is answered This display includes the trunk group name and word forward When the call is answered the word forward is removed and the name and number of the answering party displays Distributed Communications Systems Call Forwarding feature transparency does not exist on calls tandemed between a QSIG Supplementary Service protocol b network and a traditional DCS network However the basic call continues Facility Restriction Levels and Traveling Class Marks The FRL and TCM of the original call is the FRL used for Call Forwarding with Reroute Forwarding and Coverage If a coverage point is a number that routes over an ISDN Supplementary Service protocol b trunk QSIG diversion information is not passed to the coverage switch QSIG Name and Number Identification Availability of name and or number display at the originating and diverted to users depends upon how QSIG Name and Number Identification has been administered for the switches involved Terminating Call has Coverage Active If a call is forwarded off switch the terminating switch has call coverage activated and the criteria are met the call d
269. ction is through port 06 Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8csi not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 141 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi Field BCC COS COR TN Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen n means that the switch at the remote end of this connection Switch 1 in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for Switch 1 Not needed if the Establish Connection field is set to n Name of the node a
270. d NCA TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end as needed An entry of as needed means the administered NCA TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed It can be set up either by the near end or far end switch blank Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 285 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Dest Digits Used to route the administered NCA TSC to the far end switch These digits are sent as entered to the destination switch no routing or other digit manipulation is performed Valid entries Usage O through 9 Can include up to 15 digits blank Appl Specifies the application this administered NCA TSC is going to be used for Valid entries Usage audix Used for ISDN PRI D channel DCS AUDIX feature dcs Used for the DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel feature gateway Used when the administered NCA TSC will be used as one end in the gateway channel connecting to a BX 25 link If gateway is entered then the ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments screen must be completed masi blank Adjunct Name Only displays for G3r configurations Displays when the Appl field is audix Valid entries Usage Enter the name of the AUDIX as it appears on the Adjunct Names screen Machine ID Used to indicate the far end PBX or the AUDIX machine to which this administered NCA TSC will be connect
271. d associated status lamp e The status lamp remains lighted as long as backup service is in effect e To deactivate the feature the attendant presses the Backup button while the status lamp is lighted Calls are not sent to the backup extension unless all RLTs are maintenance busy or out of service CAS Remote Hold The attendant can put a CAS call from a branch on Remote Hold The branch holds the call and drops the RLT After a time out same as the timed reminder for an attendant held call the branch automatically attempts to route the call back to the attendant The returning call can queue for the RLT Attendants should use Remote Hold when they have to put a call on hold to keep RLTs from being tied up unnecessarily Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 339 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Considerations Branch generated call identification tones The branch in a CAS network generates call identification tones and transmits them to the CAS attendant by way of the RLT These tones indicate the type of call coming from the branch or the status of a call extended to or held at the branch The attendant hears these tones in the console handset before being connected to the caller The tones may vary by country See DEFINITY ECS Console Operations for information on these tones CAS Outgoing Call Routing The centralized attendant at the main has acc
272. d gig he ak eh ew A 33 H 323 Trunk Administration Task Summary 2 000202 ee eee 36 H 323 Trunk Administration Task Detail 020000004 38 Troubleshooting IP Solutions soas viee ester aa 50 H 323 Trunk Problem Solving s aca 04 Arse GPA a doe Pe ede hae 50 IP Softphone Problemi Soling s r asa aca eek Boe a i eo oe 52 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 iii Contents 3 C LAN Administration 53 OVEIVIGW sepultada Dia dia el ANE a 53 CONTGUIALIONS 2 6 Lu ae ss de in di ia ad id Rat o cs Oe Be 56 Intuity AUDIX LAN Setup Summary a 59 CMS LAN Setup Summary e a io a d a i aoi ee 59 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8Ssi 0 00 tee 60 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7cSi 000 cece 73 Intuity System Administration a o ee 92 Administer SUDSCIHDEO S sa s cna dond eRe A ao Me ee ee 95 Worksheet A Names and IP Addresses for Lucent Intuity System 96 Worksheet B LAN Data for the Lucent Intuity System 0 97 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si 99 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi 124 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si 146 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs
273. d if its associated port is a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with its Zero Code Suppression field administered as b8zs If the port is on a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with its Zero Code Suppression administered as zcs or b8zs the end validation fails and the form submission is rejected Without this end validation a user could administer an access endpoint as unrestricted when in fact it is restricted that is its associated port is a member of a DS1 circuit pack that uses ZCS data transmission Valid Entries Data Usage Module Types restricted procr intf Use restricted except for wideband endpoints nrestricted dm ki A stcon For unrestricted only unrestricted transmission facilities b8zs and hdb3 will be analog dm y used to complete the call An unrestricted facility is a transmission facility that does not enforce 1 s density digital transmission that is digital information is sent exactly as is For restricted either restricted ami zcs or ami basic or unrestricted transmission facilities is used to complete the call A restricted facility is a transmission facility that enforces s density digital transmission that is a sequence of eight digital zeros is converted to a sequence of seven zeros and a digital one via zcs coding on DS1 circuit pack DTE DCE Designates the interface defined by this data module as data terminal equipment or data communications equipment Valid Entries DataModule Usage
274. data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen n means that the switch at the remote end of this connection Switch 1 in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for Switch 1 Not needed if the Establish Connection field is set to n Name of the node at the far end of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 192 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 1 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 n 0 2 n 0 3 n 0 4 n 0 217 y des G 1 0 node 1a ppp 5003 21 12 1 23 y des g 1 0 node 3 5003 23 32 om 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments
275. de Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 181 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to C LAN b This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 1 for the ppp connection from the C LAN a circuit pack to the C LAN b circuit pack Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 2013 add data module 2013 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 2013 Name _ppp on link 12 to clan b BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01c0713 COR 1 Link 12 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node la Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 2378 Node Name node 1b CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this link Port In this example the C LAN a circuit pack is in slot 01407 the ppp connection is through port 13 Link The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y befo
276. de names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default O OQ O node 1 192 168 1 124 node 2 192 168 1 125 node 3 192 168 1 97 node 5 192 168 1 51 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter node names for the following 4 nodes node 1 C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 node 2 CMS node for consistency use the host name of the CMS computer assigned during the CMS setup procedure see Centre Vu CMS Software Installation and Setup 585 215 866 node 3 Interface on the router to the subnet of Switch 1 e node 5 C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 2 IP Address The unique IP addresses for the nodes named in the previous field See the description of the Subnet Mask field in the next task for information on valid IP addresses gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 76 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN and MedPro board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Beg
277. der digits need to be included In QSIG MWI the subscriber number is appended to the inserted digits and the resulting number is used to route over a QSIG TSC For example Dallas is a Message Center PBX and Chicago is a remote PBX e If Feature Plus is running between Dallas and Chicago and the Feature Plus extension in Chicago is 82000 the Inserted Digits to form Complete Number field administered in Dallas to get to Chicago must be 3035382000 The Routing Digits AAR ARS Access Code field also needs to be filled in appropriately If QSIG is running between Chicago and Dallas the Inserted Digits to form Complete Number field must contain 30353 The Routing Digits AAR ARS Access Code field also must be filled in appropriately Administration for Network Connectivity 356 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 ISDN Feature Plus B Private Networking Interrogation When performing an audit the Served User PBX sends a request towards the Message Center PBX As a Message Center PBX the DEFINITY ECS receives the request message maps it intoa MW STATUS REQUEST SINGLE STATION message and sends it to AUDIX on the BX 25 link When AUDIX replies to the DEFINITY on the BX 25 link with a MW STATUS UPDATE the Message Center PBX sends the information on to the appropriate Served User PBX e Ifit is a Message Center PBX the MW STATUS UPDATE indicates whether there are any messages waiting not how many messages are waiti
278. dminister tenant partitioning and multiple attendant groups on a branch PBX However all attendant seeking calls at the branch PBX are directed to the QSIG CAS number as administered on the console parameters form regardless of any tenant partition If the QSIG CAS number corresponds to the Dial Access to Attendant number at the main or to a VDN that eventually routes to the Dial Access to Attendant number at the main the call is directed to the attendant group assigned to the tenant partition of the incoming trunk to the main Attendant Interposition Calling and Transfer Attendant Interposition calling and transfer is a local feature that remains unchanged by QSIG CAS Attendants on the main still have the ability to call and transfer to each other using Individual Attendant Extensions Attendant Intrusion As with RLT CAS Intrusion is not be available in QSIG CAS to calls that are incoming from a branch Attendant Misoperation Misoperation is used only in France and Italy It is a local feature and functions as for RLT CAS If the system goes into Night Service while an attendant has a call on hold the call realerts at the attendant console If it is unanswered after an administrable amount of time the call begins alerting at the night service destination Attendant Override of Diversion As with RLT CAS Override of Diversion is not available in QSIG CAS for calls incoming from a branch Attendant Recall As with RLT CAS Att
279. dministration 4 Networking Example Switch Node 2 Administration This section displays the filled in screens for the administration of Switch Node 2 DS1 Circuit Packs add dsl 1a10 DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01a10 Name sw 2 to sw 1 Bit Rate 1 544 Line Coding b8zs Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode common chan Idle Code 11111111 DMI BOS n Slip Detection n Dial Plan change dialplan DIAL PLAN RECORD Local Node Number ETA Node Number Uniform Dialing Plan 4 digit ETA Routing Pattern UDP Extension Search Order local extensions first FIRST DIGIT TABLE First Length Digit 1 4 extension extension extension extension ake 2 3i 4 5 6 Ue 8 9 0 238 Administration for Network Connectivity 222 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 2 Administration 4 Networking Example Synchronization Plan Page 1 of X SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum Port Network Primary Secondary Location Slip Type Location Name Slip Type Olal0 y UDS1 BD NOTE TN722B TN464B DS1 sources result in stratum 4 type II synchronization Trunk Goups Group 12 page 1 display trunk group 12 Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 12 Group Type tie CDR Reports y Group Name tgl2 COR 1 TN 1 TAC 712 Direction two way Outgoing Display n Trunk Signaling
280. dule Type procr intf used for BX 25 connections with the si model 266 Data Module type X 25 used for BX 25 connections with the r model 269 Data Module type pdm used for BX 25 connections with the rmodel 272 Communication Interface Processor Channel a a 273 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 v Contents A AAA ee a a 277 Signaling Grou s i se idot iane aia Aa Se a E 280 ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments a oaoa a 291 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens 0000 0c cece eee eee eee 293 Communication Interface Links 0 e e ee ee 293 Data Module type netcon e 295 Data Module type analog dm o ee 297 Extended Trunk Access Call Screening 0 e 298 Extension Number Portability Numbering Plan 0 299 Hop Channel Assignments Screen 2 e 300 ImplementationiNOtOS lt ss sansirnar A A A RR Lee he 301 Node Number ROUNO ea ek baw ee he a ee ee a a ee 302 Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes 303 Synchronization Pla we 6 H ek a we dS A doe A Re ee E 304 Pages 1 X of ihe screen 44 8 doo oo Bo ee eA Pe ee eee Be ee es 305 Writonm Dial Plant xocs a Be ale ei ee he eG ad Eee ed AR RRA 307 Appendix B Private Networking 311 Contents of this Appe
281. dures for administering CMS and Intuity AUDIX TCP IP connections ppp or ethernet require DEFINITY ECS Release 7 or later hardware and software ISDN and BX 25 connections are supported on switches upgrading to R8 and pre R7 switches can be connected to R8 switches via ISDN or BX 25 However new systems are not sold with X 25 connections Therefore all switches in the configuration are assumed to be upgraded to release R7 or later Supported Switches and Adjuncts Csi model switches cannot have X 25 connections New R8si and R8r switches cannot have new X 25 connections but pre R7 switches with X 25 connections can be upgraded to R8 and keep the X 25 connections The vs model of DEFINITY ECS cannot be upgraded to R8 R6 3 is the last release supported for the vs model However pre R7 releases of the vs model will be supported via X 25 and ISDN not TCP IP in customer networks that include R8 versions of the csi si and r models The call management system CMS and Intuity adjuncts can be connected to the DEFINITY ECS R8csi with an ethernet connection and to the si and r models with either an ethernet or Bx 25 connection Procedures for administering these connections are not covered in this book They are documented in CentreVu CMS Switch Connections and Administration 585 215 876 for CMS and in Intuity Messaging Solutions LAN Integration with DEFINITY ECS 585 313 602 for Intuity CMS administration is covered in Centre CMS Softwar
282. e 66 m 8i TT 9G a TRE a 22 T 175 ooo bys E A EAS OTE SN 23 IO E 68 __ 83 _ 98 ___ Cio 24 __ 39 mei 54 69 __ 84 __ 99 10o n 25 m 40 __ 55 eF OA 85 __ A 2 CI 41 DES n US 86 _ E ee PAS ALA US E UP E ETS ES Tne 28 _ 43 58 VIS 88 _ 14 2 II 44 gt A TA 89 _ Partitioned Group This read only field displays the partitioned group number associated with the node Number numbers being administered Valid entries Usage Read only field The partitioned group number is either specified on the command line or defaults to partitioned group number 1 Node Number This display only field lists the node number to be changed Valid entries Usage Display only Two pages display simultaneously for a total of 200 nodes 100 field per page For example entering change node routing 87 displays nodes 1 through 199 and entering change node routing 151 displays nodes 100 through 299 However entering change node routing 999 displays nodes 900 through 999 on one page Route Pattern Enter the routing pattern associated with the corresponding node number This field repeats the same number of times as there are node numbers on the page Valid entries Usage 1 to 254 blank Administration for Network Connectivity 302 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes The information entered on this screen
283. e hunt group s coverage path Depending on the circumstances the attendant can get a busy tone or ringing e Leave Word Calling If a message is left for a branch user and the attendant at the CAS switch tries to retrieve the message by using LWC message retrieval permission is denied e Night Service Night Console Service When the CAS main enters night service CAS calls terminate at the CAS main night service destination When the branch enters Night Service CAS calls route to the branch night console the LDN night station or the TAAS e Night Service Trunk Answer from Any Station In a multiswitch DCS environment with CAS the result of transferring incoming trunk calls via Night Service Extension or Trunk Answer from Any Station varies depending on the home switch of the transferred to station the home switch of the connected trunk and the type of night service function chosen Night Service Extension Trunk Answer From Any Station or both e Nonattendant Console Handling of CAS Calls The CAS branch calls terminate at the CAS main based on the incoming RLT trunk group day destination or night service destination You can also answer a CAS call by the Trunk Answer Any Station feature Administration for Network Connectivity 342 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Emergency 911 Calls How to administer Emergency 911 Calls Interactio
284. e on every node within the ENP subnetwork and ENP Codes are administered in the ENP Numbering Plan table as well as in the AAR Analysis table Since ENP Codes are home on every node they cannot be used as AAR location codes UDP extensions are converted to ENP numbers if node number routing is specified for the extensions in the UDP table Note One ENP code is required for a 4 digit ENP subnetwork A 5 digit UDP requires one ENP code for each leading digit of extensions used within the ENP subnetwork DCS message signaling links are not required to support ENP As a result many multiple switch configurations are possible with ENP Typically the ENP network will be a subnetwork of a UDP or Electronic Tandem Network ETN Administration for Network Connectivity 346 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Interactions e Distributed Communications System If you use DCS the ENP node numbers must correspond to DCS node numbers Inter PBX Attendant Service Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS allows attendants for multiple branches to be concentrated at a main location Incoming trunk calls to the branch as well as attendant seeking voice terminal calls route over tie trunks to the main location How to administer Inter PBX Attendant Service Form Field Tie Trunk Group Main e Incoming Destination IAS Branch e IAS Tie Trunk Group No TAS Att Access Code
285. e 1 DEFINITY ECS Intuity AUDIX R7r Gateway Switch Node 4 ppp Ethernet 10BaseT DEFINITY ECS Hub R7csi Customer Data Network Ls Router CMS Administration for Network Connectivity 204 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Overview 4 Networking Example Task Summary The following matrix summarizes the administration tasks required to set up this network Administration Switch Switch Switch Switch Task Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node4 CMS Intuity AUDIX R7r R si R7csi R7si DS1 Circuit Pack X X X X Synchronization X X X X Plan Trunk Groups X X X X Dial Plan X X X X Uniform Dialing X X X X Plan AAR Digit X X X X Analysis Signaling Group X X Hunt Group X X X ISDN TSC X Gateway Channel Assignment Interface Links X Node Names X X X X IP Route X X X X Data Modules X X X X Processor Channel X X X X X X Assignments Routing Patterns X X X X Bus Bridge X Intuity X Translations for DCS Audix CMS Server X Translations Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 205 Link Channel TSC Map 4 Networking Example Link Channel TSC Map The link channel TSC map shows the link processor channel and temporary signaling connection numbers and the connection types for each Switch Node in the network Node 2 Processor Interface interface i Sig channels
286. e 1 C LAN on the IP Interfaces screen No IP routes are needed on Switch C because node 5 is defined as the Gateway Address for node 6 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 29 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview Administration for Network Connectivity 30 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 2 H 323 Trunks This chapter describes how to set up and perform initial administration of IP Trunks between DEFINITY ECS switches and between DEFINITY and non DEFINITY switches that support the H 323 V2 signaling protocols The IP trunk connections described in this chapter use the TN802B circuit pack in the MEDPRO mode See Appendix F for administration of trunk connections that use the TN802 or TN802B in the IP Trunk mode Overview This section provides a summary of DEFINIY IP Solutions for DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 IP Solutions DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions provide TCP IP connectivity for two types of trunks and three types of IP Softphones On DEFINITY ECS IP Solutions use the TN802B IP Interface assembly for voice processing and the TN799B C LAN for signaling The TN802B IP Interface includes a Windows NT server that resides on the TN802B circuit pack inside the DEFINITY ECS The TN802B IP Interface introduced in Release 8 can be administered to operates in either the MedPro mode for H 323 compliant ISDN PRI equivalent trunk connections or IP Trunk mode for
287. e 2 add trunk group 24 Page 2 of 10 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Measured none Internal Alert n Maintenance Tests y Data Restriction n Glare Handling none Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize en Maintenance Busy neither end Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Per Call CPN Blocking Code Connected to CO Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Group 24 member assignments TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 3 Port Code Sfx Name Night Mode Type Ans Delay 1 01c1723 TN767 F 20 2 3 4 5 6 ds 8 9 10 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 215 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Uniform Dialing Plan display udp 2 Page 1 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes ddxx Ext Code Type dd Type dd Type ___ 2x udpcode 222 udpcode 223 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 AAR Digit Analysis display aar analysis 1 Page 1 of AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full Dialed Total Route Call Node ANI String Min Max Pattern Type Num Reqd 222 7 7 102 aar 2 n 223 7 7 103 aar 3 n 224 7 7 104 aar 4 n Administration for Network Connectivity 216 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignment change isdn t
288. e IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen Gateway Addr Enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway for the IP interface Net Rgn Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 41 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Task 3 Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module for the connection between the C LAN board s ethernet port port 17 and the LAN The data module associates a link number and extension number with the C LAN ethernet port location This association is used by the DEFINITY processor to set up and maintain signaling connections for multimedia call handling The C LAN ethernet port is indirectly associated with the C LAN IP address via the slot location which is part of the port location on the IP Interfaces screen and the node name which is on both the IP Interfaces and Node Names screens Task 3 Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data module next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 2377 Name ethernet on link 2 Type ethernet Port 01c0817 Link 2 Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type ethernet for this link Port Ethernet conn
289. e Installation and Setup 585 215 866 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 53 Overview 3 C LAN Administration Checklist for Prerequisite Administration This is a checklist of things that need to be completed before you can proceed with the network administration tasks Review this checklist before starting the administration tasks Y Checklist Item The prerequisite administration needed depends on whether the system is new or is being upgraded from an R7 or pre R7 system to R8 Use the following map to determine which steps to perform New R7 A ee ISDN connections 4 5 6 7 gt 2 3 to be preserved Pa a Other Pre R7 For more information about the checklist items refer to Appendix A or the appropriate upgrades book in References page 56 UPGRADES ONLY Steps 1 6 apply only to systems being upgraded to R8 from an R7 or pre R7 release For new systems skip to step 7 1 Save translations on customer flash card csi or si models or tape r model For R7 systems skip to step 5 2 This step is for the si model only It preserves ISDN PRI connections which for R7 and later are carried on the NetPkt circuit pack instead of the PI or PACCON circuit packs ISDN PRI connections are preserved transparently on the csi and r models If the si switch has existing ISDN PRI connections that the customer wants to keep com
290. e Outgoing Display y e QSIG Value Added Lucent y On Page 2 Also for Supplementary Services with or without Rerouting Hop Dgt y e Disconnect Supervision y Numbering Format public private unknown unk pvt NCA TSC Trunk Member The trunk member whose D channel routes CISCs e Send Called Busy Connected Number y Send Calling Number y e Send Name y Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 373 QSIG B Private Networking Setting Up QSIG Steps Supplementary Services Begin 1 Administer or check the ISDN Numbering Public Unknown screen see Appendix A Administer or check the ISDN Numbering Private screen see Appendix A Administer or check the Signaling Group screen see Appendix A Check for the following field entries to ensure proper operation of Call Completion e Supplementary Service Protocol b e Max Number of NCA TSC greater than 0 Administer or check the Route Pattern screen Check for the following field entries to ensure proper operation of Call Completion and Transit Counter e TSC y necessary if switch is a transit node for TSC e Hop Lmt between 1 and 32 Administer or check the Feature Related System Parameters screen Check for the following field entries to ensure proper operation of Call Completion and Call Transfer e Trunk to Trunk Transfer y e QSIG TSC Extension valid extension number to serv
291. e The coverage point is busy with no hunting forwarded or has send all calls activated or activates send all calls after ringing e The coverage point has no staffed agents or an invalid vector When the coverage point is unavailable the local system determines the availability status from a time out or from a message from the remote system When the local system discovers that the coverage point is unavailable it tries the next coverage point If the last coverage point is unavailable the previous coverage point rings until it is answered or until the caller hangs up If only one coverage point exists in the path and it is unavailable the principal s station rings until it is answered or until the caller hangs up A call to the principal is forwarded and the forwarded to extension is not available In this case the first coverage point in the principal s path is tried Note that the coverage does not follow the forwarded to extension s coverage path A call to the principal redirects to the remote coverage point which answers Subsequently the principal goes off hook In this case the local system bridges the principal onto the call between the calling party and coverage point creating a conference among the three The principal receives the call on the same call appearance as the original call Administration for Network Connectivity 316 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications Sy
292. e a ie A Bak a ak A 223 Uniform Dialing Pali ss s 64 Ys 48 64 40 Pa boa Ae Se ae Ge ee ow 224 AAR DIQIGANAIVSIS a cis ok San ekki at Ri A ee ds ee me a ae Bai od 225 ROUND FARMS 205 5442 44 S4eeb es aN OES SRS EOS be oS Eo 225 Data MOQUISS soes s ey ecard Hein he dt ROG Ble ME ya ae eee Gee Ma 225 Processor Channel Assignments 0000 a 226 FGI Groups eaa a aa ara Bae Sy e a a OR Rh EA et AA 227 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Contents Switch Node 3 Administration 0 0 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 228 DSTGEICUIEPICKS ois das ce be dR daa a Roa Res a PS ARA ES aa 228 Dial Plam soci ae bees Bee ke Ge Seve dik ae a i oe Sid ae A Sh he We dae a 228 Synchronization Plan s gt ta ssa ea Re DAES ORDA ERE Eee Hees 229 SIGNALING GROUPS o s a das et a d g a dk a A a a Tal ew ea RR 229 Tunk GROUDS ria e Gig dhe Baad AA a A 230 Uniform Dialing Pals cas aa Bs Boge ol Ue ee a i 231 AAR DIOIANalYSIS 2 284 serrana a a A as 231 Routing Patterns i 4 4 4 66 di re AR Howe 4 232 Punt GOUS amp a a a a a a a a a a Be ey Slew 232 Switch Node 4 AdministalioMiiaariacii Dana Deia lid add Raabe i 233 B SiBMOOO seca a A A A 233 DSi Circuit Packs lt gora aai dd a de a a A a Sw 233 DANI 0 a a o A cs dr da a e AR 234 synchronization Pla 0 a aa caia a o ee Ede ew E a 234 AR RO 234 TUNK GrOUDS 2 4 dd a Bak SE wae we A de So we a 235 Union Dialing Paln ss p es ei ec
293. e as TSC for both incoming and outgoing QSIG network calls e Automatic Callback No Answer Timeout Interval rings enter the number of times 2 to 9 a callback call should ring at the caller s phone before the callback is cancelled e For AUDIX Octel Serenade support only MWI Number of Digits per AUDIX Subscriber enter the number of digits in messaging subscriber extensions if any The value in this field must match the value of the Extension Length field on the Switch Interface Administration form of AUDIX e For AUDIX Octel Serenade support only Unknown numbers internal for AUDIX y if when the switch cannot identify a calling number as internal or external the switch should treat it as internal for AUDIX use 6 Administer or check the Class of Service COS screen for each COS that may be using the QSIG network Check for the following field entries to ensure proper operation of Call Completion Call Offer and Call Forward e Restrict Call Forward Off Net n e Auto Callback y e QSIG Call Offer Originations y 374 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Setting Up Centralized Attendant Services B Private Networking Call Completion In addition to the Basic QSIG Supplementary Services administration described above complete the following administration e On the Trunk Group screen page 1 set the Supplementary Service Protocol field to b
294. e changed if the Send Name far end is a non DEFINITY switch e Send Calling Number Send Connected Number gt Go to page 4 add trunk group 3 Page 4 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 0 0 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 0 Port Code Sfx Name Night Sig Grp 1 ip H 323 Tr 1 3 2 ip H 323 Tr 2 3 3 ip H 323 Tr 3 3 4 5 Note Each signaling group can support up to 31 trunks If you need more than 31 trunks between the same two switches add a second signaling group with different listen ports and add a second trunk group See Signaling group assignments page 50 for more information about the relationship between signaling groups and H 323 trunk groups 46 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks gt Enter group members Field Conditions Comments Port Enter ip When the screen is submitted this value will automatically be changed to a T number of the form Txxxxx Name Enter a 10 character descriptive name for the trunk The name is to help you identify the trunk it is not used by the system Sig Grp Enter the number of the signaling group that you set up for H 323 trunks gt Submit the screen When the screen is submitted the Port field for the IP H 323 trunks is changed to a Txxxxx number as shown below display trunk group 3 Page 4
295. e point It goes to the next coverage point at the branch if administered or continues to ring at the previous coverage point If the attendant group 0 is the only coverage point it continues to ring at the principal s extension Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 347 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Centralized Attendant Service CAS and Inter PBX attendant calling cannot be used at the same time Dial Access to Attendant Administer Dial Access to Attendant via the dial platform to the same digit on both the IAS main switch and the IAS branch switch On the branch switch administer the PBX attendant access code Console Parameters form to match the main PBX attendant group dial access code Night Service Inter PBX Attendant Calls deactivates when a branch goes into night service and reactivates when the branch comes out of night service Private Network Access How to administer Private Network Access Use Private Network Access to allow calls to other switching systems in a private network These calls do not use the public network They are routed over customer dedicated facilities Form Field Trunk Groups All Access APLT ISDN BRI ISDN PRI Tandem Class of Restriction Advanced Private Line Termination Feature Access Code FAC e Automatic Alternate Routing Access Code AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table All AAR and ARS Digit Conver
296. e since a node number is supplied CASE 4 e ETA Route Pattern Administered ETA Node Number Administered In this case the ETA Route Pattern routes undefined dialed strings while the ETA Node Number routes DCS messages Nodes themselves do not have to be administered for ETA ETA should not be used over tandem tie trunks e Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing calls are routed via ETA e Attendant Attendants calls are routed via ETA e Data Call Setup Analog and digital endpoints can access ETA The digit string goes to the remote switch like any other digit string is sent The remote switch handles the data call setup from that point forward e Facility Restriction Levels It is possible to restrict trunks that are being used in conjunction with ETA by assigning FRLs Last Number Dialed If a number is routed via ETA to a remote switch and you want to reaccess that number then reaccess uses ETA e Modem Pooling Modems in Modem Pools are treated like all other trunks e Remote Access Remote access trunks are able to access the ETA feature just as any other trunk or station does Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 345 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Extension Number Portability Extension Number Portability ENP gives you the ability to assign any extension to any switch in an ENP subnetwork Stations can be moved across switches
297. e switch with one listed directory number LDN A tributary switch is connected to the main switch via tie trunks but has its own attendant positions and LDN Management Information Base MIB A virtual database used by the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP MAPD Multiapplication platform for DEFINITY MA UUI Message Associated User to User Signaling M Bus Memory bus Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 479 MDR Glossary MDR Message detail record See Management Information Base MIB MMCH Multimedia call handling MSA Message Server Adjunct multicasting A transmission method that promotes efficient bandwidth utilization on a multimedia data network when several parties are transmitting and receiving simultaneously Normally each party sends a separate video stream to each of the other parties and receives a separate video stream from each in return this is called unicasting Multicasting substitutes a single broadcast transmission addressed to all parties for the separate transmissions addressed to each Each party then continues to receive multiple data streams while sending only one For best results multicast messages should be restricted to one or more subnet National Television Standards Committee NTSC standard The standard format and transmission method for television signals in North America Central America and Japan
298. e using D channel DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection allows attendants at one node to have direct access to an idle outgoing trunk at a different node in the DCS This feature functions the same as regular Direct Trunk Group Selection However the attendant uses a remote tgs feature button on the console for this purpose Note DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection is not available if you are using D channel DCS To use this feature you must have a DCS Trunk Group between the local and remote switches and the trunks in that trunk group cannot insert digits on incoming calls If you need digit insertion on these trunks it should be added on the outgoing trunk based on the dialed digits You can assign a Trunk Hundreds Select button to access a trunk group at the local node or a trunk group at a remote node A Trunk Group Select button assigned to access a remote node is referred to as a remote Trunk Hundreds Select button Pressing a remote Trunk Group Select button is the same as dialing the tie trunk group access code for the remote node and the trunk access code of the selected trunk Attendant Display The DCS attendant console displays calling party ID and called party ID information for calls to and from remote switches in the network Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 313 Distributed Communications System B Priva
299. ea code area code Dialed String 1A2B2D2E 1C2D2E 2E Dialed String 2A1B1D1E 2C1D1E 1E Total Mn E Total Mn j Total Mx i i Total Mx i i Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including ARS feature access code for example 9 Create route pattern number lt 1H gt with First route Second route Group No 11 Group No 1J No Del Digits blank No Del Digits blank Inserted Digits blank Inserted Digits blank Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including ARS feature access code for example 9 Create route pattern number lt 2H gt with First route Second route Group No 2l Group No 2J No Del Digits blank No Del Digits blank Inserted Digits blank Inserted Digits blank SI99YSA10M YUNAL dl 0002 dy enss pOG E2 99S AUANIOUUOD YIOMION 104 UONCSIUILUPY O ZZZ dlD 1Sp Worksheet 2 continued SITE 1 SITE 2 MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in E Same Sipe Same Create Ent Different country same Create Pill nomen Different country pale A your actual area Z your actual B area entries Country different entries Country different values code values code area code area code Originating Originati
300. each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and Session vice versa Remote Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 201 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level connectivity can remain intact when higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Adm
301. ections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack Link The link number must be in the range 33 for G3r or 1 25 for G3si and G3csi and not previously assigned on this switch Name This field is information only it appears in lists generated by the list data module command Network Leave the default y if the private network contains only uses 1 s for DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network broadcast includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of addresses forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 42 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration Task 4 Create a signaling group 2 H 323 Trunks This task creates a signaling group that will be associated with H 323 trunks that connect this switch to a far end switch One or more unique signaling groups must be established for each far end n Note to H 323 trunks The and are described in Task 4 Steps ode that this switch is connected to via H 323 trunks The following steps address only those fields that are specifically related other fields are administered as for previous releases the Administrator s Guide Begin gt Open new Signaling Group form enter a sig n add signaling group n Grou
302. ed This number is the Local Node Number administered on the Dial Plan Record screen Valid entries Usage 1 63 For DCS 1 99 For AUDIX 1 12 For MASI blank Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Type H 323 The H 323 signaling group type is used for H 323 trunks Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 2 Group Type h 323 Max number of NCA TSC 0 Max number of CA TSC 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection Supplementary Service Protocol a Near end Node Name Far end Node Name Near end Listen Port 1720 Far end Listen Port LRQ Required n Calls Share IP Signaling Connection n Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded n Internetworking Message PROGress Near end Node Name Valid entries Usage A node name administered on Enter the node name for the C LAN IP interface the Node Names form on this on this switch switch Far end Node Name Valid entries Usage A node name administered on Optional If entered this is the node name for the the Node Names form on this far end C LAN IP Interface used for trunks switch assigned to this signaling group Near end Listen Port Valid entries Usage 1719 1720 or Enter an unused port number The number 1720 is 5000 9999 recommended If LRQ is set to y this field must be 1719 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504
303. ed and sent on a standby basis as channel capacity becomes available The Internet is a good example of a packet switching network 482 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 PBX Glossary PBX Private Branch Exchange a customer owned telephone switch that connects a company s internal telephone network with the local telephone service provider s central office Lucent s DEFINITY PBX is a good example PDM See processor data module PDM PGATE Packet gateway Point to Point Protocol A TCP IP implementation tailored for use over telephone lines It supports router to router and host to network connections over both synchronous and asynchronous circuits PPP replaces SLIP the older Serial Line Interface Protocol Port 1 Interface between an application and the TCP IP network A port is a predefined internal address port number that serves as a pathway from the application to the Transport layer or from T to A 2 circuit pack port PPP See Point to Point Protocol PRI Primary Rate Interface See ISDN Primary Rate Interface See ISDN private network A network used exclusively for the telecommunications needs of a particular customer private network office code RNX The first three digits of a 7 digit private network number processor data module PDM A device that provides an RS 232C DCE interface for connecting to data termina
304. efault gateway to a node an explicit host IP route must be defined to enable communications to any node on a different sub network You can also assign a default gateway by setting up an IP route with the default node as the destination and the router or C LAN as the gateway The default node is a display only entry on the Node Names screen with IP address 0 0 0 0 It acts as a variable that takes on unknown addresses as values When the default IP route is set up any address not know by C LAN is substituted for the default address in the default IP route which uses the router as the default gateway A SECURITY ALERT A default gateway could allow unauthorized access to your network if it is not properly administered and maintained 22 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview When to use IP routes You need to define IP routes only in special cases when default gateways are not defined or when you want to limit communication between nodes This section describes the network configurations that require explicit IP routes The following table summarizes when you would use IP routes Connection When IP Routes are Needed Type The endpoints are on different subnets and no default gateway is defined on the IP Interfaces screen for the local node and e You want the local node to communicate with only Ethernet the specified node o
305. efined time period consultation timer to request invocation of SS CO e Immediate invocation the calling user is able to request invocation of SS CO as part of the initial call set up e Network invocation delayed the network having informed the calling user that a call has failed because it is busy at the destination invokes SS CO automatically unless the calling user initiates call clearing within a defined time period automatic call offer invocation timer DEFINITY ECS The effect of QSIG SS CO on the terminating end is similar to the DCS Call Waiting feature with the exception that for Call Waiting the calling side user or PBX does not have to convey any special message to invoke the feature The Call Waiting Termination feature is driven based on the terminating user for instance single line analog set user with Call Waiting enabled For QSIG Call Offer DEFINITY takes advantage of the additional information available from the far end if QSIG Call Offer invokes successfully and provides similar information to the calling user as the Call Waiting feature provides for on internal calls with the exception that the display update will be offered instead of wait to reflect invocation of QSIG Call Offer service On successful invocation of the QSIG Call Offer service DEFINITY provides the following e To the busy analog set user the same tone as Call Waiting Termination feature or e To the busy Multi ca
306. emote end of this connection Switch 1 in this case will be responsible for the call setup Enter y when administering the data module for Switch 1 Connected Data This is an information only field Module Keep the default values for the rest of the fields 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 114 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 2 Steps Begin gt Open Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Proc Chan Enable Appl 1 2 21 23 256 K k IS Is 15 des des PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Page 1 of X Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 0 2 21 0 21 21 1 2 23 0 23 23 3 0 Note The Processor Channel number the Interface Channel number and the Local and Remote Session numbers do not need to be the same number but they should be made the same whenever possible to simplify network bookkeeping and diagnostics gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 21 X 25 connection to Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destinat
307. enables MWI messages to be routed to the subscriber s switch in a QSIG network Page 1 of 1 MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION SUBSCRIBER NUMBER PREFIXES Machine Inserted Routing AUDIX Machine Inserted Routing AUDIX ID Digits Digits Mach ID ID Digits Digits Mach ID dl 8 11 2 12 S T3 4 14 58 T5 6 16 U8 17 8 18 9 19 10 20 Inserted Digits to form Displays only if this machine ID is assigned to the qsig mwi application in the Complete Number Change Communication Interface Processor Channels form Valid entries Usage up to 12 digits The entered digits are those needed in front of the Intuity 0 9 AUDIX subscriber number which allows the Message Center PBX to obtain a complete number for the subscriber This digit string has a valid entry in the AAR or ARS analysis tables enabling a route to the Remote PBX associated with a particular process channel blank Note Both of the following two fields must be filled in If either one is filled in and the other is left blank an error displays Routing Digits e g Enter the desired numbers up to 4 digits AAR ARS Access Code Valid entries Usage up to 4 digits These digits comprise the AAR or ARS access code Blank 0 9 X is not a valid entry AUDIX Mach ID This field value corresponds to the AUDIX number serving that switch as translated in the AUDIX number field of the Switch Interfa
308. ency allows the referral calls to originate at a node other than the node that detects the problem If referral calls are generated at a node for one or more remote nodes the remote nodes are notified when ACA referral is activated or deactivated Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks allows attendants and multiappearance voice terminal users to make test calls to voice terminals and trunk groups that are located at other nodes in the DCS To use this feature you must have a DCS Trunk Group between the local and remote switches and the trunks in that trunk group cannot insert digits on incoming calls If you need digit insertion on these trunks it should be added on the outgoing trunk based on the dialed digits Multiappearance voice terminal users can busy verify an adjunct at a remote location by pressing Verify and dialing the TAC of the tie trunk group to the remote node Then they must press Verify a second time and dial the desired TAC and the trunk group member number to be verified Verification of the trunk then continues as if the trunk is on the same node 314 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Call Coverage DCS Call Coverage provides DCS messaging required for calls to be covered on remote systems when there is a DCS signaling link BX 25 PPP or ISDN PRI
309. endant Recall is not available in QSIG CAS to calls incoming from the branch 388 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking Attendant Release Loop Operation Attendant Release Loop Operation is a local switch feature It allows an unanswered extended call on the main to return to the attendant after an administrable amount of time The call first tries to return to the same attendant that originally answered the call and if that attendant is not available the call goes to the next available attendant waiting in the Attendant Queue if necessary Attendant Return Call Attendant Return Call functions in the following manner Suppose a call comes into the attendant from a branch PBX If the attendant extends the call and it is unanswered after an administrable amount of time the call returns to the attendant Initially the call attempts to return to the same attendant that originally handled the call If that attendant is unavailable then the call goes to the next available attendant waiting in the Attendant Queue if necessary Attendant Serial Calling As with RLT CAS Attendant Serial Calling is not available in QSIG CAS to calls incoming from the branch Attendant Tones Call identification tones are not heard by attendants answering calls from a QSIG CAS branch Attendant Trunk Group Busy Warning Indicators As with RLT CAS the attendant can
310. ent to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 32 connection to Switch for gateway to Switch 2 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 to Server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen The Destination Port number must match the Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 122 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R
311. eorganization has been made for Release 8 e New Chapter 2 covers H 323 trunk administration e The previous Chapter 2 has been renamed Chapter 3 This chapter now describes how to connect switches and adjuncts using the C LAN signaling connectivity without the H 323 functionality if you are running Release 8 software This would be the case if you use R8 as a bugfix for R7 or if you are using the IP Interface board in IP Trunk mode e Chapter 3 has been renamed Chapter 4 The example network is the same as for R7 with the Data Module and IP Interfaces screens updated A subsequent issue of this book will add MedPro functionality in the example network e The appendix sections are organized as in R7 and updated for R8 changes Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 xiii Organization Preface Organization This document is organized into four chapters and seven appendixes Chapter 2 gives the essential information needed to administer H 323 trunk connections Chapter 1 Overview NM An overview of DEFINITY Connectivity and IP Addressing Appendix C Security A brief discussion of security issues as related to networking Chapter 2 H 323 Trunk Administration Gives detailed procedures for initial administration of IP trunks using H 323 IP connections Appendix D Capacity and Performance A brief discussion of network
312. eractions Attendant Call Waiting 325 Call Coverage 325 Call Forwarding 325 Call Park 325 Call Pickup 325 Centralized Attendant Service CAS 325 ISDN PRI 325 DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access feature 313 323 interactions DCS Attendant Display 325 DCS Automatic Callback ACB 326 Uniform Dial Plan UDP 325 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 493 Index DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection feature 313 323 DCS Attendant Display feature 313 323 interactions DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 325 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 DCS Automatic Callback ACB feature 314 323 interactions Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 326 DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 326 DCS Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA feature 314 DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks feature 314 interactions routing patterns 326 Trunk Identification by Attendant 326 DCS Call Coverage feature 315 316 interactions Call Coverage off premises 326 coverage answer groups 326 Coverage Callback 326 displays 326 Go to Cover 326 Leave Word Calling LWC 327 queuing 327 operation under normal conditions 316 DCS Call Forwarding feature 317 interactions Coverage Callback 327 DCS nodes 327 Leave Word Calling LWC 327 DCS Call Waiting feature 317 interactions Automatic Callback ACB 327 Data Privacy 327 Data Restriction 327 Enhanced DCS EDCS 327 DCS Distincti
313. ere are packet based applications such as TCP IP over the C LAN or ISDN PRI over the TN464 The TN776 EI can be used only when the switch has no packet based applications NetPkt TN794 replaces the NetCon TN777B and the PACCON TN778 circuit packs Upgraded processor TN790B In duplicated systems a second NetPkt Control Assembly and a new DUPINT TN792 Expansion Interface TN570 if there is an EPN ISDN PRI capabilities formerly provided by the PI and PACCON circuit packs are now provided by the NetPkt Note that you do not need to replace the TN767 with the TN464 since NetPkt supports D channel signaling over the TDM bus R8csi model The following table shows the hardware required for an upgrade to an R8csi Connection Type BX 25 Existing systems only TCP IP ethernet and ppp ISDN PRI Hardware Required The csi model does not support BX 25 connectivity e C LAN TN799B e Upgraded processor TN798B e Upgraded processor TN798B Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity DEFINITY Connection types and capacities This subsection gives an overview of the types of connections that can be set up with DEFINITY switches and adjuncts and capacities for some connectivity parameters Types of connections This table lists the types of connections possible with each DEFINITY model and adjunct DEFINITY ECS R8 Model
314. erence and Transfer You cannot activate QSIG SS CC towards a transferred to party Hold A single line voice terminal cannot receive a QSIG SS CC call while it has a call on hold Hotline Service A hotline service cannot request SS CC Administration for Network Connectivity 382 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Message Waiting Indications B Private Networking Internal Automatic Answer IAA If the IAA feature is enabled QSIG SS CC calls are not answered automatically Manual Originating Line Service A manual originating service cannot request QSIG SS CC Multimedia Endpoints You cannot activate QSIG CC towards multimedia data endpoints Restriction Features Class of restriction COR Any terminal that is Origination restricted cannot activate SS CC Any terminal that is Termination restricted cannot have SS CC activated towards it Class of Service COS To invoke SS CC the ACB field on the Class of Service screen of the calling terminal must be set to yes Ringback Queuing Ringback Queueing and ACB share the same button to indicate that they are active If the user has only one ACB button then both features cannot be active at the same time Outgoing Trunk Queuing Outgoing Trunk Queueing cannot be invoked after the calling party answers the priority call back call and no trunks are available The SS CCBS and SS CCNR request cancels at both PBXs Termination Extension Group TEG Yo
315. ers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 13 ethernet connection to Switch 3 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 1d is the server for this session Set to node 3 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 1d data module screen or TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O 20f3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 185 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administ
316. erver Enterprise ITS E The IP Trunk service enables you to reduce long distance charges and gives you added flexibility in routing traffic between sites IP Trunk is implemented using the TN802 circuit pack IP Trunk connections can be used with Release 7 and Release 8 of all three DEFINITY ECS switch models csi si and r To use the IP Trunk feature the ZP Interface assembly needs to be installed The IP Interface assembly J58890MA 1 L30 is a 3 slot wide TN802 R7 or TN802B R8 MAPD circuit pack The procedures in this appendix apply to the following software circuit pack configurations R8 with the IP Interface TN802B in IP Trunk mode e R8 configured as R7 bugfix with the IP Interface TN802 or TN802B in IP Trunk mode R7 with the IP Interface TN802 IP Trunk Installation For IP Trunk installation procedures see the upgrades or installation document that is appropriate for the switch model There are five upgrades installation documents on the DEFINITY Documentation Library CD ROM See DEFINITY ECS R8 2 Documentation CD ROM 555 233 813 Title Document Issue Number Number Upgrades and Additions for R8 2r 555 233 115 1 Upgrades and Additions for R8 2si 555 233 122 1 Installation and Test for Multicarrier Cabinets 555 233 114 1 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets 555 233 120 1 Installation Upgrades and Additions for CMC 555 233 118 1 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 I
317. es Data Module Usage Types dte isn pdm Displays only when Type is pdm and the Destination Number is set to eia Enter dte if the data module is connected to Data Terminal Equipment DTE or enter isn if connected to an Information Systems Network ISN ITC Information Transfer Capability This field is used to determine the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originating from this endpoint Displays when Communication Type is 56k data 64k data or Wideband Enter restricted default or unrestricted to indicate the type of transmission facilities to be used for ISDN calls originated from this endpoint The field does not display for voice only or BRI stations When adding an access endpoint with the ITC administered as unrestricted its associated port must be a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with zero code suppression administered as b8zs If the port is not a channel of a DS1 circuit pack with its zero code suppression administered as b8zs the end validation fails and the form submission is rejected Administration for Network Connectivity 260 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference When adding an access endpoint with the ITC administered as restricted its associated port can be a channel from a DS1 circuit pack with Zero Code Suppression administered as zcs or b8zs For an existing access endpoint ITC can only be changed from restricted to unrestricte
318. es For example PRI is translated a little differently in G3r when traditional DCS and this feature are used in combination On systems with AUDIX in a DCS environment an additional column has been added to the Signaling Group form so you can specify which AUDIX and switch to use When traditional DCS and DCS over ISDN are used in combination translations are also different Detailed description A TSC provides a temporary signaling path through ISDN switches for exchanging supplementary service information on ISDN PRI D channels There is no B channel related to the connection no data or voice transmissions take place There are two types of temporary signaling connections e Call Associated CA TSC Non Call Associated NCA TSC CA TSC A CA TSC refers to a service for exchanging USER INFORMATION messages associated with an ISDN B channel connection by the call reference value of the call control data packets On DEFINITY ECS this type of TSC is used only for DCS features on ISDN PRI Signaling Groups administered with Supplementary Service Protocol a Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 321 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking NCA TSC An NCA TSC is a connection not related with any ISDN B channel connections DECINITY ECS supports two types of NCA TSC that conform to two different protocol standards The QSIG type of NCA TSC is used for certain QSIG fe
319. es not cover the installation or upgrade procedures for establishing physical connectivity between DEFINITY switches or for connecting the CMS and Intuity AUDIX adjuncts to a DEFINITY switch that information is contained in the upgrades and installation documents listed in the References section Audience This document is intended for anyone involved in planning designing or administering DEFINITY ECS systems as part of networks using IP connectivity Issue Status First issued for DEFINITY ECS Release 7 this update includes Release 8 new hardware and administration as described below IP Interface assembly The Release 8 IP Interface assembly is a 3 slot wide TN802B circuit pack It enables the transmission of voice and signaling data over IP connections It can be used in one of two operating modes e MedPro mode enables H 323 tie trunks over IP connections IP trunk mode as in Release 7 enables emulation of DS1 trunks over IP connections Each IP Interface assembly operates in either Medpro mode or IP trunk mode for all trunks assigned to it it cannot mix modes The MedPro mode is the normal operating mode for R8 systems The IP Trunk mode is used only for compatibility with existing R7 systems that cannot be upgraded to R8 The C LAN TN799B circuit pack is required to handle signaling for the Medpro mode C LAN can be used but is not required for signaling in the IP Trunk mode Administration for the MedP
320. ess through RLTs to all outgoing trunk facilities at the branches in a CAS network The attendant can extend an incoming LDN call to an outgoing trunk at a branch by dialing the access code and allowing the caller to dial the rest of the number or by dialing the complete outgoing number CAS Incoming Call Routing Calls extended to busy single line voice terminals at the branch wait automatically If there is a call in queue the user hears a busy signal When station hunting and send all calls is administered the call routes along the administered path Not answering any waiting extended call within an administered interval causes the branch switch to return the call to the attendant Call Waiting does not apply to multiappearance terminals if no appearances are available busy tone is sent to the attendant who tells the caller that the line is busy Calls from voice terminals at the branch to an attendant also route over RLTs seized by the branch switch A branch caller reaches the attendant by dialing the attendant group access code The access code is administrable the default is 0 The conversation between the branch caller and the attendant ties up the seized RLT but calls of this type are usually short If an extended call returns to the main attendant unanswered the called party at the branch does not drop but continues to be alerted until the caller releases This allows the attendant to talk to the caller then extend the call again
321. ess expensive connection May replace the current path of a call with a route that is better in terms of Automatic Alternate Routing Automatic Route Selection AAR ARS routing preferences administered on a DEFINITY ECS Frees up resources being used unnecessarily DCS with Rerouting primarily provides you with the ability to attempt to be more effective with the usage of Trunk groups administered for Supplementary Services Protocol Option E SSE during the existence of an active call This means using a more preferred route in terms of UDP AAR ARS routing preferences administered on the PBX between the PBXs involved Your users invoke DCS with Rerouting by Call Transfer Transfer out of Audix and dial 0 out of Audix DCS with Rerouting must be enabled on a switch wide basis and the trunk groups involved must be administered as SSE Administration for Network Connectivity 318 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Interactions Italian DCS Protocol How to administer Enhanced DCS When interworking with non ISDN trunks or non Supplementary Service Option E ISDN trunks DEFINITY acts as a gateway in the following sense When a call is tandeming through a DEFINITY system from a non ISDN trunk to an SSE trunk or from a non Option E to an SSE trunk the system acts as an incoming gateway When a call is tandeming through a DEFINITY system from an SSE tr
322. ests are assumed to be rejected and administered NCA TSCs which were in the process of being established at the time of the switchover are dropped when the switchover occurs Those administered NCA TSCs that were dropped are reattempted again If a D channel switchover occurs on a D channel going to the public network then all TSCs are dropped A maintenance provided heartbeat message periodically is sent over each permanent administered NCA TSC to ensure that such a situation is detected and recovered from Distributed Communications System AUDIX DCS AUDIX The DCS over ISDN PRI D channel feature can be used to support DCS AUDIX The connection between G3si and AUDIX should be BX 25 GRS GRS selects TSC compatible facilities when routing NCA TSCs In other words a NCA TSC request can only select a routing preference that supports TSCs In a tandem node GRS first selects facilities that support TSCs if the call falls into any one of the following two conditions It requests a CA TSC explicitly It contains a DCS information element in the SETUP message Once a trunk group with available members is selected the call proceeds even if all the TSCs belonging to the associated signaling group are active In other words the completion of a call is given priority over DCS transparency SDN The DCS over ISDN PRI D channel feature allows the system to access public networks such as SDN SDN supports all DCS features except
323. et password Chap Secret Password for the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Valid Value Usage 1 30 alphanumeric This field displays only if the CHAP field is y This field characters but displays the data being entered or changed It displays an cannot begin with asterisk when the form is brought up initially if the field the at sign already contains some data Default is blank This field displays the actual contents rather than asterisks if the form is brought up by the init login Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 265 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Data Module Type procr intf used for BX 25 connections with the si model Use the procr intf data module type to define an interface between the Processor Interface circuit pack and the DS1 facilities carrying the X 25 data for the connection to far end switch This data module associates a link number with a physical channel number and extension number for the PI port used for the connection This form applies when the Destination Number field is not set to eia add data module next Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Data Extension 3456 Name Type procr intf COS 1 Maintenance Extension Physical Channel __ COR 1 Destination Number ITC TN 1 Establish Connection n Link __ DTE DCE DTE Connected Data Module Enable Link n ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIA
324. et require DEFINITY ECS Release 7 or later hardware and software ISDN and BX 25 connections are supported on switches upgrading to R8 and pre R7 switches can be connected to R8 switches via ISDN or BX 25 However new systems will not be sold with X 25 connections Therefore all switches in the five configurations are assumed to be upgraded to release R7 or later except the si connected via BX 25 and the csi connected via ISDN in configurations 3 and 4 these 2 switches could be either R7 or pre R7 versions Organization of this chapter Configuration Overview Task Summary Configuration Diagram The descriptions of the configurations have a common format Each configuration section has the following subsections e Configuration overview e Task summary e Checklist of prerequisite tasks e Configuration diagram e Administration tasks The subsections are described below Each of the configuration sections begins with a brief description of the network represented by the configuration This section includes a high level diagram and a description of the switches and their connections for each node in the network Lists the tasks that need to be performed to administer this configuration 1 Review checklist 2 Assign node names 3 Assign links 4 Assign processor channels Procedures for completing each of these tasks are described in detail following this summary A detailed diagram of the configuration is shown after the task s
325. et can potentially take a different route through the network The call and DCS signaling data are sent as datagram packets over an IP network using the C LAN interface The R7 type of IP trunk IP Interface operating in ip trunk mode can also use tie trunk PVC facilities for the DCS signaling Release 8 Hardware Requirements For the three DEFINITY ECS switch models csi si and r Release 8 IP trunking H 323 and IP Softphone connections require at least one IP Interface TN802B circuit pack and at least one C LAN TN799B circuit pack DEFINITY One requires only the IP Interface circuit pack IP Interface C LAN The IP Interface assembly J58890MA 1 L30 is a 3 slot wide TN802B circuit pack that provides voice processing over IP connections The IP Interface assembly contains an NT processor which is automatically administered by the DEFINITY software The TN802B can be administered to operate in medpro mode for H 323 trunks and IP softphones or in ip trunk mode for R7 type IP Trunk connections The C LAN circuit pack TN799B provides call setup TSCs QSIG and DCS signaling over IP connections Note The TN799B must be used to handle call signaling for the TN802B in MedPro mode However the previous version of C LAN TN799 can be used for call signaling with the TN802 or the TN802B operating in IP Trunk mode The TN799 can also be used for DCS signaling connections on a switch that is using the TN802B in MedPro mode as lo
326. etail records Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Call Management System CMS Glossary Call Management System CMS An application running on an adjunct processor that collects information from an ACD unit CMS enables customers to monitor and manage telemarketing centers by generating reports on the status of agents splits trunks trunk groups vectors and VDNs and enables customers to partially administer the ACD feature for a communications system call redirection See restricted facilities CALLed Party Number IE The ISDN information element containing the digits sent to the called party capture rate The number of frames contained in a one second video sample used as a measure of video quality CA TSC Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connection CCIS Common Channel Interoffice Signaling CCITT Comitte Consultatif International Telephonique et Telegraphique Now called International Telecommunications Union ITU CCMS Control Channel Message Set CDR See Call Detail Recording CDR Same as SMDR and CMDR CDRU Call Detail Record Unit CDRP Call Detail Record Poller CEPT1 European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Rate 1 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 469 channel Glossary channel A communication path linking two points for transmitting voice
327. ete the 222 and insert the digit 6 at the beginning of the extension number so that the receiving switch can continue to route correctly If the user at extension 51234 on Switch C dials extension 61234 the call must first go through Switch A before proceeding to Switch B When 61234 is dialed the system recognizes 61 as a UDP code determines the associated RNX 222 and uses AAR to route the call The AAR feature access code plus 222 1234 are outpulsed to Switch A Switch A then recognizes the RNX 222 as a remote switch and routes the call to Switch B and extension 61234 This same type of call routing occurs when an extension at Switch B calls an extension at Switch C If extension 61234 on Switch B calls extension 61235 the system recognizes 61 as a local UDP code and routes the call directly to extension 61235 e In North American network environments extensions beginning with 0 may route to an attendant You are encouraged to use another number as the leading digit when assigning extensions e When you call an extension on another switch there may be a slight delay before call progress tones are applied This delay is due to the trunk signaling necessary to complete the call to the remote switch e When you select the option to look at the UDP table first calls that might otherwise terminate at a local extension route over the network This is easily reversed When you remove the extensions from the UDP table the local extension can
328. ets 2 7 that can be sent without confirmation Default is 2 The T20 timer is a DTE time limit 0 500 started when DTE issues a restart indication and terminated when the restart request is received or confirmed Default is 8 The T22 timer is a DTE time limit 0 500 started when DTE issues a reset indication and terminated when the reset request is received or confirmed Default is 10 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 271 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Data Module type pdm used for BX 25 connections with the r model This form applies only to the r model This form assigns a Modular Processor Data Module MPDM data module 700D 7400B 7400D or 8400B The MPDM is an external hardware device that provides a Data Communications Equipment DCE interface for connection to equipment such as data terminals CDR output devices on premises administration terminal Message Server Property Management System PMS AUDIX and host computers It also provides a Digital Communications Protocol DCP interface to the digital switch Use the tdm data module type to assign an MTDM which provides an EIA Data Terminal Equipment DTE interface for connection to off premises private line trunk facilities or a switched telecommunications network and a DCP interface for connection to the digital switch Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Data Extension 30 Name 27 BCC Type pdm
329. etween 2 switching systems They also provide some feature transparency for COR Inward Restriction DID when reaching busy stations and Intrusion e Attendant Call Waiting Call Waiting is provided via Italian TGU TGE main and satellite trunks Call Waiting also is provided in Italy and all other countries through DCS e Attendant Intrusion Attendant Intrusion is provided on satellite switches via TGU TGE trunks Attendant Intrusion also is provided through DCS Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 349 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Uniform Dial Plan How to administer UDP Detailed description Uniform Dial Plan UDP provides a common 4 or 5 digit dial plan specified in the Dial Plan Record that can be shared among a group of switches Interswitch dialing and intraswitch dialing both require 4 or 5 digit dialing UDP is used with an electronic tandem network ETN main satellite and tributary switches and Distributed Communications Systems DCS In addition UDP can provide uniform 4 or 5 digit dialing between 2 or more private switching systems without ETN main satellite and tributary switches or DCS Form Field Dial Plan Record Uniform Dial Plan Second Digit Table e UDP Extension Search Order Uniform Dial Plan All AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table All AAR and ARS Digit Conversion All Table Node Number Routing R
330. event the duplication of IP addresses on the Internet the LANA has reserved the following ranges of IP addresses for private networks 1 Class A networks 16 6 Million addresses 10 0 0 0 gt 10 255 255 255 16 Class B networks 1 Million addresses 172 16 0 0 gt 172 31 255 255 256 Class C networks 65 000 addresses 192 168 0 0 gt 192 168 255 255 These IP addresses can be used repeatedly in separate private networks which are not connected to the Internet Routing tables prohibit the propagation of these addresses over the Internet See RFC 1918 All other IP addresses are unique and must be assigned by the IANA or ISP Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 15 IP Addressing Subnetting Reasons for subnetting How subnets are 1 Networking Overview Subnetting is the grouping of IP addresses associated with a network ID into two or more subnetworks The subnets of a network ID are visible only within the organization that owns the network ID Internet routers route messages based on the network ID and the routers within the private organization differentiate between the individual subnets Subnetting is desirable because 1t enables a more efficient allocation and management of IP addresses The three class hierarchy of IP addresses results in an inefficient allocation of addresses in many cases because addresses are assigned and managed in blocks by network ID For
331. example a company that needs 10 000 IP addresses in each of two locations might be assigned two Class B network IDs each of which provides 65 534 IP addresses Even though one Class B network ID would provide more than enough addresses for both locations having a separate network ID for each location is easier to manage If the company uses only 20 000 of these addresses about 100 000 go unused In this case subnetting would enable the company to use one Class B network ID and subdivide the addresses into two subnets one for each location Each subnet would have a unique extended network ID that would enable them to be managed as if they had unique network IDs Typically organizations need to manage IP addresses in separate groups based on several criteria in addition to location e different types of LANs e different server applications e different work projects e security The grouping of IP addresses provided by the three Class structure does not allow nearly enough flexibility to meet the needs of most organizations Subnetting allows the N IP addresses associated with a network ID to be divided into as few as 2 groups each with N 2 addresses or into as many as N 2 groups each with 2 addresses if desired RFC 950 defines a standard procedure to divide a Class A B or C network ID into created subnets The subnetting adds a third level of hierarchy to the two level hierarchy of the Class A B and C network ID number
332. extension to the file name when it is saved You must save the file without an extension or rename it to Imhosts with no file extension Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 441 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Alert types IP trunk generates alerts when e The IP trunk service stops e The DSP card does not respond e The Dial Plan has changed e The access rules have changed e The initialization file its ini is missing e The dial routing plan file gk ini is missing Testing Alerts You can test alerts by generating a dial plan has changed alert To generate a dial plan has changed alert 1 Open Configuration Manager 2 Click the Dial Routing Plan tab 3 Add anew machine entry and click Add Viewing error messages The IP trunk application logs error messages and stores the error messages and warnings in the Windows NT Event Viewer Note Set System logs and the Application logs to Overwrite Events as Needed for the NT Event Viewer To view error messages and warnings in the Windows NT Event Viewer 1 Click Start Programs Administrative Tools 2 Click Event Viewer If necessary click Log Application to view the application window The Event Viewer application window displays with a list of events the date and time the events occurred and the source category and event number 3 Double click the event that you want to
333. extension used to perform maintenance functions on the standby physical channel in a duplicated system This is the extension specified on the dial plan The standby remote loop around tests fail if this field is not administered Identifies the maximum allowable bit rate for the modem Displays only if the Modem field is y Valid entries Usage 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 and 28800 default is 9600 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 295 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Abbreviated Dialing Specifies the type of abbreviated dialing list List 1 Valid Value Usage s system Tf g or p is entered a group number or personal list number g group also is required Entry in this field supports Data Hot Line p personal This field can be left blank e enhanced blank Note See Administrator s Guide 555 233 502 for detailed information on abbreviated dialing Special Dialing Option Identifies the type of dialing when this data module originates calls Valid Value Usage hot line default or Leave blank for regular normal keyboard dialing blank Assigned Member Ext Display only Extension and name of a previously administered user who has an and Name associated Data Extension button and who will share the use of the module Administration for Network Connectivity 296 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1
334. f 0 allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen This must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 143 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch Processor Channel 32 connection to Switch 1 for gateway to Switch 2 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Dest
335. f a user on a branch calls the attendant and conferences the attendant onto the call the attendant s display is not updated with conference There is no QSIG standard defined for Conference and Definity has not implemented conference via MSI Centralized AUDIX When a user zero s out of AUDIX if the host PBX is a QSIG CAS branch then the call is sent to the QSIG CAS attendant DCS On an incoming attendant seeking call calling party information may be received at the branch if a call comes from another PBX in the network over a DCS ISDN trunk Dial Access to Attendant When a user on a branch PBX dials the Dial Access to Attendant number as administered on the Dial Plan Record screen the call is sent to an attendant on the main PBX DID Tie ISDN Intercept DID Tie and ISDN trunk calls that are intercepted are sent to the attendant on the main Emergency access to attendant Emergency access may be administered so that if stations are off hook for an extended period of time then a call is placed to the attendant or a user can dial an Emergency access to attendant feature access code Emergency access to the attendant does not go to the attendant on the main PBX Instead the call goes to an attendant on the branch PBX If there is no branch attendant the call is denied Facility Busy Indication Facility Busy indication functions as for RLT CAS Individual Attendant Access An attendant may be assigned an individu
336. f preference of G711MU use See IP Parameters page 34 for a description of the G723 6 3K differences between codec types G723 5 8K G729A UDP Port Ranges Enter a minimum and maximum port number Valid Value Usage 1 65535 Enter a minimum and maximum port number to specify a y block of port numbers to be used for audio connections Min lt Max Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 255 Networking Screens Data Module Screens A Screens Reference The Data Module screen must be administered at both ends of a DCS connection except for ISDN connections There are two types of data modules used with TCP IP connections ppp and ethernet There are two types of data modules used with BX 25 connections the proc intf data module is used for the csi and si models and the x 25 data module is used with the r model The pdm data module is needed when the r model is connected to an si model via x 25 The fields that are common to two or more of the data module types are described first followed by the screen pictures and descriptions of the fields that are unique for a given data module type Common Data Module Fields The following fields are common to two or more of data module types Data Extension Extension number for this data module Valid Entries Data Module Usage Types A 1 to 5 digit ppp The data extension is entered on the number consistent ethernet c
337. f unrestricted Class of Service QSIG MWI messages use the default COS of unrestricted Facility Restriction Levels and Traveling Class Marks A QSIG MWI TSC always uses FRL 7 unrestricted Generalized Route Selection GRS uses the TSC column on the Route Pattern form to select a preference for carrying QSIG MWI TSCs ISDN QSIG BRI QSIG MWI is dependent on QSIG TSCs QSIG MWI is possible over QSIG BRI lines Message Sequence Tracer MST traces QSIG MWI messages Off Premises Station If a DS1 is used to implement an off premises station QSIG MWI does not work with the off premises station DS1 off premise stations do not receive system message waiting indicators Uniform Dial Plan UDP It is possible to route QSIG MWI messages by using UDP Administration for Network Connectivity 384 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Called Busy Name B Private Networking Adjunct Switch Applications Interface ASAT A Connected Number is sent in the Connected Event to ASAI adjuncts Therefore upon receipt of a Called Busy Number it is stored in such a way that it is not be sent accidentally as a Connected Number if no actual Connected Number is received in the CONNECT message when the call is answered ISDN QSIG Call Diversion including Reroute Both the Called Name and Called Number are sent to the ringing busy extension Call Transfer As is done for the Called Name the Called Number of a ringing party is
338. fined connections Interface Processor channels channels channels channels tos 1 1 4 1 2 5000 5000 lt 2 Y 5001 5001 12 h A 4 21 5003 x any 384 64500 64500 256 Link 2 Link 5 hardware connections Processor UN331B Network DS1 DSI RA control TN767 Voice data L TN767 Bee UN332B TN464 TN464 pS Woo es of on g TDM bus Router E TDM bus 2000 Ethernet lu a data ie C LAN Bus o Ka A a TN799 bridge Router E e Intuity o Packet bus LAN AUDIX Packet bus O O node 1 node 2 node 3 node 4 Node 5 Ext 2377 192 168 1 125 192 168 1 97 192 168 1 39 Ext 3201 loc 1c0877 loc 120517 192 168 1 124 192 168 1 51 cydfec2b KLC 101899 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 75 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names 3 C LAN Administration This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or a Lucent representative Note Enter no
339. for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 235 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Group 24 data to Switch Node 1 page1 add trunk group 24 Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 24 Group Type tie CDR Reports Group Name dcs data to Switch 1 COR 1 TN 1 TAC Outgoing Display n Busy Threshold 99 Direction two way Dial Access y Queue Length 0 Comm Type rbavd Trunk Signaling Type Night Service Incoming Destination Auth Code n Trunk Flash n BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5 Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec 500 Digit Treatment Digits Sig Bit Inversion none Connected to Toll n DTT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 STT Loss normal Duplex full Receive Answer Supervision y Group 24 page 2 add trunk group 24 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Connected to CO Group 14 member assignments Page 2 of 10 Measured none Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Glare Handling none Maintenance Tests y Maintenance Busy neither end Per Call CPN Blocking Code Per Call CPN Unblocking Code TRUNK GROUP Administe
340. for the following DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access DCS Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection DCS Busy Verification of Terminals and Trunks Voice Terminals An attempt to dial an extension that has been previously administered as belonging to an administered NCA TSC results in intercept tone being received Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing treats a call from another switch in a DCS arrangement as external DCS Distinctive Ringing treats such calls as internal If both features are administered DCS Distinctive Ringing takes precedence If EDCS is activated DID treatment may be different See Example DCS configurations page 329 328 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Enhanced DCS LWC Multiappearance Conference Transfer Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication e Class of Restriction When a call goes to coverage it is the called party s not the covering party s restrictions that are used e DCS Multi appearance Conference Transfer Activation of LWC is denied after a DCS call has been conferenced or transferred Voice Terminal Display No display transparency is provided for DCS Multi Appearance Conference Transfer EDCS On calls to or from Public Network Trunks calling called party restrictions are checked when EDCS is active e Loudspeaker Paging Access If Trunk
341. g et erty Bees at Beery adm Aa A ee A E i 237 AAR Digit Analysis aq a ae ee al Be eRe ee Ee SO 237 ROUING Pates 550 pue Bh ae eg E oe Re Be oh at we we 237 Node Names 4 coi ek enh A EE we ea ee Re we Oe he Hwee do eh a a 238 Data Modules cee ca ay ic ae ke ew a A ta Re a 238 Processor Channel Assignments e 239 IP ROUNO lt lt cutis a da Re ah ro Ro a Ge oe A Be ce o 239 IP ROUNO aui ds bods Sohn Oy ds Ae Gs SS a A a si 239 FUNC TOUD aca Se A de Gece Gee a Gees Bes te cea hares A ACES 240 Intuity Translations for DCS AUDIX 2 0 00 tenes 241 GMS AGMIMIStRAGIOMN iiis seriadas dt ape dt end did a ale ata ged 241 Appendix A Screens Reference 243 Networking SCIONS escitas hah nde AAA taaad 243 Other Network Related DEFINITY Screens 0 0 0 0 00 a 244 Networking Screens 26sec acacia eee ed nee Heke CORRES HREM CERES ERGO CRRA Re RE OD 245 Node Names ros e deo ee how de he Gees amp Se Se Bee Bo HS oe EG 245 pade Wes cat Bee ce Gea we a ee O A oe etre 245 Pages 2 Ga poa 86s SHEERS A a SSD GED EAHA ER Ee Re RE 246 IP Interfaces o sorora bk do eR he we a we aw Bee a ed 247 IP ROUINO susi a A Pa bok ODES eae Ge babe 251 IP Media Parameters aa a a a a 255 Data Module Screens 2 aa a 256 Common Data Module Fields a aaa a a 256 Data Module Type ethernet a 262 Data Modulo Type pips rere ipe sgi eh aoe we AB ae a 263 Data Mo
342. g on the physical connectivity For DCS CMS or Intuity AUDIX set this field to adjunct The link number must be in the range 1 33 for R8r not previously assigned on this switch 10f2 104 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Field Name COS COR TN DTE DCE Enable Link Remote Loop Around Test Destination Number Establish Connection Connected Data Module Error Logging Permanent Virtual Circuit Switched Virtual Circuit Highest PVC Logical Channel 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The DTE DCE assignments must be opposites on the two ends of the connection Use dee for node 2 Set to y after the processor channels have been assigned Set to n unless testing external is used when connecting an r model to an si model For an r to r connection enter the TAC extension y means that this switch will be responsible for the call setup for this connection Enter n when administering the data module for Switch 2 Extension of node 2 data module Set to n for normal operations Set to y for testing logs all data module errors Always y for DCS CMS and I
343. g stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default Oe Oe QUESO node 1 eth 192 168 10 128 node 2 192 168 10 12 node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 3 nodes e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 e C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 164 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx
344. g user by QSIG VALU Call Coverage and if the Principal user has a Simulated Bridge Appearance SBA and if a call goes through a QSIG Path Replacement successfully the Principal user will loose the SBA Integrated IP Trunking An incoming call over an IP trunk that goes through more than 2 tandem nodes and is compressed and decompressed at each entry and exit point on the trunk may suffer voice quality degradation Abbreviated Dialing The main attendant can use abbreviated dialing buttons to extend QSIG CAS calls Administration without Hardware Administration without hardware for attendant consoles for QSIG CAS functions as for RLT CAS Attendant Auto manual Splitting The attendant can split away from a call to privately call another party by pressing the START button Attendant Auto Start and Dont Split Attendant Auto Start and Don t Split functions as for RLT CAS The attendant can initiate a call while on an active call by pressing any button without pressing the START button first The system automatically splits the call and dials the next call To deactivate Auto Start press the Don t Split button Attendant Backup Alerting Attendant Backup Alerting for QSIG CAS functions as for RLT CAS If attendant backup alerting is turned on other users on the main PBX may have the ability to answer attendant seeking calls Attendant Call Waiting Attendant call waiting is available for calls that originate on the main A
345. ge 1 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes ddxx dd 2x 20 Type local 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 224 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 2 Administration 4 Networking Example AAR Digit Analysis change aar analysis 1 Page 1 of AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full Total Route Node ANI Min Max Pattern Num Reqd 7 7 101 1 n 7 7 101 3 n 7 7 101 4 n Routing Patterns display route pattern 101 Pattern Number 101 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC No Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 1 12 0 3 user 2 user 3i user 4 user Si user 6 user Data Modules procr intf data module add data module 2992 Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Data Extension 2992 25 on link 2 to node 1 Type procr intf cos Maintenance Extension 2002 Physical Channel 02_ COR Destination Number 7221993 ITC Restricted TN Establish Connection y Link 2_ DTE DCE Connected Data Module Enable Link ABBREVIATED DIALING Listl SPECIAL DIALING OPTION ASSIGNED MEMBER Station with a data extension button for this data module Ext Name Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 225 Switch Node 2 Administration 4 Networking Example Processor Channel Assignments Release 6 Processor Channel As
346. gned to a signaling group Enter values in these fields page 1 Group Type Carrier Medium Service Type Codeset to Send Display TestCall ITC TestCall BCC page 2 Used for DCS PBX ID DCS Signaling page 4 trunk group members assignment Port Code Name Night Sig Grp Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 37 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks IP Media Parameters Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Media Parameters screen Use this screen to enter the types of codecs for audio processing available on this switch the preferred order of use of the codec types the range of port numbers available for audio connections Network Regions The Region field on the IP Interfaces screen allows you to set up segregated groups of C LAN and IP Interface Medpro resources This feature can be used in a variety of ways For example you could use regions to allocate specific C LAN and IP Interface boards to H 323 trunks and others to stations or you could use regions to avoid multimedia traffic over low bandwidth or high latency network links H 323 Trunk Administration Task Detail This section describes the tasks that need to be completed to administer an H 323 trunk Sample values are used to populate the fields to show the relationships between the screens and fields Task 1 Assign Node Names This task assi
347. gnment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID dls n 0 2 n 0 21 y des c 3 0 node 1 5003 21 12 Y 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 21 ppp connection to Switch 1 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 2 is the client for this session Set node 1 to server s Interface Link This must match the link number on the node 2 data module screen in the previous task Interface Chan A value of 0 allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 Destination Node Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen Destination Port This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 70 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be
348. gns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network that this switch communicates with via IP connections A Node Names screen must be administered on each DEFINITY switch in an IP network A node is defined as any of the following a C LAN ethernet or ppp port a bridge or router a CMS ethernet port or an Intuity AUDIX or other MSA network interface card The AUDIX and MSA node name and IP address must be entered on page 1 of the screen The data for all other node types must be entered on pages 2 6 For H 323 connections each MedPro ethernet port IP interface on the local switch only must also be assigned a node name and IP address on this form The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 38 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Task 1 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names screen enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 of the screen change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address
349. gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 31 ethernet connection to Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 eth to Server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 168 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote
350. gt R8csi Switch 3 Task Enable Bus Bridge Connectivity This task enables the bus bridge functionality on the C LAN circuit pack to provide a path between the packet bus and the processor Note Bus Bridge Connectivity is used on the csi model only This task may have been complete when the C LAN circuit pack was installed Steps Begin gt Open the Maintenance Related System Parameters form enter ch sys ma gt Go to page 2 and skip to the Packet Intf2 field near the bottom of the screen change system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 vcs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI Service SPID DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop Around Test Call Extension LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Packet Intf1 y Packet Intf2 y Bus Bridge 0la09 Inter Board Link Timeslots Pt0 6 Pt1 1 Pt2 1 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Packet Intf2 Enables the bus bridge Bus Bridge Location of the C LAN circuit pack If the system has two C LANs only one is administered for bus bridge Inter Board Specifies the bandwidth used on the 3 ports of
351. gt Submit the screen End Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Used for TCP IP connections only This must match the link number assigned on the procr intf data module screen The interface channel number must be in the range 1 64 for an X 25 link Used for TCP IP connections only Used for TCP IP connections only For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 2 of 2 116 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Node Names 3 C LAN Administration This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 3 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2
352. hannel and a switch equipped with traditional DCS using BX 25 data links In this situation the messages travel from the gateway through the NCA TSCs or CA TSCs to TSC capable switches and from the gateway to switches that support only traditional DCS via a BX 25 logical channel At least one switch must be configured as an ISDN DCS Gateway node in a DCS network that consists of switches that support DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel and PBXs that do not support the feature Switches directly connected to AUDIX serve as Gateway nodes 322 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking DCS feature considerations Attendant Alphanumeric Display considerations Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access considerations Attendant Direct Trunk Group Selection considerations Attendant Display considerations Automatic Callback considerations If you call an attendant on another switch in the DCS network your display shows the attendant s name but does not show the attendant s extension instead you see a zero where the extension should be On outgoing DCS calls display of the called name may be delayed for a few seconds until the required information arrives from the distant node The called name display only works between DEFINITY ECS DEFINITY Generic 1 and Generic 3 Systems and System 75s This feature is not available f
353. hannel has high or low priority Priorities should be assigned based on the operational speed of the links and the number of hops in the network channel Displays for G3si only Valid entries Usage high low blank Implementation notes The fields that appear on a particular screen will vary depending upon the system configuration Cabinet Layout and Carrier Type being administered The number of Slot fields displayed will vary depending on the system being configured For G3r the number of Slot fields displayed will represent all administrable slots available for the given Carrier Type For G3si all possible Slots will display Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 301 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Node Number Routing This screen specifies the routing pattern associated with each node in a public or private network NNR is a required capability for Extension Number Portability ENP and is associated with the Uniform Dial Plan UDP change node routing 87 partition 2 Page 1 of 2 NODE NUMBER ROUTING Partitioned Group Number 2 Route Route Route Route Route Route Route Pat Pat Pat Pat Pat Pat Pat Lg ae 30 45 T 60 Ue a 90 __ A AS o SI 46 _ 61a T 76 SE DE ai e ZA AN PL GAPS eee OZ 3 SR mE 3 m 48 _ 632 eee UTS 93 TS Asa EQ E en 49 64 ___ YE 94 _ 5 aen 20 DS 50 imm 65 o 80 _ 95 o Or LIA O A pyl
354. he Signaling Group Enter the assigned ISDN PRI trunk group number whose call handling table will be used to route the incoming NCA TSCs An ISDN BRI trunk group may not be used Valid entries Usage 1 to 99 blank 282 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Trunk Group for Channel Selection Enter the assigned trunk group number An ISDN BRI trunk group may not be used Valid entries Usage 1 to 99 blank Supplementary Service Protocol Determines whether AT amp T NCA TSCs or QSIG NCA TSCs are sent over the interface To change this field from a to b first check the Adm d NCA TSC Index field on the ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments page 291 Make sure no NCA TSC on the Signaling Group screen is administered as a Gateway Channel If they are you must remove the NCA TSC Gateway assignment first before this field can be changed to b Valid entries Usage AT amp T protocol b QSIG protocol This field may be set to b only if the Basic Supplementary Services field on the System Parameters Customer Options screen is y If this field is b pages 2 through 5 do not appear Trunk Brd Enter a 5 character DS1 Interface circuit pack number that has trunk members belonging to this Signaling Group Displays when the Associated Signaling field is n indicates NFAS Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 G3
355. he destination switch 3 of 3 82 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Enable Bus Bridge Connectivity This task enables the bus bridge functionality on the C LAN circuit pack to provide a path between the packet bus and the processor Note Bus Bridge Connectivity is used on the csi model only This task may have been completed when the C LAN circuit pack was installed Steps Begin gt Open the Maintenance Related System Parameters form enter ch sys ma gt Go to page 2 and skip to the Packet Intf2 field near the bottom of the screen change system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 vcs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI Service SPID DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop Around Test Call Extension LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Packet Intf1 y Packet Intf2 y Bus Bridge 01a05 Inter Board Link Timeslots Pt0 6 Pt1 1 Pt2 1 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Packet Intf
356. he switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn C LAN 01a05 TN799 B node 3 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 128 1 BEBK gt Enter values Field Inter region IP Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use connectivity MedPro resources administered in regions that are allowed different from the endpoints regions Enable Eth Pt The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Type Enter c lan or medpro Slot Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Code Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Node name Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 197 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ether
357. higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Administration for Network Connectivity 72 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi This configuration is a 10BaseT ethernet connection between a DEFINITY ECS R8r and a DEFINITY ECS R8csi switch in a DCS network which includes routers between the switches The R8r is connected to a CMS adjunct the DEFINITY administration for Intuity AUDIX would be similar via the LAN LAN aia 1 Router 1 Switch 1 Can Switch 2 DEFINITY ECS R8csi m ES Ethernet node 2 pot CMS ae or ns _ C LAN node 1 Intuity node 5 C LAN AUDIX Note This network has 5 IP nodes 2 DCS nodes 2 nodes on the router and one adjunct node The router separates two subnets so IP routes are needed from each switch to the nodes on the other side of the network Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 73 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi Task Summary 3 C LAN Administration The following tasks need to be completed for Switch 1 and Switch 2 4
358. his eventually requires at the time of installation and test realignment of the circuit packs and reworking associated wiring to agree with the software translations or new software translations to agree with the shipped hardware configuration Page 1 of X CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet __ Carrier _ Cabinet Layout Carrier Type Slot Code Sf Mode Name Slot Code Sf Mode Name 00 11 MEDPRO _ RESERVED IP 01 12 MEDPRO _ RESERVED IP 02 13 TN802_ B MAPD 03 14 04 15 05 e 16 06 alge 07 18 ae 08 Ds 19 ER 09 E 20 z 10 21 indicates circuit pack conflict Cabinet Note Each page of the screen represents one carrier within the cabinet specified on the command line For G3si all carriers and slots appear even if they are not included in the actual hardware This supports reconfiguration This field shows the cabinet number as entered on the command line Valid entries Usage Display only field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 277 Networking Screens Carrier Cabinet Layout Carrier Type Slot A Screens Reference This field shows the letter of the carrier A through E circuit packs are being administered on Valid entries Usage Display only field This field is only displayed for G3r This field describes the physical layout of the cabinet Valid entries Usage Display only field
359. horized use of com mon carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 or contact you Lucent representative Federal Communications Commission Statement Part 15 Class A Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea sonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a resi dential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Part 68 Network Registration Number This equipment is regis tered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of the FCC Rules It is identified by FCC registration number AS593M 13283 MF E Part 68 Answer Supervision Signaling Allowing this equipment to be
360. i POE POE POE POE Tims 57 65 Tms 52 60 100 20 500 23 400 200 9400 10 800 150 13 700 15600 300 6200 7 200 200 10 300 11 700 400 4700 540 TDM bus performance The impact of H 323 voice only calls on the TDM bus is the same as for circuit switch voice calls Administration for Network Connectivity 410 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 D Capacities and Performance Number of MedPros The following table gives the approximate carried load CL in Erlangs for m needed MedPro boards installed Carried loads are shown for a 22 and 31 audio streams per MedPro board corresponding to having the G 723 or G 729A a 22 or the G 711 a 31 codecs administered Number of MedPro boards CS MA NIN WN RA Ww NY A BW Y NY DN oul onli on amp 46 Assumptions This table assumes CL m for GOS P001 a 22 10 5 26 9 44 7 63 2 82 1 101 4 120 9 140 5 160 4 180 3 281 4 384 1 487 7 591 9 696 7 801 8 923 4 a 31 17 0 41 4 65 7 94 3 121 7 149 5 177 6 205 9 234 3 262 9 407 6 554 0 701 5 849 7 998 6 1147 9 1327 6 CLin for Full Availability a 22 a 31 22 31 44 62 66 93 88 124 110 155 132 186 154 217 176 248 198 279 220 310 330 465 440 620 550 775 660 930 710 1085 880 1240 1012 1426 e In columns 2 and 3 the carried loads are calculated assuming an infinite source for Grade of Service GOS of P001 The carried
361. ian to upgrade an existing DEFINITY Communications System or DEFINITY ECS to DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Includes upgrade considerations lists of required hardware and step by step upgrade procedures Also includes procedures to add control carriers switch node carriers port carriers circuit packs auxiliary cabinets and other equipment Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 461 G References DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Maintenance for R8 2r 555 233 117 Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R8 2r ECS Included are maintenance architecture craft commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Maintenance for R8 2si 555 233 123 Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R8 2si ECS Included are maintenance architecture craft commands step by step trouble clearing procedures the procedures for using all tests and explanations of the system s error codes DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Maintenance for R8 2csi 555 233 119 Issue 1 Provides detailed descriptions of the procedures for monitoring testing troubleshooting and maintaining the R8 2csi Compact Modular Cabinet ECS Included are maintenance ar
362. ications interface links 293 communications interface processor channel 273 data module 256 extension number portability numbering plan 299 hop channel assignment 300 IP Interfaces 247 IP Media Parameters 255 ISDN TSC gateway channel assignment 291 mwi subscriber number prefixes 303 netcon data module 295 new Xii node names 245 node number routing 302 signaling group 280 synchronization plan 304 uniform dialing plan 307 security issues 403 security alert default gateway 22 setting alerts on IP trunks 440 signaling 3 signaling group example 210 for ATM 289 for H 323 Trunk 287 signaling group screen 280 signaling group create 43 signaling group modify 48 softphone 11 software defined networks SDN 328 subnet mask 263 default 17 defined 17 example 19 subnetting 16 supplementary service B SSB routes 367 supported switches and adjuncts 53 58 switch components 4 synchronization plan example 210 229 234 synchronization plan screen 304 T1478 T1 support configuring DEFINITY ECS 421 tandem tie trunk networks TTTN 349 task assign IP route 77 85 88 106 118 151 163 165 177 187 188 195 197 assign ISDN TSC gateway 132 135 assign link via ethernet data module 42 43 45 48 49 79 87 108 120 153 167 179 199 assign link via ppp data module 63 68 127 141 149 159 175 180 182 191 assign link via procr intf data module 113 assign link via x 25 data module 104 assign node names 38 62 67 76
363. iciently in the private network QSIG Call Transfer attempts to connect the two parties more efficiently and drops the unnecessary switches When you use this feature you see no difference between QSIG Call Transfer and the standard DEFINITY ECS Transfer or Trunk to Trunk Transfer features QSIG Call Transfer differs from DCS Call Transfer in that additional call information is available for the connected parties after the transfer completes Depending upon QSIG Identification Services administration the connected parties displays show each other s name and or number If the name and number are not available the display of a connected party updates with the name of the involved trunk group 362 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Call Offer Call Completion B Private Networking This feature is the QSIG equivalent of Call Waiting A Private Telecommunication Network PTN offers up to four ways of invoking QSIG Supplementary Service Call Offer SS CO listed below DEFINITY ECS uses only the first way e Network invocation immediate the PTN automatically invokes SS CO whenever the calling user makes a call to a user that is busy if required by the service profile of the calling user e Consultation the calling user on being informed that a call has failed because it is busy at the destination and that SS CO may be possible is able within a d
364. ides QSIG Diversion with Rerouting page 1 Enter y to ensure that the coverage after forwarding activation deactivation defined at a user s phone via Station screen takes precedence over the system wide coverage after forwarding activation deactivation selection via the System Parameters Call Coverage Call Forwarding screen With QSIG Diversion with Rerouting active the system wide selection takes precedence unless you enter y See the examples in the following table Table 2 Coverage with QSIG Diversion with Rerouting Cvg After Cvg After QSIG VALU Then Fwd Pwd Sys Coverage Station Parms Overrides Screen Coverage QSIG Screen Diversion Call doesn t go to local user s m a coverage after failed forward y attempt Call control passed to switch to which call forwarded a Call goes to local user s coverage y y after failed forward attempt i i Call goes to local user s coverage y after failed forward attempt Call doesn t go to local user s a coverage after failed forward y y attempt Call control passed to switch to which call forwarded Administration for Network Connectivity 376 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Related Phone Administration Related Hunt Group Administration Related Administration of Terminating Extension Groups Related Administration of AUDIX Message Centers B Private Networking e Maintain SBA at Principal Enter y to a
365. ies C LAN prepares the signaling information for TCP IP transmission over one of two pathways either via an Ethernet LAN or a point to point protocol PPP connection depending on how the data link is administered If the link is administered for an ethernet connection the signaling data is sent out on a 10Base T network which is connected directly to the C LAN ethernet port If the link is administered for a PPP connection C LAN inserts the signaling data on the TDM bus for subsequent inclusion via the switching fabric in the same DS1 bit stream as the voice transmissions The C LAN board can be inserted in any available port slot Up to 10 C LAN boards can be used in the DEFINITY ECS R8r and R8si models up to 2 C LAN boards can be used in the R8csi model Each C LAN board has 17 ports port 17 is used for the LAN interface and the other 16 can be used for PPP connections Up to 508 sockets are available on each C LAN circuit pack IP Interface The IP Interface circuit pack TN802B enables two switches to transmit voice data between them over an IP network The TN802B normally operates in the MedPro mode which enables support of applications that comply with the H 323 v2 protocols It can also operate in the IP Trunk mode to support R7 IP trunks that emulate DS1 connections Tie Trunk Circuit Packs The tie trunk circuit packs provide an interface between the switch and the transmission facilities for voice data call signali
366. ify decode and restore the long zero strings in the original message B8ZS line coding does not corrupt digital data so it is commonly used with T 1 lines Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 467 bit binary digit Glossary bit binary digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible values 0 or 1 bit rate The speed at which bits are transmitted usually expressed in bits per second Also called data rate bps Bits per second BOS Bit oriented signaling BRI See Basic Rate Interface BRI bridge A device that connects two or more packet switched networks and directs packets sent from one to the other See router bus bridge A connection between the TDM bus and the packet bus built into the C LAN circuit pack for use with DEFINITY ECS R7csi Bus bridge connectivity is not used with any other DEFINITY switch model BX 25 A version of the CCITT X 25 protocol for data communications BX 25 adds a fourth level to the standard X 25 interface This uppermost level combines levels 4 5 and 6 of the ISO reference model byte A sequence of usually eight bits processed together Call Detail Recording CDR A feature that uses software and hardware to record call data Same as station message detail recording SMDR Call Detail Recording utility CDRU Software that collects stores optionally filters and outputs call d
367. iginating Originating Search string 1A2B 1C 1C Search string 2A1B 2C 2C Replace string 1A2B 1C 1C Replace string 2A1B 2C 2C IP Address 2G 2G 2G IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Terminating Search string 2A1B 2C 2C Search string 1A2B 1C 1C Replace string 1F1C 1F1C 1F1C Replace string 2F2C 2F2C 2F2C SI99YS410M YUNAL dl 0002 dy anss poS esz sg g AUANIOUUOD YIOMION 104 UONENSIUILIPY O ZZZ dID Ssv Worksheet 6 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site same country only area code X SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same A Different country Different country analysis entry your actual A area analysis entry your actual z area h Country different A Country different with values code with values code area code area code Dialed String 1A2BX 1CX 1CX Dialed String 2A1BX 2CX 2CX Total Mn ii Total Mn ll i Total Mx E 5 z Total Mx i Rte Pat 1H 1H 1H Rte Pat 2H 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each area code X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each area code X Set this value to the total length of the numbe
368. in gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Eth Pt 555K Net Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn C LAN 01c08 TN799 B node 1 255 255 255 224 192 168 1_ 97_ 1 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 gt Enter values Field Inter region IP connectivity allowed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node name Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use MedPro resources administered in regions that are different from the endpoints regions The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Enter c lan or medpro Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 77 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn gt Submit the screen End Condit
369. in SBA at Principal on the System Parameters Call Coverage Call Forwarding form Temporary Bridge Appearance TBA Same interaction as Simulated Bridge Appearance AUDIX Centralized AUDIX AUDIX is usually specified as the last coverage point When a call is routed to AUDIX local or remote centralized place the TBA Temporary Bridge Appearance is not maintained for the Principal user i e the Principal user can not bridge on to the call after it routes to AUDIX For the last coverage point which do not require control at the Principal user s PBX the QSIG VALU Coverage shall route the call as QSIG Diversion by Rerouting instead of QSIG Diversion by forward switching and let the remote calling user s PBX route the call directly to the remote covering number If the Rerouting PBX indicates failure then the Principal user s PBX i e Served User s PBX in terms of QSIG Diversion shall revert to the normal QSIG VALU Coverage handling The advantage of this approach is that it saves the trunk resources and provide path optimization without QSIG Path Replacement 386 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Centralized Attendant Service CAS B Private Networking QSIG Call Transfer If a call that is transferred using QSIG Call Transfer transfer by join to a secondary user i e Principal user for QSIG VALU Call Coverage and the call is routed to a coverin
370. ination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 to server s This must match the link number assigned on the data module screen A value of 0 allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen Node name for the gateway through which the destination is reached This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen This must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 144 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note
371. ing features Attendant Call Waiting Call Waiting Termination Priority Calling DCS priority calling from the attendant station is not available Distinctive Ringing DCS Distinctive Ringing activates the called terminal alerting or ringing device to indicate the type of incoming call to the user before they answer it Distinctive Alerting functions in a DCS environment the same as it does within a single system By default internal calls are identified by al burst ringing pattern external calls by a 2 burst ringing pattern and priority calls by a 3 burst ringing pattern However you can administer these patterns Leave Word Calling LWC transparency in a DCS configuration allows messages from a DEFINITY switch to another node depending on the storage capability of the remote node Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 317 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Multiappearance Conference Transfer DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer provides transparency for transferring calls and conferencing calls within a DCS network A user in the DCS can initiate conference calls among or transfer calls originated from extensions in the DCS network to another extension within the DCS by dialing the UDP extension For transferred calls the destination need not be within the DCS In a DCS if a party in a conference hangs up or completes a transfer leav
372. ing message recording retrieval To use centralized AUDIX you must use QSIG Diversion On a remote switch the call covers using Diversion to the hunt group assigned to AUDIX on the host switch Then the host switch sends all the appropriate information to AUDIX so that AUDIX correctly answers the call 364 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking Other QSIG Centralized Messaging With a QSIG centralized messaging system the remote switch is called a served user switch When an AUDIX system supports a QSIG network the served user switch does not need to be a DEFINITY ECS but the host or message center switch must be QSIG allows a DEFINITY switch to be a served user switch of a non DEFINITY message center switch Therefore the messaging system connected to the message center switch can serve the DEFINITY switch if that messaging system has a QSIG interface Octel Serenade is such a messaging system The users on a served user switch in a QSIG messaging network may use only one message center However the message center switch may served multiple served user switches via DCS as well as QSIG What you get with QSIG Centralized AUDIX e Calls to users on a remote PBX cover or forward correctly and are answered by AUDIX With a personalized greeting With appropriate busy or not available greeting depending upon the reason the call was redi
373. ing only outgoing trunks on the call the system attempts to preserve the connection if any of the remaining parties on the call is a DCS tie trunk Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication provides attendants with a visual indication that the number of busy trunks in a remote group reached an administered level A visual indication is also provided when all trunks in a trunk group are busy Note DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication is not available if you are using DCS over ISDN PRI To use this feature you must have a DCS Trunk Group between the local and remote switches and the trunks in that trunk group cannot insert digits on incoming calls If you need digit insertion on these trunks it should be added on the outgoing trunk based on the dialed digits Except for System 75 System 85 and DEFINITY G2 switches you can administer DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication only for remote trunk groups that are directly connected to the local switch Trunk group access codes for these trunk groups must be 3 digits or less and cannot include trunk members 100 through 999 DCS with Rerouting DCS with Rerouting allows a call s connection between two DEFINITY systems to be replaced by a new connection All of the trunks used in the original path must be DCS and the new path utilizes only DCS trunks DCS with Rerouting provides the following capabilities Attempts to obtain a better generally l
374. inister a host IP route On the IP Routing screen you would enter the node names assigned on the Node Names screen for these nodes Node Destination Route Switch Gateway Comments Connections Node Node Type host IP route needed because there is an B 1 gt 4 4 2 intermediate node between nodes 1 amp 4 host IP route needed c de 1 3 because there is an intermediate node between nodes 4 amp 1 Note 1 The PPP data modules on switches B and C for the connections to A must be enabled before the IP routes can be administered Note 2 Nodes 2 and 3 in this example are two ports on the same C LAN board Messages from node 1 destined for node 4 arrive at node 2 the C LAN ARP software routes the messages to node 4 through node 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 25 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview PPP with Ethernet Connections The diagram below shows two interconnected sub networks There are three switches in a DCS network with a ppp signaling connection between switches A amp B and an ethernet signaling connection between switch A and the adjunct Switches A amp B and the adjunct are on one sub network and switch C is on another sub network Switch A acts as a gateway to convert between the two signaling protocols PPP data modules are administered between nodes amp 3 on switches A amp B and ethernet data modules are administered on
375. inistration for Network Connectivity 202 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 4 Networking Example This chapter provides an example of a complex network It describes procedures for administering trunk groups dial plans signaling groups and data links for a four switch network with an Intuity AUDIX and a CMS The network example is unchanged from the example in Issue 1 for R7 of this book The screens have been updated for R8 Overview This section shows a high level diagram of the example network and lists the administration tasks that need to be completed for each node to set up the network NOTE The term node is used in this chapter as in the other chapters to mean a network interface such as a port on the C LAN board Traditionally in a DCS network of DEFINITY switches node has been used to refer to a switch In this chapter a DCS node is referred to as a Switch Node Thus a Switch Node a switch can have many nodes network interfaces The Dial Plan and AAR Digit Analysis Table screens both have fields that still use node to refer to a switch Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 203 Overview 4 Networking Example Network Diagram The following diagram shows a high level view of the example network Switch Node 2 Switch Node 3 X 25 ISDN DEFINITY ECS DEFINITY ECS R6si R7si Switch Nod
376. inistration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks Best Service Routing You can also use the Audio IP port number range field to specify a block of port numbers to be used for audio connections Then if your network is equipped with the appropriate data filtering devices audio data can be segregated from other data traffic to improve quality of service Open the screen with the change command ch ip p and set the following fields e Codec type enter as many of the following types as supported by this switch in the preferred order of usage G711A G711Mu G723 6 3k G723 5 3k G 729A Refer to the following table of bandwidth requirements to decide which codecs to administer Codec Bandwidth Requirement G711 A law 64Kbps 117 6 Kbps G711 Mu law 64Kbps 117 6 Kbps G723 6 3Kbps 31 1 Kbps G723 5 3Kbps 29 6 Kbps G729A 8Kbps 33 6 Kbps e Audio IP port number range UDP Port Range Min 2048 Max 65535 The G711 codecs use either an A law or Mu law companding algorithm The Mu law algorithm is used in the U S and Japan the A law is typically used in other countries The call center Best Service Routing BSR feature can be implemented using H 323 trunks You can use H 323 trunks for just the polling function or for both the polling and interflow functions Since polling requires only a small amount of data exchange the additional netwo
377. inward dialing DID trunk groups 354 Distinctive Ringing feature interactions DCS Distinctive Ringing 328 Distributed Communication System DCS feature interactions ISDN Feature Plus feature 357 Distributed Communications System DCS feature 312 see also specific DCS features 2 Node private network with AUDIX 329 3 Node public private network with AUDIX 332 administration for switch 1 330 334 administration for switch 2 331 335 administration for switch 3 336 AUDIX administration 330 333 494 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System DCS feature continued AUDIX configuration examples 329 configuring DCS networks 312 DCS features 313 feature considerations 323 forms 293 interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 Extension Number Portability ENP 347 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Call Transfer 380 QSIG Name and Number Identification 380 Uniform Dial Plan UDP 354 network configurations 312 documents how to order xvi dotted decimal notation 13 DS1 circuit pack example 208 228 233 IP Trunk 421 DTGS buttons 342 El 476 electronic tandem networks ETN Private Network Access 349 ELMO xvi Emergency Access to Attendant feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 enable links 72 processor channels 72 Enhanced DCS EDCS feature 319 324 interactions Class of Restriction COR 329 DCS Ca
378. ion Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Used for TCP IP connections only This must match the link number assigned on the procr intf data module screen The interface channel number must be in the range 1 64 for an X 25 link Used for TCP IP connections only Used for TCP IP connections only 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 115 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch This is usually called the node number Processor Channel 23 connection to Switch 1 for gateway to Switch 3 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID
379. ion for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing Private IP Address 1 Networking Overview The IANA assigns a network address to an organization and a network administrator in the organization assigns the Host IDs associated with that Network ID to nodes within the organization s network The following table shows the ranges of network and host IDs and the total number of IP addresses network IDs times host IDs for each class Network ID Range Host ID Range Total IP Addresses Class A 7 bits 24 bits 2 1 Billion 126 Networks 16 8 Million Hosts per network Wh 1 to 126 f 0 0 1 to 255 255 254 Class B 14 bits 16 bits 1 1 Bilion 16 382 Networks 65 534 Hosts per network 25 128 0 to 191 255 0 1 to 255 254 Class C 21 bits 8 bits 0 5 Billion 2 1 Million Networks 254 Hosts per network 12 5 192 0 0 to 233 255 255 1 to 254 Classes 0 5 Billion DE 12 5 You can tell the class of an IP address by the first octet For example 191 221 30 101 is a Class B address and 192 221 30 101 is a Class C address Addresses on the Internet need to be unique to avoid ambiguity in message routing over the Internet To insure uniqueness the Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA controls the use of IP addresses Organizations that maintain private networks that never communicate with the Internet can use arbitrary IP addresses as long as they are unique within the private network To help pr
380. ions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address for node 1 specified on the Node Names screen 1s 192 168 1 124 The 192 in the first octet puts this address in the range of Class C addresses which means the first 3 octets are used for the network ID and the fourth octet is used for host IDs The subnet mask defines the network and host parts of the IP addresses In the Subnet Mask for this example 192 168 1 224 the 224 in the fourth octet indicates that 3 high order bits from the fourth octet are used to define subnets on the network 192 168 1 224 128 64 32 11100000 The first 3 bits are used for subnet IDs and the last 5 bits are used for host IDs Eight subnets can be defined with 3 bits and each subnet can have a maximum of 32 hosts defined with the remaining 5 bits Of these only 6 subnets with 30 hosts each are usable The usable IP addresses in the 6 subnets have the following ranges of values for the fourth octet 33 62 65 94 97 126 129 158 161 190 and 193 222 The IP address for this node 1 IP interface 192 168 1 124 is on the third subnet because 124 lies in the range 97 126 Note that node 2 adjunct 192 168 1 125 and node 3 router 192 168 1 97 are both also on the third subnet Node 4 192 168 1 51 and node 5 192 168 1 39 are both on the first subnet The first and last IP addresses in each subnet are not usable as host addresses bec
381. is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Node name Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 106 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this example leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Leave blank for this configuration The only connection to this IP interface is node 3 on Switch 3 Node 3 is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 2
382. is the node name for the far end C LAN IP Interface used for trunks assigned to this signaling group The node name must be administered on the Node Names form on this switch This field can be left blank if the signaling group is associated with an unspecified destination The same number as entered in the Near end Listen Port field is recommended this number must match the number entered in the Near end Listen Port field on the signaling group form for the far end switch This field can be left blank if the signaling group is associated with an unspecified destination Leave the default n if the far end switch is a DEFINITY ECS Set to y only if the far end switch is a non DEFINITY switch and requires a location request to obtain a signaling address in its signaling protocol Always enter y for inter DEFINITY connections If the local and or remote switch is a non DEFINITY switch leave the default n Set to y to automatically remove from service trunks assigned to this signaling group when IP transport performance falls below limits administered on the Maintenance Related System Parameters sys par maint screen 2 of 2 add signaling group next ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service Feature As needed Inactivity Time out min TSC Local Mach Index Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl ID E n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n es n 8 n Page 2 of 5 If this signaling group will be used f
383. istration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field The node name for the interface C LAN port defined by this data module This must be a name previously entered on the Node Names screen y means that this switch will be responsible for the call setup for this connection Enter n when administering the data module for Switch 2 Trunk access code 611 plus extension of data module on node 2 3020 If you use just the extension then you must administer UDP and AAR route patterns to access the correct trunk group Name of the node at the far end Switch 2 of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen on both switches This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y another field will appear prompting for a CHAP secret password 20f2 64 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 1 and specifies the destination node and machine ID Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface
384. itch 2 This task administers an x 25 data module for the connection to node 2 The data module associates a link number with a port address and extension number for the PGATE port used for Steps this connection Begin gt If a PGATE circuit pack is not already administered in slot 1c01 insert the circuit pack in the slot and enter add pgate 1c01 then fill in the PGATE screen gt Open the Data Module form enter a da n add data module next DATA Data Extension 2102 Type x 25 cos Port 01C0102 COR Baud Rate 9600 TN Endpoint Type adjunct DTE DCE Link 5 Enable Link Permanent Virtual Circuit y Switched Virtual Circuit n Page 1 of 2 MODULE Name x 25 on link 5 to sw 2 Remote Loop Around Test n Destination Number external Establish Connection y Connected Data Module 4121 Error Logging n ict iO AS Highest PVC Logical Channel 64 gt Enter values Field Type Port Baud Rate Endpoint Type Link Conditions Comments This indicates the data module type for this connection This example means that the PGATE circuit pack is in slot 01c01 and link 5 uses port 02 Set to 9600 for DCS connections to vs or si models or to an r model with an external 9600 baud data line Set to switched for r to r connections with common channel signaling on DS1 trunks Set to 9600 for connections to Intuity AUDIX Set to either 9600 or 19200 for CMS dependin
385. itch is expected to call this data module Used to enable access to the correct trunk group at the far end of the connection This is typically the trunk access code TAC plus the extension of data module on the far end If you use just the extension then you must administer UDP and AAR route patterns to access the correct trunk group Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 259 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Establish Connection Specifies whether this switch will be responsible for the call setup for this connection Valid Data Usage Entries Module Types y n procr intf Enter y if the System is responsible for any part of the call x 25 setup for the link defined by this data module Default is n If the physical link is through a pair of MPDMs or MTDMs then each switch terminating the link must set up a connection between its Processor Interface Data Module and MPDM MTDM Enter the opposite value when administering the data module for switch at the other end of the connection If the link is to be used for ISDN signaling enter y Connected Data Module This in an information only field This field displays when the Destination Number field is other than eia Valid Entries Data Module Usage Types no entries information procr intf only x 25 Connected To Specifies whether the connected device is dte or isn Valid entri
386. ity Time out min TSC Adj Index Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl Name als permanent 1901 dcs permanent 1902 des 2 acs Si permanent 1903 dcs 4 permanent 1904 audix Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 229 Switch Node 3 Administration Trunk Groups Group 13 ISDN PRI page 1 add trunk group 13 4 Networking Example Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 13 Group Name ISDN TG 13 to sw 1 Direction two way Dial Access n Queue Length 0 Service Type tie Group Type Auth Code n isdn pri COR 1 TN 1 CDR Reports TAC Outgoing Display n Busy Threshold 99 Night Service TestCall ITC Far End Test Line No TestCall BCC 4 TRUNK PARAMETERS Codeset to Send Display 6 Max Message Size to Send 260 Supplementary Service Protocol a Trunk Hunt cyclical Connected to Toll n Calling Number Delete Bit Rate Insert 1200 Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Group 13 page 2 add trunk group 13 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment n Used for DCS y PBX ID 1 Suppress Outpulsing n Outgoing Channel ID Encoding Send UCID n Send Codeset 6 7 LAI IE y STT Loss Synchronization async Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Measured none Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Send Name n exclusive Codeset to Send TCM Lookahead 6 Charge Advice none Digit Handling in out
387. ive updated versions of this book For more information on standing orders or to be put on a list to receive future issues of this book please contact the Lucent Technologies Publications Center Administration for Network Connectivity xvi CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Tell us what you think Preface Tell us what you think Let us know what you like or don t like about this book Although we can t respond personally to all your feedback we promise we will read each response we receive You can use the comment card at the back of the book or send us your feedback in your own format Write to us at Lucent Technologies Product Documentation Group Room 22 2H15 11900 North Pecos Street Denver CO 80234 USA Fax to 303 538 1741 Send email to document drmail lucent com How to Order Books In addition to this book other description installation and test maintenance and administration books are available A complete list of DEFINITY books can be found in the Business Communications System Publications Catalog 555 000 010 This book and any other DEFINITY books can be ordered directly from the Lucent Technologies Business Communications System Publications Fulfillment Center at 1 317 322 6791 or toll free at 1 800 457 1235 How to Comment on This Book Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback Please fill out the reader comment card found at the front of this manual and return it Your comments are
388. ivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 183 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 1 Note that there are no processor channels or interface channels associated with the ppp connection between the two C LAN circuit packs Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1I n 0 2 n 0 3 n 0 12 y dcs s 1 5003 node 2 0 12 21 2 13 y dcs s 2 5003 node 3 0 13 31 2a 384 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 12 ppp connection to Switch 2 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 1a is the server for this session Set node 2 to client c Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node la data module screen Interface Chan For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused f
389. k The Destination Node will be set to net 96 which is associated with the network IP address of 192 168 1 96 on the Node Names screen This will enable node 5 to communicate with any node on the 192 168 1 96 subnetwork Steps Begin gt Open the IP Routing form enter a ip n add ip route next Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 2 Destination Node net 96 Gateway node 4 C LAN Board 1c05 Metric 0 The system assigns the route number 2 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Destination The name of the node at the destination of this route In this case Node net 96 is associated with IP address 192 168 1 96 on the Node Names screen This is the network IP address of the subnet that nodes 1 and 2 are on See the description of the Subnet Mask field in Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces page 77 Gateway Node name of the IP route gateway by which the destination node is reached for this route In this case it is the node name of the router port C LAN The location of the C LAN circuit pack that provides the interface Board for this route Metric Enter 0 See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for more information on the use of the Metric field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 88 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Note We could
390. k 358 Call Coverage 358 Call Park 358 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 358 Connection Line Identification Presentation COLP 358 Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX 358 Feature Plus Message Waiting Indication Audio Information Exchange AUDIX 359 Off Premise Station 359 QSIG 359 ISDN Private Networking Specification IPNS forum 369 ISDN TSC gateway channel assignments screen 29 ISDN PRI interactions DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 QSIG Additional Network Feature Transit Counter ANF TC 381 ISDN TSC gateway channels per system 10 Italian DCS Protocol 319 Italy Enhanced DCS EDCS 319 traslatore giunzione uscente entrante interno TGU TGE TGD trunks 349 ITU T access protocols 369 Last Number Dialed feature interactions Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 Leave Word Calling LWC feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 342 DCS Call Coverage 327 DCS Call Forwarding 327 link enable 72 per circuit pack 10 per system 10 link channel map example 206 Listed Directory Numbers LDN feature see also Centralized Attendant Service CAS Loudspeaker Paging Access feature interactions DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication 329 Index maintaining performance of the IP trunk server 444 making calls to the IP trunk application from Microsoft NetMeeting 447 Malicious Call Trace MCT feature interactions QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 Manual Originating Line Servi
391. k Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 149 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen y means that this switch will be responsible for call setup for this connection Enter n when administering the data module for Switch 2 Trunk access code 899 plus extension of data module on node 2 3020 Name of the node at the far end of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 2of2 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has
392. l DCS 327 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 381 capacities C LAN boards needed 412 definitions 409 DEFINITY 10 example calculation 412 MedPro boards needed 411 CAS Channel Associated Signaling 400 CCS 410 Centralized Attendant Service CAS feature 338 backup service 339 branch generated call identification tones 340 considerations 340 interactions AAR and ARS 341 Abbreviated Dialing AD 341 Attendant Auto Manual Splitting 341 Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 341 Attendant Override of Diversion Features 341 Attendant Serial Calling 341 Busy Indicator buttons 341 Call Coverage 341 Call Detail Recording CDR 341 492 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Centralized Attendant Service CAS feature interactions continued Call Forwarding 341 DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 Distributed Communications System DCS 342 DTGS buttons 342 DXS buttons 342 Emergency Access to Attendant 342 Hunt Groups 342 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 348 Leave Word Calling LWC 342 Night Service 342 nonattendant consoles 342 queues 339 release link trunks RLT 339 remote hold 339 changing audio settings on Microsoft NetMeeting 446 channel service unit CSU 478 circuit packs 4 C LAN 5 DS1 208 228 233 per system 10 Circuit Packs form implementation notes 301 Circuit Packs screen 277 C LAN 5 cables 415 installation 414 pinouts 416 testing 414
393. l Remote ID ale n 0 2 n 0 13 y des s 1 5003 node 3 0 13 31 30 14 y gateway s 1 6002 node 3 0 14 32 ey 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 13 ppp connection to Switch 3 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 1 is the server for this session Set node 3 to client c Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen Interface Chan For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the node 3 Processor Channel screen 1 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 129 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway lt ppp gt R8csi Field Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the
394. le set used with the MAPD circuit pack Check LAN functions The following table summarizes the basic tests Execute the DOS test commands in your NT command window Network DOS Test Command Test type at the DOS prompt Function for your computer Reasons for Failure Current Use ipconfig or ipconfig Settings typed incorrectly network all Record settings and verify configuration settings with network settings administrator Network Ping IP loopback address e IP address typed interface card or IP trunk s own IP incorrectly fnauomaly acrea e Improper TCP IP software For example ping installation Ee e Duplicate network IP address may happen with your own IP address 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 443 DCS over IP Trunk F Network DOS Test Command Test type at the DOS prompt Function for your computer Local Ping IP address of default network gateway available from connectivity your LAN administrator For example ping 192 20 239 1 IP Trunk Installation and Administration Reasons for Failure IP address typed incorrectly LAN cable not plugged into network card Wrong gateway default gateway on different subnet Gateway machine is down Wide Area Network connectivity Ping IP address of known machine outside the local default gateway can use remote IP trunk application or any machine Use tracero
395. lication or Lucent s Internet Telephony Server Enterprise ITS E Release 1 2 Administration overview To administer IP trunks on DEFINITY ECS you must complete the following tasks Planning Tasks e Plan routes and dialing permissions for IP calls by following the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites page 433 or by completing the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets for remote off premise dialing scenarios DEFINITY Tasks e Administer the IP Trunk circuit pack by completing the DS1 circuit pack screen the IP Trunk emulates a T1 or El connection e Create a trunk group for the IP trunks and assign trunk group members to ports on the IP Trunk circuit pack e Administer the AAR and ARS Digit Analysis Table using the information from the Switch Admin tables on the worksheets 418 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration NT Tasks Log on to Windows NT and start the IP Trunk service e Use the Configuration Manager to administer the routes and dialing permissions you defined on the Dial Routing Plan worksheets or the procedures for extension dialing between sites e Use the Configuration Manager to set the IP Trunk service parameters Plan call routing Use the IP Trunk worksheets shown at the end of this appendix and or the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites to plan and coordinate your IP T
396. ling for multiple applications For example the call center Call Management System CMS would typically use a small portion of a C LAN s capacity so the same C LAN could easily handle the signaling for other IP endpoints at the same time There are many variables that affect the number of C LAN and TN802B MedPro circuit packs that you will need for your network configuration To accurately estimate the C LAN and MedPro resources needed a network configuration tool is available from Lucent See Appendix D Capacities and Performance for a summary of this tool Traffic congestion is potentially a problem when multiple IP Interfaces such as C LAN MedPro PCs CMS share a network and some of the endpoints are heavily used This problem can be minimized by using a switched network and assigning endpoints such as CMS to a separate LAN WAN segment Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 51 Troubleshooting IP Solutions 2 H 323 Trunks IP Softphone Problem Solving Codecs used with Netmeeting Telecommuter use of phone lines NetMeeting drops unanswered calls NetMeeting ignores out of band tones Voice quality for the road warrior application of DEFINITY IP softphone will vary depending on several factors Poor voice quality can be caused by the use of the high compression codecs G 723 or G 729 in situations where the low compression codec G 711 should be used This can happen
397. link 1 to node 2 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01b0115 COR 1 Link 1 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name node 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 6113020 Node Name node 2 CHAP n The system assigns the extension 2010 to this data module Instead of n next in the command line you could specify any unused extension in the dial plan gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection ppp Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01b01 the ppp connection is through port 15 Link For G3r the link number must be in the range 1 33 not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 63 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si Field COS COR TN BCC Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP gt Submit the screen End 3 C LAN Admin
398. ll Waiting 327 DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer 329 enhanced private switched communications service EPSCS 349 Erlang 410 error messages on IP trunks viewing 442 ETA call screening table screen screens ETA call screenin table 298 Extended Trunk Access ETA feature 344 345 cautions 344 forms 344 interactions Abbreviated Dialing AD 345 attendant calls 345 Data Call Setup 345 Index Extended Trunk Access ETA feature interactions continued Facility Restriction Levels FRL and Traveling Class Marks TCM 345 Last Number Dialed 345 Modem Pooling 345 Remote Access 345 Extension Number Portability ENP feature 346 ENP codes 346 ENP numbering plans 346 interactions Distributed Communications System DCS 347 Uniform Dial Plan UDP 354 extension number portability numbering plan screen 299 Facility Restriction Levels FRL and Traveling Class Marks TCM features interactions Extended Trunk Access ETA 345 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 features See Private Networking Features fixing problems IP trunks 443 gateway default 22 IP routing 252 gateway nodes 322 Generalized Route Selection GRS feature interactions DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS 328 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 Go to Cover feature interactions DCS Call Coverage 326 H 323 Trunk 7 32 administration 33 signaling group 287 hardware R77 High Density Bipolar 3 Bit Substitution HDB3 4
399. ll appearance set for instance at least one call appearance is busy for an active call and at least one call appearance is available for incoming calls user the available appearance rings normally For incoming QSIG calls the QSIG Call Offer service may use path retention which is a generic mechanism to retain the signaling connection so that the originating party can decide whether to invoke the supplementary service The network connection can be retained for more than one of the supplementary services for which path retention has been invoked Use this feature to provide QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion SS CC The Supplementary Service Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers SS CCBS and Supplementary Service Completion of Calls on No Reply SS CCNR are the equivalent QSIG features of Automatic Callback On Busy and Automatic Callback on No Answer respectively Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 363 QSIG QSIG Centralized AU DIX B Private Networking An analog voice terminal user activates SS CCBS or SS CCNR by pressing the Recall button or flashing the switchhook and then dialing the Automatic Callback ACB Activation feature access code An analog user can activate only one ACB call at any given time A multiappearance voice terminal user can activate SS CCBS or SS CCNR for the number of ACB buttons assigned to the terminal SS CC Options
400. llow the user who originally receives the call to have simulated bridged appearance capability in the event the coverage point s are unavailable This capability allows the user to break into the call before it is answered by a coverage endpoint Note If Maintain SBA at Principal is enabled y then Path Replacement 1s disabled 5 Define the remote QSIG users that you may include in coverage paths using the Remote Call Coverage Table See Defining Coverage for Calls Redirected to External Numbers in the Handling Incoming Calls chapter of the Administrator s Guide See also the Remote Call Coverage Table screen in the Administrator s Guide 6 Define coverage paths for users as required As you set up each user s phone QSIG networking features allow the following e QSIG displays the user s name as entered in the Name field on the Station screen both on the display of another networked phone when called by that user or when calling that user e QSIG allows call waiting from networked phone calls if you set the Call Waiting Indication field to y e QSIG allows auto callback from networked phones if you create an auto callback button for the user As you set up each hunt group you must enter either grp name or mbr name in the ISDN Caller Disp field page 1 This entry determines which of the following the system displays on a QSIG networked phone that calls the hunt group e The hunt group name extension e The hunt group me
401. loads are calculated as an average of Erlang B and Erlang C to account for retrials e In columns 3 and 4 the carried loads are calculated assuming full availability no blocking Note that the carried load for the full availability case is just the number of audio streams times the number of MedPro boards Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 411 Number of C LANs needed Example D Capacities and Performance The number of C LAN circuit packs needed can be estimated as follows 1 Calculate the C LAN socket carried load for c sockets CLe 2 The number of C LANs needed is C LANS CL 448 for infinite source GOS of P001 C LANS CL 508 for full availability Assumptions This formula assumes e 508 is the maximum number of simultaneous TCP UDP connections per C LAN e 448 is the average of Erlang B and Erlang C for GOS P001 and 508 connections Internet Call Center A DEFINITY call center with all incoming connections originating as H 323 DID endpoints on the Internet The customer requires 10 000 Busy Hour Calls BHCs be carried with a GOS of P001 The average call holding time is 100 seconds and the codec is G723 1 Problem Calculate the DEFINITY resources required the number of C LANs and the number of MedPros Solution The average number of C LAN sockets per call c for H 323 endpoints is 2 The number of audio streams per MedPro
402. ls applications processors APs and host computers and provides a DCP interface for connection to a communications system Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 483 protocol Glossary protocol A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors PSDN Packet switch public data network PSTN See Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN PSN Packet switched network Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The worldwide voice telephone system QPPCN Quality Protection Plan Change Notice QSIG A set of open standards for Enterprise Networking QSIG is a protocol defining message exchanges signalling at the Q reference point between two PBXs RBS Robbed bit signaling RFC Request for comment restricted facilities PRI spans that use ZCS line coding the opposite of unrestricted facilities RNX Route number index private network office code router An interface between different networks Routers support network management including load balancing route optimization prioritizing of calls and troubleshooting They are thus more capable than bridges 484 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 routing plan Glossary routing plan Routing plans direct outgoing voice interworking and in
403. m a node that is connected via a ppp link to the node you are using for the Gateway you must first enable the link on the ppp data module Note 2 If an entry in the Destination Node or Gateway field is rejected check that the name has been entered on the Node Names screen In particular check that names are entered on the correct page of the Node Names screen page for AUDIX and MSA pages 2 6 for a CMS server a node in a switch and router nodes Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 251 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Route Number A number that identifies this IP route Valid Value Usage 1 400 Command line entry Enter a specific number or n for the next available number Destination Node The node name of the final destination for this connection Valid Value Usage A name previously This is the final destination of the IP route for this entered on the Node connection Names screen Gateway The node name of the first intermediate node Valid Value Usage A name previously If there are no intermediate nodes between the local and entered on the Node remote C LAN ports for this connection the Gateway is the Names screen andis local C LAN port If there are one or more intermediate either a port on the nodes the first intermediate node is the Gateway C LAN board or identified as a Destination Node on another IP route For example c
404. mation sufficient for routing from the originating data terminal equipment DTE without the necessity of establishing a connection between the DTEs and the network Connectionless unreliable data link The configuration of physical facilities enabling end terminals to communicate directly with each other Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 471 data path Glossary data path The end to end connection used for a data communications link A data path is the combination of all elements of an interprocessor communication in a DCS data port A point of access to a computer that uses trunks or lines for transmitting or receiving data data service unit DSU A device that transmits digital data on transmission facilities data terminal equipment DTE Equipment consisting of the endpoints in a connection over a data circuit In a connection between a data terminal and host the terminal the host and their associated modems or data modules make up the DTE DCE Data communications equipment D channel backup Type of backup used with Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS A primary D channel provides signaling for an NFAS D channel group two or more PRI facilities A second D channel on a separate PRI facility of the NFAS D channel group is designated as backup for the D channel Failure of the primary D channel causes automatic transfer of call control signaling t
405. mber s name extension As you set up each terminating extension group you must enter either grp name or mbr name in the ISDN Caller Disp field This entry determines which of the following the system displays on a QSIG networked phone that calls the terminating extension group e The group name extension e The group member s name extension For AUDIX administration generally see one of the following Installation and Switch Administration for the DEFINITY AUDIX System R4 0 585 300 122 which appears on the CD ROM entitled DEFINITY AUDIX System R4 0 Documents 585 300 803 e Intuity Messaging Solutions LAN Integration with DEFINITY ECS 585 313 602 e Switch integration section of the CD ROM entitled Intuity Messaging Solutions Release 5 Documentation 585 313 803 Note Set up QSIG TSCs before you administer messaging See Call Completion page 363 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 377 QSIG B Private Networking See the Octel Serenade documentation for Serenade administration Steps Begin 1 Local node message center switch only Complete the Processor Channel Assignment screen see Appendix A 2 Local node message center switch only Complete the Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes screen see Appendix A 3 Local node message center switch only Complete the Station screen as specified in the Intuity or DEFINITY AUDIX documen
406. mentary Service with e Call Forwarding Diversion with Rerouting Rerouting e Path Replacement Transfer into Lucent QSIG Voice Transfer into QSIG Voice Mail Mail Value Added Lucent VALU e Called Busy Number Display Distinctive Ringing e Call Coverage 2 Determine whether the system is using ISDN PRI ISDN BRI or ATM for the QSIG network connections Your sales representative or project manager should know this If the system is using ATM trunking for QSIG see DEFINITY ECS R8 2 ATM Installation Upgrades and Administration 555 233 124 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 371 QSIG B Private Networking 3 Enter display system parameters customer options on the command line of your system administration screen 4 On page 1 verify fields as follows G3 Version field is V8 or later 5 If the system is using ATM for QSIG go to page 2 and verify the following field Async Transfer Mode ATM Trunking field is y 6 On page 3 verify fields as follows If the system is using ISDN BRI for QSIG ISDN BRI Trunks field is y If the system is using ISDN PRI for QSIG ISDN PRI field is y If the system is using QSIG Supplementary Services with or without Rerouting Restrict Call Forward Off Net field is n 7 On page 4 verify fields as follows Basic Call Setup field is y If the system is using QSIG Supplementary Services Basic Supplement
407. module defines a network interface it associates a link number with a port address and node name for the C LAN port on Switch 2 It also specifies the node name for the destination node which is a C LAN port on Switch 1 Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da n Data Extension Type Port Link Enable Link Node Name add data module next 3020 Ppp __ 01a1206 3_ n node 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 Establish Connection n DATA MODULE Name _ppp on link 3 to node 1 BCC 2 cos 1 COR 1 TN 1 0 Page 1 of x DESTINATION Digits Node Name node 1 CHAP n This data module is assigned the next available extension 3020 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this link Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01a12 the ppp connection is through port 06 Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 not previously assigned on this switch Enable Link If you need to add an IP route that uses this node as a gateway this field must be set to y before adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 68 CID 7773
408. mple leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Leave blank for this configuration The only connection to this IP interface is node 1 on Switch 1 Node 1 is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module on Switch 3 for the ethernet connection The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 3901 Name ethernet on link 1 BCC 2 Type ethernet Port 01a0517 Link 1_ Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field C
409. n For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 275 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Destination Port Identifies the port number of the destination Valid entries Usage 0 5000 64500 The channel number O means any available port can be used which will be automatically selected by the system Session Local A number used by the system to identify one end of a connection Valid entries Usage 1 128 csi The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value 1 256 si between 1 and 256 but they must be consistent between 1 384 r endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on the local switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers For example it is frequently convenient but not necessary to use the processor channel number for both the session numbers For the qsig mwi and fp mwi applications the Local Session numbers must be unique on the switch For other applications it is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Session Remote See Session Local above Mach ID The machine identification number Valid entries Usage 1 63 si model For switches
410. n T1 Timer 1 10 seconds 10 Idle T4 Timer 1 10 seconds 30 LAYER 3 PARAMETERS Number of Outstanding Packets 2 Restart T20 Timer seconds 8 Reset T22 Timer seconds 10 Number of Outstanding Specifies layer 2 window size 1 7 frames If the value is 2 up to 2 frames can be Frames w sent without confirmation Default is 4 Administration for Network Connectivity 270 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens Retry Attempt Counter N2 Frame Size N1 Retransmission T1 Timer 1 10 seconds Idle T4 Timer 1 10 seconds Number of Outstanding Packets Restart T20 Timer seconds Reset T22 Timer seconds A Screens Reference Specifies the number of times 0 7 to send one frame when this frame is not confirmed for a period of time Default is 2 Specifies the number of bytes 135 263 in a frame Default is 135 If the value is 135 there can be up to 1080 bits within a frame This value is suitable for all adjuncts and for DCS The T1 timer is started at the beginning or the end of the transmission of a frame At the end of this timer 0 250 retransmission of a frame is initiated according to the procedures for link set up and disconnection or information transfer Default is 10 The T4 timer is a system parameter that represents the time a DTE allows without frames being exchanged on the data link 0 250 Default is 30 Specifies the number of pack
411. n Manager icon IP Trunk Configuration Manager appears Click the QoS tab The Quality of Service property page appears Select Line Pool trunk group 80 Click Properties The Line Pool Properties dialog box appears Click Monitor and PSTN Fallback IP trunk will now monitor this trunk group and block access if either of the service quality criteria are exceeded Click OK to close the Line Pool Properties dialog box If you want to change the default criteria used to measure service quality change the settings in the following fields on the QoS tab Sampling Interval sec Samples to Average number Packet Loss Threshold Low Packet Loss Threshold High Round Trip Delay Threshold msec Low Round Trip Delay Threshold msec High 8 Click OK to save your changes and close Configuration Manager Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 439 DCS over IP Trunk More information F IP Trunk Installation and Administration The Packet Loss Threshold and Round Trip Delay Threshold fields work like this e If the value in either High field is exceeded access to the IP trunk group is blocked e Access to the IP trunk group is only allowed again when the average for both measurements drops below the values in the Low field Placing a test telephone call To place a test telephone call to the remote switch over IP trunk service 1 Contact the
412. n a remote subnet this is a host route type or You want the local node to communicate with any node a remote network but not with nodes on other networks this is a network route type There are one or more intermediate nodes between PPP i endpoints The host and network route types are not specified directly The system implies the type from the specified destination IP address and its associated subnet mask The route type is displayed on the IP Routing screen for the display list and modify commands The endpoint nodes are on the same subnet if the following three conditions are met e the endpoints are on the same physical subnetwork e the Subnet Mask field is assigned the same value on the IP Interface screens for the two endpoint nodes e the network subnet portions of the IP addresses as determined by the subnet mask are the same See Subnetting page 16 for more information about subnet masks Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 23 IP Addressing IP Routing Screen The following diagram shows the IP Routing screen 1 Networking Overview display ip route 1 Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 1 Destination Node clan a2 Gateway router 1 C LAN Board 1b01 Metric 0 Route Type host To set up an IP route enter the node names for the destination and the gateway and enter the slot location of the C LAN on the local switch The des
413. n the Switch 2 DS1 circuit pack TSC 1 carries the DCS signaling between node 1 and node 2 Destination is node 2 TSC Index 2 for connection to Switch 2 for gateway to Switch 3 Local Ext Enabled Established Extension number of the ISDN interface on the Switch 1 DS1 circuit pack y enables the administered NCA TSC Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA TSC permanent means that the administered NCA TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end as needed means the administered NCA TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed it can be set up either by the near end or far end switch 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 133 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Field Conditions Comments Dest Digits Extension number of the ISDN interface on the Switch 2 DS1 circuit pack Appl Specifies that TSC 2 will carry signaling that will be converted in Switch 1 to another protocol TCP IP which will then be forwarded to Switch 3 Mach ID Leave blank for gateway 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 134 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch
414. n with a data extension button for this data module Name station name Ext 1 1002 s Data Module 30 Name pdm Cos 01C0102 COR restricted TN ON Page 1 of 2 pdm on port 1c0102 BCC Remote Loop Around Test n Secondary data module n Connected to dte PPF gt Enter values Field Type Port ITC Name COS COR TN Remote Loop Around Test Conditions Comments This indicates the data module type for this connection This example means that the PGATE circuit pack is in slot 01c01 and link 5 uses port 02 Enter restricted unrestricted is used only for wideband transmission Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator Set to n unless testing 10f2 102 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Field Conditions Comments Secondary data Enter n modules Connected To Enter dte Keep the default values for the rest of the fields 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 103 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via x 25 Data Module to Sw
415. nable full duplex audio so can speak while receiving audio a Le IS ge J Enable eute gath contol Tuning Wizard Advanced m Microphone sensitivity 4A Adjust sensitivity automatically recommended i 9 Let me adjust sensitivity myself _ r Calling a telephone using NetMeeting EP IM Use H 323 gateway 192 168 100 1 Cancel 2 Click the check box for Enable full duplex audio so I can speak while receiving audio If this option is dimmed it is not accessible to change This means your sound card is not full duplex You need to install updated sound card drivers to make the card full duplex 3 Click the check box for Use H 323 gateway and type the IP address of the IP trunk in the corresponding field 4 In the same Options window select the Calling tab and clear the Refresh directory listing check box 5 Click OK to save your changes and close the Options dialog box Administration for Network Connectivity 446 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Making Calls tothe IP Before you place a call make sure the following settings are correct trunk application from NetMeeting e If You Have a LAN Connection Make sure the TCP IP settings are correct on the client machine To verify this open an NT command window and ping the IP trunk If You Have a Modem Connection Make sure yo
416. nable the ppp link on the node 2 data module screen ch da 3020 set Enable Link to y gt Open the IP Routing form enter a ip n add ip route next Route Number Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING 1 node 3 node 1 ppp 1a04 0 The system assigns the route number 1 gt Enter values Field Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric gt Submit the screen End Conditions Commenis The name of the node at the destination of this route Node name of the gateway by which the destination node is reached for this route The location of the C LAN circuit pack that provides the interface for this route Enter 0 See IP Routing page 251 in Appendix A for more information on the use of the Metric field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 163 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 3 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the plannin
417. naling information in one of two configurations either 10BaseT ethernet or point to point ppp e In the ethernet configuration the C LAN passes the signaling information over a separate 10BaseT TCP IP network usually via a hub For this configuration install the C LAN circuit pack and connect the appropriate pins of the C LAN I O field to the hub as described below e In the ppp configuration the C LAN passes the data link signaling to the DS1 for inclusion in the same DS1 bit stream as the DCS voice transmissions For this configuration install the C LAN circuit pack no other connections are needed In both configurations the appropriate DS1 circuit packs must be installed if they are not already present Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 413 E C LAN Installation Install the C LAN Circuit Pack The following sections describe the steps for installing the C LAN circuit pack Insert C LAN Circuit TCP IP connections 10BaseT ethernet or ppp require a TN799 C LAN circuit pack Packs Complete the following steps to install these circuit packs 1 Determine the carrier slot assignments of the circuit packs to be added Both types of circuit pack can go into any port slot with the following exceptions The C LAN circuit pack cannot be installed in the A carrier for the r model a duplicated si model 2 Insert the circuit packs into the slots specified in step 1 You
418. name entered on the Node Names screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections This field is not used for CMS Processor Channel 12 ethernet connection to Switch 2 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Enter des for the DCS connection on Processor Channel 12 Set the node 5 Mode field to e client on the Processor Channel Assignment screen on Switch 2 This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there
419. name information A transit switch is a switch that routes an incoming call administered for Supplementary Services Protocol Bto a trunk also administered for Supplementary Services Protocol B However Basic Call Setup and number information is subject to modification by the transit switch This means that trunk group administration on a transit switch does not override incoming name information but may override incoming number information as long as this does not lower the restriction on the information Example If a non restricted calling name and number are received by a DEFINITY ECS acting as a transit switch and if the outgoing trunk is administered for presentation restricted for both name and number the number is passed on as restricted and name is passed on as unrestricted Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 361 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion Call Transfer B Private Networking Tandem switch information However in the case of tandemed calls calls involving two ISDN trunks that are not both administered for Supplementary Service Protocol B trunk group administration may override both incoming name and number information as long as doing so does not lower the restriction on the information For example a tandemed call that comes in with restricted name information is sent out with restricted name information even 1f the outgoing trunk is
420. nd Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 169 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level connectivity can remain intact when higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Administration for Network Connectivity 170 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Configuration 5B Rgscsi lt ppp gt Rer 2 C LANs lt
421. ndix curar rs a 311 Distributed Communications System page 312 o o o o o ae 311 ISDN Feature Plus page 355 a oa ea iea da o e mo 311 OSIE Paga 3607s lt se iiaa mod fee hap o Ge Re ta th Doe a A 311 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code page 395 o 311 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols page 400 311 Distributed Communications System 000 ccc tees 312 Description oF DOS s sor 2462440 deed Sard Oe e Beek tele Hae 312 DGS Features 2 25 2 805 bbe do a a a a de ba afb Ss 313 taian DGS Protocol uos i dos oe A ete E Rim Oe eh A eb ae ed 319 ISDN A 25 Gateway 3 2 2 Sed gat hk dae he HEE Se ERR Shee eed D 320 DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel o o o 320 DCS feature considerations o e e 323 DGS Interactions 20 0 casa a a a Boe aa 325 Example DCS configurations lt o ssa 206 8 ciar a a a 329 Centralized Attendant Service 1 0 2 0 ee 338 Extended Trunk Access 2 24 244 Hee Lae 26 OES eee he wae RAS abe 344 Extension Number Portability o 346 Inter PBX Attendant Service s sax acea ace o e ee 347 Private Network Access a 348 Union Dial Pla ir es de ars ds de o HO arid ve e Mata he Rik a 350 ISDN Feature PIUS Sendai a rs A A A Beene ate eee 355 How to administer ISDN Feature Plus o 000002 355 DESCAPUION 4 44 a o
422. ndix A Screens Reference Screen fields not mentioned here are administered as in previous releases Enabling Administration Before you can administer an H 323 trunk a few customer options and circuit pack parameters need to be properly set In addition there are some optional maintenance and IP parameters that can be administered These enabling settings are summarized here Optional Features The Optional Features screen must be administered by the init login Open the screen System Parameters gt Customer Options with the change command ch sys cu and set the following fields page 1 e G3 Version V8 e Maximum H 323 Trunks number purchased must be greater than 0 page 3 e H 323 Trunks y e ISDN PRI y Circuit Pack The C LAN and IP Interface assembly circuit packs must be administered on the Circuit Pack screen Open the Circuit Pack screen with the change command ch ci and enter the board codes in available port slots C LAN Code TN799 gt Sfx B Name C LAN IP Interface assembly enter in a slot with at least two empty slot before it Code TN802 gt Sfx B Name MAPD Board entered automatically by system The two slots immediately before this slot are automatically populated as follows e Code DSMAPD displays automatically Change DSMAPD to MEDPRO the IP Interface board defaults to the IP Trunk mode which is specified by the DSMAPD in this field Changing this field to M
423. nected name number information in a DCS ISDN network When an incoming ISDN call is routed back out over a non ISDN trunk group DEFINITY ECS can send the name of the non ISDN trunk group as the connected name if the Send Non ISDN Trunk Group Name as Connected Name field is y on the Feature Related System Parameters form Basic Call Management System If the old connection is monitored by a BCMS entity ANF PR is blocked due to BCMS measurements Call Detail Recording Codes for recording the new connections of ANF PR calls are code J for incoming trunk calls and code K for outgoing trunk calls When a path is replaced you also may receive records for short duration calls that are not directly linked to the J and K records Call Management System If the old connection is monitored by a CMS entity ANF PR is blocked due to CMS measurements Call Vectoring A transferred call that terminates at a vector and is answered cannot have its path replaced 380 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG Transit Counter Call Completion B Private Networking Data Call Setup A data call is denied ANF PR Data Privacy If Data Privacy is active ANF PR is denied Data Restriction If Data Restriction is active ANF PR is denied Malicious Call Trace If MCT is active ANF PR is denied Recorded Announcement A call that is receiving a recorded announcement cannot ha
424. nectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 315 Distributed Communications System Error Condition DCS link not up or DCS trunk is not available or DCS Call Coverage feature is not activated on the remote system B Private Networking Action The call is routed to the remote coverage point If the call is answered it is treated as Call Coverage Off Premises also called Remote Call Coverage If the call is redirected at the remote coverage point before the DCS SRI expires the remote point s path is followed If the call is not answered within the DCS SRI time out period the next coverage point is tried with DCS Call Coverage from the local system All trunks to the remote The next coverage point is tried with DCS system DCS or otherwise Call Coverage from the local system are busy When the DCS link is down call consult operates differently If Station A calls Station B but the call covers to Station C then Station C consults back to Station B and Station B receives the consult call on the next call appearance DCS Call Coverage does not support Coverage Call Back from a remote node Additionally in some DCS Call Coverage situations call coverage operation may deviate including A call to the principal redirects to the remote coverage point which is unavailable The coverage point is considered unavailable when e The coverage point is not a valid extension QDN or VDN
425. nectivity can remain intact when higher level applications such as DCS are not functioning For example an external ping to a C LAN s ethernet port could be successful even when the board is busied out When debugging connectivity problems pinging only checks low level connectivity Administration for Network Connectivity 98 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Configuration 3 Resi x 25 gt Rer Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si In this configuration a DEFINITY ECS R8r acts as a gateway between two other nodes one connected via X 25 to an R8si and the other via ethernet to another R8si Task Summary Switch 2 DEFINITY ECS R8si Switch 1 PGATE DS1 PDM DEFINITY ECS Rer Switch 3 node 1 tub C LAN C LAN Ethernet nade 3 DEFINITY ECS R8si The following tasks need to be completed for Switch 1 Switch 2 and Switch 3 1 2 Review checklist Switch 1 administration a Assign node names b Assign pdm data module c Assign IP Interfaces d Assign link via an x 25 data module to Switch 2 e Assign link via an ethernet data module to the LAN f Assign processor channels Switch 2 administration a Assign link via a proc intf data module to node 1 b Assign processor channels Switch 3 administration a
426. ned on or off on page 6 of the Customer Options screen QSIG Category Basic Call Setup Basic Supplementary Services Centralized Attendant Supplementary Services with Rerouting Transfer into Lucent QSIG Voice Mail Value Added Lucent VALU Supported Features Basic Call Setup Number Transport Called Busy Name Name Identification Services Call Forwarding Diversion Call Transfer Centralized AUDIX Call Offer Call Completion Automatic Callback Centralized Attendant Service CAS Call Forwarding Diversion with Reroute using Path Replacement Call Transfer with Reroute using Path Replacement Call Transfer into QSIG Voice Mail Displays of called party number to the calling party when the called number is ringing or busy Called Busy Number Distinctive Ringing to identify internal external and priority calls Call Coverage to networked switches 360 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking QSIG Basic Call Setup Transit Counter ANF TC DEFINITY ECS provides QSIG ANF TC as defined in ISO IEC 6B032 and 6B033 It prevents indefinite looping connections giving poor transmission performance and inefficient use of network resources ANF TC is invoked automatically for ISDN basic calls and the Route Pattern form indicates the number of switches through which a call may be routed QSIG Basic Sup
427. net gt R8si Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this example leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Leave blank for this configuration The only connection to this IP interface is node 1b on Switch 1 which is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 2 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module on Switch 3 for the ethernet connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin
428. nformation only appears in the list data module command list Network Leave the default y if the private network contains only uses 1 s for DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network broadcast includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of addresses forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 120 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 3 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 3 Steps Begin gt Open Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 n 0 2 n 0 Si y des a DS node 1 5003 31 31 i 32 y dcs G 2n node 1 6002 32 32 mao 256 n 0 Note The Processor Channel number the Interface Channel number and the Local and Remote Session numbers do not need to be the same number but they should be made the same whenever possible to simplify network bookkeeping and diagnostics
429. ng Search string 1A2B2D2E 1C2D2E 2E Search string 2A1B1D1E 2C1D1E 1E Replace string 2E 2E 2E Replace string 1E 1E 1E IP Address 2G 2G 2G IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Terminating Search string 1E 1E 1E Search string 2E 2E 2E Replace string None None None Replace string None None None SI99YS4A10M YUNAL dl eSy 0 422 Ald 0002 Iudy enss p0OS E2 9GS AVAHIOUUOD YIOMJON 104 UONEASIUILIPY Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site same area code any exchange Worksheet 3 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Ivsi i Different country Different country analysis entry your actua Count different area analysis entry your actual i area with values ountry itteren code ith i Country different d area code with vaes area code cage Dial d String 1AeBaD ie Me Dialed String 2A1B1D 2C1D NA Total Mn hi ba me 7 Total Mx J dete Rte Pat 1H 1H Total Mx y Rte Pat 2H 2H Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 This type of routing is not allowed Set this value to the total length of the number the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for exam
430. ng as there are TN799Bs to handle the call signaling for the TN802B Hardware Requirements for Upgrades from Pre R7 Switches DEFINITY release 7 introduced several hardware changes that are also required for release 8 This section summarizes the hardware changes needed for pre R7 switches upgrading to R8 for each switch model and each type of non H 323 connectivity R8r model The following table shows the hardware required for an upgrade to an R8r Connection Type Hardware Required BX 25 Existing PGATE TN577 systems only TCP IP C LAN TN799B ethernet and ppp ISDN PRI No hardware changes required Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 7 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview R8si model The following table shows the hardware required for an upgrade to an R8si Connection Type BX 25 Existing systems only TCP IP ethernet and ppp ISDN PRI Hardware Required PI TN765 NetPkt TN 794 replaces the NetCon TN777B and the PACCON TN778 circuit packs Upgraded processor TN790B In duplicated systems a second NetPkt Control Assembly and a new DUPINT TN792 C LAN TN799B NetPkt TN794 replaces the NetCon TN777B and the PACCON TN778 circuit packs Upgraded processor TN790B In duplicated systems a second NetPkt Control Assembly and a new DUPINT TN792 Expansion Interface TN570 if there is an EPN and th
431. ng connections CA TSC 369 interactions ISDN Feature Plus 359 QSIG Features QSIG NCA TSC 370 QSIG features 360 366 additional network features ANF 369 Busy name 361 Call Completion 363 Call Offer 363 Called name 361 detailed description 369 interactions 379 noncall associated temporary signaling connections NCA TSC 369 QSIG Path Retention 366 QSIG signaling protocols 369 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 365 QSIG Centralized AUDIX 364 what you get with QSIG Centralized AUDIX 365 QSIG Message Waiting Indication feature 365 interactions AAR ARS Partioning 383 Alternate Facilities Restriction Levels 383 Audio Information Exchange AUDIX 383 Authorization Codes 384 Automatic Alternate Routing AAR 384 Automatic Route Selection ARS 384 Call Coverage Features 384 Class of Restriction 384 Class of Service 384 Facility Restriction Levels FRL and Traveling Class Marks TCM 384 Generalized Route Selection 384 ISDN QSIG BRI 384 Message Sequence Tracer 384 Off Premises Station 384 Uniform Dial Plan UDP 384 QSIG Name and Number Identification feature 361 interactions Distributed Communications System DCS 380 QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 QSIG Call Transfer 380 ISDN numbering formats 362 Index QSIG Name and Number Identification feature continued tandem switch information 362 transit switch information 361 QSIG NCA TSC 370 QSIG Path Retention 366 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion feature 383 det
432. ng data and data See System Description 555 230 211 for descriptions of tie trunk and other circuit packs PI si only The PRI functionality of the Processor Interface PI board TN765 is replaced by the NetPkt board TN794 in R7 The PI board will no longer be shipped with new systems starting with R7 The PI board is needed in switches upgraded to R7 and later releases only if existing X 25 connections are retained The PI board has 4 data links that can connect to DS1 tie trunks over the TDM bus for interface to DCS or ISDN applications The PI board terminates BX 25 and ISDN PRI link access procedure on the D Channel LAPD NETCON si only The network controller NETCON board TN77B is replaced by the NetPkt board TN794 starting in R7 For pre R7 systems NETCON provides an interface to the processor for the port circuit packs on the TDM bus Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 5 DEFINITY Switch Connectivity 1 Networking Overview PACCON si only The Packet Controller PACCON board TN778 is replaced by the NetPkt board TN794 starting in R7 For pre R7 systems PACCON provides an interface to the processor for D Channel signaling over the packet bus The following table gives a summary of the different types of call connections and how the voice and signaling data are transmitted between switches Tie Trunk LAN or WAN Connection Voice amp Call DCS Call
433. ng or what media types are these messages If the MW STATUS UPDATE indicates that there are new messages then the Message Center PBX sends a message telling the Served User PBX to activate the message waiting indication Similarly if the MW STATUS UPDATE indicates that there are no new messages then the Message Center PBX sends a message telling the Served User PBX to deactivate the message waiting indication e Ifitis a Served User PBX when the Served User PBX receives the result it makes sure that the result received from the Message Center matches the state of the Served User s light Interactions e Automatic Circuit Assurance Automatic Circuit Assurance including Referrals is not activated for calls terminating at the Feature Plus extension e Distributed Communication System DCS Feature Plus signaling links do not support DCS e Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP If the public network supports CLIP and the called user has subscribed to the service calling party information is available to the called user when messages are retrieved Feature Plus Diversion Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX relies upon Feature Plus Diversion When a call covers to AUDIX it must invoke Feature Plus Diversion to identify the called party to AUDIX Feature Plus Message Waiting When a calling party leaves a message using Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX Feature Plus Message Waiting engages
434. nicate with all nodes on sub network 3 but none on sub network 2 you would define a network IP route to sub network 3 and not assign node 4 as the Gateway Address for node 1 Then node 1 could communicate with any node on sub network 3 without defining host IP routes to them DCS Signaling over Ethernet Internet Network 1 Network 2 192 168 1 0 192 168 2 0 13 Adjunct Network 3 192 168 3 0 LAN 28 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview The following table shows the IP routes needed if node 4 is not defined as the Gateway Address on the IP Interfaces screen for nodes 1 2 and 3 but node 5 is defined as the Gateway Address for node 6 Node IP Route IP Route Switch Connec Destination Gateway tions Node Node Route Type 1 gt 6 6 4 host 1 gt network network 3 network 3 4 B 2 gt 6 6 4 host Comments IP route needed because nodes 1 6 are on different subnets and no Gateway Address is specified for the node 1 C LAN on the IP Interfaces screen This route enables node 1 to communicate with any node on Network 3 The node name network 3 must be associated with the IP address 192 168 3 0 on the Node Names screen IP route needed because nodes 2 amp 6 are on different subnets and no Gateway Address is specified for the nod
435. nistration Conditions Comments Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen y means that this switch will be responsible for call setup for this connection Enter n when administering the data module for Switch 3 Trunk access code 79 plus extension of data module on node 3 2801 Name of the node at the far end of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 gt Submit the screen 128 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on the node 1 switch Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Loca
436. nk Backup Restore Utility screen appears 2 In the IP Trunk Backup Restore Utility dialog screen click Files Restore The IP trunk Backup screen appears 3 In the IP Trunk Backup screen click on the RESTORE button Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 425 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Confirming the number of available ports To confirm that all ports allowed under your license are available start at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the Configuration Manager icon IP Trunk Configuration Manager appears Click the Telephony tab The Telephony property page appears Click Show All Ports Verify that the number of enabled port matches the maximum your license allows If not contact your Lucent representative Click OK to close Configuration Manager NT administration procedures The following procedures must be performed on the NT server to administer IP Trunks Administer call routing Outgoing calls parameters on Configuration Manager To administer routing for outgoing originating calls start at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the Configuration Manager icon IP Trunk Configuration Manager appears Click the Telephony tab The Telephony property page appears In the Maximum Digits to be collected box type the number of digits that the switch will forward to the IP Trunk software The Maximum
437. nly connection to this IP interface is node 1 on Switch 1 Node 1 is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 119 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Switch 3 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to the LAN This task administers an ethernet data module on Switch 3 for the ethernet connection to Switch 1 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data module next Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 4531 Name ethernet on link 3 BCC 2 Type ethernet Port Olal017 Link 3_ Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this connection Port In this example the C LAN circuit pack is in slot 01a10 the ethernet connection is through port 17 Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 for R8si not previously assigned on this switch Name I
438. nnectivity MedPro resources administered in regions that are allowed different from the endpoints regions Enable Eth Pt The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Type Enter c lan or medpro Slot Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Code Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Node name Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 177 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this example leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Leave blank for this configuration
439. nnel Selection X Mobility Wireless Type NONE Supplementary Service Protocol a Administration for Network Connectivity 280 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Group Number Display only field when the screen is accessed using an administration command such as display or change Valid entries Usage Display only field Associated Signaling For FAS the D channel can carry signaling information only for B channels located on the same DS1 circuit pack Valid entries Usage y Indicates Facility Associated Signaling n Indicates Non Facility Associated Signaling Primary D channel Enter a 6 to 7 character port number associated with the DS1 Interface circuit pack port The port number assigns the primary D channel in the Signaling Group For 24 channel facilities the 24th port is assigned as the D channel For 32 channel facilities the 16th port is assigned as the D channel Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 G3r First and second characters are the cabinet number 01 through 03 G3si A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number 16 or 24 Sixth and seventh characters are the port blank Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 281 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Secondary D channel Enter a 6 to 7 charac
440. ns The Enhanced 911 E911 systems installed in many jurisdictions in the U S are equipped so that by dialing a service code 911 in the U S a victim of a fire accident crime or medical emergency may quickly access a public safety agency that will dispatch the appropriate response The public E911 system maintains a database that stores location and background information to aid public safety agencies in responding quickly with the appropriate assistance Information about the calling party can be triggered by the transmission of a Caller s Emergency Service Identification CESID number over Centralized Automatic Message Accounting CAMA trunks when the call originates from behind a PBX 911 calls from a station on a PBX not equipped with CAMA trunks or an adjunct computer system associated with CAMA trunks will not provide the E911 system with the information required to identify the location of the person placing the call Instead the E911 system will only be able to identify the location of the trunk termination at the PBX This feature allows transmission of identifying information in the form of the CESID over CAMA trunks as to the extension number of a DID station associated with the calling party The calling party may be at or near a station on a remote port network or may be at a remote location served by an off premises station Form Field ARS Digit Analysis Table All CAMA Numbering Format All Class of Restriction e C
441. ns between network nodes that enable certain key call features to operate transparently across the DCS network That is the transparent features appear to operate as if the switches in the DCS network were a single switch For example the DCS Call Coverage feature enables calls to an extension on one switch to be covered by extensions on a remote switch in the network DCS consists of two components routing and message signaling Routing the message requires one of several networking software packages Typically UDP is used singe it is included with DCS at no additional charge Although DCS is actually a messaging overlay for an existing network it is commonly thought of as a type of network itself In this document we will refer to DCS in this way DCS network will refer to a cluster of switches that are part of an existing ETN or MS T network and are also administered for DCS In addition to the normal tie trunk connections for the transmission of voice and call control data DCS requires a special signaling connection to carry the information needed to make the DCS features work This signaling connection or link between two switches in a DCS network can be implemented in one of three ways e over a processor interface PI channel on the si model or a packet gateway PGATE channel r model using the X 25 protocol e over an ISDN PRI D channel csi si or r models e over a TCP IP either PPP or 10Base T Ethernet connection
442. ns between them Switches A amp B and the adjunct are on one sub network and switch C is on another sub network Nodes 1 2 and 6 are C LAN ports Node 3 is the adjunct interface port to the LAN Nodes 4 5 and 7 are interfaces to the WAN Internet cloud and have IP addresses that are on different sub networks An ethernet data module and IP Interface is administered for the C LAN ethernet port on each switch Switches A and B can communicate with each other and with the adjunct without using the IP Routing screen to explicitly administer host IP routes Normally node 4 would be defined as the Gateway Address for node 1 on the IP Interfaces screen which would enable switch A to communicate with switch C without an explicit host IP route defined However if node 4 is not assigned as the Gateway Address for node 1 switch A needs an IP route to communicate with switch C because these switches are on different sub networks Similarly node 5 would normally be defined as the default gateway for node 6 if not switch C needs an IP route to communicate with switch A In this configuration network IP routes could be used alone or in combination with host IP routes to tailor access among nodes For example if you wanted node 1 to be able to communicate with any node on sub networks 2 and 3 you would define node 4 as the Gateway Address for node 1 Then you would not need any IP routes defined for node 1 If you wanted node 1 to be able to commu
443. nstration H 323 Trunk task summary 36 Adminstration H 323 Trunk 33 Alarms 93 Alternate Facility Restriction Levels AFRL feature interactions QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion 379 Alternate Facility Restriction Levels feature interactions QSIG Message Waiting Indication 383 Alternate Mark Inversion AMI coding 478 analog dm data module screen 297 ATM signaling group 289 Attendant Auto Manual Splitting feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 Attendant Call Waiting feature interactions DCS Alphanumeric Display for Terminals 325 Private Network Access 349 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 381 382 Attendant Console feature interactions QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 381 Index Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 DCS Automatic Callback ACB 326 Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 382 Attendant Direct Extension Selection DXS with Busy Light Field feature interactions DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS 327 Attendant Display feature interactions Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 Attendant Intrusion Call Offer feature interactions Private Network Access 349 Attendant Override of Diversion Features feature interactions Centralized Attendant Service CAS 341 Attendant Recall feature interactions Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 347 Attendant Serial Calling feature
444. nt seeking calls at a branch reach the attendant at the main e Attendant splitting away and calling the extended to party e Night Service e Monitoring agents per attendant group QSIG CAS functions not in RLT CAS The following QSIG CAS functions are currently not in RLT CAS e Announcements for attendant seeking calls e Attendant calls enter the attendant queue with priorities calls that originate from the branch do not have different priorities in the queue e Attendant display of user s COR e Attendant split swap e QSIG Path Replacement kicking in after the transfer e Attendant Return Call Release Loop Operation returns to same attendant if available If not then attendant group Display Enhancements Attendant Conference QSIG Supplementary Services with Rerouting QSIG Path Replacement DEFINITY ECS provides QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR as defined in ISO IEC 13863 and 13874 With this feature a call s connections between switches in a private network can be replaced with new connections while the call is active ANF PR is invoked when a call is transferred and improvements may be made in the routes For example after a call is transferred the two parties on the transferred call can be connected directly and the unnecessary trunks are dropped off the call The routing administered at the endpoints allows for a more efficient route connection ANF PR selects the best route based on
445. nt subnets and A 2 gt 7 7 5 the Gateway Address field for the node 2 C LAN is blank on the IP Interfaces screen IP route needed because 3 is connected to 1 via ppp and there are intermediate nodes between 3 3 gt 4 4 1 amp 4 The data module for the ppp connection between nodes 3 and 1 must be enabled before administering this route IP route needed to because 3 is connected to 1 via ppp and there are intermediate nodes between 3 3 gt 7 7 1 amp 7 The data module for the ppp connection between nodes 3 and 1 must be enabled before administering this route IP route needed because nodes 4 amp 7 are on different subnets and 1 gt 4 4 6 the Gateway Address field for the node 7 C LAN is blank on the IP Interfaces screen IP route needed because nodes 2 amp 7 are on different subnets and 7 gt 2 2 6 the Gateway Address field for the C node 7 C LAN is blank on the IP Interfaces screen IP route needed because nodes 3 amp 7 are on different subnets This route depends on route 7 gt 2 7 gt 3 3 2 Note this route would not be needed if node 6 is administered for proxy ARP to act as a proxy agent for node 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 27 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview Ethernet only Connections The diagram below shows three interconnected sub networks There are three switches in a DCS network with ethernet signaling connectio
446. ntuity AUDIX Always n for DCS CMS and Intuity AUDIX Set to 64 the default for normal operations 2 of 2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Inter region Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn y C LAN 01b01 TN799 B node 1 255 255 255 0 1 n A SSA ZO SO AAA ee AA 25 e A R R R Bo LOS LS OSLO DE CI A A gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Inter region IP Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use connectivity MedPro resources administered in regions that are allowed different from the endpoints regions Enable Eth Pt The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Type Enter c lan or medpro Slot Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Code Display only This field
447. o DCO Loss Synchronization In y Out n async Duplex Receive Answer Supervision y Page 2 of 10 Measured none Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Glare Handling none PBX ID 4 Maintenance Tests y When Maintenance Busy neither end Per Call CPN Blocking Code no n Per Call CPN Unblocking Code TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 Total Administered Members 3 Night Mode Ans Delay 20 20 20 Type 214 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Group 24 data to Switch Node 4 page1 add trunk group 24 Page 1 of TRUNK GROUP Group Number 24 Group Type tie CDR Reports Group Name DCS data to node 4 TG24 COR 1 TN 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Trunk Signaling Type Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination Comm Type rbavd Auth Code n Trunk Flash n Bcc 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink Incoming Rotary Timeout sec Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec Digit Treatment Digits Sig Bit Inversion Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Receive Answer Supervision y Group 24 Pag
448. o the backup D channel The backup becomes the primary D channel When the failed channel returns to service it becomes the backup D channel DCIU Data communications interface unit DCP Digital Communications Protocol DCS Distributed Communications System dial plan table A data structure that defines how a switch or server such as MMCX interprets dialed digits and routes calls The dial plan table performs two tasks First it identifies a dial plan rule that applies to the kind of input it has received Then it applies the rule and translates the dialed input into a corresponding extension or public network telephone number MMCX interserver calls are handled differently see interserver routing table 472 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DID Glossary DID Direct Inward Dialing digital communications protocol DCP A proprietary protocol used to transmit both digitized voice and digitized data over the same communications link A DCP link is made up of two 64 kbps information I channels and one 8 kbps signaling S channel The DCP protocol supports 2 information bearing channels and thus two telephones data modules digital signal level 0 DSO A single 64 kbps voice channel A DSO is a single 64 kbps channel in a T1 or El facility and consists of eight bits in a T1 or El frame every 125 microseconds digital signal level 1 DS1 A
449. o use connectivity MedPro resources administered in regions that are allowed different from the endpoints regions Enable Eth Pt The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Type Enter c lan or medpro Slot Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Code Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Sfx Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Node name Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 118 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this example leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Leave blank for this configuration The o
450. oc Chan in the Processor Channel Assignments form refers to the processor channel of the Gateway PBX if the destination PBX is an ISDN DCS PBX not the destination PBX On the contrary Machine ID in the Processor Channel Assignments form refers to the destination PBX either an ISDN DCS PBX or a traditional DCS PBX The Gateway PBX number must not be used in this field if the destination PBX is an ISDN DCS PBX Enhanced DCS Ifthe DCS link fails the administrator can choose to allow calls to continue considerations without class of restriction checking or to block all DCS calls to inward restricted stations LWC considerations e LWC cannot be successfully activated toward any system that is not capable of storing the messages either internally or in an associated adjunct e Messages from one node through an intermediate node to a remote node do not require storage capability at the intermediate node e LWC transparency is supported for all DCS configurations except for cases when either the activating node or the remote node is either an ENHANCED DIMENSION PBX or a System 85 R2V1 e Retrieval of LWC messages is permitted only from a terminal at the node where the messages are stored DCS LWC cannot be activated from an attendant console Trunk Group e Trunk Group Busy and Trunk Group Warning Indication is particularly useful ores oe with the Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access feature The indicators alert c
451. ocedures for these tasks follow Providing general The first time you start NetMeeting follow these steps information for the Configuration Wizard 1 To start NetMeeting from the Windows Task bar click Start gt Programs gt NetMeeting default location Note You may follow a different procedure to start NetMeeting depending on how your system is set up 2 When prompted by the Configuration Wizard respond as follows e Choose not to log on to a directory server e Provide your name e mail address and other information e Categorize your information as For Business Use or as appropriate e Choose LAN or appropriate modem speed for example 28 8 for network connection e Click the Starting Recording button and speak into the microphone so that NetMeeting can adjust the audio settings This can also be accomplished using the Audio Tuning Wizard from the main user interface Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 445 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Changing Audio To change the audio settings so that NetMeeting operates properly with the IP trunk Settings application follow these steps 1 From the Tools menu choose Options and then select the Audio tab The Audio tab settings appear as shown in Figure 5 Figure 11 Audio Tab Settings in Options Dialog Box General My Information Calling Audio Video Protocols General IV E
452. ocking for the physical layer of the protocol Valid Value Usage internal external Entering internal specifies that the clocking is provided by the eia port and external default specifies that clocking is provided by the other end of the link One end of the link should be set to internal and the other end should be set to external Administration for Network Connectivity 268 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Data Module type X 25 used for BX 25 connections with the r model This form applies only to the r model Page 1 of 2 DATA MODULE Data Extension Name Type x 25 Remote Loop Around Test n Port __ COR 1 Destination Number Baud Rate TN 1 Establish Connection n Endpoint Type Connected Data Module Link 1_ DTE DCE Error Logging _ Enable Link n Permanent Virtual Circuit _ Highest PVC Logical Channel __ Switched Virtual Circuit _ Common Fields See Common Data Module Fields 256 for descriptions of fields on this screen that are not listed below Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission rate for this connection Valid entries Usage 9600 19200 switched Set to 9600 for DCS connections to the si model or to an r model with an external 9600 baud data line Set to switched for r to r connections with common channel signaling on DS1 trunks Set to 9600 for connections to Intuity Set to either 9600 or 19200 for C
453. ocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 2 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on the Switch 2 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 n 0 2 n 0 Sie n 0 4 n 0 217 y des G 1 0 node 1 ppp 5003 21 12 1 23 y des g 1 0 node 3 5003 23 32 om 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments For Processor Channel 21 ppp connection to Switch 1 Enable Set to y after the link administration is complete Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 2 is the client for this session Set node 1 ppp on Switch 1 to server s Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 2 data module screen Interface Chan A value of O allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processo
454. ode ppp This name is associated with Names Screen an IP address of the port on the For a ppp data module AUDIX Bode Nene vaca and MSA names listed on page 1 of the Node Names screen are not allowed in this field only names listed on pages 2 6 of the Node Names screen are valid Destination Number This field specifies the destination of the link Valid Data Usage Entries Module Types Extension procr intf Used to enable access to the correct trunk group at the number or x 25 far end of the connection This is typically the trunk TAC access code TAC plus the extension of data module extension on the far end If you use just the extension then you number or must administer UDP and AAR route patterns to eia or access the correct trunk group ao If a trunk access code TAC is used prepend the TAC Leave blank to the extension 1f Establish Connection Enter eia simplex system only for is set to n The Link field must be set to 1 for eia For the x 25 data module to connect the Adjunct via the cable on the back of the PGATE circuit pack enter external If a value other than external is used the associated X 25 data module must have a baud rate of switched This field can be left blank assuming the other side will call it however it is preferable to put in the actual digits of the other side and set the Establish Connection field to n This enables you to identify which X 25 data module on the remote sw
455. ode n gt Go to page 2 change node names Name default Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES IP Address Name IP Address node 1a ppp node la node 1b 192 168 10 130 node 1b eth 192 168 10 128 node 2 192 168 10 12_ node 3 192 168 10 129 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 6 nodes e C LAN a PPP port on Switch 1 for the connection to Switch 2 e C LAN a PPP port on Switch for the connection to C LAN b e C LAN b PPP port on Switch 1 for the connection to C LAN a e C LAN b Ethernet port on Switch 1 e C LAN PPP port on Switch 2 e C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 174 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 2 This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 1 for the ppp connection to Switch 2 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 2010 add data module 2010 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 2010 Name _ppp on link 1 to node 2 BCC 2
456. oes not route to the forwarding party s coverage path It routes to the terminating station s coverage path Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 379 QSIG Call Transfer Transfer Into QSIG Voice Mail QSIG Name and Number Identification interactions Path Replacement B Private Networking Call Forwarding Diversion When a call is forwarded and transferred or transferred and forwarded the forwarding indication displays to the caller until the call is answered This display includes the trunk group name and word forward When the call is answered the word forward is removed and the name and number of the answering party displays Distributed Communications Systems The only DCS transparency that exists when a call is transferred in a DCS network and passed over a QSIG administered trunk is calling name QSIG Path Replacement ANF PR is invoked whenever a QSIG transferred call is answered QSIG Name and Number Identification Availability of name and or number display at the connected parties depends upon how QSIG Name and Number Identification has been administered for the switches involved QSIG Path Replacement After a call is transferred into QSIG voice mail and the voice mail system answers the call Path Replacement is attempted Distributed Communications Systems DCS DEFINITY ECS can display DCS called name number information or ISDN con
457. of the table The mask 255 255 255 224 corresponds to a bit pattern of 27 ones followed by 5 zeros This mask would be used to check that two IP addresses are on the same or different subnets by comparing the first 27 binary digits of the two addresses If the first 27 binary digits are the same the two addresses are on the same subnet Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing 1 Networking Overview Example To continue the example using a 3 bit subnet ID assume a Class C network ID of 192 168 50 xxx This network ID can provide 254 usable IP addresses all on the same network from 192 168 50 1 to 192 168 50 254 If we divide this network into 3 bit subnets we will have 6 usable subnets with 30 usable IP addresses in each subnet Note that we have lost 74 usable IP addresses in the process because we had to discard the all ones and all zeros subnet IDs 62 addresses and host IDs 12 addresses There is always a loss of usable IP addresses with subnetting The following table shows the subnet boundaries for the six subnets formed with 3 bits The boundaries are the numbers formed by using all combinations of 3 bits as the highest order bits in an octet Columns 1 and 2 and then using these numbers in the 4th octet for the host IDs Binary Decimal Range of usable IP Subnet Subnet Addresses in the Boundaries Boundaries Subnet for 3 bits 00000000 0 not usable
458. of NCA TSC 5_ Primary D Channel 01c1824 Max number of CA TSC 23 Trunk Group for NCA TSC 13 Trunk Group for Channel Selection Supplementary Service Protocol a Page 2 Administered NCA TSC Assignment Page 2 of 5 ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service Feature As needed Inactivity Time out min TSC Adj Mach Index Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl Name ID permanent 3901 dcs 3 permanent 3902 gateway permanent 3903 gateway permanent 3904 gateway Synchronization Plan Page 1 of X SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum Port Network Primary Secondary ___ Location Name Slip Type Location Name Slip Type 01c17 DCS Node 4 UDS1 BD 01c18 DCS Node 3 TBRI BD 01c19 DCS Node 2 01c20 AT amp T a a a Y NOTE TN722B TN464B DS1 sources result in stratum 4 type II synchronization Administration for Network Connectivity 210 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration Trunk Groups Group 12 tie to Switch Node 2 page 1 add trunk group 12 Group Number 12 Group Name Switch 1 to Switch 2 tg12 Outgoing Display Direction two way Dial Access y Queue Length 0 Comm Type avd BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out Outgoing Dial Type Wink Timer msec Digit Treatment tone 300 Connected to Toll n Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Di
459. of great value and help improve our documentation If the reader comment card is missing FAX your comments to 1 303 538 1741 or to your Lucent Technologies representative and mention this book s name and number DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 501 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 xvii Where to Call for Technical Support Preface Where to Call for Technical Support Use the telephone numbers in the following table for technical support Telephone Number Streamlined Implementation for missing equipment 1 800 772 5409 USA Canada Technical Service Center 1 800 248 1234 Technical Service Center INADS Database 1 800 248 1111 Administration Asia Pacific Regional Support Center 65 872 8686 Western Europe South Africa Middle East 441 252 774 800 Business Communications Europe 441 252 391 789 Eastern Central Europe 361 345 4334 International Technical Assistance Center ITAC 1 303 804 3777 Latin Central America amp Caribbean 1 303 804 3778 DEFINITY Helpline 1 800 225 7585 Lucent Technologies Toll Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center 1 800 242 2121 Lucent Technologies Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 Administration for Network Connectivity xviii CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Trademarks Trademarks Preface The following
460. om the customer network concern 3 It would be very difficult via the network to modify administration or perpetrate toll fraud At worst a hacker could cause a temporary interruption of DCS CMS or Intuity connections All three security concerns presented above can be addressed by a combination of one or more of the security methods described here Probably the two most important methods to prevent unauthorized access to a network are 1 Choose a network topology for the DEFINITY ECS network that satisfies security needs 2 Carefully administer the DEFINITY ECS network to minimize the possibility of the LAN or intranet being accessed by unauthorized personnel Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 405 Network Security Issues C Security Issues Administration for Network Connectivity 406 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 D Capacities and Performance This Appendix discusses issues related system capacities and performance for DEFINITY ECS in an IP network environment It provides a method of estimating the number of C_LAN and MedPro circuit packs that are needed to support various levels of traffic This appendix provides performance and traffic configuration guidelines for the C LAN TN799B and the MedPro TN802B circuit packs It assumes DEFINITY switch connections in which both signaling and voice data are carried over a LAN or WAN using TCP IP
461. ommand line If next is entered on the with the Dial Plan procr intf command instead of an extension x 25 number the system assigns the next pdm available extension number Type The data module type which determines the connection type Valid Entries Data Usage Module Types For TCP IP connections ppp Enter the data module type that ppp and ethernet For X 25 connections proc intf for the csi and si models x 25 and pdm for the r model ethernet is appropriate type for the procr intf connection type and switch x 25 model pdm For an r model connected to an si model via X 25 a pdm data module needs to be administered in addition to the x 25 data module CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Port Seven characters to specify the port location for this data module in the format NNCSSPP Valid Entries Data Module Usage Types NN cabinet number ppp You can enter x in the Port field 01 44 r model ethernet to indicate that there is no x 25 hardware associated with the port e 01 03 si model pdm assignment Administration 01 csi model Without Hardware C carrier position a e SS slot number 00 20 PP port number 01 16 Link The communication interface link number associated to this data module Valid Entries Data Module Usage Types e
462. ompanies DEFINITY Terminals and Adjuncts Reference 555 015 201 Issue 10 Provides drawings and full descriptions for all phones phone adjuncts and data terminals that can be used with System 75 System 85 DEFINITY Communications System and DEFINITY ECS This document is intended for customers and Lucent Technologies account teams for selecting the correct equipment Guide Builder Software for DEFINITY Telephones 555 230 755 Issue 5 Provides the ability to produce laser printed documentation for specific telephones A comprehensive user s guide and on line help support the software This information applies to Release 8 2 as well as earlier DEFINITY systems All customers receive this software Administration for Network Connectivity 460 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Installation and maintenance G References DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Installation and Test for Single Carrier Cabinets 555 233 120 Issue 1 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of single carrier cabinets This document is availabe in languages other than English and can be ordered from the BCS Publications Catalog web site DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Installation and Test for Multi Carrier Cabinets 555 233 114 Issue 1 Provides procedures and information for hardware installation and initial testing of multi carrier cabinets DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Installation for Adjuncts
463. on Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 n 0 2 n 0 3 n 0 12 y des s 1 5003 node 2 0 12 21 2 13 y dcs s 2 5003 node 3 0 13 31 3 384 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 12 ppp connection to Switch 2 Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode Node 1 ppp is the server for this session Set node 2 to client c Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node la data module screen Interface Chan or TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen 1 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 154 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN lt ethernet gt R8si Field Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments
464. on the ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI data link layer level 2 LAPD provides data transfer between two devices and error and flow control on multiple logical links LAPD is used for signaling and low speed packet data X 25 and mode 3 on the signaling D channel and for mode 3 data communications on a bearer B channel local area network A short range data communication network providing high speed carrier service with low error rates Generally a LAN is limited in range to a maximum of 6 2 miles Ethernet and Token Ring are common LAN architectures See wide area network Ethernet looparound testing Checking an interface by sending a signal through the output across a medium the loop and back through the input Internal looparound tests run against the internal circuitry of the card External looparound tests check the connectors at the edge of the card using a fiber or wire loop PRI Ethernet and ATM cards are tested this way M MAC Media Access Control a sublayer of the OSI Data Link layer provides an interface with the network adapter main satellite tributary A private network configuration that can either stand alone or access an ETN A main switch provides interconnection via tie trunks with one or more subtending switches called satellites all attendant positions for the main satellite configuration and access to and from the public network To a user outside the complex a main satellite configuration appears as on
465. onditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this link Port Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack Link The link number must be in the range 1 25 not previously assigned on this switch Name Information only appears in list data module list Network Leave the default y if the private network contains only uses 1 s for DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network broadcast includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of addresses forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 167 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 3 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links with processor channels on Switch 3 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Page 1 of X Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID ale n 0 223 n 0 31 y des Ci 1 oO node 1 eth 5003 31 13 a 32 y des s 1 5003 node 2 0 32 23 2a 64 n 0
466. onference Before Adding Extra Loss SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Packet Intf1 y Packet Intf2 y Bus Bridge 01a05 Inter Board Link Timeslots Pt0 6 Pt1 1 Pt2 1 DS1 Circuit Packs page 1 add dsl 1a10 Page DS1 CIRCUIT PACK Location 01a10 Name Switch 4 to Switch 1 Bit Rate 1 544 Line Coding b8zs Line Compensation 1 Framing Mode esf Signaling Mode robbed bit Interface Companding mulaw Idle Code 11111111 Slip Detection n Near end CSU Type other Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 233 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Dial Plan change dialplan DIAL PLAN RECORD Local Node Number ETA Node Number Uniform Dialing Plan 4 digit ETA Routing Pattern UDP Extension Search Order local extensions first FIRST DIGIT TABLE First Length Digit 1 4 extension extension extension extension 000 J0O00UAyyNnNA Synchronization Plan Page 1 of X SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE circuit pack location Stratum Port Network Primary Secondary Location Slip Type Location Name 0lal0 y UDS1 BD TN722B amp TN464B DS1 sources result in stratum 4 type II synchronization Administration for Network Connectivity 234 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Trunk Groups Group 14 page 1 display trunk gr
467. onnectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 253 Networking Screens Route Type A Screens Reference A message originating on Switch B destined for node 6 can use either route 2 or the implied route The switch will choose the implied route because it has metric O while route 2 has metric 1 By using the implied route the message goes directly from the source to C LAN2 without passing through C LAN1 If route 2 had been administered with metric O the switch may have used route 2 which goes through C LAN1 to C LAN2 In this case if traffic volume were high the PPP connection between C LAN1 and C LAN2 could be unnecessarily overloaded Of course any destination 6 message already being handled by C LAN1 such as a message from Switch A would have to use route 2 The same description applies to route 3 and destination 1 There is an implied metric 0 route with destination 1 and gateway 2 The Route Type is a display only field that appears on the screen when the change display and list commands are used it does not appear for the add command It specifies whether this is a network or host route A network route enables communications between the node specified in the C LAN Board field and all nodes on the sub network specified in the Destination Node field A host route enables communications between the node specified in the C LAN Board field and the single node specified in the Destination Node field For a netwo
468. onsider a connection between two switches two C LAN ports that goes through a WAN with multiple routers Each router is an intermediate node but the first router is the Gateway for the IP route between the C LAN ports This router is defined as first by setting up another IP route between the local C LAN port and the router In this IP route the local C LAN port is the Gateway and the router is the Destination C LAN Board The slot location of the local C LAN board Valid Value Usage A slot location Enter MMCSS where MM is a 2 digit machine number C occupied by a is the carrier letter and SS is a 2 digit slot number C LAN board Administration for Network Connectivity 252 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens Metric A Screens Reference The metric value indicates the desirability of the IP route in terms of the efficiency of the data transmission between two nodes Valid Values Usage 0 or 1 A metric value of 1 is used only on a switch that has more than one C LAN board installed You can always enter either O or 1 in the Metric field but the choice should be guided by the information below If there are two routes to the same destination one with metric O and one with metric 1 the switch software will choose the route with metric O because it is if properly administered the more efficient route of the two On the other hand if both routes are administered with metric
469. onsiderations 353 detailed description 350 examples 352 forms 350 interactions AAR and ARS 354 DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access 325 Dial Plan 354 DID trunk groups 354 Distributed Communications System DCS 354 Extension Number Portability ENP 354 QSIG Message Waiting Indication 384 UDP codes 351 Index uniform dialing plan example 216 224 231 uniform dialing plan screen 307 utility programs ipconfig 443 ping 444 traceroute 444 vectory directory numbers VDN QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 viewing IP trunk error messages 442 Voice Terminal Display feature interactions DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer 329 QSIG Additional Network Feature Path Replacement ANF PR 381 W web sites documents xvi Z Zero Code Suppression ZCS 490 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 501 Index Z Administration for Network Connectivity 502 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 We d like your opinion Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Comcode 108678749 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas Excellent Good Fair Poor Ease of Finding Information Clarity Completeness Acc
470. onsiderations the attendant when control of access to local and remote trunk groups is necessary Administration for Network Connectivity 324 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking DCS Interactions Alphanumeric Display The following features allow transparency with respect to Calling or Called Name Display and miscellaneous ID DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access Call Coverage At the calling terminal the miscellaneous id cover is not displayed Call Forwarding When a system user calls a party on a different node in the DCS and the call is forwarded the miscellaneous ID forward is not displayed At the covering forwarded to user s terminal only the calling party s name is shown the called party s name is not displayed Call Park When a DCS call between a local system user and a user on another node is parked by the remote user the miscellaneous ID park is not displayed at the local terminal Call Pickup When a DCS call from a system user to another node is answered by way of Call Pickup the miscellaneous ID cover is not displayed at the caller s terminal Call Waiting When a DCS call from a system user to another node is waiting at the called terminal the miscellaneous ID wait is not displayed at the caller s terminal CAS When a user dials the extension for CAS a RLT is seized or the caller is
471. operated in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervi sion signaling is in violation of Part 68 Rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public switched network when e Answered by the called station e Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user This equipment returns answer supervision signals on all DID calls forwarded back to the public switched telephone network Permissible exceptions are e A call is unanswered A busy tone is received e A reorder tone is received CID 77730 Canadian Department of Communications DOC Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le Pr sent Appareil Nom rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la class A pr scrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Trademarks See the preface of this document Ordering Information Call Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center US Voice 1 888 582 3688 US Fax 1 800 566 9568 Canada Voice 317 322 6619 Europe Middle East Africa Voice 317 322 6416 Asia China Pacific Region Caribbean Latin America Voice 317 322 6411 Non US Fax 1 317 322 6699 Write Lu
472. or DCS enter NCA TSC information here See Chapter 3 Configuration 4 for instructions gt Submit the screen End 44 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration Task 5 Create a trunk group 2 H 323 Trunks This task creates a new trunk group for H 323 trunks Each H 323 trunk must be a member of an ISDN trunk group and must be associated with an H 323 signaling group Note The following steps address only those fields that are specifically related to H 323 trunks The other fields are administered as for previous releases and are described in the Administrator s Guide Task 5 Steps Begin gt Open new Trunk Group form enter a tr n add trunk group n Group Number 3 Group Name TG 3 for H 323 trunks Direction two way Dial Access n Queue Length 0 Service Type tie TestCall BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Codeset to Send Display 0 Max Message Size to Send 260 Supplementary Service Protocol a Trunk Hunt cyclical Calling Number Delete Insert Bit Rate 1200 Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 TRUNK GROUP Group Type Outgoing Display n Busy Threshold 99 Auth Code n Far End Test Line No Codeset to Send National IEs 6 Charge Advice none Digit Handling in out enbloc enbloc Synchronization Page 1 of 10 isdn COR 1 CDR Reports y TN 1 TAC 103 C
473. or a centralized attendant service Administration for Network Connectivity 368 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG QSIG Protocols B Private Networking QSIG signaling protocols are based on ITU T formerly CCITT Q 931 access protocols across the Q reference point QSIG standards are also supported by the ISDN Private Networking Specification IPNS Forum DEFINITY ECS QSIG complies with a number of international regulations For example QSIG e Complies with ISO standard 11572 for layer 3 to support private network connectivity e Meets requirements for the ISO Private Network Generic Functional Procedures ISO standard 11582 for call related supplementary services e Supports call related supplementary service transport Abstract Syntax Notation 1 ASN I Basic Encoding Rules BER and Remote Operation Service Element ROSE services protocols e Provides the Name and Number Identification supplementary service as defined by ISO Standards 13864 13868 and 11572 e Provides Call Forwarding Diversion as defined by ISO Standards 13872 and 13873 e Provides Call Transfer as defined by ISO Standards 13865 and 13869 Temporary Signaling Connection TSCs CA TSC DCS only A Temporary Signaling Connection TSC provides a temporary signaling path through ISDN switches for exchanging supplementary service information for example exchange Facility Information Elements in call control messages FACIL
474. or multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen 1 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 184 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numb
475. or trunk groups with 4 digit trunk access codes or for trunk members 100 through 999 If the remote node where the trunk group to be controlled resides is a System 75 Generic 1 or Generic 3 it is not necessary for that node to have an attendant console with corresponding three lamp Trunk Hundreds Select button However if the remote node is a System 85 Generic 2 1 or Enhanced DIMENSION PBX control of the trunk group is not allowed unless an attendant at that node has a corresponding three lamp Trunk Group Select button The attendant must use the Remote Trunk Hundreds Select button to directly access the controlled remote trunk group If an attendant controls a remote trunk group and that attendant dials the trunk access codes of the DCS tie trunk and the controlled remote trunk group the call is routed to the attendant at the node where the trunk group resides If Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access is activated and no attendant is assigned or the attendant is later removed calls to a controlled trunk group route to the attendant queue This feature is not available for trunk groups with 4 digit trunk access codes or for trunk members 100 through 999 CORs for a DEFINITY switch may not correspond to those used by an Enhanced DIMENSION PBX System 85 or DEFINITY system Generic 2 1 Therefore if the DCS network contains nodes other than Generic 1 or Generic 3 the display CORs may be misinterpreted If it is important that cer
476. ort QSIG NCA TSCs In addition BRI trunk D channels support QSIG NCA TSCs An NCS TSC for QSIG is not administered ahead of time but is invoked dynamically by the QSIG feature that needs it Some QSIG features remove the NCA TSC when it is no longer needed others leave the it active for a longer period of time DEFINITY ECS does not provide gateway functionality between a QSIG NCA TSC and an AT amp T NCA TSC For example although a call can be routed from a DCS network into a QSIG network it is not possible for the caller in this case to invoke an automatic callback 370 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking Setting Up QSIG Steps Begin 1 Verify with your sales representative or project manager what QSIG capabilities the system should have The following capabilities apply Table 1 QSIG capabilities Capability Categories Cross Networking Features QSIG Basic e Calling Connected Number e Calling Number Identification Transit Counter Interworking with DCS e Called Calling Name Number delivered to and received from DCS networked switches Basic Supplementary Service e Called Busy Name e Call Completion e Call Forwarding Diversion e Calling Name Identification Call Offer Centralized AUDIX Call Transfer Path Retention e Message Waiting Indication Centralized Attendant Service e Centralized Attendant Supple
477. oup 14 Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 14 Group Type tie CDR Reports Group Name Node 4 to Node 1 TG14 COR 1 TN 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Trunk Signaling Type Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination Comm Type voice Auth Code n Trunk Flash n BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink Incoming Rotary Timeout sec 5 Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type tone Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec 500 Digit Treatment Digits Sig Bit Inversion none Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss normal Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex full Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Receive Answer Supervision y Group 14 Page 2 display trunk group 14 Page 2 of 10 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Measured none Internal Alert n Maintenance Tests y Data Restriction n Glare Handling none Used for DCS y PBX ID 1 Suppress Outpulsing n Seize When Maintenance Busy neither end Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Per Call CPN Blocking Code Connected to CO Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Group 14 member assignments TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 3 Port Code Sfx Name Night Mode Type Ans Delay 01a1001 TN767 e 20 01a1002 TN767 e 20 01a1003 TN767 e 20 Administration
478. oup for NCA The ISDN PRI trunk group number whose incoming TSC call handling table will be used to handle incoming NCA TSCs through this signaling group Trunk Group for Channel Selection Supplementary a indicates AT amp T protocol b indicates QSIG protocol Service Protocol gt Press the Next Page key Administration for Network Connectivity 132 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service Feature As needed Inactivity Time out min _ TSC Local Mach Inde Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl ID 1 2951 y permanent 1701 dcs 20 2 2952 y permanent 1702 gateway Ea Page 2 of 5 3 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments TSC Index 1 for DCS connection to Switch 2 Local Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl 1 Mach ID 1 Extension number of the ISDN interface on the Switch 1DS1 circuit pack y enables the administered NCA TSC Used to indicate the strategy for establishing this administered NCA TSC permanent means that the administered NCA TSC can be established by either the near end or the far end as needed means the administered NCA TSC will be established the first time the administered NCA TSC is needed it can be set up either by the near end or far end switch Extension number of the ISDN interface o
479. oups screen with option b for Supplementary Service Protocol Console Parameters screen Attendant Console screen Assign an extension to Attd on the Dial Plan Record screen at the main PBX on OQ A Administer each QSIG Supplementary Service that will be used by attendants Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 375 QSIG Setting Up QSIG VALU Steps Call Coverage B Private Networking Begin 1 Enable the QSIG Basic Supplementary Services on the Customer Options screen page 6 described above 2 Enable enter y Value Added Lucent VALU on the System Parameters Customer Options screen page 6 as described above 3 Ona Trunk Group screen enter y in the QSIG Value Added Lucent field page 1 and sent b in the supplementary Service Protocol Option field page 1 4 Administer the System Parameters Call Coverage Call Forwarding screen as normal with the inclusion of the following fields Immediate Redirection on Receipt of PROGRESS Inband Information page 1 Enter y to speed up redirection of subsequent coverage points or call processing This may be necessary in cases where coverage path endpoints over non Lucent switches are unavailable but the QSIG networked switch or the public network sends PROGRESS messages that delay the local switch from redirecting the call elsewhere If the QSIG network contains only DEFINITY switches enter n QSIG VALU Coverage Overr
480. outcome 50 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Troubleshooting IP Solutions 2 H 323 Trunks No MedPro resources available C LAN sharing The solution to this problem is to set up a separate signaling group for each trunk group as shown in Figure 3 More generally set up a separate signaling group for each set of trunk groups that have common attributes Figure 2 Shared signaling group TGA1 Private NW TGB1 SGB1 SGA1 Trunk Group for Channel Selection A TGB1 TGA2 Public NW TGB2 Switch A Switch B Figure 3 Separate signaling group SGA1 Private NW SGB1 Trunk Group TGBI for Channel Selection TGB1 TGA1 SGA2 Public NW SGB2 Dare Trunk Group pe TGB2 for Channel Selection TGB2 Switch A Switch B If two switches are connected via an H 323 trunk and all MedPro resources are in use on the call destination switch when a call is made the call will fail even when a 2nd preference is administered in the routing pattern on the source switch This can be avoided by setting the first preference look ahead routing LAR to next in the routing pattern Depending on the network configuration a single C LAN board has the capacity to handle the signa
481. oute Pat Extension Number Portability All Numbering Plan Route Pattern All Note On the Uniform Dialing Plan form if you change the Ext Code and Type fields from a 4 digit or 5 digit extension number to none a warning message informs you that all UDP extension codes will be lost The same warning message displays when you change the Ext Code and Type extension numbers from 4 digits to 5 digits or from 5 digits to 4 digits UDP routes calls off the local switch by converting the extension number into a private network number with 7 digits This number is formed by prepending a 3 digit code of the form XXX to the last 4 digits of the extension number 3 types of conversion are supported UDPCode AARCode and ENPNode e For UDPCode and AARCode XXX is a 3 digit private network location code and the result is analyzed and routed via Automatic Alternate Routing AAR UDPCode conversion prohibits digit conversion via AAR AARCode conversion permits it just as if you dialed the AAR number instead of the extension For ENPCode XXX is called an Extension Number Portability ENP code It is not used for routing node number routing is used instead The ENP code is chosen based on the first 1 or 2 digits of the dialed string Because it is not used for routing the ENPCode can be independent of location 350 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications
482. overage path Call Detail Recording If the CAS main RLT trunk has the CDR option selected CDR records generate for incoming CAS calls Call Forwarding Do not forward calls to a CAS extension Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 341 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking e DCS Operation If an RLT trunk group is administered as a DCS trunk the following interaction applies On an incoming CAS call to the attendant the DCS message displays instead of the name of the incoming RLT trunk group Upon answering the call the attendant hears call identification tones indicating that the call is a CAS call Use a TRUNK NAME button to obtain the name of the RLT trunk group DXS and DTGS Buttons DXS and DTGS buttons at the main attendant console can be used with CAS However with DXS buttons it takes a few seconds before the attendant hears ringback tone e Emergency Access to the Attendant CAS Branch Emergency Access calls generated by a Feature Access Code route Off Hook Alert to the branch attendant group If there is no attendant in the branch the call routes to the branch s administered Emergency Access Redirection Extension When the branch switch is in CAS Backup Service the calls route to the backup station and the call is treated as a normal call e Hunt Groups If an incoming CAS call directs to a hunt group the call does not redirect to th
483. owed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name C LAN 01a05 TN799 B node 5 555K n Net Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Rgn ADD 295 ADS REA ooo h 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 gt Enter values Field Inter region IP connectivity allowed Enable Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node name Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use MedPro resources administered in regions that are different from the endpoints regions The Ethernet port must be enabled y before it can be used The port must be disabled n before changes can be made to its attributes on this screen Enter c lan Enter the slot location for the circuit pack Display only This field is automatically populated with TN799 for C LAN or TN802 for MedPro Display only This field is automatically populated with B for the TN802 and TN799 Enter the unique node name for the IP interface The node name here must already be administered on the Node Names screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 85 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Field Subnet Mask Gateway Addr Net Rgn Conditions Comments Enter the subnet mask associated with the IP address for this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen Since the node 1 and node 5
484. p Number 3 Group Type Supplementary Service Protocol Near end Node Name clan al Near end Listen Port 1720 LRQ Required n SIGNALING GROUP Trunk Group for Channel Selection __ Page 1 of 5 h 323 Max number of NCA TSC 0 Max number of CA TSC 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC a Far end Node Name clan bl Far end Listen Port 1720 Calls Share IP Signaling Connection Bypass If IP Threshold Exceeded 15 Internetworking Message PROGress gt Enter values Field Group Type Trunk Group for Channel Selection Near end Node Name Near end Listen Port Conditions Comments Enter h 323 Leave blank until you create a trunk group in the following task then use the change command and enter the trunk group number in this field Enter the node name for the C LAN IP interface on this switch The node name must be administered on the Node Names screen and the IP Interfaces screen Enter an unused port number from the range 1719 1720 or 5000 9999 The number 1720 is recommended Note If the LRQ field is set to y the near end Listen Port must be 1719 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Cl D 77730 43 H 323 Trunk Administration Field Far end Node Name Far end Listen Port LRQ Required Calls Share IP Signaling Connection Bypass if IP Threshold Exceeded gt Go to page 2 2 H 323 Trunks Conditions Comments This
485. p da eke bee ole lets Poteet ee ae al Seed E RES XV How to access this book from the web 0 0 eee eee xvi HOW to Order More COPISS yace erro cicatrices xvi Tell ys what you IMK gt a A A A e xvii Howto Order BOOKS vidriado nora One ir e as A ea xvii Howto Comment on This BOO ima a a E E dia xvii Where to Call for Technical SUpport ooooccccccccco eee xviii Trademarks tie erano A AE alae tue sae ea tun A xix 1 Networking Overview 1 DEFINITSWich Connectivity sra proce ono al decias aan 1 Connectivity OVervieWw ee 1 Release 8 Hardware Requirements e 7 Hardware Requirements for Upgrades from Pre R7 Switches 7 DEFINITY Connection types and capacities 0 o 9 IPSOMPNONES vitrina dida dias 11 IP AOGKESSING sario diia ON rt e id ad 13 Physical AQGKeSSING ala a a ad 13 Logical ACOESSINO a gw ck a ke ra a a RR Me ws ee eG 13 SUDNCUING pisos deve aoe dade a Gare eS Aa BO ae ES 16 Default Gate Way serka mean di aah we a hoe Rt a a 22 When to uso IP routos e 2262 bea tia te eee Bee a ee ee Alek ce Z 23 2 H 323 Trunks 31 OV EYE i Bice oe vee seca dadas 31 IPS OMIT AN nee ee eet Sw de tai a oe ere Bh A i 31 IP Connected Trunks 3 240486 ae 4448 Pe boa ee ee ee ee PS 32 IPSS OIDNOMES a aui godine das te dite Woes okt Re al yh Arak da Wee bn ee SH ea oe 32 F820 Trunk AOMINISHALONS errar AAA A 33 Enabling Administrations sa s a we a ate Gun Bale Sele en
486. part corresponds to the extended network prefix and the 0 s part corresponds to the host ID of the address Each of the three classes of addresses has a default subnet mask that specifies the end of the Ist 2nd and 3rd octet as the boundary between the extended network prefix and the host ID The default subnet mask in each case means no subnetting Default Subnet Mask Class A 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 Class B 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 Class C 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 In addition to the default subnet masks which divide the network and host IDs at the octet boundaries in the IP address subnets can be formed by using 2 or more bits from the host octets to define the subnet ID Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 17 IP Addressing Class C subnets 1 Networking Overview The following table shows that Class C IP addresses can have 5 subnetting schemes each with a different number of subnets per network The first and last subnet formed by using 1 and 7 bits respectively are unusable because they result in either the subnet ID or the host ID having all zeros or all ones No No of No of Lido Subnet i Sub Usable Hosts be P ID ribo Class C net Subnets per Addresses ID Subnet Masks bits per NW Subnet 4th Octet 1 0 126 0 10000000 128 255 255 255 128 2 2 62 124 11000000 192 25
487. ple 9 This type of routing is not allowed MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in a a Same Create PiN iA with Different country Same ae your actual g area entries Country different values code area code Originating Search string 1A2B2D 1C2D NA Replace string 1A2B2D 1C2D IP Address 2G 2G Terminating Search string 2A1B1D 2C1D NA Replace string 1F 1F MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with l zame Same Create Different country i your actual i area entries Country different values code area code Originating Search string 2A1B1D 2C1D NA Replace string 2A1B1D 2C1D IP Address 1G 1G Terminating Search string 1A2B2D 1C2D NA Replace string 2F 2F SI99YS410M YUNAL dl 0002 dy anss poS esz sg g AUANIOUUOD YIOMION 104 UONENSIUILIPY O ZZZ dID esp Worksheet 4 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site same area code only exchange X SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Add ARS Fill in with Same Same Different country Different country analysis entry your actual a area analysis entry your actual E area f Country different f Country different with values code with values code area code area code Dialed String 1A2B2DX 1C2DX X Dialed String 2A1B1D
488. plementary Services Called Busy Name QSIG Name and Number Identification Enables the calling party to see the name of the called party at the following times e while the call is ringing at the called party s terminal e while listening to a busy tone because the called party s terminal was busy Called Busy Name is similar to the display provided for local on switch calls as well as for the DCS calls with the following exceptions e Names longer than 15 characters are truncated only the first 15 characters display e The number does not display unless QSIG VALU is enabled QSIG Name and Number Identification allows a switch to send and receive the calling number calling name connected number and connected name QSIG Name and Number Identification displays up to 15 characters for the calling and connected name and up to 15 digits for the calling and connected number across ISDN interfaces 66 You can administer outgoing calls as yes no or restricted Restricted means that DEFINITY ECS sends the information but sends it presentation restricted which indicates to the receiving switch that the information should not be displayed A received restricted number is included on the Call Detail Record CDR Transit switch information When DEFINITY ECS acts as a transit switch the QSIG standards require it to pass on all supplementary service information that is not addressed to it This includes
489. plete the following steps De administer the ISDN PRI connections e busy the ISDN links e remove comm interface links of type ISDN e remove comm interface processor channels that use ISDN links e remove data modules using those links Save translations on a working flash card Otherwise skip to step 3 1 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 54 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Overview 3 C LAN Administration vw Checklist Item 3 Remove old circuit packs Turn off the power For the csi model remove the Processor TN798 circuit pack Don t remove the processor circuit pack if it is a TN798B For the si model remove the Processor TN790 PACCON TN778 and NETCON TN777 circuit packs If there are X 25 connections that the customer wants to keep leave the PI TN765 circuit pack in the switch otherwise remove it For the r model if there are X 25 connections that the customer wants to keep leave the PGATE TN755 circuit pack in the switch otherwise remove it 4 Install new circuit packs on all switches upgrading from a pre R7 software load to R8 For csi models install the TN798B processor and TN799B C LAN circuit packs For si models install the TN790B processor TN794 NetPkt and TN799B C LAN circuit packs For any PPN or EPN that will be carrying packet data replace the TN776 Expansion Interface with the TN570B or TN570C circui
490. plished by adding the powers of 2 corresponding to the 1 s positions in each byte X P Pa ate 2 alt 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 194 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 13 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 219 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 The IP address space pe or about 4 3 billion addresses has been divided into five groups Classes A E to accommodate the need for different network sizes Each class has a different allocation of bits between the network and host IDs The classes are identified by a fixed pattern of leading bits In Class A addresses the first leftmost bit is always 0 So Class A IP addresses have 7 bits to define network IDs 7 bits can define a total of 128 0 gt 127 Class A networks The remaining 24 bits of a Class A IP address are used to define host IDs So for each of the 126 networks there are 22 or 16 777 216 possible hosts The following table shows how IP addresses are the allocated among the five classes Octet 1 N Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4 A 1 A x k v Class A 50 Class C n 12 5 p D aiio Reserved f r Multicast addresses pea E aahh Reserved for future use Address classes A B and C cover 87 5 of the address space These addresses are assigned by the ISP or the Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA to organizations for their exclusive use The remaining 12 5 of addresses designated classes D and E are reserved for special purposes Network ID Administrat
491. point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0 0 0 0 node 1 192 168 10 101 node 3 192 168 10 103 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter unique node names for the following 2 nodes e C LAN PPP port on Switch 1 e C LAN PPP port on Switch 3 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End 126 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to Switch 3 This task administers a ppp data module for the ppp connection to node 3 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 5803 add data module 5803
492. port that a call arrives on Note Itis not possible to mix dialing strategies in the IP Trunk software Once line numbers are used to route calls line numbers must be used on ALL entries in a routing table Routing information entered will be based on information that has been entered on the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or on information collected based on the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites Routing based on Dialed String If routing will be based on dialed string enter any in the Line Number field then enter the information from the worksheets or a unique identifier for an extension range from the Procedures for Extension Dialing Routing based on Line Numbers If routing will be based on line numbers that are dedicated to a specific location you need to make sure that the same line number is used on both the originating and destination switches This is done by prepending a string of digits unique to a line and associating it with that line number at both the originating and terminating IP Trunks This code will be discarded at the terminating end For example in the display above the code number 01 is entered in the Replace Digits field as a unique digit string that will be associated with line number 1 If none is entered in the Search Digits field no digits will be searched for We don t need to search for dialed digits because the line numbers which are associated with port numbers on the circuit pack are
493. processor channels Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 n 0 2 n 0 12 y des s 1 5003 node 2 0 12 21 2 64 n 0 Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT gt Enter values for processor channel 12 Field Conditions Comments Enable Set to y Appl Set to des for DCS signaling Mode node 1 is the server for this session Set node 2 to client c Interface Link This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen in the previous task Interface Chan For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway This number must match the Destination Port number on the node 2 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 65 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si Field Destination Node
494. provides the logic to determine the best route for a network call possibly modifies the digits outpulsed and allows or denies certain calls to certain users tandem through The switched connection of an incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk without human intervention tandem tie trunk network TTTN A private network that interconnects several customer switching systems TCP Transmission Control Protocol Transport layer Connection oriented reliable TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A standard that lets different computer hardware and different operating systems such as PCs Apple computers UNIX workstations and mainframes communicate with each other over a network TCP IP is the most complete most widely accepted network protocol currently available TDM See time division multiplexing tie trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems time division multiplexing A way of interleaving digitized voice video and or data so that several calls can be sent concurrently over the same spread of frequencies TDM systems distribute the available bandwidth across a series of time slots and divide each input stream into a set of samples They then assign successive time slots to the first sample in each input stream They repeat the process until all time slots have been assigned or all inputs sent At the far end the receiver demultiplexes the transmission
495. r First and second characters are the cabinet 01 through 03 G3si nom A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number blank Interface ID In an NFAS Signaling Group an Interface ID must be assigned to each DS1 facility so that it can be referenced by both interfacing switches When a call is established between switches the Interface ID at each end is used to determine which B channel is to be used to establish the call The Interface ID numbers on both ends must be the same Displays when the Associated Signaling field is n indicates NFAS Enter an interface ID for the corresponding DS1 Interface circuit pack Pages 2 through 5 of the screen Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 283 Networking Screens A Screens Reference NCA TSC The Non call associated temporary signaling connections NCA TSC are administered on pages 2 3 of the ISDN PRI and H 323 Signaling Group screens and on pages 3 6 of the ATM Signaling Group screen ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Page 2 of 5 Service Feature As needed Inactivity Time out min TSC Local Adj Mach Index Ext Enabled Established Dest Digits Appl Name ID T 228 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 T2 T3 14 T5 16 _ Service Feature The service type for
496. r The header contains the virtual circuit number that identifies the pre negotiated path through the network ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Audio Information Exchange AUDIX A fully integrated voice mail system Can be used with a variety of communications systems to provide call history data such as subscriber identification and reason for redirection Automatic Alternate Routing AAR A feature that routes calls to other than the first choice route when facilities are unavailable Automatic Route Selection ARS A system for automatically routing telephone calls by the least costly route A feature of the Lucent DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server auxiliary trunk A trunk used to connect auxiliary equipment such as radio paging equipment to a communications system AWOH See Administration Without Hardware AWOH Administration for Network Connectivity 466 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 B8ZS Glossary B8ZS See Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS Basic Rate Interface BRI A standard ISDN frame format that specifies the protocol used between two or more communications systems As used in North America BRI provides 23 64 kbps B channels voice or data and one 64 kbps D channel signaling The D channel is the 24th channel of the interface and contains multiplexed signaling information for the other 23 channels bandwidth The amount of data that a given channel c
497. r Channel screen must also be set to 0 Destination Node Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen Destination Port This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 1 of 2 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 161 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Conditions Comments The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch For Processor Channel 23 connection to Switch 3 through Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID
498. r Class A subnet masks and all 13 valid Class B subnet masks can also be valid Class A subnet masks For example 255 255 255 224 is a valid subnet mask for all three address classes It allows 6 2 2 subnetworks for Class C addresses 2046 pis subnetworks for Class B addresses and 524 286 2 9_2 subnetworks for Class A addresses Each of these subnetworks can have 30 25 2 hosts 264 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Destination Digits Used to enable access to the correct trunk group at the far end of the connection This is typically the trunk access code TAC plus the extension of data module on the far end If you use just the extension then you must administer UDP and AAR route patterns to access the correct trunk group Valid Value Usage The extension or TAC If a trunk access code TAC is used prepend the TAC extension of the to the extension destination data Ifthe Establish Connection field is n this field module should be left blank Destination Node Name Name of the node at the far end of this connection Valid Value Usage A name administered on the Node Names Screen Chap Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Valid Value Usage y n Identifies whether the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol is used over this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secr
499. r Class B networks subnets can be formed using from 2 to 14 bits from the 3rd and 4th octets For Class A networks subnets can be formed using from 2 to 22 bits from the 2nd 3rd and 4th octets The Subnet Mask field on the ppp Data Module screen used for ppp connections and on the IP Interfaces screen used for ethernet connections enables the specification of a subnet for the IP address 20 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Addressing Valid subnet masks Class A default 255 0 0 0 255 2539 255 255 255 255x 255 255 255 LID 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 259 255 255 255 192 224 240 248 2202 254 22008 255 255 255 2255 255 255 255 239 255 255 255 2295 255 2205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 192 224 240 248 202 s204e 255 255 255 253 2295 255 2295 o 1ro r ro o o o o s a N 00 192 224 240 248 2292 Class The valid subnets for each Class of address are default 255 255 0 0 255 259 255 290 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 200 239 235 2299 255 299 DO 2299 255 255 2959 255 192 224 240 248 ASIAN 254 ASIN 2209 255 LID 230 2299 e200 0 0 0 O 128 192 224 240 248 232 1 Networking Overview Class C default 255 255 25
500. r Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Uniform Dial Plan This screen administers the Uniform Dial Plan UDP Page 1 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes Ext Code Type a dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type Ox 1x 2x 3x 4x 00 10 20 30 40 01 dl 21 les 41 02 12 22 32 42 03 T3 23 33 43 04 14 24 34 44 05 15 25 35 45 06 16 26 36 46 07 17 27 37 47 08 18 28 38 48 09 19 29 39 49 Page 2 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes Ext Code Type dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type 5x 6x 7x 8x 9x 50 60 70 80 90 51 61 71 81 91 52 62 72 82 92 53 63 73 83 93 54 64 74 84 94 55 65 75 85 95 56 66 76 86 96 57 67 77 87 97 58 68 78 88 98 59 69 79 89 99 Ext Codes Displays a string of digits x and dd The position of the dd shows which digit positions of the Ext Codes are being administered For example 512dd means that the last two digits of the Ext Codes for the leading digits 512 are being administered on the screen The string 5ddxx shows that the second and third digits of the Ext Codes for the leading digit 5 are being administered on the screen these entries would all be wildcard entries Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 50
501. r ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default O OA QA O net 96 192 168 26 node 1 192 168 1 124 node 2 192 168 1 125 node 4 192 168 1 _ 39 node 5 192 168 1 51 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Name Enter node names for the following 5 nodes net 96 the network address of the node 1 and node 2 subnet this is described in the IP Route task e node 1 C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 1 node 2 CMS node for consistency use the host name of the CMS computer assigned during the CMS setup procedure see CentreVu CMS Software Installation and Setup 585 215 866 node 4 Interface on the router to the subnet of Switch 2 node 5 C LAN Ethernet port on Switch 2 IP Address The unique IP addresses of the nodes named in the previous field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 84 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi Switch 2 Task Define IP Interfaces 3 C LAN Administration The IP interface for each C LAN and MedPro board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity all
502. r the user will dial not including the ARS feature access code for example 9 Substitute all X s in these tables for each area code X which may be 2 3 or 4 digits You need one entry both PBX and ITS for each area code X MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in MMCX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Fill in with l Same Same Fill in with same Same Create Different country Create Different country z your actual E area 2 your actual A area entries Country different entries Country different values code values code area code area code Originating Originating Search string 1A2BX 1CX 1CX Search string 2A1BX 2CX 2CX Replace string 1A2BX 1CX 1CX Replace string 2A1BX 2CX 2CX IP Address 2G 2G 2G IP Address 1G 1G 1G Terminating Terminating Search string 2A1BX 2CX 2CX Search string 1A2BX 1CX 1CX Replace string 1F1CX 1F1CX 1F1CX Replace string 2F2CX 2F2CX 2F2CX SI99YS4A10M YUNAL dl 99t 0 422 dld 0002 indy enss p0OG E2 9GS AWAHIOUUOD YIOMJON 104 UONEASIUILIPY Worksheet 7 Two Site Solution DEFINITY T1 Administration Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site any different country SITE 1 SITE 2 PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in PBX Admin If Sites 1 and 2 are in Add ARS Fill in with i Same Same Add ARS Fill in with same Same A Different country Different country analysis entry your actual A area analysis entry your actual
503. ration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Conditions Comments Session Local For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch Session Remote and vice versa Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 3 of 3 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 186 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Route C LAN a to node 3 This task specifies a route for packets handled by C LAN a destined for node 3 This route is needed because node 1a and node 3 are connected via ppp and there are intermediate nodes between them Steps Begin gt Enable the ppp link on the node 1a data module screen ch da 2013 set Enable Link to y gt Open the IP Routing form enter a ip n add ip route next Route Number Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING 1 node 3 node 1b 1c07 1 The system assigns the route number 1 gt Enter values Field Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric gt Submit the screen End Conditions Comments The name of the node at the destination of this route Node name of the gateway by which the destination node is re
504. re adding the IP route Otherwise leave this field set to n until the link administration is complete that is until after all data modules and the processor channels are assigned then set to y Name Information only appears in list generated by the list data module command BCC Bearer Capability Class This is a display only field 10f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 182 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs lt ethernet gt R8si Field COS COR TN Node Name Subnet Mask Establish Connection Destination Digits Destination Node Name CHAP 3 C LAN Administration Conditions Comments The values for these fields will be specified by the system administrator The node name for the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen y means that this node is responsible for the call setup for the link to node 1c Enter n when administering the data module for node 1c Extension 2378 of data module on node 1c Name of the node at the far end of this connection Must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connect
505. rected Caller can leave a message for the called party e Once a subscriber logs into AUDIX by dialing the AUDIX number and entering the extension and password the subscriber can perform the following activities Listen to or delete messages voice fax or text Leave a message for other subscribers on the same AUDIX without calling them Forward a message to another subscriber on the same AUDIX Access the AUDIX directory to address a message A Access the AUDIX directory to find a subscriber s extension N Record or change your greeting Transfer out of AUDIX T or 0 e Message Waiting Indication typically a lamp but may be a stutter dial tone or display indicates the presence of new messages I If another vendor s switch acting as a served user switch does not provide this functionality the call will not cover properly to a DEFINITY ECS message center switch complex e When a remote subscriber logs in to AUDIX from the subscriber s phone the subscriber does not need to enter his or her extension Instead of entering the extension the password and the subscriber can enter the password and then What you do not get e Leave Word Calling does not work between served user switches though users on the same switch can use it Transfer into AUDIX does not work from a served user switch Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 3
506. red Members min max 1 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 3 Port Code Sfx Name Night Mode Type Ans Delay 1 01a1023 TN767 f 20 2i 3 4 Administration for Network Connectivity 236 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Uniform Dialing Paln change udp x Page 1 of 2 UNIFORM DIALING PLAN Ext Codes ddxx dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type dd Type Ox 1x udpcode 221 2x udpcode 222 3x udpcode 223 4x local eer 00 10 20 30 40 01 11 21 31 41 02 12 22 32 42 03 T3 23 33 43 04 14 24 34 44 05 15 25 35 45 06 16 26 36 46 07 ILAS PAIS 37 47 08 18 28 38 48 09 19 29 39 49 AAR Digit Analysis display aar analysis 1 Page 1 AAR DIGIT ANALYSIS TABLE Percent Full Dialed Total Route Call String Min Max Pattern Type 221 7 7 101 aar 222 7 7 101 aar 223 7 7 101 Routing Patterns display route pattern 101 Pattern Number 101 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 0 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 237 Switch Node 4 Administration 4 Networking Example Node Names page 1 change node names NODE NAMES Audix Names IP Address MSA Names IP Address intuityl 192 168 200 10 msa page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NO
507. ries Usage host network or pbx DCP Analog Bearer Capability Valid entries Usage 3 1kHz or speech Internetworking Message Specifies whether the system sends alerting or progress if an incoming trunk call is routed to a non ISDN trunk group for example CO or tie This field is administerable on a per port basis Valid entries Usage PROGress default ALERTing Administration for Network Connectivity 290 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference ISDN TSC Gateway Channel Assignments This screen is required when the switch is to act as a gateway between a switch that supports the Temporary Signaling Connections TSC feature and a non TSC compatible switch The gateway provides interface protocols necessary for communications to exist between a switch administered with Non Call Associated TSCs in a Signaling Group on the ISDN side and a processor channel BX 25 on the non ISDN side A NCA TSC is a type of virtual connection established for exchanging user information messages on ISDN PRI D channels There is no B channel related to the connection Page 1 of 2 ISDN TSC GATEWAY CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Group TSC Index Channel cation Group TSC Index Channel cation Lee aa a T7 ee Em LEE a EA SA pws Sie a Zes PO 4 _ EN EZ LO poe Ses mn ome 2
508. rk route the node name in the Destination Node field must be administered on the Node Names screen where it is associated with a sub network address not a specific node address For example 192 168 1 0 is the network address for the 192 168 1 network The identification of an address as a network address or a host address depends on how the network is subnetted which is specified by the Subnet Mask field on the IP Interfaces screen Valid Value Usage network or host Display only 254 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference IP Media Parameters This screen specifies the types of codecs available on the IP Interface board TN802B The codecs encode and compand the analog voice data for transmission over the IP facilities The order in which the codecs are listed is the preferred order of use by the switch Note The codec ordering must be the same on DEFINITY switches at both ends of an H 323 trunk connection The set of codecs listed need not be the same but the order of the listed codecs must be the same change ip parameters Page 1 of 1 IP Media Parameters Audio Codec Preferences 1 G 711MU 2 G 723 6 3K 3 G 729A 4 UDP Port Range Min 2048 Max 65535 n Audio Codec Enter the codec types in the order of preference of use Preferences Valid Value Usage G 711A Enter up to four codec types in the order o
509. rk traffic is insignificant However the interflow function requires a significant amount of bandwidth to carry the voice data Depending on the other uses of the LAN WAN and its overall utilization rate the voice quality could be degraded to unacceptable levels Lucent recommends that if H 323 trunks are used for BSR interflow this traffic should be routed to a low occupancy or unshared LAN WAN segment Alternatively you might want to route internal interflow traffic which may have lower quality of service requirements over H 323 trunks and route customer interflow traffic over circuit switched tie trunks Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 35 H 323 Trunk Administration 2 H 323 Trunks H 323 Trunk Administration Task Summary After the enabling administration is complete you can administer the H 323 IP trunks The screens and fields that need to be administered are listed below NOTE This is only a list of screens and the fields that need to be administered The values that need to be entered in these fields are described in the next section Node names A node name and IP address must be entered on the Node Names screen for each C LAN and IP Interface board on the local switch For each far end node that the H 323 trunks on the local switch will connect to a node name and IP address must be entered for the far end gatekeeper which is a C LAN board if the far end is a DEF
510. rm signaling group 4 TSC Local Enabled Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext Ext PBX ID 1 5900 y permanent 4900 1 des 2 5901 y permanent 4901 audix e Trunk Group form Group Grp Type Used for DCS DCS Sig PBX ID Method 1 isdn pri y d chan 1 e Routing Pattern form Routing Trunk FRL Del TSC CA TSC Pattern Group Request 1 1 0 3 y at setup The D channel signaling feature expands the domain of DCS networks by supporting configurations that include public network ISDN facilities utilizing network services including Software Defined Network SDN By eliminating the need for dedicated private line facilities this feature allows geographically dispersed DCS networks to be cost effective Figure 6 shows a 3 node network 332 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Figure 6 3 Node public private network G3i G3i PBX ID 1 PBX ID 2 RNX 221 RNX 222 AUDIX SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2 D CHANNEL 1 Bes 1 Link 2 1 ml PXI aa TSO cee EA 4 1 TSC u2 AUDIX2 12 p 212 AUDIX2 DCS 1 3 hs EE O TSC o A A ono AY oe A D D P U C Cl D S S H ea A Soa 3 3 3 L AT amp T NETWORK A U D iI X 3 as GR m s PRZZ gt TO O 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 TSC SWITCH 3 G3i PBX ID 3 RNX223 The following tables sho
511. ro mode includes the H 323 trunking introduced with Release 8 and is documented in Chapter 2 Administration for the IP trunk mode is documented in Appendix F and is unchanged from Release 7 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 ix Issue Status Preface Screen Changes In Release 8 the following changes have been made to screens related to IP networks Ethernet Data Module screen The ethernet Data Module screen is changed in Release 8 add data module next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 2377 Name Type ethernet Port Link 2_ Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses y 1 The following fields have been removed from the ethernet Data Module screen e Broadcast Address e Automatic Subnet Routing The Broadcast Address field previously enabled you to specify that broadcast messages are to be sent to a subset of the host s subnet Now broadcast messages are always sent to the host s full subnet The Automatic Subnet Routing field previously enabled you to disable automatic subnet routing Now automatic subnet routing is always enabled 2 The following fields have been moved from the ethernet Data Module screen to the new IP Interfaces screen e Enable Link e Node Name e Subnet Mask 3 The following field is added to the ethernet Data Module screen Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses This field enables you to accommodate system
512. rocedures must be done on the host switch e Administer the local node number in the dial plan e Administer the Intuity system voice ports as stations including Class of Restriction COR and Class of Service COS e If the switch is a csi model assign the bus bridge e Assign node names for the Intuity system and the switch e Administer a hunt group and add the Intuity system voice ports to that hunt group e Add an ethernet data module e Administer a processor channel for the link from the switch to the Intuity system Enable the link on the ethernet data module e Set up a coverage path for access to the voice port hunt group 92 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration e Apply the coverage path to stations and if the switch is an r model specify the node name of the Intuity system for each station that has a voice mailbox on the Intuity system Intuity system administration The following procedures must be done on the Intuity system e Administer the UNIX name and IP address for the Intuity system e Administer the switch interface link to the host switch This includes the Extension Length Host Switch Number AUDIX Number Switch Number Switch IP Address and TCP Port Administer extension numbers channels and services Administer subscribers Administer the TCP
513. rom the DEFINITY switch to another DCS node is denied This prevents forwarded incoming trunk calls from being forwarded ad infinitum between two extensions DCS Call Waiting is denied when the following features are activated at the single line voice terminal Automatic Callback to or from the voice terminal Data Privacy Data Restriction On incoming trunk calls to the attendant extended over DCS trunks Attendant Call Waiting interacts with the EDCS feature ASAI For incoming calls on DCS over ISDN PRI ASAI applications receive the ISDN PRI Calling Party Information not the DCS Calling Party Information Attendant DXS with Busy Lamp Field An attempt by the attendant to directly select an extension that has been previously administered as belonging to a administered NCA TSC results in intercept tone being received CDR CDR records both the status and the utilization of TSCs Both CA TSCs and NCA TSCs can be recorded For more information consult the CDR description in this manual or the CDR manual Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 327 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Distinctive Ringing D channel Backup In the event of a D channel switchover primary to secondary or secondary back to primary in a private network administered NCA TSCs that were active are assumed to have remained active Any unacknowledged user user service requ
514. rom the PBX activating Transfer Into Voice Mail to the voice mail system must be QSIG QSIG Value Added Lucent VALU Value Added Lucent VALU adds three forms of feature transparency to QSIG networks e Called Busy Number The system sends and displays across the network the called party s number to the calling party during alerting It updates the display to connected number when the called party answers the call It also sends and displays a busy party s number This serves to confirm to the caller that he or she dialed the correct number The Called Busy Number feature is an extension to QSIG Called Busy Name For additional information see QSIG Name and Number Identification page 361 The Called Busy Number never displays alone it displays only if the Called Busy Name is available for instance received from the far end and marked presentation allowed In contrast upon receipt of a Calling Number without a Calling Name the number displays with the words CALL FROM e Distinctive Ringing QSIG VALU provides two kinds of distinctive ringing across the network internal and external e Call Coverage The system allows calls to be covered by extensions across the network This coverage operates similarly to DCS Call Coverage page 315 though the connectivity of the network itself differs If administered path replacement is invoked after coverage These features work with phone users as well as f
515. rst or last This allows flexibility to change extensions from local to non local and vice versa DID Trunk Group DID calls to 5 digit UDP extension numbers require that the DID trunk group insert enough digits to make a 5 digit extension number Distributed Communications System UDP is required when DCS is provided The necessary UDP software is provided with the DCS software Extension Number Portability If an extension code is administered to use ENP node routing ENP routes the call to the correct switch If AAR is enabled in addition to UDP the 7 digit AAR number provides the same routing as UDP that is via ENP 354 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 ISDN Feature Plus B Private Networking ISDN Feature Plus This feature allows you to have basic feature transparency over public networks without having a dedicated leased line This provides a lower cost option for using the switched public network How to administer ISDN Feature Plus Note Only Lucent representatives perform step 1 1 On the System Parameters Customer Options form set the G3 Version field to V8 ISDN Feature Plus field to y 2 On the same form set either or both of the following ISDN PRI field to y or ISDN BRI Trunks field to y 3 Set either or both of the following ISDN BRI Trunk Group Set the Supplementary Service Protocol field to f ISDN PRI Trunk Group Set
516. runk administration in Configuration Manager and DEFINITY ECS switch administration software You will create a dialing and routing plan then use the information to administer DEFINITY ECS and the IP Trunk application Read and follow these instructions carefully Using the Procedures Follow these procedures for administering extension dialing between several sites for Extension Dialing This section includes the steps for administration as well as examples using three sites Between Sites that show DCS and non DCS scenarios Using the Dial Routing The worksheets are used for any two site configuration allowing off premise dialing Plan Worksheets Worksheet 1 is used to capture general information about your site Worksheets 2 8 are used for different levels of off premise dialing restrictions at the remote site as listed in the following table Off Premise Dialing at Remote Site Worksheet 2 No off premise dialing at remote site Worksheet 3 any exchange Same Area Code Worksheet 4 only exchange X Worksheet 5 any area code Same Country Worksheet 6 only area code X Worksheet 7 any different country Worksheet 8 only different country X Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 419 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration For any two site configuration you would fill out Worksheet 1 and one of the worksheets 2 8 Use the worksheets as follows
517. s a D channel to convey signaling information for B channels that are located on DS1 facilities other than the one containing the D channel With NFAS a signaling group does not necessarily correspond to a single DS1 interface The Signaling Group screen is administered to show how B channels and D channels are related The Signaling Group screen also supports Facility Associated Signaling FAS The screen establishes the fact that a D channel carries signaling information for all B channels on its associated DS1 interface and for no others In addition the screen administers Temporary Signaling Connections TSC used in support of DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel includes ISDN PRI D channel DCS AUDIX Screen for ISDN PRI Non Facility Associated Signaling Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 2 Group Type isdn pri Associated Signaling n Max number of NCA TSC 0 Primary D Channel Max number of CA TSC 0 Secondary D Channel Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection X Mobility Wireless Type NONE Supplementary Service Protocol a Trunk Brd Interface ID Trunk Brd Interface ID alas 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CUOWDAHDUPWNHE ray Screen for ISDN PRI Facility Associated Signaling Page 1 of 5 SIGNALING GROUP Group Number 2 Group Type isdn pri Associated Signaling y Max number of NCA TSC 0 Primary D Channel Max number of CA TSC 0 Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Cha
518. s best to them The OSI layers are 1 Physical transmission medium 2 Datalink link level signaling and error control 3 Network computer to computer signaling routing etc 4 Transport delivery end to end error control and flow control 5 Session dialog management 6 Presentation data format compatibility and 7 Application file transfer services virtual terminals etc OSI See Open System Interconnect OSI Model out of service state DOS The condition or state of an MMCX server that is operating but not ready to accept or place calls PACCON Packet controller packet A group of bits including a message element which is the data and a control information element IE which is the header used in packet switching and transmitted as a discrete unit In each packet the message element and control IE are arranged in a specified format packet bus A wide bandwidth bus that transmits packets packet switching A data transmission technique whereby user information is segmented and routed in discrete data envelopes called packets each with its own appended control information for routing sequencing and error checking The packets can travel to their destinations by varying routes For data transmissions a packet switched network can make more efficient use of available bandwidth than a circuit switched network because it does not dedicate a channel for the duration of a call Instead packets are queu
519. s for broadcast addresses y gt Enter values Field Type Port Link Name Network uses 1 s for broadcast addresses Conditions Comments This indicates the data module type for this link Ethernet connections must be assigned to port 17 on the C LAN circuit pack The link number must be in the range 1 33 for G3r not previously assigned on this switch This field is information only it appears in lists generated by the list data module command Leave the default y if the private network contains only DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 79 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on the node 1 switch Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remo
520. s on your network that use the older method of putting 0 s instead of 1 s in the host portion of a broadcast address Administration for Network Connectivity x CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Issue Status Preface ppp Data Module screen The ppp Data Module screen is changed in Release 8 add data module 1994 Page 1 of x DATA MODULE Data Extension 1994 Name _ppp on link 4 to node 4 BCC 2 Type ppp cos 1 Port 01c 1502 COR 1 Link 4 TN 1 Enable Link n Node Name pppl4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0_ Establish Connection y DESTINATION Digits 7241991 Node Name ppp41 _ _ _ _ _ _ CHAP n The following fields have been added to the ppp Data Module screen e Subnet Mask The Mask field enables you to specify a subnetwork for the IP address of this node P routing and the IP Route screen add ip route next Page 1 of 1 IP ROUTING Route Number 3 Destination Node Gateway C LAN Board Metric The following fields have been added to the IP Routing screen e Route Type display only For the display change and list IP Route commands a display only field Route Type indicates whether this IP route is a host or network route Whether an IP route is a host or network route is determined by the Destination Node IP address and the subnet mask associated with that address Administration for Network Connectivity 555 23
521. s one Erlang and the maximum capacity of a group of trunks is equal to the number of trunks in Erlangs For example the maximum capacity of a group of 30 trunks is 30 Erlangs If during a given hour the utilization of the trunk group was 10 Erlangs on average 10 trunks were busy This could have happened for 10 one hour calls unlikely or 600 one minute calls or any combination of calls and durations that result in 36 000 call seconds Another measure of traffic intensity is the CCS or hundred century call seconds per hour Since one Erlang is equal to 3600 call seconds per hour one Erlang is equal to 36 CCS per hour Erlang B The probability distribution used to estimate the number of trunks needed to carry a given amount of traffic for a loss system It assumes that when a call arriving at random finds all trunks busy it vanishes and doesn t return lost calls cleared Erlang C The probability distribution used to estimate the number of trunks needed to carry a given amount of traffic for a delay system It assumes that all calls will wait indefinitely to get through Processor performance The number of thousands busy hour calls KBHC can be estimated as a function of the processor occupancy estimate POE and the time per call T in milliseconds as follows KBHC lt 36 POE T The following table gives the estimated BHC capacity for the G3r and G3si models given various values of POE and T G3r G3s
522. s should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway This number must match the Destination Port number on the node 3 Processor Channel screen 20f3 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Field Conditions Comments Destination Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name Node entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections 1t must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen Destination A value of 0 allows any available interface channel on the Port destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number for this connection on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 Session Local For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and Session vice versa Remote Mach ID Leave blank for gateway applications 3 of 3 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555
523. s well as voice mail Features Not Supported The following capabilities are not supported via mode code e Most DCS feature transparency e Centralized voice mail for a tandem switch does not have a direct connection to the hub switch Transfer into voice mail Administration for Network Connectivity 396 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code B Private Networking Setting Up Centralized Voice Mail Via Mode Code The following step describe how to set up DEFINITY switches to support centralized voice mail For information on setting up Merlin Legend Merlin Magix see Merlin Magix Integrated Systems Network Reference 555 715 114 For information on setting up INTUITY Messaging Solutions see INTUITY Messaging Solutions Integration with System 75 Generic 1 and 3 and R5 6 Begin 4 Enter change system parameters customer options on the command line of your system administration screen On page 3 verify fields as follows ISDN PRI field is y Mode Code for Centralized Voice Mail field is y Mode Code Interface field is y UDP field is y On the hub switch enter add trunk group xxxx on the command line of your system administration screen where XXXX is the number of the ISDN PRI trunk group connecting the hub with the remote switch On page 1 verify fields as follows Group Type field is ISDN Service Type field is TIE On page 2 verify fields
524. s y Adjunct Supervision field is y Distinctive Audible Alert field is n Switchhook Flash field is y LWC Activation field is y 23 For each remote DEFINITY node enter change coverage remote on the command line 24 Administer or verify the following End 01 contains the extension of the voice mail hunt group Administration for Network Connectiv 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 ity CID 77730 399 Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols B Private Networking Japan TTC Q931 a Private Networking Protocols The Telecommunications Technology Committee TTC of Japan defines national standards that are to be used in domestic public and private network facilities The TTC typically modify other international standards as defined by ITU T for use in Japan with additional national protocols to enhance operation for their customers Overview The TTC has defined a family of Q931 a private networking protocols that allows for a level of feature transparency between different switches within a single vendor or multi vendor private network DEFINITY ECS provides connectivity into the Japanese private networking environment via two methods e CAS Channel Associated Signaling first developed in DEFINITY ECS R7 for the Japan market See the description of TN2242 Japan 2Mbit Trunk in DEFINITY ECS R8 System Description 555 233 200 e ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network PRI Primary Rate Interface
525. sc gateway Page ISDN TSC GATEWAY CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Sig Adm d NCA Processor Appli Group TSC Index Channel cation Group TSC Index Channel cation T25 dcs 17 elo 16 des 18 Sah Soe audix 19 a 20 a 1 Routing Patterns Pattern 102 display route pattern 102 Pattern Number 102 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 0 3 user user user user user user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 1 314 Request Format both ept none rest none rest none rest none rest none rest none 555555 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 217 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Pattern 103 add route pattern 103 Pattern Number 103 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 0 3 user user user user user user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 1 3 4 Request Format y as needed both ept n rest n rest n rest n rest n y y y y y y rest y y y y y y y y y y y y Pattern 104 display route pattern 104 Pattern Number 104 Grp FRL NPA Pfx Hop Toll No Del Inserted IXC Mrk Lmt List Digits Digits 0 3 user user user user user user BCC VALUE TSC CA TSC ITC BCIE Service Feature Numbering LAR 1 3 4 Request Format both ept rest rest rest rest rest 555555 Node Names
526. sconnect Supervision In Answer Supervision Timeout Group 12 Page 2 display trunk group 12 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize When Incoming Tone DTMF ANI Connected to CO Group 12 member assignments GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Port 01c1901 01c1902 01c1903 Code TN767 TN767 TN767 Sfx Name EF E FE wink wink o 4 Networking Example Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Type CDR Reports COR 1 TN 1 TAC Trunk Signaling Type Night Service Incoming Destination Busy Threshold Auth Code Trunk Flash Incoming Rotary Timeout sec Incoming Dial Type Disconnect Timing msec Digits Sig Bit Inversion STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss Synchronization y Out n async Duplex Receive Answer Supervision y Page 2 of 10 Measured none Internal Alert n Data Restriction n Glare Handling none PBX ID 2 Maintenance Tests y Maintenance Busy neither end Per Call CPN Blocking Code Per Call CPN Unblocking Code TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max Total Administered Members 1 3 3 Mode Night Ans Delay 20 Type ee 20 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 211 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example Group 22 data to Switch Node 2 page1 add trunk group 22 Page 1 of 10 TRUNK GROUP Group Number 22 Gro
527. screen End Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Processor Channels 3 C LAN Administration This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on the node 1 switch Steps gt Begin gt Open Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Page 1 of X Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID ale n 0 2 n 0 21 y des 5 21 0 21 21 2 23 y gtwy tcp 32 5 23 0 23 23 31 y dcs s 3 5003 node 3 0 31 31 Sa 32 y gtwy tcp 23 s 3 6002 node 3 0 32 32 256 n 0 Note The Processor Channel number the Interface Channel number and the Local and Remote Session numbers do not need to be the same number but they should be made the same whenever possible to simplify network bookkeeping and diagnostics gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 21 X 25 connection to Switch 2 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Used for TCP IP connections only This must match the link number assigned on the x 25 data
528. sent to the transferred to party in the QSIG Call Transfer Complete message Message Sequence Tracer MST MST records facility IEs containing Manufacturer Specific Information MSI but is not yet able to decode this information VALU Call Coverage The interactions that apply to DCS call coverage apply to VALU call coverage with the exceptions listed below See Call Coverage page 326 Call Coverage Off Premises Unlike DCS QSIG VALU can handle non UDP numbers in the remote call coverage table It is not limited to route only on UDP numbers Coverage Answer Groups Same as DCS Call Coverage i e Coverage Answer Groups across nodes on a remote system are not supported Consult Consult from the remote covering user to principal user is not supported Displays When a Principal user bridges on the call its display is updated with CONFERENCE and counted for the number of parties on the call The remote covering user and calling user local and remote display is not updated with the word CONFERENCE Leave Word Calling back to Principal from Covering User Same as DCS Call Coverage not supported Go to Cover Same as DCS Call Coverage not supported Queuing UDC DDC ACD VDN Same as DCS Call Coverage QSIG Call Forwarding Diversion Same as DCS Call Coverage call forwarding has a higher priority than Call Coverage with QSIG VALU Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Is
529. ser An H 323 endpoint on an MMCX network Such users do not have log ins so the MMCX server identifies them using an extension number and an IP address ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network a digital voice and data service You get ISDN in either of two forms Primary Rate Interface PRI service has a capacity of 1 544 mbps divided into 23 or 29 B channels 23 on a North American T 1 connection 29 on a European E 1 and D channel each with a capacity of 64 kbps Basic Rate Interface BRI service has a capacity of 144 kbps divided into 2 B channels at 64 kbps each and 1 D channel at 16 kbps ISDN trunk A trunk administered for use with ISDN PRI Also called ISDN facility Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 477 LAN L LAN Glossary See local area network LAN emulation LANE A technique that lets ATM networks communicate with Ethernet LAN cards ATM service is not widely available at the desktop and ATM interface cards are expensive so ATM networks usually emulate LANs when communicating with user terminals Typically a LAN emulation configuration server LECS keeps track of the relationships between ATM network addresses and IP addresses on the LAN Each ATM card is then treated as a client of a LAN emulation server which connects the ATM cards to the LAN cards on the user terminals LAP D See link access procedure on the D channel LAPD LECS
530. set to 0 The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers It is allowed but not recommended to use the same Session numbers for two or more connections This field is not used for CMS Processor Channel 21 ethernet connection to Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y dcs indicates that this connection will carry DCS data Node 5 will be the client on this session Set node 1 on Switch 1 to server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 5 data module screen A value of 0 allows any available interface channel to be used for this connection The Destination Port number on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen must also be set to O Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This number must match the Interface Channel number assigned on the Switch 1 Processor Channel screen 20f3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 91 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet
531. si Processor nterface software defined connections Interface Processor channels channels channels channels 1 1 1 1 2 5000 5000 2 E 5001 5001 E a 21 A gt 5003 x any 7 384 64500 64500 256 Link 1 Link 3 e hardware connections UN331B H T Processor TN790B 1 fP t Processor bus i 1 1 gt Processor bus 5 Voice data Pktint Network DS1 NetPkt TN1655 control TN767 ppp data TN794 UN332B A n KEAT E ans We E dahon dared a node 1 node 2 Ext 2010 Ext 3020 loc 100115 loc 1a1206 192 168 10 31 192 168 10 32 Packet bus Packet bus cydfecta EWS 052099 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 61 Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R 8si 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 1 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available
532. sic system troubleshooting information and routine maintenance procedures This document is availabe in languages other than English and can be ordered from the BCS Publications Catalog web site DEFINITY ECS and Guestworks Release 8 2 Hospitality Operations 555 233 755 Issue 1 Provides step by step procedures for using the features available for the lodging and health industries to improve their property management and to provide assistance to their employees and clients Includes detailed descriptions of reports DEFINITY ECS Application Notes for Type Approval Describes specific hardware and administration required to operate the DEFINITY ECS in countries outside the United States Available on the DEFINITY ECS Release 8 2 Library CD only 464 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Glossary A AAR See Automatic Alternate Routing AAR Abbreviated Dialing AD A feature that allows callers to place calls by dialing just one or two digits AD See Abbreviated Dialing AD ADU See Asynchronous data unit ADU adjunct A processor that does one or more tasks for another processor and that is optional in the configuration of the other processor Intuity AUDIX and CentreVu CMS are considered adjuncts to the DEFINITY ECS Administration Without Hardware AWOH A feature that allows administration of ports without associated terminals or other hardware
533. signment screen change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of 4 PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Interface Remote Chan Link Chan Priority Proc Chan Machine ID T TI 12 13 59 Release 6 Interface Links screen change communications interface links Page 1 of 1 INTERFACE LINKS Est PI Destination DTE Link Enable Conn Ext Digits Brd DCE Identification 2992_ 1a1004 1992 dce Link 1 eia Connected to Clocking Administration for Network Connectivity 226 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 2 Administration 4 Networking Example Hunt Group page 1 add hunt group 99 HUNT GROUP Group Number 99 ACD Group Name Intuity 1 Queue Group Extension 2111 Vector Group Type ucd mia Coverage Path TN 1 Night Service Destination COR 1 MM Early Answer Security Code ISDN Caller Display page 2 add hunt group 1 Page 2 of 10 HUNT GROUP Message Center rem audix AUDIX Extension 1111 Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX n LWC Reception none Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 227 Switch Node 3 Administration 4 Networking Example Switch Node 3 Administration This section displays the filled in screens for the administration of Switch Node 3 DS1 Circuit Packs add dsl lal1l Location Bit Rate Line Compensation Signaling Mode Interface Companding Idle Code
534. sing or Networking Administration TCP IP Administration TCP IP Interface Host Name called UNIX Machine Name on R4 4 This information may already be administered If not enter the UNIX name for this machine The name is case sensitive IP Address IP address administered on the Lucent Intuity system Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address eeE_0 denaudix 192 168 1 125 192 168 1 224 192 168 1 97 96 CID 77730 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Worksheet B LAN Data for the Lucent Intuity System Complete the information on this worksheet to administer the Lucent INTUITY system for integration with the switch Field Recommended Your Entry Lucent INTUITY System Switch Interface Administration Window Extension Length 4 Use the extension length from the switch dial plan Host Switch Number 1 Use 1 if the integration supports only one DEFINITY switch If more than one DEFINITY system will be supported use the number administered on the Local Node Number field in the host switch dial plan AUDIX Number 1 The number assigned to the Lucent INTUITY system on the DEFINITY ECS For r model switches a number from 1 to 8 for csi and si 1 This must match the Machine ID field of the Processor Channels screen Switch Number 1 Enter the node number of the s
535. sion Table All Node Number Routing All Station COR Trunk Group Forms Set the Group Type field to access aplt tandem tie or isdn and the Service Type field to access tie or tandem Complete COR digit treatment and common type fields for tie trunk groups associated with a private network 348 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking Detailed description Interactions Private networks can include e Common control switching arrangement CCSA e Distributed Communications Systems DCS and Enhanced DCS EDCS e Electronic tandem network ETN e Enhanced private switched communications service EPSCS Tandem tie trunk network TTTN e Italian Traslatore Giunzione Uscente Entrante Interno TGU TGE TGI trunks Unless prohibited by the COR all incoming private network trunks except CCSA can access outgoing trunks without attendant or terminal user assistance All incoming CCSA calls must route to an attendant or a terminal user When off network calling is part of the CCSA and EPSCS long distance calls route as far as possible over these networks before terminating on the public network Thus charges for toll calls are reduced The COR you administer to individual system users determines whether access to this capability is allowed or denied In Italy TGU TGE TGI trunks provide private network access b
536. ss TCP Number Host Name Port Number Host Name Port 1 192 168 1 124 5002 No A 2 Use Worksheet B to enter the correct values in this window 3 Press F3 Save 4 Continue with the next procedure Administer Extension Numbers Channels and Services Administer Extension To associate the switch voice ports you must do the following on the Intuity system Numbers Channels f and Services e Map channels to switch extensions e Map services to channels e Assign services to called numbers For more information on this see Administering Channels in the Lucent INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 documentation Continue with the next procedure Administer Subscribers Administration for Network Connectivity 94 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi Administer Subscribers 3 C LAN Administration Subscribers must be administered on the Intuity system For more information on this see the Lucent INTUITY Messaging Solutions Release 5 documentation The following screens show examples of subscriber screens on the Intuity system Jasa subscriber 3066 SUBSCRIBER Name Jean Collins Secondary Ext Account Code o Page 1 of 2N Locked n Extension 150 Password COS class00 Miscellaneous Switch Number 1 Covering Extension 161 Community ID 1 Broadcast Mailbox n A aaa subscriber 3066
537. ssue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 417 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration IP Trunk Administration This section tells you how to administer the IP Trunk service after all installation procedures are complete Prerequisites Before you can administer an IP trunk group you must have one or more TN802 circuit packs or TN802B set to IP Trunk mode and a right to use license for the number of ports you need Refer to DEFINITY ECS System Description for information on the TN802 circuit pack The TN802 circuit pack contains the Windows NT operating system The IP trunk software that sends and receives calls over a TCP IP network resides on this NT server You need to use a Windows NT application called Configuration Manager and your DEFINITY ECS switch administration software to administer IP trunk groups In order to complete the administration for IP trunks the following must also be in place e The TN802 circuit pack must be connected to an Ethernet 10 100 BaseT local area network e In order to log on to the NT server on the TN802 circuit pack a monitor keyboard and mouse must be connected directly to the circuit pack Alternatively you can access the NT server remotely via a dialup connection through a modem connected to the circuit pack Finally remember that IP trunk provides service between specific sites the switch at each site must have the DEFINITY Internet Protocol Trunk IP trunk app
538. stem B Private Networking A call to the principal redirects to the remote coverage point While the remote coverage point is ringing the principal answers the call In this case the call is not cut through to the coverage point Instead ringing and ringback is removed from the coverage point and the call is cut through to the principal Call Forwarding DCS Call Forwarding allows all calls to an extension to be forwarded to a selected extension in the DCS network or to an external off premises number If the Call Forwarding and DCS Call Forwarding are both active and if a call is forwarded between extensions on the same node the Call Forwarding coverage path is used If the nodes are different the DCS Call Forwarding coverage path is used Voice terminal users in the DCS can activate deactivate this feature with a dial access code or with a Call Forwarding button Note Calls can be forwarded to a Vector Directory Number VDN anywhere in the DCS network An attendant cannot activate deactivate Call Forwarding for a VDN Call Waiting DCS Call Waiting allows calls from one node to busy single line voice terminals at another node to wait until the called party is available to accept the call With DCS Call Waiting a single line voice terminal user by knowing a call is waiting can quickly process calls from locations within the DCS DCS Call Waiting functions the same as normal Call Waiting DCS Call Waiting includes the follow
539. stration task sections list the steps for completing a screen or form and show a representation of the filled in screen Many of the field values shown in the screens are examples you will use different values that are appropriate for your system Information about the fields and their values when and why different values are used is given for each screen More detailed information about the screens and their fields is given in Appendix A Supported Switches and Adjuncts Csi model switches cannot have X 25 connections New R8si and R8r switches cannot have new X 25 connections but pre R7 switches with X 25 connections can be upgraded to R8 and keep the X 25 connections The vs model of DEFINITY ECS cannot be upgraded to R8 R6 3 is the last release supported for the vs model However pre R7 releases of the vs model will be supported via X 25 and ISDN not TCP IP in customer networks that include R8 versions of the csi si and r models The call management system CMS and Intuity adjuncts can be connected to the DEFINITY ECS R7csi with an ethernet connection and to the si and r models with either an ethernet or Bx 25 connection Procedures for administering these connections are not covered in this book They are documented in CentreVu CMS Switch Connections and Administration 585 215 876 for CMS and in Intuity Messaging Solutions LAN Integration with DEFINITY ECS 585 313 602 for Intuity CMS administration is covered in
540. sue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 385 QSIG B Private Networking QSIG Centralized Attendant Service CAS The calls that cover from a QSIG CAS branch to main are not treated as QSIG VALU Coverage calls This is because calls covered to attd administered as a coverage point on a Coverage Path form do not utilize Remote Call Coverage table and QSIG VALU Call Coverage is supported only for coverage points associated with Remote Call Coverage table The implication of this is that the attendant on the main will lose QSIG VALU Call Coverage display information and QSIG Path Replacement will not be invoked after the call is answered by the covering attendant Coverage of Calls Redirected Off Net CCRON If both QSIG VALU coverage is enabled and CCRON is enable the QSIG VALU coverage will have a higher precedence then CCRON Privacy Manual Exclusion With Call Coverage feature when the principal user bridges onto a call that went to coverage and has been answered at the coverage point the user is not dropped when Privacy Manual Exclusion is activated by the Covering user With QSIG VALU Coverage if the Principal bridges on the call after the remote covering user has answered the call then the remote coverage user stays bridged until the call clears or the covering user goes on hook Simulated Bridge Appearance SBA With QSIG VALU maintaining SBA for Principal user will be based on the administration of the field Mainta
541. switch administrator at the remote site to verify that IP trunk service 1s set up on the remote switch The connection between the MAPD circuit pack and the switch is configured Dial plan and routing is administered IP trunk service is started 2 Dial the telephone number of the remote site For example if prior to installing IP trunk you dialed 9 then 011 plus the country code followed by the telephone number then dial the number the same way to test IP trunk service If your call does not go through refer to Troubleshooting IP Trunk page 448 Setting up alerts on IP trunks Instructions Whenever something happens on IP trunks that might affect service quality Windows NT can display an alert in a popup window You can select the IP address for the alert messages and notify a computer other than the IP trunk display screen NT alerts allow you to monitor IP trunk service on one or more switches To set up alerts on the IP trunk server start at the Windows NT desktop 1 Go to NT s Control Panel 2 Double click Services 3 Select Messenger and click Start Started appears in the Status column 4 Select Alerter and click Start Started appears in the Status column 5 Click Close To specify the computers on which alerts should be received 1 Go to NT s Control Panel 2 Double click Server 3 Click Alerts The Alerts dialog box appears 440 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Iss
542. t be administered on the Node Names screen Specifies the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway for the IP interface The default gateway enables communication with nodes on sub networks that are different from the sub network of the IP interface A default gateway makes use of explicit IP routes unnecessary If left blank this node this IP interface can communicate with nodes on different sub networks only if explicit IP routes on the IP Routing screen are defined communication with nodes on the same sub network is not affected With the Gateway Address left blank you can enable communications with individual nodes on other sub networks by creating host IP routes to them Or you can enable communication with all nodes on a different sub network by defining a network IP route to that sub network You can define a combination of network and host IP routes to enable communications to all nodes on some sub networks and individual nodes on other sub networks Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 249 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Net Rgn Specifies the network region assigned to the IP interface Valid Values Usage 1 10 The Region field on the IP Interfaces screen Default is 1 allows you to set up segregated groups of MedPro resources This feature can be used in a variety of ways For example you could use
543. t generated by the list data module command Network uses Leave the default y if the private network contains only 1 s for DEFINITY switches and adjuncts Set to n only if the network broadcast includes non DEFINITY switches that use the 0 s method of addresses forming broadcast addresses See Appendix A Data Module type ethernet for more information about this field gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 179 Configuration 5B R8cs lt ethernet gt R8si i lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ppp Data Module to C LAN a This task administers a ppp data module on Switch 1 for the ppp connection from the C LAN b circuit pack to the C LAN a circuit pack Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter ad da 2378 add data module 2378 Data Extension Type Port Link Enable Link Node Name Subnet Mask DATA MODULE 2378 Name _ppp on link 21 to clan a BCC 2 ppp cos 1 01c0815 COR 1 21 TN 1 a node 1b 255 255 255 0 Page 1 of x Establish Connection n DESTINATION Digits Node Name node la CHAP n gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Type This indicates the data module type for this link Port In this example the C LAN b circuit pack is in slot 01c08 the ppp connection is through port
544. t only within the local subnet subnet mask A bit pattern that lets a network administrator define subnets using the host machine portion of the IP Internet Protocol address The subnet mask has binary ones in positions corresponding to the network and subnet parts of the address and zeros in the remaining host address positions During IP address resolution zero fields in the mask hide corresponding host address fields in the address causing the router to ignore them The router resolves only the networking part of the address leaving the host part for the local subnet to resolve This increases speed and makes multicasting more efficient Subnet masks are usually written in the decimal notation used for IP addresses A 4 wire 2 twisted pair digital communications link with a capacity of 1 544 Mbps 1 544 000 bits per second A T 1 provides 24 separate 64 Kbps channels These can support up to 23 concurrent voice and data channels plus a separate channel for signalling and framing synchronization T 1 is the standard for data communications in North America and Japan Also spelled T1 See E 1 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 T carrier Glossary T carrier A hierarchy of digital voice and data transmission systems used in North America and based on multiples of the capacity of the T 1 line tandem switch A switch within an electronic tandem network ETN that
545. t pack For r models install TN799B C LAN The C LAN circuit pack is required for TCP IP ppp and ethernet connections In all cases the R8 software will run without the TN799B C LAN circuit pack all other new circuit packs are required for R8 5 Install the R8 1 Software on all switches upgrading to R8 1 6 Copy translations from translations flash card or tape G3r Use the working flash card if step 3 was performed NEW and UPGRADE Systems the following items apply to both new systems and systems being upgraded to R8 from a previous release For more information about the checklist item refer to the appropriate installation book in References page 56 7 Established physical connections at each node 8 Set software version on the System Parameters Customer Options form General Administration for new installations the following translations should already be in place for existing systems and usually should not need to be changed for an upgrade to R8 unless new nodes are being added to the network Refer to appendix A for more information about these tasks 9 DS1 circuit packs administered 2 of 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 55 Overview 3 C LAN Administration Y Checklist Item 10 Signaling group administered page 1 Trunk board address and Interface ID Page 2 Administered NCA TSC assignment 11 Synchronization pl
546. t the far end of this connection This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 142 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 3 Task Assign Processor Channels This task associates data links hardware with processor channels software on Switch 3 Steps Begin gt Open the Processor Channel Assignment form enter ch com p change communications interface processor channels Page 1 of X PROCESSOR CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID ale n 0 2 n 0 31 y des c 1 0 node 1 5003 31 13 i 32 y dcs c 1 0 node 1 6002 32 4 PA 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 31 ppp connection to Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node Destination Port Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the client for this session Set node 1 to server s This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen A value o
547. tain CORs between various systems correspond with each other those CORs should be administered accordingly On outgoing calls the display of called party information may be delayed a few seconds until the required information arrives from the remote node The called party information is displayed only if both nodes are Generic 1 or System 75 DCS tie trunks between nodes must be administered with the Outgoing Display enabled This enables the called party s name to be displayed at the calling attendant s display An Automatic Callback request is canceled automatically if the called party does not become available within 40 minutes or if the calling party does not hang up within six seconds after activating Automatic Callback Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 323 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking DCS Over ISDN PRI e The gateway node serves as the terminating node to the D channel DCS network D channel _ as well as the terminating node to the traditional DCS network considerations A PBX serving as an ISDN DCS Gateway node introduces some interesting situations when administering processor channels in an associated traditional DCS PBX In a traditional DCS network BX 25 processor channel links Remote Port in the Processor Channel Assignments form refers to the processor channel of the destination PBX In an Integrated DCS network Remote Pr
548. tation Ensure that Page 2 of the screen has the following field entry e MWI Served User Type qsig mwi 4 Served user switch only On the Hunt Group screen set the following fields for the AUDIX hunt group e Message Center qsig mwi Voice Mail Number the desired number e Routing Digits for example AAR ARS Access Code the desired number Digits entered in these fields should be selected so that the processing of these digits by the served user switch results in a call being redirected to the message center switch by an ISDN PRI supplementary service protocol b facility For example if the message center switch is a DEFINITY ECS the digits entered should reroute the call to the AUDIX hunt group on the message center DEFINITY ECS switch e Calling Party Number to AUDIX y End Administration for Network Connectivity 378 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG QSIG Interactions B Private Networking Call Forwarding The interactions that apply to the standard DEFINITY ECS Call Forwarding features Diversion also apply to Call Forwarding Diversion with QSIG The following are additional interactions Alternate Facilities Restriction Levels The AFRL of the original call is the AFRL used for Call Forwarding with Reroute Authorization Codes Call Forwarding with Reroute is denied to calls that require an Authorization Code Automatic Alternate Routing and Automatic Route Sele
549. tch nodes With this feature DCS features are no longer restricted to private facilities The ISDN PRI B channel is used for voice communications and the ISDN PRI D channel transports DCS control information DCS Over ISDN PRI utilizes the Message Associated User to User Information MA UUI and Temporary Signaling Connections TSC to transport certain DCS control information MA UUI allows additional user specific information to be transported along with certain ISDN call control messages Note Use this feature only over DS1 E1 or T1 circuit packs that are administered to Country Protocol Option 1 Protocol Version A even in a private network environment independent of what country the system is in Administration for Network Connectivity 320 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking How to administer DCS Over ISDN PRI D channel Form Field Signaling Group e Max number of NCA TSC e Max number of CA TSC e Trunk Group for NCA TSC e Administered NCA TSC Assignment fields e Service Feature e Inactivity Time out min ISDN TSC Gateway e All Channel Assignments Trunk Group e Used for DCS Node Number DCS ISDN PRI Signaling e NCA TSC Trunk Member Route Pattern e TSC e CA TSC Request Processor Channel e Application Assignment Feature Related System Record TSCs for CDR Parameters Note There are several differences in administration between switch
550. te ID 1 y mis s 2 5001 node 2 0 1 1 2 n 0 Sig n 0 4 n 0 12 y dcs s 2 5003 node 5 0 12 21 2 64 n 0 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Processor Channel 1 connection to CMS Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Interface Chan Set to y Enter mis for the CMS connection on Processor Channel 1 Set the Mode to s server on both switches for connections to CMS This must match the link number assigned on the node 1 data module screen For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications for example if there are two Intuity AUDIX s use 5002 for both or if there are four DEFINITY ECS s use 5003 for all four The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique The recommended values for gateway switches is 6001 6099 The interface channel number must be unique for each gateway 1 of 3 80 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Field Destination Node Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID Conditions Comments Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a
551. te Networking Automatic Callback DCS Automatic Callback allows a user at one node to make an automatic callback call to a user at another node in the DCS A DCS Automatic Callback call can be initiated from a terminal at one node to a terminal at another node in the same way as if at a local node under the following conditions Ifthe called party is at a System 85 Generic 2 or Enhanced DIMENSION PBX node the callback call can only be activated if the called node is returning busy tone or special audible ringback Ifthe called party is at a Generic 3 Generic 1 or System 75 node the callback call can be activated if the called node is returning busy tone Call Waiting ringback tone or ringback tone The calling party must disconnect within 6 seconds after hearing the confirmation tone for Automatic Callback activation Note If the calling party is on a System 85 Generic 2 or Enhanced DIMENSION PBX node and is unable to receive the callback call for example a busy single line voice terminal without Call Waiting Automatic Callback is reactivated by the calling party s node If the calling party is on a Generic 3 Generic 1 or System 75 node and is unable to receive the callback call the callback call is canceled Automatic Circuit Assurance DCS Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA allows a voice terminal user or attendant at a node to activate and deactivate ACA referral calls for the entire DCS network This transpar
552. telecommunications transmission pathway and associated equipment facility associated signaling FAS Signaling for which a D channel carries signaling only for those channels on the same physical interface FAS Facility associated signaling framing The data formatting conventions that allow a receiver to synchronize with the transmitting end of a circuit For example T 1 frames contain an 8 bit sample from each of the 24 channels on the interface 192 bits total plus a framing bit for a total of 193 bits Each framing bit marks the end of a timed sample the input at the transmission end FRL Facilities Restriction Level FX Foreign exchange Gateway 1 protocol converter 2 a node between network segments H 320 The most common standard for videoconferencing over ISDN BRI circuits H 320 compatible systems can communicate with each other even when they rely on dissimilar hardware and software H 323 A specification that sets standards for multimedia communications between LANs and telephony networks such as ISDN HDB3 See High Density Bipolar 3 Bit Substitution HDB3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 475 High Density Bipolar 3 Bit Substitution HDB3 Glossary High Density Bipolar 3 Bit Substitution HDB3 HDB3 line coding is similar to Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS in some ways It replaces every 4 consecutive zero in a stream of
553. tem Generic or 3 a DEFINITY System Generic 2 1 a System 85 a DIMENSION PBX or a System 75 V3 The CAS main switch operates independently of the CAS branch switches Operation for CAS main switch traffic is identical to operation of a stand alone switch Each branch in a CAS network connects to the main by way of RLTs These trunks provide paths for e Sending incoming attendant seeking trunk calls at the branch to the main for processing and extending them back to the branch both parts of a call use the same trunk e Returning timed out waiting and held calls from the branch to the main e Routing calls from the branch to the main A branch can connect to only one main CAS Queues Two queues are associated with CAS calls one at the main and one at the branch If idle RLTs are available from the branch to the main RLTs are seized and CAS calls are queued at the main along with other attendant seeking calls If all RLTs are in use CAS calls to the attendant are queued at the branch in a RLT queue The length of the queue can vary from to 100 as set during administration of the RLT group CAS Backup Service Backup service sends all CAS calls to a backup extension in the branch if all RLTs are maintenance busy or out of service or if the attendant presses a backup button that is not lighted e To activate the feature and provide notification that backup service is in effect assign the backup extension to a Backup button an
554. tem performs the specified conversion into a private network number and routes the call as specified If more than one extension code matches the best match most explicit digits is used For example 1234x is chosen over 123xx if 12345 is dialed However 123xx is chosen if 12355 is dialed If no matching extension code is found the user receives intercept treatment Or if Extended Trunk Access ETA is enabled the call routes via ETA To administer assign each UDP code e Toa private network location code RNX or node number The RNX is equivalent to an office code of a central office in a public network This RNX determines how a UDP call is routed e Assign each UDP code as either local or remote to the switch To understand the function of a UDP review the following example Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 351 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking A given station is called using the same 5 digit extension regardless of where in the ETN the call originates Three switches are included in the example Each has been assigned a list of RNX and UDP codes See Figure 7 SWITCH RNX UDP CODE A 224 41 C 223 51 c 223 52 B 222 60 B 222 61 Figure 7 UDP Example 1764905 CJL 062296 1 Switch A 4 Extension 41000 rosie for extensions is 5 Extension 61234 RNX 224 6 Extension 60123 2 Switch B 7 Extension 51234 Dial Plan for
555. teps for each terminating entry line or dialed string specified in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets and or the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites Click OK to save your changes and close Configuration Manager The Dial Routing Plan on the remote switch must be administered for the Originating and Terminating Routing Info in a similar manner The IP Trunk software is now configured without restrictions on remote access Stopping IP Trunk Note Before you stop IP Trunk service you must busy out the IP trunk group service on the DEFINITY ECS then after you restart IP Trunk service release the IP trunk group To stop IP Trunk service 1 2 3 Busy out the IP trunk group on DEFINITY ECS Open the Windows NT Control Panel Double click Services The Services dialog box appears In the Service column select IP Trunk Service Click Stop Started disappears and the Status column does not show an entry beside Internet Telephony Server Click Close Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 431 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Starting IP Trunk service Administration Use this procedure only if you have manually stopped your IP Trunk service To start IP Trunk service 1 Log onto the NT server 2 Open the Windows NT Control Panel 3 Double click Services The Services dialog box appears 4 In the Service column select IP Trunk Servi
556. ter port number associated with the DS1 Interface circuit pack port used for secondary D channel signaling Displays when the Associated Signaling field is n indicates NFAS The port number assigns the secondary D channel in the Signaling Group For 24 channel facilities the 24th port is assigned as the D channel For 32 channel facilities the 16th port is assigned as the D channel Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 G3r First and second characters are the cabinet number 01 through 03 G3si A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number 16 or 24 Sixth and seventh characters are the port blank Max Number of NCA TSC The maximum number of simultaneous Non Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connections NCA TSCs that can exist in the Signaling Group This number includes all NCA TSCs that are administered on this screen and those NCA TSCs that tandem through the switch in route to another switch in the network Valid entries Usage 0 to 256 Max number of CA TSC The maximum number of simultaneous Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connections CA TSCs that can exist in the Signaling Group Typically the number of ISDN PRI trunk group members controlled by the Signaling Group Valid entries Usage 0 to 400 Trunk Group For NCA TSC The ISDN PRI trunk group number whose incoming call handling table will be used to handle incoming NCA TSCs through t
557. ter rel sig 3 End Administration for Network Connectivity 48 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 H 323 Trunk Administration Task 7 Specify codecs 2 H 323 Trunks This task modifies the IP Media Parameters screen to specify the type of codecs available on this switch and the preferred order of use of the different types Task 7 Steps Begin gt Open the IP Parameters screen enter ch ip p change ip parameters Audio Codec Preferences 1 G 711MU 2 G 723 6 3K 3 G 729A 4 UDP Port Range Min 2048 Max 65535 n Page 1 of 1 IP Media Parameters gt Enter values Field Audio Codec Preferences UDP Port Range gt Submit the screen End Conditions Comments Enter up to four codec types in the order of preference of use Valid types are G711A G711Mu G723 6 3k G723 5 3k G 729A Note The codec ordering must be the same on DEFINITY switches at both ends of an H 323 trunk connection The set of codecs listed need not be the same but the order of the listed codecs must be the same See IP Parameters page 34 for a description of the differences between codec types Enter a minimum and maximum port number to specify a block of port numbers to be used for audio connections Valid values are 1 to 65535 with Min lt Max Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 49 Troubleshooting IP Sol
558. terserver calls to the first available PRI trunk group in a list This arrangement lets you allow for trunk groups that are busy out of service or out of bandwidth Each routing plan is identified by a routing plan number in the range 1 32 RPN Routing plan number RTP Real time protocol Socket An address formed by concatenating the IP address and the port number server 1 Any system that maintains and administers files that are used by independent client applications 2 the MMCX server the computer that sets up maintains and administers MMCX network communications See dial plan table server name The name that identifies the MMCX server on your local area network You enter the server name in the boot time administration menu See server number server number The ISDN international number that uniquely identifies your MMCX server on the PBX and or the public telephone network See server name interserver routing table signaling The control information that a network uses to set up and maintain connections On hook and off hook are for instance the familiar voice telephone signals that tell the central office that you have picked up the telephone handset or hung up at the end of a call In channel signalling reserves part of the available data communication bandwidth for control information see restricted facilities Out of channel signalling schemes use a separate channel for signals so that data tr
559. that runs on one processor while drawing on data or other resources that are on a server located elsewhere MMCX client a workstation capable of making MMCX calls Such a workstation is a client of one or more MMCX servers See dial plan table CMDR Centralized Message Detail Recording Same as CDR and SMDR CMS Call Management System Administration for Network Connectivity 470 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 COR Glossary See Class of Restriction COR See Class of Service COS Circuit pack See circuit switched network Channel service unit cyclic redundancy checking CRC A method for detecting read transmit and write errors in data At the transmission end the system treats a block of data as a single binary number divides it by some specified binary number and appends the remainder called the CRC character to the data At the receiving end the system recalculates the remainder and compares the result to the CRC character If the two agree there are no errors data channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals data communications equipment DCE The equipment usually a modem data module or packet assembler disassembler on the network side of a communications link that makes the binary serial data from the source or transmitter compatible with the communications channel datagram In packet switching a packet that carries infor
560. the Inter Board Link Link The total number of timeslots assigned cannot exceed 11 Timeslots Pt0 carries PPP traffic and can have 1 9 timeslots Pt carries Pt0 Pt1 Pt2 maintenance messages and can have 1 3 timeslots Pt2 carries broadcast messages and can have 1 3 timeslots gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 139 Configuration 4 R8csi lt ISDN gt R8si Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ppp gt R8csi Switch 3 Task Assign Node Names This task assigns node names and IP addresses to each node in the network This screen is administered on Switch 3 A Node Names screen must be administered on each switch in the network The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative Note Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for switches routers and CMS starting on page 2 Steps Begin gt Open Node Names form enter ch node n gt Go to page 2 change node names Page 2 of 6 NODE NAMES Name IP Address Name IP Address default 0 0 0 0 node 1 192 168 10 101 node 3 192 168 10 103
561. the Supplementary Service Protocol field to f 4 On the Feature Related System Parameters form set the Feature Plus Ext field to the local extension used to terminate Feature Plus signaling for ISDN Feature Plus 5 On the Hunt Group form to add a centralized AUDIX set the Message Center field to fp mwi To start administration for Message Waiting Indication at the Message Center PBX 1 On the Feature Related System Parameters form set the MWI Number of Digits per AUDIX Subscriber field to the desired number 2 On the Processor Channel Assignment set the Application field to fp mwi 3 Administer the Message Waiting Indication Subscriber Number Prefixes form To start the Calling Name feature 4 On the ISDN BRI or ISDN PRI trunk group form whichever you are using set the Send Name field to y Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 355 ISDN Feature Plus B Private Networking Description ISDN Feature Plus uses a DEFINITY ECS proprietary signaling protocol The features do not function in the same way as their QSIG or DCS counterparts To use Feature Plus Phase I you need DID extensions In addition to the general Feature Plus call handling Feature Plus includes the following features e Centralized AUDIX A simple one step coverage to voice mail If voice mail is unavailable for any reason the call does not cover elsewhere e Call Diversion You can
562. the interface defined by this data module This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen y means that this switch will be responsible for the call setup Enter n when administering the data module for Switch 2 Trunk access code 899 plus extension of data module on node 2 3020 Name of the node at the far end of this connection Must be a name entered on the Node Names screen This field enables disables the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol security mechanism on this link If you enter y the system will prompt for a CHAP secret password 20f2 gt Submit the screen 176 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5B R8csi lt ppp gt R8r 2 C LANs 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign IP Interfaces The IP interface for each C LAN board on the switch must be defined on the IP Interfaces form Each DEFINITY switch in an IP network has one IP Interfaces form Steps Begin gt Open IP Interfaces form enter ch ip i change ip interfaces Page 1 of 2 IP Interfaces Inter region IP connectivity allowed n Enable Net Eth Pt Type Slot Code Sfx Node Name Subnet Mask C LAN 01c08 TN799 B node 1b eth 255 255 255 0 E 1 15 15 15 k gt Enter values Field Inter region IP Conditions Comments Enter y to allow IP endpoints phones and trunks to use co
563. the link There is one Interface Link screen per System Interface Links provide a physical interface between the system and the other nodes in a DCS ISDN a Message Server Adjunct a CMS an ISDN Gateway adjunct supports CPN BN or AUDIX Page 1 of x INTERFACE LINKS Link Enable Est Extn Type Destination DTE Conn Name Conn Number DCE Mod ils n n 2 n n 3 n n 4 n n I7 Link Indicates the interface link number that connects to another node in a DCS network a Message Server CMS ISDN Gateway or AUDIX Interface links always terminate on a port in a PGATE circuit pack for G3r or on the NetPkt or PI for X 25 circuit pack for G3si Valid entries Usage Display only field Enable The link is enabled on the Data Module screen Valid entries Usage y y link is enabled n n link is not enabled Message flow over the link is suppressed Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 293 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Est Conn Ext Type Destination Number DTE DCE Conn Mod Name If the physical link is over a DS1 interface it is possible except for ISDN signaling links for one switch to set up the entire connection see Destination below In this case the other switch will not initiate any part of the connection between the two endpoints Typically when using a DS1 interface the Enable field is y
564. the primary circuit has a failure Only displays when the Stratum field is 4 The Primary and Secondary synchronization sources DS1 or BRI trunk facilities must be on the same Port Cabinet that is PPN EPN1 or EPN3 Valid entries Usage 01 through 44 G3r First and second characters are the cabinet number 01 through 03 G3si A through E Third character is the carrier 01 through 20 Fourth and fifth characters are the slot number blank A blank entry means no external source Pages 1 X of the screen Location Name Identifies the location and name for each DS1 or BRI trunk circuit pack administered via the DS1 or BRI Trunk Circuit Pack screen Only displays if the Stratum field is 4 Valid entries Usage Display only field Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 305 Other Networking Related DEFINITY Screens A Screens Reference Slip Displays as y if the Slip Detection field has been enabled for any of the 8 ports on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen Valid entries Usage Display only field Type Contains a value for each displayed circuit pack that indicates the circuit pack s maintenance name For example UDS1 BD appears for a TN464 circuit pack and TBR1 BD appears for a TN2185 circuit pack Valid entries Usage Display only field Administration for Network Connectivity 306 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Othe
565. this IP interface The IP address is associated with the node name on the Node Names screen In this example leave the default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 which indicates no subnetting for a Class C IP address See the discussion of subnetting Subnetting page 16 in Chapter 1 and Configuration 1 R8r lt ppp gt R8si page 60 in this chapter for details about subnet masks Gateway Addr Leave blank for this configuration The only IP connection to this IP interface is node 3 on Switch 3 Node 3 is on the same subnetwork as this IP interface so no gateway is needed In general for connectivity to other sub networks enter the address of a network node that will serve as the default gateway to the other sub networks Net Rgn Enter the region number for this IP interface 20f2 Administration for Network Connectivity 152 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 1 Task Assign Link via ethernet Data Module to Ethernet This task administers an ethernet data module for the ethernet connection to node 3 The data module associates a link number with a port address extension number and node name for the C LAN port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data next Page 1 of X DATA MODULE Data Extension 2377 Name ethernet on link 2
566. tination and gateway node names and their associated IP addresses must be specified on the Node Names screen The Route Type is a display only field that appears on the screen for the display list and change ip route commands This field indicates whether the route is a host or network route It is a host route if the destination address associated with the Destination Node on the Node Names screen is the address of a single host or node It is a network route if the destination address is the address of a network not a single node An IP address for a network has the network ID in the network portion and 0 in the host portion For example 192 168 1 0 is the network address for the 192 168 1 network When a network is subnetted and you want to set up a network IP route to a subnetwork the IP address of the subnetwork is the first address in that subnetwork which has all 0 s for the host portion of the address For example the subnet mask formed by using 2 bits of the host portion of a Class C address is 255 255 255 192 1100000 192 For the 192 168 1 network this subnet mask creates 2 usable subnetworks whose IP addresses are 192 168 1 64 0100000 64 and 192 168 1 128 1000000 128 with 62 usable host addresses in each subnetwork If you wanted the local C LAN node to be able to communicate with the nodes on the 192 168 1 64 subnetwork and not with others you could do the following 1 Leave blank the Gateway Address field
567. ting Entry dialog box you enter information that routes the incoming call to a terminating location You need to enter information that allows the IP Trunk to route calls based on dialed digits or on the line port that a call arrives on Note Itis not possible to mix dialing strategies in the IP Trunk software Once line numbers are used to route calls line numbers must be used on ALL entries in a routing table Routing information entered will be based on information that has been entered on the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or on information collected based on the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites Routing based on Dialed String If routing will be based on dialed string enter any in the Line Number field then enter the information from the worksheets or a unique identifier for an extension range from the Procedures for Extension Dialing Routing based on Line Numbers If routing will be based on line numbers that are dedicated to a specific location you need to make sure that the same line number is used on both the originating and destination switches This is done by prepending a string of digits unique to a line and associating it with that line number at both the originating and terminating IP Trunks This code will be discarded at the terminating end Administration for Network Connectivity 430 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administra
568. tion For example the code numbers 01 02 were prepended to the dialed string in the originating switch For each line number the code number is entered in the Search Digits field as in the display above as a unique digit string associated with the line number Since the code number is not intended to be routed to the DEFINITY to complete the call none is entered in the Replace Digits filed to prevent digit replacement Remember the digits prepended at the originating end and searched for at the terminating end must be the same Note Any digits searched for must also be replaced if they are used to complete 10 11 12 the routing of a call If digit substitution will be needed it may be necessary to put a digit string in the Search Digits field and substitute those with new digits in the Replace Digits field For Entry Type enter accept to allow incoming calls In the Search Digits field type the digits entered in the Terminating Search string box for this site in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or follow the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites In the Replace Digits field type the digits entered in the Terminating Replace string box for this site in the Dial Routing Plan Worksheets or follow the Procedures for Extension Dialing Between Sites Click OK The Add Terminating Entry dialog box closes and the Dial Routing Plan property page appears showing the information you entered Repeat the above s
569. tion Manager to route outgoing and incoming calls appropriately 424 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 IP Trunk Administration F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Backing up configuration manager Before you begin Instructions Restoring IP trunk Before you start Instructions Lucent recommends you perform a backup to the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA flash disk whenever you make a change in the configuration manager Keep the flash disk in a safe place so you can use the backup information if your MAPD circuit pack fails or if you want to restore to a previous known state Be sure your backup PCMCIA flash disk is inserted in the MAPD circuit pack To perform a backup begin at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the IP Trunk Backup Restore icon The IP Trunk Backup Restore Utility screen appears 2 In the IP Trunk Backup Restore Utility dialog screen click Files Backup The IP trunk Backup screen appears o In the IP Trunk Backup screen click on the BACKUP button 4 Remove the flash disk and store in a safe place 1 Remove the defective MAPD circuit pack from the switch 2 Install the replacement MAPD circuit pack in the switch 3 Insert the backup PCMCIA flash disk into the MAPD circuit pack To perform a restore begin at the Windows NT desktop 1 Double click the IP Trunk Backup Restore icon The IP Tru
570. tion for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 111 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Field Conditions Comments Destination Port A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 Session Local For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote Session Remote switch and vice versa Mach ID Leave blank for gtwy tcp 4of4 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 112 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 3 R8si lt x 25 gt R8r Gateway 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R si Switch 2 Task Assign Link via procr intf Data Module to Switch 1 This task administers a processor interface data module for the x 25 connection to node 1 The data module associates a link number with a physical channel number and extension number for the PI port used for this connection Steps Begin gt Open Data Module form enter a da n add data module next Page 1 of 1 DATA MODULE Data Extension 4121 Name _x 25 on link 2 to node 1 Type procr intf cos 1 Maintenance Extension 4191 Physical Channel 02 COR 1 Destination Number
571. tions This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen Note that 5003 can be used for the connections to both Switch 2 and 3 because they are on different links Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name entered on the Node Names screen For ppp connections it must match the Destination Node Name entered on the ppp Data Module screen A value of O allows any available interface channel on the destination node to be used for this connection The Interface Channel number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen must also be set to 0 2of3 Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 155 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Field Conditions Comments Session Local For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the Session Remote E remote switch and vice versa Mach ID Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch 3of3 gt Submit the screen End Administration for Network Connectivity 156 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Configuration 5A R8csi lt ppp gt R8r one C LAN 3 C LAN Administration lt ethernet gt R8si Switch 2 Task Enable Bus Bridge Connectivity This task enables the bus bridge functionalit
572. ttendant Calling of Inward Restricted Stations Attendant calling of inward restricted stations for QSIG CAS functions as for RLT CAS That is a user who is inward restricted cannot receive an attendant originated or extended call unless that user has field Restriction Override on the COR form set to attd Attendant Conference By using the attendant split swap feature it is possible for the attendant to conference join the attendant calling party and extended party together in conference If the attendant drops out of the conference leaving just the calling party and extended party path replacement is not attempted Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 387 QSIG B Private Networking Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access Attendant control of trunk group access for QSIG CAS functions as for RLT CAS Attendant Crisis Alert Attendant crisis alert for QSIG CAS functions as for RLT CAS Attendant Direct Extension Selection With Busy Lamp standard and enhanced For QSIG CAS the DXS allows attendants to use the DXS for monitoring and placing calls to users on the main PBX and for placing calls to users on a branch PBX only when UDP is used Attendant Group and Tenant Partitioning Attendant Group and Tenant Partitioning are local features that do not require QSIG signaling on the main Attendant Group and Tenant Partitioning do not function on a CAS branch You can a
573. tween the local DEFINITY system and the IP Softphones H 323 trunk connected remote DEFINITY systems Socket A software data structure associated with a connection between the C LAN board and an endpoint Grade of Service GOS If the call load offered to a system can exceed its maximum capacity there is a probability that some calls will be blocked The GOS is a specification of the probability that one or more calls will be blocked The probability is expressed in the form P0 0X For example a GOS of PO1 specifies that in the long run calls will be block 1 of the time P0001 specifies that calls will be blocked 1 100th of 1 of the time Full Availability The capacity is sized to the carried load Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 409 D Capacities and Performance Erlang The Erlang is a unit of measure of the intensity of telephone traffic It measures the average utilization of a set of system resources during a given time period For example if a server trunk is busy for 30 seconds over a measurement period of 2 minutes the traffic intensity for that measurement period is 0 25 30sec 120sec Erlangs An intensity of one Erlang represents the full utilization of one call server or an average of 1 ntn utilization of n servers over the measurement time period Since the Erlang is time divided by time it is a dimensionless unit The maximum capacity of one trunk i
574. tween the three signaling protocols An ISDN PRI DCS Gateway node provides backward compatibility to existing traditional DCS networks Integrated DCS network public network access The same as D channel DCS Network Private Network Only but the D channel of at least one ISDN PRI facility uses a public network ISDN PRI 312 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking DCS Features Once you have connected and set up your DCS network you can provide the following features across the network Alphanumeric Display for Terminals This feature allows calling name display called name display and miscellaneous identifiers to be transferred from a terminal on one node to a terminal on another node Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access allows an attendant at any node in the DCS to control an outgoing trunk group at an adjacent node in the cluster The attendant uses a remote tgs feature button on the console for this purpose To use this feature you must have a DCS Trunk Group between the local and remote switches and the trunks in that trunk group cannot insert digits on incoming calls If you need digit insertion on these trunks it should be added on the outgoing trunk based on the dialed string Note DCS Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access is not available if you ar
575. tworking Example Hunt Group page 1 add hunt group 99 Page 1 of 10 HUNT GROUP Group Number 99 ACD n Group Name Intuity 1 Queue n Group Extension 4111 Vector n Group Type ucd mia Coverage Path TN 1 Night Service Destination COR 1 MM Early Answer n Security Code ISDN Caller Display page 2 add hunt group 1 Page 2 of 10 HUNT GROUP Message Center rem audix AUDIX Extension 1111 Calling Party Number to INTUITY AUDIX n LWC Reception none Administration for Network Connectivity 240 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Intuity Translations for DCS AUDIX 4 Networking Example Intuity Translations for DCS AUDIX This screen is administered on Intuity not on the DEFINITY ECS Switch Interface Administration Switch Link Type Switch Definity Extension Length Country _United States Host Switch Number Audix Number Switch IP Address Host Name Switch IP Address Host Name TCP Port Number 192 168 200 111 11 12 13 14 15 20 CMS Administration See Centre Vu Call Management System Software Installation and Setup 585 215 866 for administration procedures for the CMS server Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 241 CMS Administration 4 Networking Example Administration for Network Connectivity 242 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 A Screens Reference This appendix gives
576. u cannot activate QSIG SS CC towards a TEG extension but QSIG CC requests can be activated towards a single member in the group Uniform Call Distribution and Direct Department Calling You cannot activate QSIG SS CC towards a uniform call distribution group or a direct department calling group extension but you can activate towards a single member in the group Vector Directory Number VDN You cannot activate SS CC towards a VDN extension AAR ARS Partitioning All QSIG MWI messages use Partition Group for routing Alternate Facilities Restriction Levels QSIG MWI messages have unrestricted COR DCP and Mode Code links to AUDIX QSIG MWI does not work with the DEFINITY AUDIX that emulates a DCP phone A Prologix that communicates with AUDIX by using mode codes cannot be a QSIG message center switch complex Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 383 QSIG B Private Networking Authorization Codes The authorization codes do not block routing because the routing of TSCs used for QSIG MWI uses FRL 7 Automatic Alternate Routing AAR AAR may be used to route the QSIG TSCs Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS may be used to route the QSIG TSCs Call Coverage Features The served user switch uses call coverage paths to route calls to users in the served user switch to the AUDIX hunt group on the Message Center switch Class of Restriction QSIG MWI messages use the default COR o
577. u have the correct dial up networking settings for the remote RAS server that you are connecting to You should be able to get these settings from the network administrator of the remote PPP RAS server Once the dial up connection is made you can ping the IP trunk To place a call 1 On the Windows Taskbar clicking Start gt Programs gt NetMeeting to start NetMeeting This path may vary depending on the configuration and operating system of your computer The NetMeeting main window appears e Microsoft NetMeeting No Connections Edit View Go Tools SpeedDial Help s 0o N E 8 a Stop Refresh Properties SpeedDial Send Mail SpeedDial a Current Call History Not in a call Not logged on az Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 447 DCS over IP Trunk Placing a test telephone call Setting up alerts on IP trunks Viewing error messages Troubleshooting IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration 2 Inthe NetMeeting main window click the Call icon located in the upper left hand corner of the tool bar The New Call dialog box appears New Call 2 xi Call Type the e mail name computer name or network address of the person you would like to call Address 5551212 z Call using H 323 Gateway S m Call properties TF Join the meeting named Cancel 3 In the Address box type the phone number you
578. ue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration 4 In the dialog box enter the NT networking computer names for the systems on which alerts should be received For example ICB189 85 ICB189 14 Note Do not specify the IP address of the system You must specify the NT networking computer name If another person is responsible for LAN administration consider making this a joint activity To set up the receiving machines 1 On each system which received alerts start the Messenger service Refer to steps 1 3 in the first procedure above To receive alerts on systems in a different domain from the IP trunk system that is generating the alerts you must use LMHOST services 1 In Windows NT go to the c winnt system32 drivers etc subdirectory 2 Locate the Imhosts sam file 3 Edit this file Add an entry row at the end of the file for each system that will receive alerts from this IP trunk application Each entry row contains the IP address and NT networking computer name of the receiving system separated by a tab character Each entry row must be followed by a hard return Y our entries might look like this 135 17 189 85 ICB189 85 135 17 189 11 ICB189 11 135 17 189 14 ICB189 14 Every machine on which alerts should be received must have an entry row in this file Save the file and copy it to Imhosts without any extension Note Most text editors such a NotePad automatically add an
579. ue Priority Calls coming to the main from a QSIG CAS branch cannot be queued by LDN Priority at the main Note that QSIG CAS does not change the ability to of LDN Queue Priority to function for calls coming directly into the main Special Application 8156 Attendant Queuing by COR Calls coming to the main from a QSIG CAS branch cannot be queued by COR Priority at the main Note that QSIG CAS does not change the ability to of Attendant Queueing by COR to function for calls coming directly into or originating at the main Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 393 QSIG B Private Networking Timed reminder and Attendant timers Attendant timers are Timed Reminder on Hold starts when an attendant puts a call on hold When this timer expires the held call alerts the attendant Return Call Timeout starts when a call is extended and then released from an attendant console If this timer expires the call is returned to the attendant Time In Queue Warning indicates the amount of time a call can wait in the attendant queue before activating an alert No Answer Timeout Calls that terminate at an attendant console ring with primary alerting until this timeout value is reached When this timeout value is reached the call rings with a secondary higher pitch Alerting notifies via secondary alerting other attendants in an attendant group of an unanswered
580. ummary The diagram is in two parts one part showing the software defined connections and the other part showing the hardware connections The diagram shows many of the parameters that are entered on the administration screens Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 57 Overview Administration tasks 3 C LAN Administration In the hardware part of the diagram the paths for voice and signaling data are shown by dashed or dotted lines The data for voice and call setup signaling usually takes a different path through the switch hardware from the path for DCS and ISDN signaling data These two types of data are distinguished in the hardware part of the diagram by the following convention A dashed line 2 indicates voice and call setup data A dotted line indicates DCS signaling data In the software part of the diagram the virtual path from processor to processor between two nodes is traced by dashed lines The path starts at a processor channel on one node through the link interface channels on each node to the processor channel on the connected node This section gives the detailed steps for administering the connections between switches For each configuration there are several tasks and each task consists of several steps All of the tasks needed to administer all the nodes in the network are included in each configuration The admini
581. unk to a non ISDN trunk or from an SSE trunk to a non Option E trunk the system acts as an outgoing gateway As an example when calls come in from the public network to the DCS network and then are transferred to another extension within the private network DEFINITY functions as an incoming gateway and rerouting occurs If a conference call is transferred rerouting will not occur Italian DCS Protocol also known as Enhanced DCS adds features to the existing DCS capabilities EDCS is used primarily in Italy EDCS adds the following features Exchanging information to provide class of restriction COR checking between switches in the EDCS network Providing call progress information for the attendant Allowing attendant intrusion between a main and a satellite Allowing a main PBX to provide DID CO intercept treatment rather than the satellite PBX Note EDCS is not compatible with DCS Over Under ISDN PRI With EDCS all nodes must use EDCS If used with ISDN PRI configure the switch as a DCS node Also DCS ISDN display enhancements are not currently available in EDCS Form Field Feature Related System Enhanced DCS Enabled Peace Apply Intercept Locally Enforce PNT to PNT Restrictions Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 319 Distributed Communications System B Private Networking ISDN X 25 gateway DEFINITY ECS can serve as an interface between
582. up Type tie CDR Reports Group Name DCS data to node 2 TG22 COR 1 TN 1 TAC Direction two way Outgoing Display n Trunk Signaling Type Dial Access y Busy Threshold 99 Night Service Queue Length 0 Incoming Destination Comm Type data Auth Code n Trunk Flash n BCC 0 TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in out wink wink Incoming Rotary Timeout sec Outgoing Dial Type tone Incoming Dial Type Wink Timer msec 300 Disconnect Timing msec Digit Treatment Digits Sig Bit Inversion Connected to Toll n STT Loss normal DTT to DCO Loss Incoming Dial Tone y Bit Rate 1200 Synchronization async Duplex Disconnect Supervision In y Out n Answer Supervision Timeout 0 Receive Answer Supervision y Group 22 Page 2 add trunk group 22 Page 2 of 10 TRUNK FEATURES ACA Assignment Measured none Internal Alert n Maintenance Tests y Data Restriction n Glare Handling none Used for DCS Suppress Outpulsing Seize When Maintenance Busy neither end Incoming Tone DTMF ANI no Per Call CPN Blocking Code Connected to CO n Per Call CPN Unblocking Code Group 22 Group member assignments TRUNK GROUP Administered Members min max 1 3 GROUP MEMBER ASSIGNMENTS Total Administered Members 3 Port Code Sfx Name Night Mode Type Ans Delay 01c1923 TN767 F 20 Administration for Network Connectivity 212 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Switch Node 1 Administration 4 Networking Example
583. uracy Organization Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document Improve the overview introduction Make it more concise Improve the table of contents O Add more step by step procedures tutorials Improve the organization O Add more troubleshooting information Add more figures O Make it less technical Add more examples O Add more better quick reference aids Add more detail O Improve the index anaana Please add details about your concern 3 What did you like most about this document 4 Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet If we may contact you concerning your comments please complete the following Name Telephone Number _ Company Organization Date Address When you have completed this form please fax to 303 538 1741 Thank you
584. ustomer network be protected from unauthorized outside access through a DEFINITY ECS That is how can a hacker be prevented from dialing into a DEFINITY ECS and getting on the customer LAN 2 How can a customer network be protected from unauthorized access by Lucent services personnel 3 How can a DEFINITY ECS be protected from unauthorized access through the customer LAN Security solutions The first and most important line of defense in any security strategy is access control Damage to the network or theft of proprietary information by hackers can be prevented by completely denying access to unauthorized users Access control can be provided by three means e network topology e network administration authentication Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 403 Network Security Issues C Security Issues Access control network topology Access control network administration Access control authentication A second line of defense can be thought of as damage control how to limit the amount of damage that can be done if someone does gain unauthorized access to the system Damage control can be provided by application restrictions Each of these control methods is described below Network topology refers to how the DEFINITY ECS network is connected to the customer s network Private network One option to restrict access is to make sure that the DE
585. ute to determine which intermediate gateway is malfunctioning For example tracert 192 20 239 1 Maintaining the performance of the IP trunk server Gateway machine error Intermediate gateway machine errors 2 of 2 Follow these guidelines to maintain optimal performance on your IP trunk server e Check that the server has at least 64 MB of RAM installed e Check that the C drive has the following virtual memory allocation e Initial Size MB 50 Maximum Size MB 750 e Check that the performance boost for the foreground application is set to None e Check that any applications that consume lots of CPU cycles and are not needed to run the server such as screen saver utilities are not running on the server e Check that CDR and or trace files are not consuming all of the disk space e Is there little or no space available on the C drive In Configuration Manager Service Logs tab check that the free disk space threshold parameter is set correctly that is to a value other than zero 444 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Configuring Microsoft NetMeeting on a PC After NetMeeting 2 0 is installed the first time you start it the Configuration Wizard prompts you to provide general information After you provide the general information you must change some audio settings Pr
586. uted to the night service destination The night service destination for a PBX needs to be on that same PBX DEFINITY supports the following night service features Hunt Group Night Service allows an attendant to assign a hunt group to night service Night Console Service allows a console to be designated as the night service destination Night Station Service allows a station to be designated as the night service destination Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS allows voice terminal users to answer attendant seeking calls Trunk Group Night Service allows an attendant or designated night service terminal user to assign one or more trunk groups to night service Non attendant handling of CAS calls Non attendant handling of CAS calls functions as for RLT CAS Outgoing Trunk Queuing Attendant seeking calls from branch to main can be queued at the outgoing branch trunk group QSIG All the existing QSIG features and services are available in QSIG CAS QSIG CAS is available in any QSIG CAS ISDN network PRI BRI and PRI ATM QSIG Call Offer Calls extended by the attendant can invoke Call Offer If a call invokes Call Offer attendant return call procedures still apply 392 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 QSIG B Private Networking Extending a Call QSIG CAS ensures that QSIG Path Replacement is attempted after split swap provided
587. utions configurations 31 IP Solutions troubleshooting 50 IP Trunk 32 AAR ARS administration 424 administration 418 alert types 442 Configuration Manager 426 confirming the number of available ports 426 DEFINITY administration procedures 421 DS1 circuit pack 421 extension dialing between sites 433 extension dialing between sites DCS configuration 436 extension dialing between sites non DCS configuration 433 maintaining performnace 444 NT administration 426 placing a test call 440 requirements 418 rerouting calls when transmission is poor 439 restoring 425 routing based on dialed string originating 428 routing based on dialed string terminating 430 routing based on line numbers originating 428 routing based on line numbers terminating 430 setting up alerts 440 troubleshooting 443 trunk group for 422 viewing error messages 442 IP Trunk mode 31 ISDN feature forms 293 ISDN Feature Plus feature 355 359 description 356 differences in Inserted Digits field 356 how to administer 355 interactions Automatic Circuit Assurance 357 Distributed Communication System DCS 357 Feature Plus Centralized AUDIX Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 357 Feature Plus Diversion 357 Feature Plus Message Waiting 357 496 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 ISDN Feature Plus feature interactions continued Feature Plus Forwarding Diversion Automatic Callbac
588. utions 2 H 323 Trunks Troubleshooting IP Solutions This section provides solutions to some commonly encountered problems with H 323 trunks and IP Softphones H 323 Trunk Problem Solving Signaling group assignments Multiple H 323 trunk groups can be assigned to a single signaling group as with standard trunk groups that use circuit switched paths However when multiple H 323 trunk groups have different attributes it is usually better to assign each H 323 trunk group to a separate signaling group An H 323 signaling group directs all incoming calls to a single trunk group regardless of how many trunk groups are assigned to that signaling group This is specified in the field Trunk Group for Channel Selection on the H 323 signaling group screen In the example shown in Figure 2 two trunk groups are assigned to the same signaling group on each of two switches A and B Trunk groups Al and B1 are set up to route calls over a private network Trunk groups A2 and B2 are set up to route calls over the public network The signaling group on switch B terminates all incoming calls on trunk group B1 as specified by the Trunk Group for Channel Selection field Calls from switch A to switch B using trunk group Al and the private NW are terminated on trunk group B1 as desired However calls from switch A to switch B using trunk group A2 and the public NW are also terminated on trunk group B1 not trunk group B2 which would be the desired
589. ve Ringing feature 317 interactions Distinctive Ringing 328 ringing patterns 317 DCS Leave Word Calling LWC feature 317 324 interactions DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer 329 DCS Multiappearance Conference Transfer feature 318 interactions DCS Leave Word Calling LWC 329 Enhanced DCS EDCS 329 Voice Terminal Display 329 DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS feature 320 call associated temporary signaling connections CA TSC 321 considerations 324 gateway nodes 322 DCS Over ISDN PRI D Channel DCS feature continued interactions Attendant Direct Extension Selection DXS with Busy Light Field 327 Call Detail Recording CDR 327 CallVisor ASAI 327 D channel backup 328 DCS AUDIX 328 Generalized Route Selection GRS 328 software defined networks SDN 328 voice terminals 328 noncall associated temporary signaling connections NCA TSC 321 DCS Trunk Group Busy Warning Indication feature 318 324 interactions Loudspeaker Paging Access 329 DCS with Rerouting feature description 318 interactions 319 decimail binary conversion 14 default gateway 22 default node 22 DEFINITY ECS configuring T1 support 421 Dial Access to Attendant feature interactions Inter PBX Attendant Service IAS 348 dial plan example 209 222 228 234 Dial Plan feature interactions Uniform Dial Plan UDP 354 direct department calling DDC QSIG Supplementary Service Call Completion 383 direct extension selection DXS buttons 342 direct
590. ve its path replaced Trunk Access Code The paths of outgoing calls made using a TAC are not replaced Voice Terminals Voice terminal displays that show trunk group name should update with new trunk group information after ANF PR occurs Calling and connected party displays are not disturbed when ANF PR takes place if the original display shows the connected party name number or both Call Forwarding Diversion When call forwarding Diversion occurs and the ANF TC feature is enabled the transit counter is set to zero ISDN Trunk Group Administration If all of the conditions are satisfied for both the Tandem Hop Limitation and ANF TC ANF TC takes precedence In situations where DEFINITY ECS is an Incoming or Outgoing Gateway either makes use of the hop count transit count information provided by the other Trunk Access Code ANF TC does not apply to TAC calls Adjunct Switch Applications Interface ASAT ASAI cannot invoke initiate QSIG CC Attendant Calling Waiting and Call Waiting Termination If you activate QSIG SS CC to a single line voice terminal the Attendant Call Waiting and Call Waiting Termination features are denied Attendant Console Group You cannot activate QSIG SS CC toward the attendant console group or towards the individual attendant Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 381 QSIG B Private Networking Attendant Control of Trunk Group Access
591. view Details about the selected event display in the Event Detail dialog box 4 Click Close Administration for Network Connectivity 442 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 DCS over IP Trunk F IP Trunk Installation and Administration Troubleshooting IP trunk Check the IP trunk service Check physical connections Check LAN functions If IP calls are not going through try these basic procedures before contacting an authorized Lucent Technologies Service Center for assistance Check that the IP trunk service is running 1 Go to the Windows NT Control Panel 2 Double click on the Services icon to launch the Services Control Manager 3 Scroll down the list of NT services and make sure the status of IP Trunk service is started If the service is not running go to the Services Control Manager Select IP Trunk Service and click the Start button If the service does not start note the error message displayed on the screen launch the Windows NT Event Viewer and save the logs related to this error Contact your Lucent representative for further assistance After the IP trunk service is started proceed to the next section Check the physical connections on RJ 45 connection to LAN Analog telephone line to external modem Video cable from monitor to video connection on switch if applicable Keyboard mouse cables if applicable All the vital connections are labeled from the factory on the cab
592. w you how you would complete each of the necessary forms AUDIX administration e AUDIX Translations form Switch Number 1 2 3 AUDIX Port 1 2 3 Switch Port 59 57 58 Logical Data Channel Link 1 1 2 1 3 1 Switch Port refers to the processor channel that is used for AUDIX in the PBX Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 333 Distributed Communications System Administration for switch 1 e Dial Plan form B Private Networking Start Dig Len Usage 4 ext 5 4 ext 6 4 ext e Uniform Dial Plan form Ext Code Type Location Code Sxxx UDPcode 222 Oxxx UDPcode 223 e AAR Digit Conversion form Matching Min Max Del Replacemen Net Conv Pattern t String 221 7 7 3 ext n e AAR Analysis Table Dialed String Min Max RtePat Call Type Node Num 222 7 7 2 aar 2 223 7 7 3 aar 3 e Signaling Group form signaling group 2 TSC Local Enabled Establish Dest Far end Appl Index Ext Ext PBX ID 1 4900 y permanent 5900 2 des 2 4901 y permanent 5901 gateway 3 4902 y permanent 6902 3 des 4 4903 y permanent 6903 gateway e Trunk Group form Group Grp Type Used for DCS DCS Sig Method PBX ID 2 isdn pri y d chan 2 3 isdn pri y d chan 3 Administration for Network Connectivity 334 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Distributed Communications System Routing Pattern form B Private Networking Routing Trunk FRL Del T
593. want to call Type the number exactly as you dial it from a regular phone Do not use spaces or hyphens between numbers If your IP trunk application is configured to require an access code verify the correct dialing sequence with the switch administrator 4 In the Call using box select H 323 Gateway from the pull down menu 5 Click the Call button to dial and initiate the call 6 Use the microphone and headphones to talk to the person on the receiving end After starting the IP Trunk service place a test telephone call to the remote switch Whenever something happens on IP trunks that might affect service quality Windows NT displays an alert in a popup window You can select the IP address for the alert messages and notify a computer other than the IP Trunk display screen NT alerts allow you to monitor IP Trunk service on one or more switches The IP Trunk application logs Error Messages and will store the error messages and warnings in the Windows NT Event Viewer Note Log settings for the NT Event Viewer should be set to Overwrite Events as Needed for both the System and the Application logs If IP calls are not going through try these basic procedures before contacting an authorized Lucent Technologies Service Center for assistance e Check the IP Trunk service e Check physical connections e Check LAN functions 448 Administration for Network Connectivity CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 000
594. ween 1 and 256 si model or 384 r model but they must be consistent between endpoints For each connection the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa It is allowed and sometimes convenient to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch For Processor Channel 32 connection to Switch 2 through Switch 1 Enable Appl Mode Interface Link Set to y Set to des for DCS signaling Node 3 is the server Set node 2 to client c This must match the link number assigned on the node 3 data module screen Interface For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 Chan 64500 This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 3 Processor Channel screen Destination Name of the far end node for this channel This must be a name Node entered on the Node Names screen Destination For TCP IP interface channel numbers are in the range 5000 Port 64500 The recommended values are 5001 for CMS 5002 for Intuity AUDIX and 5003 for DCS connections that are not gateways These three values should be reused for multiple instances of these applications The combination of Link Interface Channel and Mach ID must be unique This number must match the Destination Port number on the Switch 2 Processor Channel screen Session Local For
595. witch being administered If there is only one switch the value must be 1 This must match the Local Node Number field in the switch dial plan IP Address Host Name 192 168 1 124 Enter the IP address for the switch being administered TCP Port 5002 Enter a TCP port number for each Intuity AUDIX for each switch being administered This must match the Interface Channel field of the Processor Channels screen You should use 5002 for every switch linked over the LAN in a DCS network Use the numbers 6001 6999 for gateway TCP links to remote switches in a DCS network Administration for Network Connectivity 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 CID 77730 97 Configuration 2 R7r CMS lt ethernet gt R7csi 3 C LAN Administration Enable links and processor channels You must enable links and processor channels before the connections can be used To enable a link open its data module screen ch da ext and set the Enable Link field to y note to view a list of assigned data modules and their extensions enter the list data module command 1 da To enable the processor channels open the processor channel screen ch com p and set the Enable field to y for each assigned processor channel Note 1 You must disable a link or processor channel before you can change its parameters Note 2 The busy out command overrules the data module Enable Link field Note 3 On the C LAN boards low level con
596. xes page 303 Synchronization Plan page 304 Uniform Dialing Plan page 307 Administration for Network Connectivity 244 CID 77730 555 233 504 Issue 1 April 2000 Networking Screens A Screens Reference Networking Screens Node Names In this context a node is defined as any of the following a C LAN port a bridge or router a CMS ethernet port or an Intuity AUDIX or other MSA Message Server Adjunct network interface card The AUDIX and MSA node name and IP address must be entered on page 1 of the screen The data for all other node types including CMS must be entered on pages 2 6 The Node Names form holds up to 8 Audix node names with up to 7 characters each up to 7 MSA node names up to 7 characters each on page 1 It holds up to 160 non specific node names up to 15 characters each for DCS CMS or bridge router nodes on pages 2 6 The node names and IP addresses in any network should be assigned in a logical and consistent manner from the point of view of the whole network These names and addresses should be assigned in the planning stages of the network and should be available from the customer system administrator or from a Lucent representative NOTE Enter node names for Intuity AUDIX and MSA adjuncts on page 1 Enter node names for CMS switches and routers starting on page 2 page 1 page 1 of 6 NODE NAMES Audix Name IP address MSA Names IP Address
597. y means that features are available to all users on DCS regardless of the switch location Configuring a DCS network is a complex process that involves 4 major steps Description of DCS Planning your DCS network Connecting the physical equipment in the network Administering the physical layer hardware connections Administering the link layer to create a DCS DCS network configurations can be TCP IP DCS network A DCS network configured with 2 or more switches using TCP IP PPP or 10 100BaseT Ethernet signaling for transporting DCS feature transparency information Traditional DCS network A DCS network configured with 2 or more switches using BX 25 signaling for transporting DCS feature transparency information D channel DCS network private network only A DCS network that includes DEFINITY ECS using the ISDN PRI D channel DCS transparency information D channel signaling ISDN PRI facilities with this type of network use only private line facilities D channel DCS network public network access egress A DCS network that includes DEFINITY ECS using D channel signaling At least one of these ISDN PRI facilities uses a public network ISDN PRI Integrated DCS network private network only A DCS network that contains a variety of switches using TCP IP BX 25 or D channel signaling methods At least one DEFINITY ECS serves as an ISDN PRI DCS Gateway node This node can interwork DCS transparency information be
598. y on the C LAN circuit pack to provide a path between the packet bus and the processor Note Bus Bridge Connectivity is used on the csi model only This task may have been complete when the C LAN circuit pack was installed Steps Begin gt Open the Maintenance Related System Parameters form enter ch sys ma gt Go to page 2 and skip to the Packet Intf2 field near the bottom of the screen change system parameters maintenance Page 2 of 3 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS Before Notification TTRs 4 CPTRs 1 Call Classifier Ports 0 MMIs 0 vcs 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST Extension Test Type 100 Test Type 102 Test Type 105 ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN PRI Test Call Extension ISDN BRI Service SPID DS1 MAINTENANCE DSO Loop Around Test Call Extension LOSS PLAN Leave Blank if no Extra Loss is Required Minimum Number of Parties in a Conference Before Adding Extra Loss SPE OPTIONAL BOARDS Packet Intf1 y Packet Intf2 y Bus Bridge 01a04 Inter Board Link Timeslots Pt0 6 Pt1 1 Pt2 1 gt Enter values Field Conditions Comments Packet Intf2 Enables the bus bridge Bus Bridge Location of the C LAN circuit pack If the system has two C LANs only one is administered for bus bridge Inter Board Specifies the bandwidth used on the 3 ports of the Inter Board Link Timeslots Link The total number of timeslots assigned cannot exceed Pt0 Ptl Pt2 11

Lucent Technologies Release 8.2 Server User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents